JP7478942B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start lever (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, and a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. Here, in a slot machine, images for effects to increase the interest of the game may be displayed on a display such as an LCD in sync with the rotation and stopping of the reels, and many slot machines are configured so that when the reel stop device is operated, the player can enjoy predicting the outcome of the game by comparing the symbols displayed on the reels with the images for effects displayed on the display.

Patent Publication 2017-018215

There was a demand for gaming machines that could transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine, and there was a need to develop a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
Reel and
Stop switch and
Start switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The counting notification information is configured to be output to the outside of the gaming machine,
The hall control and fraud monitoring information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine every first period,
The gaming machine installation information is configured to be output to an outside of the gaming machine every second period,
The gaming machine performance information is configured to be output to an outside of the gaming machine every third period,
The counting notification information includes the counting serial number, counting points, and counting cumulative points.
The cumulative count is the cumulative count since the power was turned on.
The counting serial number included in the first counting notification information after power-on is "0", and the counting serial numbers included in the subsequent counting notification information are configured to be values within the range of "1" to "M (M is a numerical value)",
The gaming machine installation information includes information on the ID number of the main control chip,
The gaming machine performance information includes information on the total number of points inserted since the power was turned on.
The gaming machine performance information includes information on the total number of points awarded since the power was turned on.
The apparatus is configured to output gaming machine installation information at a first timing when the first period and the second period overlap, and to output hall control and fraud monitoring information at a second timing when the first period has elapsed from the first timing,
The gaming machine installation information is output at a third timing when the first period, the second period, and the third period overlap, and the gaming machine performance information is output at a fourth timing when the first period has elapsed from the third timing.
This is a gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine of this aspect, it is possible to transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to establish a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine according to this embodiment with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal insertion slot in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list 1 of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 9 shows a symbol combination list 3 in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of the small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the overall electrical configuration of the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the process for handling an unrecoverable error on the main control board in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (first page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart (second page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart (third page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the process of adding game numbers on the main control board in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (first page) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel spin start preparation process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a RT state transition diagram in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram showing the rotational operation of the reels in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the main control board when the power is turned off in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram showing the push order display in the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the processing on the sub-control board side when the sub-side power supply is turned off in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing one command processing on the sub-control board in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the process of determining the presentation-related information when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT performance determination process on the sub-control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether or not a revival is possible on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when the start lever is operated in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of specialized premonition processing on the sub-control board side when the start lever is operated in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 50 is a flowchart of the special addition processing on the sub-control board when the start lever is operated in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when the first drum stop is accepted in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a second reel stop is accepted in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the process for determining the effects related to the third drum stop on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a third drum stop is accepted in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram showing the transition to the standby screen in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 60 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 61 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 62 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 63 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an outline of the relative positions of the reel and the hopper. FIG. 1 is a side cross-sectional view showing an outline of the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of a hopper. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an outline of the relative positions of the reel and the hopper. 13 is an oblique view showing the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the fullness detection electrode DE. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of a full-state detection electrode and a screw BS. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the structure of a reel strip. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the structure of a reel strip. Figure 72 is a flowchart (third page) of the game progress control processing on the main control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the time of stop on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram showing the execution of the AT start effect in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 78 shows an example of a situation-based notification mode that can be applied to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 79 shows an example of a payout configuration that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 80 shows one example of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 81 shows an example 2 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 82 shows an example 3 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 83 shows an example 4 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 84 shows one example of the action when the settlement button is operated, which is applicable to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 85 shows an example 2 of the action when the settlement button is operated, which is applicable to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 86 shows an example 3 of the action when the settlement button is operated, which can be applied to the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 87 shows an example 4 of the action when the settlement button is operated, which is applicable to the slot machine of this example. Figure 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply and power cut to a gaming machine, and Figure 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply and power cut to a gaming machine. FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89(b) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the second mode. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing the process of adding the amount of credits, the process of paying out game medals, and the process of outputting a game medium providing sound. Figure 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. Figure 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 94 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 95 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 96 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 97 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 98 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 100 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the push order navigation, including the reel window frame lamps, when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 101 is an image diagram showing the start timing of push order navigation including the reel window frame lamps when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. Figure 102 is an image diagram showing the start timing of push order navigation including audio when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 103 is an image diagram showing the start timing of push order navigation including audio when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 104 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order bell role is won during AT, which can be applied to the slot machine of this example. Figure 105 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order bell role is won during the AT state, which can be applied to the slot machine of this example. Figure 106 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell role is won during AT, which can be applied to the slot machine of this example. Figure 107 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order replay role is won during the AT state, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. Figure 108 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order replay role is won during the AT state, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. Figure 109 is an image diagram showing the change in the display mode of the reel stop control and push order navigation during AT, which can be applied to the slot machine of this example. Figure 110 is a timing chart showing the detection mode of game medals by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of the third embodiment. Figure 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine related to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Figure 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of game medals by the first and second insertion sensors on the main control board and the credit addition process, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the third embodiment. Figure 114 is an image diagram of error detection by a chute sensor on the main control board side, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of the third embodiment. Figure 115 is a timing chart showing the detection modes of game medals by the first insertion sensor, the second insertion sensor and the shoot sensor, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the trajectory of game medals flowing down the medal return member, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the trajectory of game medals paid out to a medal receiving slot, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 120 is a timing chart applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, showing the detection mode of game medals by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven. FIG. 121 is an image diagram showing the rotational state of the disk from when the hopper motor starts to be driven until when the hopper motor stops to be driven, which is applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Figure 122 is a first pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during settlement processing and then communication is restored. Figure 123 is a second pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during settlement processing and then communication is restored. Figure 124 is a pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during a wait period and then communication is restored. Figure 125 is a first pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper and then communication is restored. Figure 126 is a second pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper and then communication is restored. FIG. 127 is a table showing the numbers that can be used in this example. Figure 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. Figure 129 is a front view of a main control board housed in a main board case that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. Figure 130 is an oblique view and a side view of a main board case that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion of a main board case that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram showing the inside of the medal selector when a gaming medal applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is inserted. FIG. 133 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of game medals that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of game medals that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram showing the inside of the chute body when a gaming medal that can be applied to the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment is inserted. FIG. 136 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the coin insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 137 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the coin insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 138 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the coin insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 139 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the payout number count processing of game medals that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. Figure 140 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. Figure 141 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. Figure 142 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an example of a display of a performance display device applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. Figure 145 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. Figure 146 is a flowchart of the ratio calculation process in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. Figure 147 is a flowchart of the ratio display process in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel type gaming machine related to the tenth embodiment. Figure 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third page) (variation 1) on the main control board side that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine related to the tenth embodiment. Figure 149 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variation 2) on the main control board side applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an example of a test display of a performance display device applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an example of a test display of a performance display device applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 152 shows the configuration relating to the limit and automatic settlement in the slot machine according to the 11th embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing the transition between modes in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing in-mode item selection in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing an example of an alert in the reel-type gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment. FIG. 156 is an example of a display of a performance display device applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. Figure 157 is a functional block diagram of a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 158 is an example of the connection cable communication content for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 159 is an example of a gaming machine information notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 160 is an example of a counting notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 161 is an example of a lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 162 is an example of a loan receipt result response command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 163 shows a flow of a gaming machine information notification command for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 164 shows a flow concerning the lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 165 shows a flow concerning the lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 166 shows a flow concerning the lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 167 shows a flow of the counting notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 168 is an example of gaming machine information (when HC/fraud monitoring information is set) for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine that is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 169 shows flow 1 regarding counting notification commands and loan notification commands for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 170 shows flow 2 regarding counting notification commands and loan notification commands for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 171 shows flow 3 regarding counting notification commands and loan notification commands for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 172 shows a flow relating to a case where communication between a medal-less reel-type gaming machine, which is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment, and the SC board is interrupted. FIG. 173 shows a flow relating to the case where a communication error occurs during settlement for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 174 shows a flow relating to the case where a communication error occurs during rental of a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example of the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 175 shows a flow chart relating to serial number update processing for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 176 shows a flow of processing for controlling notification of gaming machine information for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example of the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 177 shows a flow of processing for controlling notification of gaming machine information for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine which is a modified example of the thirteenth embodiment.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes called a lottery) to determine the content of a game in a reel-type gaming machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in the narrow sense (for example, hard random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and software random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the results of a game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles for moving to a special game and winning roles (small roles, replay roles), etc. can be mentioned. A "CPU" is synonymous with a well-known one in the industry, and is not limited in any way to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, etc. A "power interruption (power cut)" refers to the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falling below a certain level, regardless of whether or not the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated, and also includes the cutoff of the power supply due to an unforeseen event such as damage to the power supply unit or a power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and stores information physically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, if the element configuration is conductive, it becomes "1", and if the element configuration is non-conductive, it becomes "0"). "RAM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and stores information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, if there is stored power, it becomes "1", and if there is no stored power, it becomes "0". It is generally configured so that a backup power source is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM in the event of a power outage). Examples of "game states" include special game states (so-called big win games, which are called bonus games, first type BB, second type BB, etc.) in which game medals are easily acquired and which are advantageous to the player, a replay probability variable game state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the replay role is higher (or lower) than in a normal game state in which the winning rate of the replay role is a predetermined value, an AT (assist time) state in which the reel stopping order and stopping position for winning the winning role can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, etc. In addition, even in the normal game state, there are high probability normal game states, low probability normal game states, etc. (called lottery states in this example) in which the lottery probability for transition to the RT state, AT state, and ART state is different. In addition, there is no problem if the game state is combined {Furthermore, there is no problem if these game states and functions (for example, the lottery for transition to the AT state and the output of the notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) are all implemented on the main control board side that controls the game progress}. In addition, in this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is called "RT1" and the state related to the AT is called "normal game state", etc., but the RT state and the state related to the AT may be collectively called the state related to the ART, and the state related to the ART may be called "normal game state", etc. "Winning role" is the type of condition device (or condition device number) that has been won by internal lottery (sometimes called internal lottery). "Notification state" is the state related to the AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even in a game in which a condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning role does not differ depending on the reel stop order is won, if the state related to the AT is in a state in which the push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be "notification state". The "counter value" is also called the "number of possible notification games" and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of possible notification games" is 1 or more (including the game that has become "0"), the push order navigation, which will be described later, can be executed. In addition, as the "number of possible notification games", the difference in the number of game media (the number of paid out minus the number of inserted) obtained based on the winning of a small role (mainly, the push order bell role) or the number of times the push order bell role is won may be adopted. In addition, the "special notification state" is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is called the "addition special state" in this example. In addition, the "specific condition" is a condition that can subtract the AT counter value, and for example, the specific condition is that one game is finished, a predetermined role (for example, the push order bell role) is won, etc. A "first-class special device" is a device that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability of the condition device related to winning for each specified number activating, and is activated in a predetermined case and can continue to operate until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times, and is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). A "first-class special device continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special device, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends its operation in a predetermined case, and is sometimes called BB (big bonus) or first-class BB. A "second-class special device" is a device that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the lottery, and is activated in a predetermined case and ends its operation when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes called CB (challenge bonus). The "second-class special consecutive operation device" is a device that can operate the second-class special device consecutively, and operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends its operation when a predetermined event occurs. It is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or second-class BB. The "normal device" is a device that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning every specified number, or increases the probability that a condition device related to winning every specified number will operate. It operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends its operation when the result of one game is obtained. It is sometimes called SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which a first-class BB role is considered to have JACINed when it wins, and the first-class BB is always in RB during its execution. The "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed during the execution of the first-class BB. In addition, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which reel-in control that may be executed after a stop operation is performed is not executed, and the reel is in a state in which it stops at the closest reel position to the reel position where the stop operation was received. An "all CB type" is a configuration in which the reel is always in CB when the second type BB is executed. A "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which the reel repeatedly switches between non-CB and CB when the second type BB is executed.

Note that this embodiment is merely one example, and is not limited to the following aspects with regard to the location and function of each means, the order of each step for various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the names of means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. Furthermore, the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples should not be interpreted as being limited to being applied to a specific thing, and any combination is acceptable. For example, a modified example of one embodiment should be understood to be a modified example of another embodiment, and even if one modified example and another modified example are described independently, it should be understood that a combination of the one modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(This embodiment) Before describing each component, we will now explain the characteristics (overview) of the slot machine P according to this embodiment. Each component will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 1 (and Figure 2 for a portion of the configuration). The reel type gaming machine P is mainly composed of a front door, a rear box (also called a cabinet or base), and a reel unit, hopper device, power supply unit E, main control board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted), and sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). Each of these will be described in order below.

<Front door DU> The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for making it possible to input game media, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as mechanisms for making the game state visible, a reel window D160, an insertion number indicator D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state display device D250, a credit number display device D200, a payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push sequence display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, a favorable zone display device YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as mechanisms for making it possible to insert game media and input the number of bets (number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170 and a bet button D220 are attached, and as a mechanism for making it possible to pay out the inserted game media, a settlement button D60 is attached. And, as mechanisms for operating the reels, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. In addition, the reel-type gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with a console that protrudes toward the player and on which the start lever D50, stop button D40, medal slot D170, bet button D220, settlement button D60, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2, etc. are attached. Each element is described in detail below.

<Mechanism for making the game status visible> Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making the game status visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. The insertion number indicator light D210 is made up of three LEDs, and is configured so that the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the number of gaming medals required to start one game) are lit. Specifically, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps), namely, a 1 bet lamp D211, a 2 bet lamp D212, and a 3 bet lamp D213. When one game medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off. When two game medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off. When three game medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on (this is not the case in the next game in which the replay is stopped, and details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and is configured to be lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and to be turned off when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). The replay lamp D290 is made of an LED and is turned on when the replay is stopped and turned off when the next game after the replay is stopped is completed. The insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on (or may be blinking) when the insertion of a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is valid or the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and is turned off when the insertion of a game medal is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game status display device D250 is made of a 7-segment display and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game status display device D250 may be omitted. In this case, the total number of payouts is displayed on the performance display device S40 (sometimes referred to as the second information display unit) described later, so that the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, making the gaming machine user-friendly. The credit number display device D200 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as the medals held by the player. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to notify the player of the most advantageous reel stop order in a game in which a condition device in which the winning combination can differ depending on the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (the stop order of the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is established (a so-called push order role (sometimes called a role with a push order), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed is different, the profit rate (the number of payouts, the RT state thereafter, etc.) given to the player is generally configured to differ) (the notification is sometimes called push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop sequence that will be the most profitable for the player, and the display mode is such that the player does not mistake which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 is configured to be able to display the number of games that can be stayed in the AT-related state (in this example, it may also be called the push sequence navigation state or the notification game, and the details will be described later) that is advantageous for the player and is guaranteed when the game progresses according to the push sequence navigation display displayed on the push sequence display device D270 (sometimes called the first information display unit) among the states related to the AT (details will be described later). In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the number of games that can be stayed in the AT state can be displayed on the performance display device S40, so that the player can recognize the number of games in which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, and the gaming machine can be made user-friendly. In addition, the payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push sequence display device.

The advantageous zone indicator YH is made of an LED, and is configured to light up when it is in the "advantageous zone" and to turn off when it is not in the "advantageous zone" (the timing of lighting and turning off will be described later). Here, in the reel type gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional reel type gaming machine, it is possible to take a special gaming state (a so-called big win game, which corresponds to what is called a bonus game, a first type BB, a second type BB, etc.) in which it is easy to acquire gaming medals and is advantageous to the player, a replay probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the replay role is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the replay role is a predetermined value, an AT (assist time) state in which the stopping order and stopping position of the reels for winning the winning role can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, etc., but in addition to these "gaming states", it is possible to set one of three "gaming zones", namely, a "normal zone", a "standby zone", and a "advantageous zone". In this example, a "standby section" is not set, and either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set as a game section. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than other "game sections", and for example, the "game state" being in an AT state or an ART state is associated with the "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in an AT state or an ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. As described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, similar to the setting control of the "game state", so that whether the game progress is relatively advantageous to the player or not can be conveyed to the player without any lies by the lighting/unlighting status of the advantageous section indicator YH. As described below, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, but at that time, the remaining AT-related state is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), so that the change in the set "game zone" can also affect the transition of the "game state", and this automatically prevents the "game state" such as the AT state or ART state, which has a relatively high degree of design freedom, from significantly increasing gambling. As described above, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous zone" ends, but the end condition of the "advantageous zone" is not limited to this. The end conditions of the "favorable zone" in the reel-type gaming machine of this example are "execution of one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number among the minor roles that make up the push order role (role with push order) (for example, if the minor roles that make up the push order role are 7, 3, and 1, the push order navigation that can obtain the largest payout number of 7 is the push order navigation that can obtain the push order role with 7 or 1 coins depending on the push order, and if there is a push order role that can obtain 3 coins depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can obtain 3 coins does not fall under the push order navigation referred to here)" or "winning either BB, RB, or MB" and "any end condition (non-winning in a 40G 1-set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G has elapsed (false premonition), etc.)" or "favorable zone of 1500G" is satisfied. In addition, in the case of a specification where there is no push order bell role (for example, a specification where there is a push order for replay to transition to the RT state, but there is no small role with a different payout amount depending on the push order), the condition for ending the advantageous zone of "one push order navigation that can obtain the small role with the largest payout amount" is excluded. In addition, in this embodiment, since the small roles that make up the push order role are composed of small roles including a small role corresponding to an 11-coin role and a small role corresponding to a 1-coin role, "one push order navigation that can obtain the small role with the largest payout amount" refers to announcing a push order that can obtain 11 medals (a role that can win an 11-coin role).

<Mechanism for enabling input of gaming media> Next, the main parts of the mechanism for enabling input of gaming media will be described. The medal insertion port D170 is an insertion port for gaming medals, and when the medal reception state is enabled, the gaming medal inserted into the insertion port is guided into the gaming machine. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s as sensors for detecting insertion of medals, and is configured to detect the inserted medals as bet medals when it is determined that the gaming medals guided into the gaming machine have been inserted normally. In addition, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to bet the stored medals (credit medals) by operation. In addition, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to pay back the stored medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player by operation. Furthermore, the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit> Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by operating it. In addition, the stop button D40 is equipped with a left stop button D41, a center stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and is configured to be able to stop the operation of the reels sequentially by operating each stop button.

<Other mechanisms provided in the front door DU> Next, the main parts of the other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to the perspective view of the inside of the reel-type gaming machine P with the front door DU open in FIG. 2. The front door DU is provided with a mechanism for increasing the interest of the game, including a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as preview performances and background performances, a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be lit in various lighting modes, a door board D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 that can output sound, a middle panel (middle decorative panel), an upper panel D130, and a lower panel D140, which are members formed of synthetic resin or the like. The performance display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that the display unit that displays the performances, etc. can be seen through the see-through area formed in the upper panel. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light sources that emit light according to the progress of the game on the reel type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamp unit D150 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, and the LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 are sometimes collectively referred to as the lamp unit). In addition, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back of the front door DU, and this door board D has the function of a relay board that receives input signals such as the stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60, and outputs the input signals directly or after processing them to the main control board M described later. In addition, a medal selector DS, which corresponds to the medal insertion port D170 and is provided near the door board D on the back side of the front door DU, detects medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 and performs simple authenticity checks, guides proper medals to a hopper H40 described later, and returns improper medals to a medal tray D230 described later. Furthermore, a speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is the upper side of the operation table and the lower side of the upper panel D130, and is a panel portion including the reel window described above. In addition, the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the operation table D190 described above are members used for operations on the menu screen described later, button rapid-fire performance on the sub-control board S side (by rapid-fire operation of the sub-input button SB, a performance regarding whether or not a bonus has been won) and mini-games (for example, a performance of the success or failure of entering the "AT state"), etc. In addition, the front door DU of the reel type gaming machine P is provided with a medal tray D230 that receives the game medals (or may be simply called medals) discharged from the discharge port D240, and a door switch D80 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. In addition, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and is configured to be able to open the front door DU by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to be able to release an error state (door opening error, etc.) by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. In addition, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or flashes), allowing the player to perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. In addition, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons, the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). The stop button lamp S60 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player can recognize that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid by the presence or absence of lighting (or blinking) and/or the lighting color of the stop button lamp S60. Note that since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, when the left stop button D41 is invalid, the center stop button D42 is valid, and the right stop button D43 is valid, the lighting state of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other, such as the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 being turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the center stop button D42 being turned on, and the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the right stop button D43 being turned on. In addition, by varying the lighting color or lighting state of the stop button lamp S60 (such as lighting/flashing, or slow/fast flashing), a configuration may be made in which it is easier for a player to determine which stop button to currently operate in a game in which push order navigation is executed. For example, when all reels are spinning and a push order bell is hit in which the push order of "left → middle → right" is the correct answer (maximum payout amount), the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button flashes white, and the stop button lamps corresponding to the middle stop button and the right stop button light blue, and then when the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button flashes white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button light blue.

Next, the rear box (also called the cabinet or base) and each device installed in the rear box will be described. A reel unit is attached in approximately the center of the rear box so that a portion of it can be seen through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source for the reel M50 (such as a stepping motor). The reel M50 also includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel section is formed from a synthetic resin or the like, and multiple patterns are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel section (on the reel band MO). Each reel section is configured to be able to rotate and stop based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the light that passes through the outer periphery of the reel section makes it appear as if the outer periphery of the reel section is lit. Also, above the reel M50, a reel board K (described later) for driving each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Above the reels M50, a main control board M, which controls the entire game, is stored, and to the left of the reels M50, a sub-control board S, which controls various effects using the effect display device S40, LED lamp unit S10, speaker S20, etc., shown in FIG. 1, is stored, which is described later. The main control board M is connected to a setting key switch M20, which is used to execute the setting change device control process (to change the settings), which is described later, and a setting/reset button M30, which can change the setting value, clear errors, etc. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided in an appropriate position on the board of the main control board M (i.e., they may be provided in a position where it is difficult to access manually without opening the front door DU).

Below the reel M50 are a hopper H40 that collects inserted gaming medals, a medal payout device H that pays out the gaming medals, and a power supply board E that supplies power to the entire reel gaming machine P. The gaming medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through a coin shooter D90 and are paid out from a discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power to the reel gaming machine P is also provided on the front of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS> Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port D170 inside the reel type game machine P. The medal selector DS has an insertion acceptance sensor D10s near the door board D, which serves as a passage for the game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170, and below the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a coin shooter D90 for guiding the game medal to the discharge port D240, etc. is provided. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170 mainly based on the size, and has a function of accepting only the game medal that meets the standard size, and the medal (or other foreign object) that is determined not to meet this function is configured to be paid back to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When a player inserts a medal before operating the start lever D50 (when medal insertion is enabled), the medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only medals that meet the standards are inserted into the hopper H40, while medals that do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when medal insertion is not enabled), the inserted medal is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 regardless of whether it meets the standards. In addition, a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), and when a medal that meets the dimensional standards passes through, it is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal insertion port D170 first passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when a game medal passes through, two protruding mechanisms are pressed down, turning on, and the game medal can pass through the passage normally. In addition, with this configuration, when a foreign object other than a game medal (a foreign object that does not meet the standards, for example, an object with a smaller diameter than a game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are not pressed down. Such a medal cannot maintain an upright state, so it cannot pass through the passage (the medal falls down), and as described above, it is paid out to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that an error has occurred (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even when the on time continues for a predetermined time or more.

When a gaming medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it will pass the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing through. This insertion sensor (the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (placed adjacent to each other with a distance smaller than the standard diameter of the gaming medal), and is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s change) and the time they are on/off.

<Medal payout device H> Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail using the front view and top view of the medal payout device H in Figure 4. The medal payout device H operates when the settlement button is operated or game medals are paid out due to winning when there are credits (game medals stored electronically inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start playing). When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. The rotation causes the game medals in the medal payout device H to displace the release biasing means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 towards the release port D240. Furthermore, the dispensing sensor (first dispensing sensor H10s and second dispensing sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s transition) and the time they are on/off. More specifically, for example, when passing through the game medal outlet H60 normally, the displacement of the release biasing means H70 causes a sensor state transition from the state of the first payout sensor H10s = OFF and the second payout sensor H20s = OFF to the state of the first payout sensor H10s = OFF and the second payout sensor H20s = OFF → the state of the first payout sensor H10s = ON and the second payout sensor H20s = OFF → the state of the first payout sensor H10s = ON and the second payout sensor H20s = ON → the state of the first payout sensor H10s = OFF and the second payout sensor H20s = ON → the state of the first payout sensor H10s = OFF and the second payout sensor H20s = ON → the state of the first payout sensor H10s = OFF and the second payout sensor H20s = ON → the state of the first payout sensor H10s = OFF and the second payout sensor H20s = OFF. Therefore, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, an example can be configured to cause an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the reel type gaming machine in this embodiment. In the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment, the prescribed number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames each, and the effective line for winning is one line of "the upper row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the lower row of the right reel M53". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (draw-in priority order) is "replay combination → small combination (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus", and for example, when the replay combination and the bonus are established at the same time, the symbol combination that becomes the replay combination is displayed stopped and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when bells and watermelons are formed, if the stop button is pressed at a position where both can be drawn in (a position within four frames from the winning stop position), the small winning combination with the larger number of coins is drawn in first. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames) or the configuration of the effective lines is changed (for example, changed to 5 lines with 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines, or changed to 1 line on the bottom of the left reel M51, the middle of the center reel M52, and the top of the right reel M53). In addition, when a push order minor prize that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, the pull-in control is such that when the predetermined correct push order is used, the minor prize with the largest payout number is pulled in first (number-priority control), and when the push order is used incorrectly that differs from the correct push order, the pull-in control is such that the symbol that has the highest chance of winning (the symbol that has the highest chance of winning out of the multiple symbol combinations that can win) among the symbols that can be stopped and displayed (positioned within four frames from the stop operation) is pulled in (number-priority control).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of a slot machine in this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames on the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (numbers 0 to 19), and there are 10 types of symbols: "Black Seven", "White Seven", "Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in a symbol combination that constitutes a winning role, just like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning role. For example, a symbol combination that constitutes a winning role that includes "blank" is "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank", which is Replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem if the types of symbols are increased, decreased, or changed.

Next, Figures 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as described below, one of the symbol combinations is displayed stopped on an active line (the one line mentioned above) depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. Note that even if the same type of symbol is not lined up on an active line, it is configured so that the same symbols are likely to line up in a row on lines other than the active line as seen by the player (in the case of watermelon, it is configured so that three watermelon symbols line up in a straight line somewhere on the reel, such as lined up in a horizontal line in the middle row). In addition, in this embodiment, there are three pattern combinations that result in a first type BB role (a role continuous operation device related to a so-called first type special role, but hereinafter may be simply referred to as a BB role): "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep", which is a first type BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and the payout ends with more than 264 coins), "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven", which is a first type BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and the payout ends with more than 132 coins), and "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven", which is a first type BB-C (RB-B is continuously operated and the payout ends with more than 132 coins). In this embodiment, when the first type BB role is won and the BB is executed (the role is activated), during the execution of the BB, one lottery table is referred to in all games during the BB to draw winning roles (small roles, replay roles) other than the role (this is a method in which the table referred to during the role drawing during one BB is not switched, and may be referred to as an all-JACIN type hereinafter). The format of the first type BB role is not limited to this, and may be configured to switch the table referred to during the role drawing during one BB. Also, when the RT state is "RT1", if a symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th numbers that becomes replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to transition to RT0 (the details of the RT state will be described later). Since "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as falling. In addition, when a symbol combination resulting in replay 05 corresponding to the number 17 is displayed in a stopped state, a "black seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53, and when a symbol combination resulting in replay 05 corresponding to the number 18 is displayed in a stopped state, a "white seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 (details will be described later). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device for "Winning-A1" to "Winning-A6" described later, is won, if the reels are stopped in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, the symbol combinations "Winning 01" to "Winning 03" corresponding to the numbers 21 to 27 will be displayed and 11 game medals will be paid out, while if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the most advantageous push order for the player, the symbol combinations "Winning 08" to "Winning 11" corresponding to the numbers 39 to 56 will be displayed and 1 game medal will be paid out. Note that the "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be displayed. For example, if the "Bell - - Bell" corresponding to the number 23 is displayed as a bell on the active line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53, 11 game medals can be won regardless of which symbol is displayed on the active line of the center reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in this embodiment. In this figure, the condition device number is called the winning number, and the condition device number may also be called the winning number hereafter. In this embodiment, the replay role is provided from replay-A to replay-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the replay role displayed in a stopped state may differ depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Here, in this embodiment, as shown in the rightmost column, "Condition Device", a plurality of types of condition devices are configured to be stopped and displayed depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices having the same winning number are grouped together and illustrated in the third column from the right, "Condition Device (Name)". Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, three types of condition devices, "replay 01", "replay 02" and "replay 03", can be displayed in a stopped state depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. Note that the "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as the condition device. In addition, a condition device related to replay such as "replay 01" may be referred to as a replay role, a condition device that pays out game medals by winning such as "winner 01" may be referred to as a minor role, and a condition device that starts BB by being displayed in a stopped state such as "type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won in overlapping fashion, and in such a case, when the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the winning small role can be stopped and displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role will be stopped and displayed, while when the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the small role cannot be stopped and displayed (cannot be drawn in), the symbol corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role will be stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, when the condition device "1 type BB-B + winning-C" of the winning number 21 is won, either the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" or the black seven which is "1 type BB-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, in the case where the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → center reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) if the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (see the reel arrangement in FIG. 6) are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "prize winning 12" is stopped on the top of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 12" is displayed regardless of the stop positions of the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to "prize winning 13" are stopped on the top of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 13" is displayed regardless of the stop positions of the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the top row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the top row of the left reel M51. (3-2) When the center stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located on the middle row of the center reel M52 at the second stop, the symbol number 18 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the middle row of the center reel M52, and then, when the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located on the bottom row of the right reel M53 at the third stop, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the bottom row of the right reel M53, and the BB role is stopped and displayed. (3-3) If the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the pattern numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle row of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, the pattern number 18 corresponding to “Type 1 BB-B” cannot be stopped in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and none of the condition devices will be displayed as stopped.

Next, the "role" section shows the role of the "condition device (name)". The "normal replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is a condition device related to replay in which a replay role is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the RT state, regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. The "reverse push white 7 replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a condition device related to replay in which a replay role is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the RT state, regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. In this case, the reels are stopped in the order of M52 → left reel M51, and the reels are stopped in the order of M52 → left reel M51. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 18 to 2 on the right reel M53, the symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the center reel M52, and the symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 are located at the bottom of each reel, "white sevens" are displayed stopped at the bottom of the right reel M53, center reel M52, and left reel M51, so that the white sevens appear to be lined up at the bottom from the player's perspective. In addition, in a game in which the replay-B is won and the AT addition lottery is won, the player is informed that the AT addition lottery has been won by executing a performance instructing the player to aim for "white sevens" by pushing backwards (details will be described later). The "Sequential Push Black Sevens Replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device for replay in which a replay symbol that does not transition to RT state is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop button is pressed. By pressing the reels in order (stopping the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53) and operating the stop button at a timing when the symbol numbers in the range of 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the range of 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the range of 13 to 17 on the right reel M53 are located at the bottom of each reel, "black sevens" are stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, so that from the player's perspective, it appears that the black sevens are lined up in the bottom rows. In addition, in a game in which the player wins Replay-C and the AT addition lottery, the device is configured to inform the player that they have won the AT addition lottery by executing a presentation (details of which will be described later) that instructs the player to aim for the "black seven" by pressing the buttons in order.

In addition, "RT Maintenance RP1** (3 options)" corresponding to winning number 4 is a condition device in which the re-play role that is stopped can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, re-play 01, re-play 02, or re-play 03, which do not result in a transition to the RT state, are displayed as stopped roles, and if the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52 or right reel M53, re-play 04, which can transition the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed as stopped roles. In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP*1* (3 options)" corresponding to the winning number 5 is a condition device in which the re-play role that is stopped and displayed can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); when the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, re-play 03, which does not result in a transition to the RT state, is displayed as a stopped role, and when the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, re-play 04, which may result in a transition from the RT state "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed as a stopped role. In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP**1 (3 options)" corresponding to the winning number 6 is a condition device in which the replay role displayed in a stopped state can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the right reel M53, replay 01 or replay 03, which do not transition to the RT state, are displayed in a stopped state, and if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, replay 04, which can transition the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed in a stopped state.

The "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321", which correspond to winning numbers 7 to 12, are condition devices that can change the winning minor role depending on which of the six reel stopping orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51:1, middle reel M52:2, right reel M53:3", and "123" means that the reels are pressed in the order "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), if the reels are pressed in the order "123" = "left → middle → right" (the correct push order), the symbol combination "winning 01", which can win the maximum number of 11 game medals, will be displayed. Note that the "123" in "push order bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stopping order) that can win the maximum number of medals for that winning number. Furthermore, if the reels are stopped in a push sequence other than the one that allows the maximum number of coins to be won, i.e. if the push sequence is not correct, one coin will be paid out. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create multiple game states with different profit rates for the player, such as navigating the push sequence for a replay role or the push sequence for a bell in an AT-related state such as an "AT in progress state" (displaying the push sequence that will bring the highest profit on the push sequence display device D270), and not navigating the push sequence in an AT-related state such as a "normal game state." The AT-related states will be described later.

The "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can win 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning numbers 04 to 07 stops. In other words, it is a condition device that can win the maximum profit regardless of the order of pressing, and is sometimes called the "order-independent bell". The "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured to make it easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in parallel lines. For example, the winning number 14 of number 60 in Figure 9 is three watermelons A lined up in the middle of each reel. The "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured to make it easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in a diagonal line. For example, the winning number 16 of number 66 in Figure 9 is three watermelons lined up diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B in the top row of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the bottom row of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium weak rare minor symbol (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to winning number 17 is a condition device that can cause three bells to line up on an active line, and as will be described in more detail below, this is a condition device that executes an AT addition lottery when it is won during a BB. In addition, the "BB medium strong rare minor symbol (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to winning number 18 is a condition device that can cause bells to stop and be displayed on the top row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the top row of the right reel M53, and as will be described in more detail below, this is a condition device that executes an AT addition lottery when it is won during a BB.

Next, in the "bonus winning information" field, a number between 0 and 3 is assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a bonus (BB role) have a bonus winning information of 0, and for winning numbers that include a bonus (BB role), the bonus winning information for winning numbers (19) that include a type BB-A is 1, the bonus winning information for winning numbers (20-23) that include a type BB-B is 2, and the bonus winning information for winning numbers (24-27) that include a type BB-C is 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding whether or not a BB has been established and which BB role has been won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the "prize winning/replay winning information" field, a numerical value from 0 to 18 is assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, the prize winning/replay winning information is set to 0 for winning numbers that do not include a replay role or a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to a miss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus), and prize winning/replay winning information from 1 to 18 is assigned to winning numbers that include a replay role or a small role for each condition device. By storing the prize winning/replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which replay role or small role has been won. Details of the prize winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the "Performance Group Number" field, a number between 0 and 11 is assigned to each winning number. By sending the performance group number from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S is configured to be able to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the performance group number will be given later.

Next, in the "ball output group number" field, a number between 0 and 13 is assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and the stored ball output group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, an AT lottery, an AT additional lottery), thereby reducing the program and data capacity for executing the lottery process related to the AT. In addition, even if a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if a condition device with a ball output group number other than 0 wins, the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In addition, details of the ball output group number will be described later. In addition, even if a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, it may be configured so that the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In such a case, it is preferable to configure the lottery result to always be a miss (non-winning) when a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins and an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery is executed.

Next, FIG. 11 is a list showing the lottery probability (also called the winning rate) of the winning numbers (also called the condition device number or winning role) and bonuses (BB or BB role) for the small role and replay role in this embodiment, which are determined by the role selection means. In this figure, the winning rate of the winning number is illustrated.

First, the lottery probability in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when BB is not activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning role (particularly the replay role) is configured to differ depending on the RT state, and the "replay role" (the total appearance rate of all replay roles) has a higher appearance rate in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "replay 04" (a so-called falling replay role, which is a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that is stopped and displayed in a situation where the bonus is not won in "RT1" and the bonus is not won, the state will move to "RT0") that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 is mainly won in "RT1" and hardly appears in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "replay 04" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but even if "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not move. In addition, when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", a fall effect (for example, "unfortunate" is displayed on the effect display device S40) which is an effect that notifies that the replay has transitioned to "RT0", that is, that the RT state has fallen, may be executed, and when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. By configuring in this way, even though "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that he has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, in such a case, the sound effect output by "replay 04" being stopped and displayed and the sound effect output by a replay role other than "replay 04" (for example, "replay 01" which does not transition to the RT state) being stopped and displayed may be configured to be different, and by configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize that "replay 04" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the player may stay in "RT1" in both cases of an AT-related state where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal game state" which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and an AT-related state where push order navigation may occur (for example, "AT in-state" which may be referred to as an AT game state). At this time, when a winning number that may transition (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, in the non-AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall may not be output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to transition the game state without making the player aware that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT game state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall may be output based on the operation of the start lever (and a push order navigation in which a replay role in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed is notified). This allows the player to be careful not to fall out of the RT state and to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is announced. In addition, "replay 05" (a replay role that can inform the player of the fact that the AT-addition lottery has been won when stopped and displayed in the AT state) that can be displayed as a stop with the winning number 2 or 3 mainly appears in "RT1" and is almost never displayed in other RT states. The transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that becomes the replay role will be described later. In addition, as described later, in this embodiment, the push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous reel stop order is configured to be executed by the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40. It is to be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of the watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small role overlap.

In addition, in a situation where the player is in "RT2", BB has been won and BB has not yet been activated, so if the player wins the BB role with winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single BB role that does not overlap with the small role and is sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new win of the BB role will be invalid and only the win of the small role will be valid. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the player is in "RT2" and has won (carried over) Type 1 BB-A, if the player wins Type 1 BB-C with winning number 24, the Type 1 BB-C with said winning number 24 will be invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as if the player had won the "miss" with winning number 0. The carried over Type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. In addition, in the "RT2" situation, since BB has been won and BB has not yet been activated, if the condition device in which the small role of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 overlaps with the BB role is won, the new win of the BB role is invalid, and only the win of the small role is valid. Specifically, for example, in the "RT2" situation, and in the "1st type BB-A" is won (carried over), if the "1st type BB-B + winning-C" of winning number 21 is won, the 1st type BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the "winning-C" of winning number 14 is won. The carried-over 1st type BB-A continues to be won. The overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the replay role of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus role. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with a condition device including an RT transition replay (a replay role that can transition to an RT state), there is a possibility that a bonus will be won even when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won, and the bonus is not denied even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, so it is possible to give the player hope. In addition, when configured in this way, the RT state is controlled so that it does not transition even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible for the player to increase his or her interest in the game by thinking that there is a high possibility that the bonus has been won, since the replay probability has not become low (replays are frequently won) even though the RT state should have transitioned (transitioned to an RT state with a relatively low replay probability).

Next, the lottery probability for "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when the BB is activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the system is configured so that three small prizes can be won during BB operation: the "common bell" of winning number 13, the "BB medium weak rare small prize (diagonal bells lined up)" of winning number 17, and the "BB medium strong rare small prize (V-shaped bells lined up)" of winning number 18. If the "BB medium weak rare small prize (diagonal bells lined up)" or the "BB medium strong rare small prize (V-shaped bells lined up)" is won during the operation of a BB that has been won in the "AT in progress state", an AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

The upper part of the figure illustrates the appearance rate of minor prizes when the setting value is 1, and the appearance rate of the common bell (winning number 13) is uniform regardless of the RT state, but as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value (6 levels in this example). Specifically, the number of balls placed in setting 1 is 3204, the number of balls placed in setting 2 is 3404, the number of balls placed in setting 3 is 3604, the number of balls placed in setting 4 is 3904, the number of balls placed in setting 5 is 4204, and the number of balls placed in setting 6 is 4504, and the appearance rate is configured to increase as the setting value increases. By configuring in this way, for example, if a player plays a game while measuring the number of times the common bell appears (the number of times it wins), he or she can play the game while hoping that the setting value related to the gaming machine he or she is playing is relatively high by frequently winning the common bell. Also, the higher the setting value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the setting value, the higher the ball payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value, but if the common bell is won, the AT lottery, AT top-up lottery, and high probability state transition lottery described below will not be executed, so it is configured not to affect the AT state transition lottery (also called the AT lottery).

The middle section of the figure is a list of expected values when push order navigation is present. The figure shows the average payout number per game (the average number of medals paid out for winning minor roles, also called the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected medal increase/decrease value per game (the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a three-coin bet; if the expected value is greater than 1, the expected value is positive and medals will increase, whereas if the expected value is less than 1, the expected value is negative and medals will decrease) when the push order navigation is performed and the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average payout number per game can be calculated as follows: "total number of replay roles (total number of roles for winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts for replay roles (3) + total number of roles for minor roles (11 roles) (total number of roles for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts for minor roles (11 roles) (11) / total number of roles (65536)". The expected value of medal increase or decrease per game can be calculated as follows: "average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (number of game media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, the expected value of medal increase or decrease per game is greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, "RT1" has the largest expected value of medal increase or decrease per game. The numerical values in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease of medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game progresses in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case where the game is operated in an optimal operation mode or an advantageous operation mode), medals will increase in "RT1". In "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, in a situation where push order navigation does not occur, the medal increase or decrease expectation value per game is a value smaller than 1, and medals will decrease. In this embodiment, the medal increase or decrease expectation value per game when push order navigation is present in "RT0" or "RT2" is greater than 1, but this is not limited to this, and the medal increase or decrease expectation value per game when push order navigation is present in "RT0" or "RT2" may be configured to be smaller than 1. In addition, when a symbol combination that is a replay role is stopped and displayed, the bet number (3 medals) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but the calculation of the medal increase or decrease expectation value in this embodiment is performed assuming that 3 medals are paid out. Furthermore, one play may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average payout number per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", and 3.67137146 when the RT state is "RT2". In addition, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", and 1.223790487 when the RT state is "RT2". When there is a push order navigation, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that the numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and the probability of winning bonuses for the above-mentioned small roles and replay roles are merely examples, and for example, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in "RT2" where BB is internally established (expected medal increase/decrease value when push order navigation is present) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring in this way, even if a bonus is not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established), the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and it is possible to prevent an attack that increases the number of medals held by intentionally not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established). Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of a miss in "RT2" to be higher than the probability of all small roles (Winning-A1 to Winning-I) that are won in "RT2", and it is preferable to determine the winning probability of the replay role so that it is designed in this way (if the winning probability of the replay role is designed to be high, the probability of a miss will be lowered accordingly, so it is preferable to design the winning probability of the replay role so that it is not too high). In addition, in "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all small roles combined is 18784/65536, the winning probability of all replays combined is 12501/65536, and the probability of a miss is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of a miss is higher than the winning probability of all small roles combined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number of 40 for all settings 1 to 6. Also, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number of 160 for all settings 1 to 6. In contrast, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, 220 for setting 4, 240 for setting 5, and 270 for setting 6. In other words, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned a different number of 40 depending on the setting value. In this way, 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C function as BB without setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C may be referred to as BB without setting difference or bonus without setting difference), and 1st type BB-B functions as BB with setting difference (1st type BB-B may be referred to as BB with setting difference or bonus with setting difference). Also, 1st type BB-A, 1st type BB-B and 1st type BB-C all have a uniform appearance rate regardless of the RT state (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C (combined) is the same regardless of the setting value, but the appearance rate of 1st type BB-B (combined) differs depending on the setting value. In addition, the combined appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, but the appearance rate of each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the setting value, and even in such a case, Type 1 BB-B may be called BB with setting difference.

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the reel type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram in Figure 12. First, the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured with a main control board M that controls the progress of the game at the center, and a sub-control board S, door board D, reel board K, power board E, relay board IN, setting key switch M20, set/reset button M30, etc., all connected so that data can be exchanged. Note that the solid lines in the figure indicate the movement related to data exchange, and the dashed lines in the figure indicate the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power board E to the relay board IN or door board D without passing through the main control board.

The main control board M (sometimes called the main control means, main board, main control means, main board, or main game section) is a board that manages the overall progress of the game played on the reel-type gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, which is equipped with a CPUC100 (sometimes called CPUMC), built-in ROMC110, built-in RAMC120, etc., which are connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged between them. The main control board M receives signals indicating that the start lever D50, etc. has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and outputs control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S, the door board D, the reel board K, etc., thereby controlling the operation of these various boards {for example, by outputting an instruction number (also called a push order number, instruction information, or operation information) to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S is able to execute push order navigation on the performance display device S40}.

The sub-control board S (sometimes called the sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, or sub-game section) is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, similar to the main control board M described above, and the sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, ROM, RAM, etc., which are connected via a bus so that data can be exchanged between them. The sub-control board S is also connected to various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a performance display device S40, a reel backlight (also called a back lamp) S30, etc. Here, the reel backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, which illuminates the patterns drawn on the surface of the reel from behind. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the performance display device S40, the reel backlight S30, etc., to perform various performances. In the reel type gaming machine of this example, multiple LEDs are provided as the reel backlight S30 so that the player can individually identify nine ranges, namely the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right reel. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel is lit and all other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit. In addition, the reel type gaming machine of this example is configured to be able to execute a back lamp performance (sometimes called a backlight performance) that indicates to the player that the predetermined pattern combination has been stopped by changing the lighting state of the reel backlight S30 when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped.

Connected to the door board D are the aforementioned insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, a stop button D40 for stopping the spinning reel M50, a start lever D50 for starting the spinning of the reel M50, a settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the status of the game (not shown, but the aforementioned insertion number indicator light D210, start lamp D180, re-play lamp D290, insertion possible lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is a collection of display devices such as the credit number display device D200 and advantageous zone display device YH), a door switch D80 for determining whether the front door is open or closed, for clearing errors and for changing setting values, and a blocker D100 for paying out game medals (or other foreign objects) that are determined to be incompatible after being inserted to the release port D240. This door board D is also connected to the main control board M described above so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, stop button D40, settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. In addition, a signal when the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of a gaming medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

The reel board K is connected to a reel motor K10 for rotating the reel M50 and a reel sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50. The reel board K is capable of stopping the reel M50 at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20. In addition, in the reel type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes called a stepping motor) is used for the reel motor K10. Note that the step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 20 pieces) of patterns of approximately uniform size are set on each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), and the number of steps corresponding to one pattern is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). Furthermore, there is no problem with changing the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel revolution.

The medal payout device H is also connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and performs the operation of paying out a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 10 medals) based on a control signal from the main control board M. The medal payout device H is also connected to a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s that determine whether the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out, and a hopper motor H80 that rotates the disk H50.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In Figure 12, the dashed arrows show how power is supplied from the power supply board E. As shown, power is supplied directly to the main control board M and sub-control board S from the power supply board E, and power is supplied to the various boards (door board D, reel board K, relay board IN) via the main control board M. A predetermined amount of AC voltage (e.g., 100V) is supplied to the power supply board E, which is converted to a specified DC voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

The main control board M is also connected to a setting key switch M20 used to execute the setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset button M30 that can change setting values and reset errors. The main control board M also has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), an AT lottery means for executing an AT transition lottery to transition to an "AT in progress state", which is an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player, and an AT addition lottery means for executing an AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can be played in the "AT in progress state".

Next, Figures 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the general processing flow performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (shown as rectangles), decisions (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. Furthermore, when the details of a processing step are shown in another flowchart, those that refer to that other flowchart are shown as subroutines (shown as rectangles with double lines on the left and right). During the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are often developed at the same time, but in this example, the main processing is configured so that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) that are executed on gaming machines with different specifications are left, preventing processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). First, in step 1000, after the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is not started but only the type of the timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) as the function setting of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, checking whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 after power off and power recovery is correctly retained based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data retained in the checksum area) and generates power off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If the answer is Yes in step 1014, then in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the on/off state of the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (which is turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of the entire RAM (the check result in step 1006) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If the answer is Yes in step 1016, then in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area to determine whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a read of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completion flag and returns to processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the on/off state of the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (which is turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of the entire RAM (the check result in step 1006) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If the answer is Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets (for example, in the register area) the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the memory area in the RAM that stores the setting value (setting value data), and proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to only the memory area that stores the setting value (setting value data), and also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "favorable zone", the total cumulative number of games in the play zone (favorable zone + normal zone), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the "favorable zone", etc. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the "advantageous zone" in the game (advantageous zone ratio). The calculation process of the advantageous zone ratio is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous zone ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, "advantageous zone ratio → consecutive feature ratio per 6000 games → feature ratio per 6000 games → cumulative consecutive feature ratio → cumulative feature ratio" is displayed repeatedly at 5-second intervals. The consecutive feature ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB is operating/the total number of payouts", and the feature ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating/the total number of payouts". On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets (e.g., sets in the register area) the initialization range of the RAM to a specific range that includes the memory area in the RAM that stores the setting value (setting value data), and proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area in the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary memory area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it is not a value that will result in the special game being executed (to prevent the special game from being executed by mistake if a process for determining whether or not a special game will be executed is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the program processing begins). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, it is preferable to secure a dedicated memory area and configure the byte that stores information related to the random number to store only information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (to prevent information related to the random number from being overwritten by noise, etc. when manipulating other data stored in the same byte).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, also referred to as the setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes it with the starting address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to "1" when it becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, it is possible to eliminate the need for correction processing of the setting value (setting value data) after executing RAM initialization (processing of steps 1106 and 1108), and it is possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If the answer is Yes at step 1106, then at step 1108 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value most disadvantageous to the player) and proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1106, it also proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" which lights up all segments), displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and proceeds to step 1112. As mentioned above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Because of this configuration, for example, when a malfunction occurs in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), it is possible that erroneous information is notified when notifying the push order. In order to prevent such a situation, by having the payout number display device D270 light up all 7 segments "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to check whether the 7-segment is malfunctioning or not, and to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage. In addition, as a configuration for displaying the setting value (setting value data), a RAM memory area for displaying the setting value may be provided, which stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the memory area that stores the setting value, and the setting value may be displayed by referring to this memory area. Although not shown, after the processing of step 1110 is executed, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set/reset button M30 has switched from off to on. If the answer is Yes in step 1112, then in step 1114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (if the setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, the setting value (setting value data) becomes 0) and proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the answer is No in step 1112, then the CPU C100 of the main control board M also proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has switched from off to on. If the answer is No in step 1116, then the CPU C100 proceeds to step 1112 and loops the processing of steps 1112 to 1116. If the answer is Yes in step 1116, then in step 1118 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has switched from on to off. If the answer is No in step 1118, then the CPUC 100 of the main control board M loops through the process of step 1118. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1118, then in step 1120 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has ended, erases the display of the setting value (setting value data) on the setting display LED (not shown), and proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, the CPUC 100 executes a process to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode has ended.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the unrecoverable error processing related to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in other flowcharts) in FIG. 13. First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described below is not executed thereafter). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M
sets the next port output address (this is repeated to sequentially stop display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether output to each output port has been completed. If the answer is Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some kind of error occurs when executing this process), repeats execution of the process, and ends when a reset signal is input as the power supply voltage drops. (That is, an infinite loop is entered, and no operation to prompt a return is accepted.) If the answer is No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes in steps 1306 to 1310 are processes to clear the output to the LEDs and motors (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, it is possible to output information about the error and the game progress at the time of the error to the hall computer).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initialized with the top address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (e.g., the upper limit number of bets, the effective winning line, etc.). Note that step 1203 also includes a process of setting data (data of "0" to clear the address of the RAM) to clear the data used in the previous game (e.g., the condition device number (winning number), the performance group number, the instruction information) in the RAM. Note that the condition device number, the performance group number, the instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0") in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Also, a command (a command to the sub side) related to the RT state may be set in step 1704. Also, when transmitting the RT state to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit it all the time, and it may be configured to transmit the RT state to the sub side only when the game zone is a "favorable zone". Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the state of the AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state" etc.) (step 1420, step 1429 of FIG. 21, step 1435, step 1439, step 1443 of FIG. 22, step 1444-3, step 1444-4 of FIG. 23 are set). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) regarding the state of the AT set in step 1206. In addition, the process of setting the state of the AT may be executed in step 1416, step 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. 23. In addition, when transmitting the state of the AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit it all the time, and it may be configured to transmit the state of the AT to the sub side only when the game zone is the "advantageous zone". Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game area (for example, "advantageous area") in the game (sets the game area determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 31). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the game area set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, the medal payout device H is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals that have overflowed from the medal payout device H, and determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals by the conduction/non-conduction of current by two fullness detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS (if the current is conducted through the medals, it is determined to be full). If the answer is Yes in step 1209, proceed to step 1218.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error on a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal full error has been released (for example, whether the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS and the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1218. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the insertion of a medal (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replay role), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1220). Here, in step 1218, the on process of the blocker D100 (the process formed by the medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, if the replay role was established in the previous game, the on process of the blocker D100 is executed on the condition that the current number of accumulated credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). In other words, if the current number of accumulated credits is a predetermined value, the on process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, if the replay role was not established in the previous game, the on process of the blocker D100 is executed uniformly. By configuring it in this way, even if a replay role is established, if the number of accumulated credits (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, and the player can play rhythmically (without feeling uncomfortable) even when the player is in an RT state (for example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning a replay role is higher than in RT states such as "RT1", or when a replay role that is difficult to tell from the outside is stopped (a replay disguised as a minor role: a symbol combination of bell-bell-bell on an invalid line or a cherry stopped on the left reel) stops.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether or not game medals have not been bet or saved (no credits exist). If the answer is Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the setting value display condition is satisfied (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all on). If the answer is Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, and the input number display light D210) (transitions to the setting confirmation mode), and transitions to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be started, and when the termination conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is executed to send a command to terminate the setting change mode. If the answer is No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 1226, then in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, there are two insertion sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on, it is judged that one game medal has been accepted). If the answer is Yes in step 1227, then in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off (when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on and then the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off, it is judged that one accepted game medal has passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1230, then in step 1231 the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the credits are at the upper limit (50 in this example) and the number of bets is at the maximum (3 in this example), and if the answer is Yes, it controls the blocker D100 to be OFF (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If the answer is No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if the answer is No in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether there are any remaining credits or bets of game medals. If the answer is Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, there are two payout sensors for detecting the payout of medals, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is judged that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If the answer is Yes in step 1236, proceed to step 1247. Although this is not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay role, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). Specifically, it judges whether the situation in which it is judged that the medal has not been dispensed despite the hopper drive signal being sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating) has continued for a predetermined time. If the answer is Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1245, then in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF), and proceeds to step 1247. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1245, then proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in step 1241 or step 1247, the CPUC100 proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 is valid (for example, the specified number of game medals to start the game have been inserted, etc.) and whether the start lever D50 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M obtains a random number and executes a process to turn off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3600). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. If the answer is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether the current state of the AT is a state in which the AT addition lottery can be executed. Here, in this example, the states of the AT in which the AT addition lottery can be executed are "AT state", "addition special state", "specialized premonition state", and "advantageous BB state", and in "advantageous BB internal play", the AT counter value can be in a state greater than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous in "advantageous BB internal play" by deliberately not matching the BB pattern combination. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the AT addition lottery can be executed during "play within advantageous BB". In such a configuration, even if the AT addition lottery is won during "play within advantageous BB", it may not be notified immediately, but rather, when the BB ends, the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won, or the number of remaining AT games after the number of AT games has been added, may be notified.

If the answer is Yes in step 1259, then in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1259, then the process also proceeds to step 1400. This game number addition execution process can also execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to the AT, but it is preferable that the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (the lottery is executed using the same lottery table). Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in Figure 30). (1) "Low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to transition to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won. In addition, since the "low probability state" is the so-called "normal state", it is also called the "normal state". (2) "Normal BB internal play" is a state in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state", the BB role has not been awarded, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" is a state that is executed when the pattern combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in a situation in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won, or when the pattern combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal play". (4) "High probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to move to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won, and is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". In addition, as described later, when a new "high probability state" is entered, it is configured not to enter the "low probability state" until the high securing obstacle game number has passed. (5) "AT state" is a state in which the AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. In addition, even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuation lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT state" continues. (6) "Specialized premonition state" is a state in which the right to move to the "addition specialized state" in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state" is acquired. (7) "Addition specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state". (8) "Game during advantageous BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialization state", and the BB role is not a winning combination. (9) "Game during waiting BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not a winning combination. (10) "Advantageous BB state" refers to a state executed when the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialized state" and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal play", or when the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal play". (12) "Revival possibility performance state" refers to a state related to the AT to which the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuation lottery described later is not won. In the "revival possibility performance state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the "AT state" is entered (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and if the revival lottery is not won, the "low probability state" is entered.

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, as described below, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a request to create a pull-in point (requested to determine the stop positions of the spinning left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and requested as appropriate depending on the stop order and the stop positions of other reels). If the answer is Yes in step 1261-1, then in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1261-1, then the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal game", even if the stop buttons are not stopped in the correct order to pay out 11 coins in a game in which the push order bell is won (for example, in the case of winning-A1, the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of "left → center → right") (when the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order), the reel stop control is configured to win a symbol combination that will pay out 11 coins. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1264, the process also proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If the answer is Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the combination that can win a prize determined by the internal lottery, it is judged to be abnormal). In addition, the judgment of whether the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal or not is made by judging whether the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally or not. In a game in which a winning combination is won, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won, even if the reel position that actually stopped is not normal (the winning combination determined by the internal lottery is not displayed as stopped from the player's perspective), if the reel stop control is completed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medals based on the winning of the winning combination are paid out. If the answer is Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display judgment error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1267, proceed to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a payout process of the game medals due to winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not there has been a winning to pay out the game medals {if the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example), the game medals are paid out}. If the answer is Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on, it is judged that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If the answer is Yes at step 1277, proceed to step 1286.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1277, then in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of processing step 1276). If the answer is Yes in step 1279, then in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display on the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been released (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1286. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1282, proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal for which the payout operation was being performed has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. Note that if the answer is No in step 1279 or step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning for which the answer is Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If the answer is Yes at step 1290, proceed to step 3400. If the answer is No at step 1286, proceed to step 1277; if the answer is No at step 1275, proceed to step 3400; if the answer is No at step 1290, proceed to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game end process (e.g., clearing the number of bets, transitioning the game state, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process related to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery, in which winning numbers and numbers to be compared with the acquired random number are stored) and proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It is possible to generate winning information for winning and replay from the winning number. In addition, when a bonus and a small role are won in overlapping, or a bonus and a replay role are won in overlapping, it is possible to generate winning information for both winning and replay information and bonus winning information from the winning number. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout group number and the same number of places to compare with the acquired random number, and is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. For example, payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of places is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push order replay roles, and the number of places is the same for six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are push order bell roles, so the number of repetitions related to the push order replay role is 3, and the number of repetitions related to the push order bell role is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push order replay roles are obtained and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 that are push order bell roles are obtained are configured as a single lottery table. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). If the answer is Yes in step 3614, it has been judged that the internal lottery has been won, so the CPUC100 does not perform a judgment (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1259). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not there are any remaining repetitions. If the answer is Yes in step 3618, proceed to step 3610, and repeat the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If the answer is No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next ball payout group number), proceeds to step 3604, and executes the processing from step 3604 onwards. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process related to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is "AT in progress", "specialized precursor state", or "addition specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the ball output group number related to the game is the ball output group number (in this example, 1, 3) related to the AT in progress add-on role (a winning number that can add the remaining AT game number in the "AT in progress state", which in this example is replay-B, replay-C, and winning-D). If the answer is Yes in step 1504, proceed to step 1514. Also, if the answer is No in step 1502, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is a favorable BB state, in step 1512, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines whether the ball payout group number for the game is a ball payout group number (in this example, 5, 6) for a BB add-on role (a winning number that can add to the remaining AT game number in an "favorable BB state", in this example, winning-H, winning-I). If the answer is Yes in step 1512, proceed to step 1514, and if the answer is No in step 1512, proceed to step 1518. Also, if the answer is No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is an "add-on specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1506, then in step 1508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout group number for the game is the payout group number (in this example, 2, 13) for the special add-on role (a winning number that can add to the number of remaining AT games in the "specialized add-on state" and does not add to the number of remaining AT games in the "AT state", which in this example are Replay-A, Replay-D1 to D3, and Winning-A1 to A6). If the answer is Yes in step 1508, then proceed to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or step 1508, then proceed to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning-time additional game number lottery table and determines the number of AT additional games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the lottery table shown in the margin, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within any range). In addition, determining the number of AT additional games is also referred to as executing an AT additional lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S can recognize whether the AT game number addition has been executed and how many games the additional number is by receiving the command), and proceeds to step 1518. In addition, when the payout group number is 7 to 11, which is the payout group number related to the winning number that includes a bonus (winning number 19 to 27), a lottery for the AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be held.

Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of games to be added when winning, and in this embodiment, when a role for adding on when winning is won in some of the states related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, "AT in progress state", "specialized precursor state", "specialized addition state", "favorable BB state"), the number of games to be added to the AT is determined by lottery from "0" to "300" based on the payout group number related to that game, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of games remaining in the AT will not increase (if "0" is determined, this may be referred to as a non-win in the AT addition lottery).

In addition, the average number of AT added games (expected value) when an additional role is won at the time of winning is the value shown in the figure, and a specific calculation method, when the winning role is watermelon A, can be calculated as follows: {number of places (600) x number of AT added games (0) + number of places (100) x number of AT added games (10) + number of places (300) x number of AT added games (30) + number of places (24) x number of AT added games (100)} / total number of places (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning role is Replay-B or Replay-C, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (500) x Number of games added to the AT (0) + Number of places (200) x Number of games added to the AT (50) + Number of places (300) x Number of games added to the AT (100) + Number of places (24) x Number of games added to the AT (300)} / Total number of places (1024) = 46.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3, or winning combination-A1 to A6, {number of places (
The total number of places (1024) = 26.61 (games). Note that when the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the AT status is "Addition Specialized Status".

Next, if the winning combination is a weak rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of placements (800) x Number of games added to the AT (0) + Number of placements (100) x Number of games added to the AT (10) + Number of placements (100) x Number of games added to the AT (30) + Number of placements (24) x Number of games added to the AT (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a strong rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of placements (300) x Number of games added to the AT (0) + Number of placements (300) x Number of games added to the AT (30) + Number of placements (400) x Number of games added to the AT (50) + Number of placements (24) x Number of games added to the AT (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (games).

In this embodiment, when an AT addition lottery is executed, the average number of AT addition games can differ depending on the type of winning role, but the average number of AT addition games is configured not to differ depending on the setting value. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same process is executed as an AT addition lottery for winning numbers 7 and 8, a process must be executed to determine whether the winning number is 7 or 8. However, by configuring the AT addition lottery to be executed based on the ball output group number as in this embodiment, when the same process is executed as an AT addition lottery for winning numbers 7 and 8, it is possible to execute the process related to the AT addition lottery for either winning number 7 or winning number 8 simply by determining whether the ball output group number is 2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number for the game (or winning information for winning the prize/replay, or ball group number, etc.) is the winning number for replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which the white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping it with a reverse push). If the answer is Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of AT games was added by replay-B, in other words, whether the number of AT games added by winning replay-B was not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which executes an effect instructing the white seven to be aligned with the invalid line by reverse pushing ("right → center → left")) and proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1520, then in step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S, which instructs a push order other than reverse push ("right → center → left") and executes an effect to prevent the white sevens from lining up on the invalid line), and proceeds to step 1526. Note that if the answer is No in step 1518, then the CPU C100 of the main control board M also proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number for the game (or winning information for prize-winning/replay, or ball group number, etc., may be used to determine this) is a replay-C (a forward push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black sevens can be aligned in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping the buttons in the forward push order). If the answer is Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the number of AT games was added by the replay-C, in other words, whether or not the number of AT games added by winning the replay-C was not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a push-in command command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which executes an effect of instructing the player to align black sevens on an invalid line by pushing in order ("left → center → right")) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a push-in avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which instructs a push order other than the push order ("left → center → right") and executes an effect of preventing the player from aligning black sevens on an invalid line) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). In addition, even if the answer is No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). In this embodiment, the reverse push instruction command, reverse push avoidance command, forward push instruction command, and forward push avoidance command are sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands, so that the sub-control board S can execute the performance related to the push order navigation, but this is not limited to this. When the AT addition lottery is won, a command related to the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won and the number of AT addition games (for example, a command related to the number of AT addition games related to the processing of step 1517) is sent to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S receives the command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the performance mode of the performance related to the push order navigation. As one example, in a game in which Replay-B is won, the sub-control board S may be configured to select and execute a presentation mode instructing reverse push in the game in which the command is received (a game in which the AT game number is added), or the sub-control board S may be configured not to execute a presentation instructing reverse push in the game in which the command is received, but to execute a presentation instructing a push order that can result in a 7 on an invalid line in a game in which a specified condition is subsequently satisfied (for example, a specific replay role (for example, Replay-B or C) is won). Alternatively, in a game in which Replay-B is won and the sub-control board S receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing a reverse push may not be executed, and an AT game number addition effect (an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 increases, for example, displaying "+30G") may be executed in a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter (for example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous effects may be executed at the same time, in which case the final game of the continuous effects)). Note that in this example, the effect display device S40 is also configured to be able to display a display relating to the number of remaining AT games, and the display and the main It may be the same as the number of remaining AT games stored on the control board side, or it may be different. Note that, in a game in which Replay-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), an example of a case in which the effect of instructing reverse push is not executed and the effect of adding the number of AT games is executed in a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter is when the sub-control board S side executes a special effect (for example, a predetermined consecutive effect) that encourages the winning of a bonus (since the probability of winning Replay-B within the bonus is low (including 0%), if the push order that allows for a 7-line is announced, the player will know that he or she has not won the bonus). Examples of such cases include when the sub-control board S side is executing a special effect, such as when the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the number of remaining AT games is added. The information by which the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side has won the AT addition lottery and the number of remaining AT games has been added is (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT addition lottery. After that, the sub-control board S side calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and determines the number of additional AT games won in the AT addition lottery, and (2) the number of additional AT games obtained as a result of the AT addition lottery on the main control board M side. A command related to the number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In addition, if the AT addition lottery is not won, a command related to the fact that the AT addition lottery was not won is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the presentation mode of the presentation related to the push order navigation. As an example, in a game in which the replay-B is won, and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the AT game number was not added), a presentation mode instructing a middle push (operating the middle stop button as the first stop, and a push order that avoids 7-matching) may be selected and executed. Note that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the information by which the sub-control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number was not added is (1) information related to the AT remaining game number is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT addition lottery. After that, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information on the number of remaining AT games sent last time and the information on the number of remaining AT games sent this time, and determines the number of AT addition games won in the AT addition lottery (if the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of remaining AT games sent this time from the information on the number of remaining AT games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), and (2) sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that the number of added AT games is 0 as a result of the AT addition lottery on the main control board M side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the current AT state is a state in which the AT lottery can be executed. In this embodiment, the AT state in which the AT lottery can be executed is only the "high probability state", and by winning BB in the "high probability state", it transitions to "advantageous BB internal game", and then by winning the BB role, it transitions to the "advantageous BB state", and by ending the executed BB, it transitions to the "AT in state", and the AT counter is set to 50 times, which is the initial value of the number of AT games. In addition, even if BB is won in the "low probability state", it transitions to "normal BB internal game", and does not transition to the "AT in state". In addition, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when BB is won in the "normal game state", it is possible to win the AT lottery with the BB role as a trigger. In such a configuration, if the player wins BB in the "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery due to the BB role, the game will move to the "game in favorable BB internal state", and then move to the "favorable BB state" by lining up BB. In addition, in the "normal game state" where the player wins BB and is in the internal state where the player does not line up BB, the game section may be the "favorable section" or the "standby section". If the answer is Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery role (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB-C, which is a BB role without a setting difference). In addition, in this embodiment, both the winning number of the BB without a setting difference alone (winning numbers 19 and 24) and the winning numbers with the BB without a setting difference and the small role overlapping (winning numbers 25, 26, and 27) are AT lottery roles. If the answer is Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "playing inside advantageous BB" and proceeds to step 1410. Also, if the answer is No in step 1402 or step 1404, proceeds to step 1410. Note that in this embodiment, the AT winning rate (whether or not you can win) for the AT lottery is configured to differ when the state of the AT differs, but when the state of the AT is the same, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same even if the setting value is different (if you win the BB in the "high probability state", you will always win the AT regardless of the setting value = then proceed to the "AT in progress state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the state of the AT for the next game onwards has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the current state of the AT is a "low probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the condition device for the game is a state promotion role (a small role that can transition from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning, in this example, a cherry). If the answer is Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a high probability state transition lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2, and it can be changed as long as it is not different depending on the set value). Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the executed high probability state transition lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT for the next game onwards to be a "high probability state" and proceeds to step 1430.

Also, if the answer is No at step 1412, then at step 1424 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is a "high probability state". If the answer is Yes at step 1424, then at step 1426 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the high probability obstacle counter KHc is 1 (the final game of the high probability obstacle state, and the 10th game since the "high probability state" was entered). If the answer is Yes at step 1426, then at step 1428 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state regarding the AT is a "high probability state", the game zone is a "favorable zone", and when the game zone is a "favorable zone", the "favorable zone" is configured not to end unless the push order navigation is executed once or more, or the "favorable zone" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) (that is, even if the low probability state transition lottery is won, if the low probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation is not executed once or more, the "high probability state" is configured not to end). In addition, when the BB role is won during the "favorable zone" and the BB is executed, the "favorable zone" may be configured to end at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed even once in the "favorable zone". If the answer is Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state" and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied by the push order navigation being executed once. In addition, when a role with a maximum payout of 8 coins and a role with a maximum payout of 11 coins are set as push order roles (winning roles that differ depending on the reel stop order and the player's profit rate differs), the low probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation for the role with the maximum payout of 11 coins, which has the larger maximum payout number, has been executed once. In addition, if the answer is No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428, the game also transitions to step 1430. In this way, in this embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" occurs, the high probability state counter KHc is set to 10 games, which are high probability state games, and the game is not transitioned to the "low probability state" until the counter value becomes 0. Note that this type of lottery method is merely one example, and for example, the low probability state transition lottery may not be executed for 10 games after transitioning to the "high probability state" (staying in the "high probability state" is guaranteed), and after those 10 games have elapsed, a lottery to transition from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/20) for each game. Note that the AT lottery role (low probability AT lottery role, high probability AT lottery role) and state promotion role have the same probability of winning for all setting values.

Next, Figure 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control processing relating to the subroutine of step 1400 in Figure 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is "AT in progress". If the answer is Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to the AT is the "AT in progress state", if the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is 4 or more, there is a 1/2 probability when winning watermelon B that the player will acquire the right to transition to the "add-on specialized state" and may transition to the "specialized premonition state", whereas when the state related to the AT is the "AT in progress state", if the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is 3 or less, even if the player wins watermelon B, a lottery to acquire the right to transition to the "add-on specialized state" (sometimes referred to as a specialized state transition lottery) is not executed, and the player will not transition to the "specialized premonition state" or the "add-on specialized state". However, without being limited to this, even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery (sometimes called a specialized state transition lottery) may be held in which a player wins watermelon B and gains the right to transition to an "add-on specialized state". If the lottery is thus executed in a situation in which the AT counter value is 3 or less and a player wins a lottery in which a player wins watermelon B and gains the right to transition to an "add-on specialized state", the system may be configured so that the player may enter (or transition to) a "specialized premonition state" or "add-on specialized state" from the next game in which the lottery is won, or the system may be configured so that the player may enter (or transition to) a "specialized premonition state" or "add-on specialized state" when the AT counter value reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 1 or 0), or the system may be configured so that the player may enter (or transition to) a "specialized premonition state" or "add-on specialized state" after a predetermined number of games have been played since the game in which the lottery was won. In addition, when transitioning to the "addition specialized state", it is not necessary to go through the "specialized precursor state", and for example, it may be configured to transition directly from the "AT state" to the "addition specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the condition device related to the game is a specialized transition role (a small role that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to the "addition specialized state", in this example, watermelon B). If the answer is Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a specialized state transition lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the executed specialized state transition lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1434, then in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be a "specialized premonition state" and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1431, then in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final game of the AT). If the answer is Yes in step 1436, then in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuation lottery that has a predetermined probability of winning (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the executed continuation lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "AT in progress" and proceeds to step 1444-1 (the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the AT state transition condition). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "state for revival possibility performance" and proceeds to step 1444-1. Note that if the answer is No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process also proceeds to step 1444-1. Thus, in this embodiment, a continuation lottery is executed in the final game of the AT, and if the continuation lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set again in the AT counter M60. That is, if the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the game is such that the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The timing of execution of the continuation lottery is not limited to the final game of the AT, and for example, the continuation lottery may be configured to be executed in the first game of the AT (the first game in which the "AT state" is newly established or the first game after the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). By configuring in this way, whether or not the next set (the AT related to the winning of the continuation lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) has already been determined in the "AT state", so the effects during the AT can be made different between when the continuation lottery is won and when it is not won. For example, when the continuation lottery is won, the background music can be changed (such as a song playing) in a situation where the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 or more (during the execution of the AT), or an effect that confirms that the continuation lottery has been won can be executed.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state of the AT is a state for revival possibility performance. If the answer is Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device for the game is a revival role (a role that can transition to the "AT in progress state" in the next game by winning in the "revival possibility performance state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in this embodiment, the revival role is a role that includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus roles (only BB role without setting difference, BB role with setting difference is not included), and when the condition device for the game becomes a revival role, it is said to win the revival lottery. If step 1444-2 is Yes, in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "AT in progress" and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the AT state transition condition. On the other hand, if step 1444-2 is No, in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "low probability state" and proceeds to step 1445. Note that, even if step 1441-1 is No, it also proceeds to step 1445. Thus, in this embodiment, even if it is the final game of the AT and the continuation lottery is not won, it transitions to the "resurrection possible or impossible performance state", and if the resurrection lottery can be won in the "resurrection possible or impossible performance state", it is configured to transition to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, although the "state for showing whether or not a revival is possible" is a "favorable zone," lotteries related to the AT in the "AT in progress state" (AT addition lotteries, continuation lotteries, etc.) are not executed, and the system is configured so that a revival lottery can be executed, and the manner in which lotteries related to the AT are executed differs between the "AT in progress state" and the "state for showing whether or not a revival is possible."

Next, in step 1445, the CP of the main control board M
The UC100 judges whether the state of the AT after the next game has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1445, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the transition condition of the state of the AT has been satisfied in step 1446 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition condition is satisfied when the premonition game number of 10 games is consumed in the "specialized premonition state"). If the answer is Yes in step 1446, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT after the next game in step 1447 and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, when the premonition game number is consumed in the "specialized premonition state", the "addition specialization state" is determined). In addition, if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a high probability counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high probability counter value, in other words, a command related to the remaining number of games for which a high probability state is guaranteed), and proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT from the next game onwards is determined to be "playing inside advantageous BB". If the answer is Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high probability counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450).

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if a BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the player will not win the AT transition lottery (and will not transition to the "AT in progress state" afterwards), whereas if a BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "high probability state", the player will win the AT transition lottery (and will transition to the "AT in progress state" afterwards). However, this is not limited to this, and if a condition device A, which is a specified condition device, is used as the AT lottery role and the states related to the AT, which is the "favorable zone", are configured to have "high probability state A" and "high probability state B", then if condition device A is won in "high probability state A", there is a 1/10 chance of winning the AT transition lottery, and if condition device A is won in "high probability state B", there is a 1/2 chance of winning the AT transition lottery. Furthermore, if the AT transition lottery is won, the AT state will transition to an "AT preparation state," which is a preparation state until transitioning to an "AT in progress state," and it may be configured to transition to the "AT in progress state" if a specified end condition is met (for example, 10 games have passed since transitioning to the "AT preparation state").

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process related to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play area is a "favorable area". If the answer is Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a command related to the winning/replay winning information related to the game). Next, in step 1454, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is a role with push order (a condition device in which the role that wins differs depending on the push order, for example, Win-A1, etc.). If the answer is Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also called the push order number) in the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and stores the instruction number in a RAM address for storing the instruction number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the push order, and in this example, the main control board M determines it and transmits it to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). In addition, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. The instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number is initialized based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (e.g., AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (see FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472 (see FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the sub control board side). In this example, the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 display the reel stop order that will be the most profitable for the player, which is referred to as push order navigation, displaying the push order navigation display, etc. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number, and for example, the push order of "left → center → right" is configured to be displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270, and is configured to be displayed as "=1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, without being limited to this, the display mode may be different when the push order navigation "left → center → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to push order bells and when the push order navigation "left → center → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to push order replay. In other words, the number of types of display modes of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning/replay winning information.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a masking process on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and stores the masked information at a specified address in the RAM. Here, if the winning/replay winning information of the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the winning/replay winning information is recognized by fraudulent conduct, the highly profitable push order (reel stop order) of the game will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the winning/replay winning information of the game is configured to be masked (a process for making the winning/replay winning information (especially the information related to the push order) secret) before being transmitted to the sub-control board S, so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. In this embodiment, the method of masking is configured to send multiple winning/replay winning information (winning/replay winning information having a similar role is suitable, for example, multiple winning/replay winning information that may stop and display a symbol combination that becomes a replay role in which the RT state is transitioned depending on the push order) as one performance group number (for example, winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 are set as performance group 4) to the sub-control board S. The method of masking is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to provide new winning/replay winning information after masking after the provided winning/replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example). Also, in such a case, it is desirable to configure the existing winning/replay winning information to have multiple winning/replay winning information as one winning/replay winning information like the performance group number, and to provide winning/replay winning information after mask processing (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information), which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing). In addition, if it is determined that the game is one in which operation information (push order navigation) is notified based on the state of the AT in the main control board M, the winning/replay winning information is sent to the sub-control board S, and in a game in which operation information is not notified, the performance group number may be sent to the sub-control board S. In this configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be sent to the sub-control board S, or it may be configured not to be sent.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub side) related to the performance group number after executing the mask process, and proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (which allows the sub side to recognize whether or not a bonus has been won), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1550). Note that in this embodiment, the system is configured to derive the prize/replay winning information and the bonus winning information from the winning number, and the method of derivation will be described later. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of push order navigation display are configured as follows in the case of "AT in progress state": (1) if a fall replay role is included → navigate to a push order that does not stop and display the fall replay role, (2) if a bell (1 coin role or 11 coin role) → navigate to a push order that will pay out the most coins, etc. In this way, in this embodiment, when the play area is an "advantageous area", it is configured to be able to transmit winning/replay winning information (a number that can identify the type of winning role and the most advantageous push order for the player) and instruction number (a number that can identify the most advantageous push order for the player) to the sub-control board S side, while when the play area is a "normal area", it is configured to be able to transmit a performance group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning role) to the sub-control board S side. That is, in the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game, including winning information for winning and replay in which the game outcome and the player's profit differ depending on the push order, can be sent directly to the sub-control board S, whereas in a game zone that is not the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game is not sent, and in the case of winning information for winning and replay in which the game outcome and the player's profit differ depending on the push order, a performance group number that conceals the information regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board S.

When the play area is not a "favorable area", etc., the main control board M is configured to execute a mask process to determine the performance group number when sending the winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and to send the performance group number to the sub-control board S. The performance group number is a number that is assigned to the winning/replay winning information related to winning roles that play similar roles (for example, replay roles that include a falling replay role, push order bell, etc.) by grouping the winning/replay winning information related to the game and assigning a number to it. By executing a mask process (a process that keeps the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) secret) on the winning/replay winning information related to the game before sending it to the sub-control board S, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the winning/replay winning information is recognized through fraudulent acts and a highly profitable push order (reel stop order) related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flow chart of the reel rotation start preparation process related to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (decrement timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a timer that measures the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts it. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information on the reel stop order and the information on the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information on the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output request at the time of reel rotation start waiting related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the reel control command related to the game and moves to the next process (processing of step 1260). In other words, the processing of steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel will start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process related to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play area is an "advantageous area". The "advantageous area" is one of the play areas, and is a play area that is likely to be set in a play situation that is advantageous for the player, such as when the AT-related state is "AT in progress". If the answer is Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the advantageous area remaining game number counter YKc-1 (a decrement counter, which is set to an initial value of 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can be stayed in the "advantageous area", and which can be subtracted every game during the period of the "advantageous area").

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is "AT in progress". If the answer is Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high probability failure counter KHc and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1700). Note that even if the answer is No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1700). In this embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress", the AT counter value is subtracted every game, but when it is "advantageous BB state", "game in advantageous BB", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, when the "AT in progress state" is shifted to the "specialized premonition state" in a situation where the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains), the AT counter value is maintained and the transition (transition) can be made from "AT in progress state" to "specialized premonition state" to "addition specialization state". Note that even if the state related to the AT is "AT in progress", if a winning number including a bonus role is determined in that game, the AT counter value can be prevented from being subtracted by 1. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the display may be controlled so that the remaining AT game number displayed on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is subtracted. For example, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value will remain at "30", or will store "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to that game. However, upon operation of the start lever D50, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 may be displayed as "29", or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery may not be announced during the game, but may be announced in a specific game after the game (at the start of bonus play, during bonus play, at the end of bonus play, or in a game that meets specified conditions after the end of bonus play)). The number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 can be configured to be subtracted by one for each game even in "games in favorable BB", and the number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game until a performance suggesting a bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. By configuring in this way, when a bonus is won in a state where push order navigation such as "AT state" can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that the bonus has been won. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus role is determined, a continuous performance over multiple games that stirs up whether or not the bonus has been won can be executed using the performance display device S40, etc., to increase the interest of the game. In addition, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 after the bonus game is finished can be controlled to display "30", or a value of "30" or more when the result of the AT addition lottery is won and the result of the addition is notified. In addition, when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "1", if a game is played and a bonus is won, the display related to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous performance spanning multiple games is executed to tease whether or not a bonus has been won, and if a game is played when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "1", a winning number (or winning information for winning a prize/replay, or a ball group number) that may be used to execute an AT addition lottery is won, and the AT game number becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 becomes "0". In addition, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing a continuous performance may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the RT state transition condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in this embodiment, the RT state transition condition is configured to be satisfied by executing RAM clear (initializing RAM), displaying the stop of replay (in this example, displaying the stop of replay 04), and winning, starting, and ending BB. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition can be performed and the RT state from the next game onwards based on the satisfied RT state transition condition (see the RT state transition diagram in FIG. 28), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750). Note that even if No in step 1702, the next process (processing of step 1750) is also proceeded to. In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels have stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing of transitioning to the RT state (storing the RT number in RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are four RT states, "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and the RT state transition occurs when the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure are met. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is performed, or when replay 04 is displayed as stopped, the RT state transitions to "RT0". When replay 04 is displayed as stopped, specifically, when "replay-D1" is won in a situation where the RT state is "RT1", if the left stop button is operated as the first stop, replays 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if you win "Replay-D1" when the RT state is "RT1", if you operate the center stop button or right stop button as the first stop, Replay 04 will be displayed as stopped, and the RT state will transition from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, if the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", and you win the BB role, but do not win the BB role in the game in which you won (the condition device related to Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the RT state will transition to "RT2". Also, if you win the BB role in "RT2" (Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the state will transition to "Type 1 BB-A, B, C". Also, if BB ends in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (the activation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the state will transition to "RT1". Furthermore, when the BB is won when the AT state is a "low probability state" and the BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player. However, since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation does not occur, when "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, if the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order (the first stop is one of three options: left button, middle button, and right button, and one of the three options is the correct push order, so replays other than Replay 04 are displayed as stopped, and two of the three options are incorrect push orders, so Replay 04 is displayed as stopped), the reels will be displayed as stopped, and the replay will transition from "RT1" to "RT0". Furthermore, if the AT state is a "high probability state," "AT state," "specialized precursor state," or "addition specialized state," and BB is won, when BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1," which is highly profitable for the player, and since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, even if "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, Replay 04 will navigate you to the correct push order that does not display a stop, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process related to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the AT state transition possible condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transition possible condition is satisfied, for example, when (1) the BB without setting difference that was won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) the continuation lottery is won, or (3) the revival lottery is won. If the answer is Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the AT initial game number (50 in this example, the number of games that starts to be subtracted after the transition to the "AT state") in the AT counter M60, triggered by the new transition to the "AT precursor state", and proceeds to step 1756. If the answer is No in step 1752, the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the current state regarding the AT is not a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the state regarding the AT for the next game is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the number of high probability obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high probability obstacle counter, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). Note that after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and proceeding to "playing inside the advantageous BB", the BB
When a winning B causes a transition to an "advantageous BB state" and the number of AT games is added in the "advantageous BB state", when the BB ends and the state transitions from the "advantageous BB state" to the "AT in progress state", the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50. Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state transitions to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + added 30). In this case, when a performance is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", it is desirable to inform the player that the initial number of AT games is 80 games at the start of the "AT state", but as another notification method, it is possible to consider a notification method in which, instead of performing a performance to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", a performance is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or when the number of remaining AT games in the performance display device S40 is small), after presenting the player with the initial value of 50 games at the start of the "AT state". By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the AT game number has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added, so that the interest in the addition performance that suddenly occurs for an unknown reason during the AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur) can be increased. In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the AT initial game number is not limited to that of this example, and the AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process of step 1400 described above. Also, the number of games (AT initial game number) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state related to the AT becomes "AT in progress state") (subtraction does not start during the BB). Also, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the memory area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are 10 AT-related states, including "low probability state", "playing in normal BB", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state", "addition specialization state", "playing in favorable BB", "favorable BB state", and "state for revival possibility performance". The AT-related state will transition by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. For example, if you win watermelon B in the "AT state" and win the specialized state transition lottery with a 1/2 chance of winning, you will transition to the "specialized premonition state". In addition, if 10 games have passed (consumed) since transitioning to the "specialized premonition state", you will transition to the "addition specialization state". In addition, as for the game zone, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "playing in normal BB", and "normal BB state" are set to the "normal zone", and the seven AT-related states of "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state", "addition specialization state", "playing in favorable BB", "favorable BB state", and "state for revival possibility performance" are set to the "favorable zone". In other words, even if the state of the seven ATs that are "favorable zones" has transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without being set to the "normal zone", the "favorable zone" will be forcibly ended and set to the "normal zone". In addition, when the push order navigation is displayed in the "AT state", "specialized premonition state", or "addition specialization state", which are the notification game states, the game state is maintained even if replay 04 is stopped and displayed.

As mentioned above, in the "AT in progress state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuation lottery is not won, the state will enter the "resurrection possible/possible presentation state". If the resurrection lottery is won in the "resurrection possible/possible presentation state", the state can return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the resurrection lottery is not won in the "resurrection possible/possible presentation state", the state will transition to the "low probability state", and the state will change from the "advantageous zone" to the "normal zone".

When a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state". Also, when a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "AT in progress state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state". Furthermore, when a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "revival possibility performance state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state" (to win the revival lottery). Furthermore, when a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "Revival possibility performance state", the BB with setting difference is activated, and the "Advantageous BB state" ends, if the BB with setting difference is the winning number associated with a single BB role (winning number 20), the state will enter a "low probability state" after the BB ends (because the BB with setting difference role will not result in a win in the revival lottery), and if the BB with setting difference is a winning number that overlaps with a rare role (winning numbers 21-23), the state will enter an "AT in progress state" after the BB ends (because the rare role will result in a win in the revival lottery).

In addition, if you are in the "advantageous zone" and in the "high probability state", you will win a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), and when the BB with setting difference is activated and the "advantageous BB state" ends, you will transition to the "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to the AT to which it transitions after the end of the "favorable BB state" is the "AT state", "specialized precursor state", or "add-on specialized state" which is the state related to the AT when the BB is won, after the end of a BB won during the AT ("AT state", "specialized precursor state", "add-on specialized state") (either a BB with a setting difference or a BB without a setting difference), and after the end of a BB without a setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "AT state". In addition, after the end of a BB with a setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "high probability state".

The state of the AT is not limited to that of this embodiment, and may be configured, for example, so that an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or "high probability state", and a transition to a "premonition state" occurs by winning the AT lottery, and a transition to an "AT in progress state" occurs after 16 to 32 games have passed. In such a configuration, an AT lottery is executed by winning the predetermined condition device, and if the AT lottery is not won, a transition to a "false premonition state" occurs, and a transition to a "low probability state" or "high probability state" occurs after 16 to 32 games have passed. In addition, a "standby section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case where an AT lottery is executed by winning "cherry", if a "BB + cherry" in which BB and cherry overlap is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of "BB + cherry" wins may be configured as a "standby section". In this way, by providing a "standby section", in the case where the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and in the case where the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off during the period until the BB pattern combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator is turned on), so that it is possible to provoke the player as to whether or not the AT lottery has been won. In addition, when the BB is won in the "addition specialization state", it may be configured so that the "addition specialization state" resumes after the BB ends, and in such a case, during the BB, the AT addition lottery is executed differently from the BB won in the "AT state" as the BB won in the "addition specialization state" (for example, it is easier to win the AT addition lottery than the BB won in the "AT state", and the number of games per AT game number addition is relatively large). In addition, if a BB is won in the "specialized precursor state", the system may be configured to transition to the "specialized add-on state" after the BB ends, and if configured in this way, the AT add-on lottery may be executed during the BB in the same way as for a BB won in the "specialized add-on state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, there is a game zone as a zone related to the game state, and there are two game zones, a "normal zone" that is relatively low profit for the player and a "profitable zone" that is relatively high profit for the player. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the game zone related to the game is a "normal zone". If the answer is Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game zone for the next game and thereafter to be a game zone corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3508, in other words, if the game zone is a "favorable zone", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0 or not, in other words, whether the "favorable zone" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If the answer is Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games stayed in the "specialized premonition state" also becomes 0). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether any favorable zone end condition is not satisfied. Here, any favorable zone end condition is an end condition of the "favorable zone" other than when the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0 or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If the answer is No in step 3518, that is, if any favorable zone end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. In this manner, in this embodiment, when the "favorable zone" ends and the "normal zone" is set after the next game, all information related to the AT (information related to the number of AT continuation games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) is cleared, so that the conditions for the "favorable zone" to be entered again in the "normal zone" thereafter will not be relaxed. Note that the information related to the AT that is cleared by the process of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone) includes the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the game state, etc. In addition, these pieces of information are also cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the setting, but depending on the RAM clearing at the time of changing the setting, information related to the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)", "RT state", "number of reserved sheets", etc. is also cleared, whereas depending on the process of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone), information related to the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)", "RT state", "number of reserved sheets", etc. is not cleared. In this way, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the settings is different from the clear range at the end of the "advantageous zone" (for example, when the processing of step 3515 is executed). It is also possible to configure the RAM clear at the time of changing the settings to hold the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)" and the "RT state". In addition, the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous zone" are continuous. By making the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous zone" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear it by a simple process of specifying the top address to be cleared at the time of the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. In addition, when the "advantageous zone" ends, a command to the effect that the "advantageous zone" has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous zone" or information related to how many games have been executed in the "AT state". However, when the RAM clear is executed at the time of changing the settings, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous zone" or information related to how many games have been executed in the "AT state" on the sub-control board S side will also be erased.

In addition, when the "favorable zone" ends because the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) if the current AT state is a "high probability state", the AT state in the next game will become a "low probability state", (2) if the current AT state is "playing in favorable BB", the AT state in the next game will become "playing in normal BB", (3) if the current AT state is a "favorable BB state", the AT state in the next game will become a "normal BB state", (4) if the current AT state is an "AT state", "specialized precursor state", "addition specialized state" or "state for revival possibility performance", the AT state in the next game will become a "low probability state" (because the information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the play area for the next game onwards to the "normal area". Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous area indicator YH because the "advantageous area" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Note that the advantageous area indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous area" ends and is set to the "normal area", but the detailed timing of turning it off is not limited to the timing of this embodiment, and for example, the advantageous area indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the "advantageous area" ends and becomes the "normal area". In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous area indicator YH is configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 is operated, which allows the next game to start. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the play area for the next game onwards to be the "advantageous area", and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether it has been decided to set a new "favorable zone" in the next game (whether it has been decided to set the "favorable zone" from the "normal zone"). If the answer is Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the favorable zone indicator YH and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). If the answer is No in step 3528, the CPU C100 also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous zone indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting timing of the advantageous zone indicator YH may be appropriately set in the period from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous zone" (the game in the "normal zone") to the timing when it becomes possible to insert game medals in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" (if the game before the new "advantageous zone" was a game related to replay, to the timing when the operation of the start lever in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" becomes effective).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the subroutine of step 1600 in this embodiment. The processing of this subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (e.g., backing up data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of the power interruption detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power interruption is currently detected (in the current interrupt processing). If the answer is No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power interruption processing described below. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area for each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data refers to information related to the detection of the settlement button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (i.e., the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and switches the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag on and off depending on the sampling results of each input port data (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, the door switch flag can be turned on to detect that the front door DU is open without being affected by noise). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel drive control process (processing related to the control of the drive of the reel M50, which will be described in detail later) for all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1612, then in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. If the answer is No in step 1612, then proceeds to step 1614 as well. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, then the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether all error flags are off (not shown, but all error flags such as the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted medal number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are off). If the answer is Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has not been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. In addition, in step 1620, information related to the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is on is configured to be sent to the sub side. Also, the error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from a state in which an error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), and when an error is not detected, the setting process of the information may not be executed (step 1618 may not be performed). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or the setting process may be executed when the type of error changes from a state in which a first error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (a command on the sub side) (for example, if a control command has been set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control command is transmitted). Here, the commands transmitted to the sub control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the first stop), a command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the stop timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the winning/replay winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the stop timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display pattern stop), a command related to the winning/replay winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third ... There are commands such as those sent immediately after the bar operation (only during the favorable zone), those related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the state of the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the high security obstacle counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the number of games remaining in the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the game zone (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Note that, as information related to errors output by the external signal, door opening error, input abnormality error, payout abnormality error, input reception sensor retention error, etc. are output, although not shown. The door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is configured to occur when the insertion reception sensor detects retention of a game medal. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs output data of an LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit is turned on, and a predetermined segment of the 7-segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (such as updating processing of random number values managed by software). Next, in step 163
In step 2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generating circuit). Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. If the answer is Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether the update status of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update status abnormality is not set). If the answer is Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt end processing and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1634 or step 1636, then in step 1640, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error display (for example, sets an error number in a register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described above.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process related to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. Note that, in this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be noted that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timing to start the reel spin start waiting state (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel spin start waiting state and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6102, the process also proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel acceleration state has been reached (the timing when the reel rotation start waiting state ends and the reel acceleration process begins to be executed, for example, the timing to execute the process of step 1260 in FIG. 18). If the answer is Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reel is stopped, this process will start the reel rotation. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6106, the process also proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6112, then in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state has been reached (for example, the timing when all interrupt processes have been executed for the "interrupt execution count" in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described below). If the answer is Yes in step 6114, then in step 6116, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintenance process and proceeds to step 6120. Note that if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, then the process also proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel constant speed state. If the answer is Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor has detected an index provided on the reel (the reel corresponding to the processing of this subroutine) since the reel has entered the constant speed state (after the processing of step 6116 has been executed). Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position or has made one rotation. Each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) an index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If the answer is Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the reel constant speed state. If the answer is No in step 6124, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is configured to be possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed has become normally constant by the reel sensor detecting the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. In this example, the predetermined time is the time it takes to execute 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 interrupt processes can rotate 400 steps), which is longer than the time it takes for the reel to rotate once (one revolution) when the reel rotation speed is constant (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time it takes to execute the interrupt process 336 times). By configuring it in this way, no matter how far the distance between the index and the reel sensor is at the time when the reel drive state becomes constant speed (the distance from when the reel rotates until the index is detected by the reel sensor), if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor is configured to detect the index within the predetermined time (the time it takes to execute the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes constant speed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes at step 6124, then at step 6126 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel acceleration state. Next, at step 6128, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a reel re-acceleration process and proceeds to processing at step 6130. Thus, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect an index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes a reel constant speed state, the reel drive state is updated again to a reel acceleration state and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even if the answer is No at step 6120, the process proceeds to processing at step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process may differ in the combination of phases that excite the stepping motor and the number of times that the interrupt process is executed for each combination of excited phases.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing related to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel deceleration standby state has been reached (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, it is determined that the timing to start the reel deceleration standby state has been reached by operating the stop button). If the answer is Yes in step 6130, then in step 6132 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6130, then it also proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to end the reel deceleration standby state (the timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration state and proceeds to processing of step 6142. Note that if the answer is No in step 6134 or step 6136, the CPU MC also proceeds to processing of step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6142, then in step 6144, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the reel deceleration state end timing (the timing at which the execution of the reel deceleration process ends) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6144, then in step 6146, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel stop state and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1612). Note that if the answer is No in step 6142 or step 6144, then the process also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1612).

Next, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the reel type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35. The reel type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (when the reel drive state becomes a reel constant speed state, a reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but there are cases where the rotation speed does not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button is stopped. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor (it does not have to be a four-phase stepping motor) having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3, and the rotation control is performed by switching the phase to be excited and exciting the stepping motor in 1-2 phases. In other words, the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, the "Phase to be excited" column shows which of Φ0 to Φ3 is specified to be excited (details will be given later).

Also, as shown in the "Reel Rotation Speed Image" in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from when the stepping motor starts to rotate until it stops is divided into six states, and the stepping motor is driven and controlled according to a driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Here, the driving states are "Reel Stop State", "Reel Rotation Start Waiting State", "Reel Acceleration State", "Reel Constant Speed State", "Reel Deceleration Waiting State", and "Reel Deceleration State". In the "Reel Rotation Speed Image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases upward, while the horizontal axis is time, and time passes to the right. Also, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case where no reel rotation failure occurs, and this does not apply if the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or loss of synchronism (the occurrence of a reel rotation failure will be described later).

The "reel stopped state" indicates the state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the "reel stopped state", the reel is stationary and all four phases of the stepping motor are not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel spin start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing of (1) in the figure. Here, the "reel spin start standby state" indicates a state in which the reel is waiting to start accelerating the stepping motor (reel acceleration process) after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is the period from when the reel drive state is changed from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, if the time from when the reel drive state became the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, the "reel spin start standby state" is entered.

Next, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel spin start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerating from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state") when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220", see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left part of the figure). Next, at the timing of (3) in the figure, in other words, the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends with one more timer interrupt process execution, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state" and the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times, so that the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state". In this way, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. In other words, the final excitation phase combination in the "reel acceleration state" is configured to execute the interrupt process only once, "φ3, φ0", which is the same excitation mode as the "reel constant speed state" in which the interrupt process is executed once for each excitation phase combination (if no reel rotation abnormality occurs). By configuring in this way, the acceleration process can be stably executed until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

Here, the bottom part of the figure is a "step motor excitation image." The figure illustrates an example of a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state," and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state." First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the bottom left part of the figure. Note that "exciting phase" refers to a combination of exciting phases, and "number of interrupt executions" refers to the number of times that the interrupt process is executed to cause excitation with that combination of exciting phases. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is excited for 220 timer interrupt processes, and the step motor (stepping motor) is excited by executing interrupt processes as follows: (KA) 100 interrupt processes at "φ0" → (KB) 60 interrupt processes at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) 30 interrupt processes at "φ1" → (KD) 15 interrupt processes at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) 8 interrupt processes at "φ2" → (KF) 4 interrupt processes at "φ2, φ3" → (KG) 2 interrupt processes at "φ3" → (KH) 1 interrupt process at "φ3, φ0" (the number of interrupt processes is merely an example and may be changed without any problem). In this way, in this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the number of times the interrupt process is executed is gradually decreased with one exciting phase combination.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "constant reel speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing reel constant speed maintenance processing), (TA) interrupt processing once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing once at "φ0, φ1" → (TC) interrupt processing once at "φ1" → (TD) interrupt processing once at "φ1, φ2" → (TE) interrupt processing once at "φ2" → (TF) interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) interrupt processing once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed one interrupt processing at a time to excite the step motor (stepping motor). Thus, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed, the number of times that the interrupt process is executed for each combination of excitation phases is set to one.

Next, when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state," the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing of (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is updated to the "reel deceleration standby state." Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the reel rotation speed is constant (a state in which the combination of excited phases is switched for each interrupt process), and the "reel deceleration standby state" refers to the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the start of stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, reel slippage occurs corresponding to the number of slipping frames). The duration of this drive state is determined based on the timing of the operation of the stop button.

Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel begins to decelerate. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor continues to be excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel; as an example, four-phase excitation is performed in which all four phases are excited. Then, after the predetermined time of excitation, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stopped state", and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, the reel driving state of the gaming machine according to this example is configured to update the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state again and execute the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation state of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) if the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state and the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Therefore, when the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, it is not determined whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally. In addition, whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined in the process of step 6124 (determined after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel driving state was updated to the reel constant speed state), but if the process of step 6124 determines that the reel is not at a constant speed (a reel rotation failure has occurred) because the reel sensor did not detect the index, the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the reel acceleration process not to determine whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during execution, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, if the reel rotation failure is subsequently resolved and the reel rotation speed can be made to reach a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration process until the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed, the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state, and the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, making it difficult for a situation to occur in which the player cannot proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the execution of the reel re-acceleration process. In addition, by configuring the reel acceleration process not to execute the process of determining whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during execution, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Note that, because of this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process by the reel drum type gaming machine of this example, it will act as follows.

<Action 1> The reel starts spinning → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. It is configured to be able to act as described above. Note that a reel rotation failure refers to a case where the reel acceleration is not executed normally due to the reel rotation being hindered by a component provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (e.g. the reel rubbing against the reel window D160), loss of synchronism occurring, etc. In this way, by configuring the reel to re-accelerate even if a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed, it is possible to smoothly progress through the game.

<Action 2> The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process is continued → the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → a reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel re-acceleration process is executed if a reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Also, as described above, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continued, and the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated when the reel acceleration process has been executed the same number of interrupts as when a reel rotation failure does not occur. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reel rotation speed to easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process in cases such as when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the execution of the reel acceleration process is started.

<Effect 3> The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the power cut process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the power is restored from the power cut → the reel acceleration process is continued (the unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process is continued (the unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power cut process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continued after the power is restored, and then, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time after updating the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state, the reel re-acceleration process is executed, so that the game can be played smoothly. In addition, if a power cut process is executed while a reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process is continued after the power is restored, and if the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to a reel constant speed state, the reel re-acceleration process is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot continue playing (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. Note that the power cut process is sometimes referred to as a power cut process.

<<Action after operating the final stop button>> The reel-type gaming machine of this example is configured so that the final reel (the reel that spins to the end, also called the third reel) stops after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, and if a winning symbol combination is displayed, the payout of game medals can be executed, but the action related to the payout of game medals may be configured as follows.

<Action 1> The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning role has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage occurs → The third reel moves (spins) to the stopped display position → Power outage is detected → Processing during power outage is executed → Power is restored → The reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to the winning role → Processing related to the payout of game medals is executed It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game where a small combination such as the aforementioned common bell, which can be used to win a prize regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop button, occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, even if a power outage occurs in the gaming center due to a power outage, the third reel can be configured to complete its movement (spin) to the planned stop position before the power outage is detected, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is at its maximum). Also, if the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination (for example, a common bell) is displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, making it difficult for the player to suffer any disadvantage.

<Action 2> The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A pattern corresponding to the winning combination appears on the reel as viewed by the player Although the combination is not stopped, the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role, is not stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → The process related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the winning role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is normally executed, the payout of game medals can be executed, and it is possible to configure in such a way that it is difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage. Note that the timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and it is applicable to all cases where a reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel is displayed to when the process related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the expected stop position (it is also applicable to the action related to the reel rotation failure exemplified below). Note that the above action 2 illustrates an action in a game in which a winning role is won. That is, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the following action will occur (similar action may be configured for other actions in the case where no rotation failure or power outage occurs): The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the player If you look, you will see that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed stopped on the reels, and the judgment process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → executes processing related to the payout of game medals.Note that the winning role in the actions described above and below may be a winning role that can be won regardless of the timing of operating the stop button in a winning game (for example, a common bell), or a winning role that may or may not be won depending on the timing of operating the stop button in a winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, if a reel spin failure or power outage does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight (sometimes called a back lamp) is flashed (sometimes called a back lamp effect) to execute a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. In addition, in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined game state, if a reel spin failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may be executed. In addition, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the intended stop position, but this is not limited to this, and it may be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot stop at the intended stop position due to a reel spin failure, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot stop at the intended stop position due to a reel spin failure (other actions can be applied in the same manner).

<Action 3> The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the stable supply of power to the gaming machine is halted → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for maintaining a power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → From the player's perspective, However, the determination process of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is a winning role, is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by the processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → the process related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. Furthermore, the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing when a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing for the judgment process of step 1269 to determine that the symbol combination is normal, and the timing for power to be restored are not limited to the above timings, and it is sufficient that the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing when a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing for the judgment process of step 1269 to determine that the symbol combination is normal, and the timing for power to be restored exist during the period from when the second reel is displayed as stopped to when the process related to the payout of gaming medals is executed, and all of these are applicable to cases where the reel corresponding to the third stop button is unable to stop at the intended stop position due to a power outage (the same applies to actions including power outages exemplified below). By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role cannot be displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the winning role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is normally executed, the payout of game medals (payout of game medals includes not only payout from the discharge port by driving the hopper, but also an increase in the display (number of credits) of the credit number display device) can be executed after the power is restored, and it is possible to configure in such a way that it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage. Note that the timing at which the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to the power outage is sometimes referred to as the timing at which the power outage occurs. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, if there is no reel rotation failure or power outage, and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes called a back lamp effect) in which the reel backlight (sometimes called a back lamp) flashes. In addition, in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined game state, if a power outage occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may be executed. In addition, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position, but this is not limited to this, and it may be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (it can be applied to other actions as well). In this example, "power supply to the gaming machine is stopped" and "stable power supply to the gaming machine is stopped" do not mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is zero, but may mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is in operation due to a power outage or the like, or the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

<Action 4> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining the constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The reel is displayed as a winning combination as viewed by the player. The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → the payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted, and even if the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to the winning role as seen by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be stopped and displayed, and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, the payout of game medals can be not executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make it possible to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 4 is not limited to only misses, and can also be applied to, for example, a game in which a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bell is displayed in a game in which a bell is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal, so a display judgment error (irrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not judged that a display judgment error has occurred).

<Action 5> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power outage is detected → Processing at the time of power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The player It may be configured to operate as described above: when, as viewed from the player's perspective, the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the reels do not display a symbol combination corresponding to a loss as viewed from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → game medals are not paid out. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be displayed in a stopped state in the internal process of the gaming machine, and when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the payout of the game medals is not executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed in a stopped state, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 5 is not limited to only loss, and can also be applied, for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is displayed in a stopped state. In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery results due to a rotation error, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal, so a display determination error (irrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) appears on the reel as viewed by the player. is displayed as a stopped symbol, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bonus role is not won and the game results in a loss, the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → the bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed as a miss in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, it is possible to configure the bonus not to start even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stop, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 6 is not limited to only misses, and can also be applied to, for example, a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as a stop in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not within the bonus) and the bonus role is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.). In addition, the above action 6 illustrates an action in a game in which a bonus role is not won. That is, when a reel rotation failure does not occur, the following action is taken (it is also applicable to other actions when a rotation failure and a power outage do not occur). The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if no reel rotation failure occurs during the game or bonus in which the bonus role is won, the following actions are taken: The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus starts to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, we have exemplified a case where a freeze is executed at the start of a bonus, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be bonuses for which a freeze is executed and bonuses for which a freeze is not executed, and whether or not a freeze is executed may also differ depending on the game state in which a bonus role is won.

<Action 7> The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is halted → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed from the player → the reel appears to have a bonus role (for example, a BB role) as viewed from the player The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bonus role is not won and the game results in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reels from the player's perspective, but the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed as a miss in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, it is possible to configure so that the bonus of the gaming medal is not started even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stop, and it is possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 6 is not limited to only misses, and can also be applied to, for example, a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus) and the bonus role is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stop. In addition, the above action 6 illustrates an action in a game in which a bonus role is not won. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following action will occur (it is also applicable to other actions in the case where a rotation failure and a power outage do not occur). The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power supply has not been interrupted during the game or bonus in which the bonus role has been won, the following actions will occur: The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus starts to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, an example was given of a case where a freeze is executed at the start of a bonus, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be bonuses for which a freeze is executed and bonuses for which a freeze is not executed, and whether or not a freeze is executed may also differ depending on the game state in which a bonus role is won.

<Action 8> The reels start spinning as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (e.g., a BB role) as viewed by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which a bonus has been won or in which a bonus role has been won, if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reels as viewed by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is normally executed, the bonus can be started and the freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed. This can be configured to prevent significant disadvantages for the player, such as a bonus not being started due to a reel spin failure in a situation where the bonus should be started, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable, just as if the reel spin failure had not occurred.

<Action 9> The reels start spinning as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing during power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (e.g., a BB role) as viewed by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → power is restored → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game that has been played in a situation where a bonus has been won or in a game in which a bonus role has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is normally executed, the bonus can be started and the freeze executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed. This can be configured to prevent significant disadvantages for the player, such as a bonus not being started due to a power outage when the bonus should be started, and the freeze executed at the start of the bonus can be executed, as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, allowing the player to proceed with the game without any discomfort.

<Action 10> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining the constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is stopped on the reel as viewed by the player. However, in the judgment process of step 1269, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a miss, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will not light up again. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that will cause the RT state to transition when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) will be accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the RT state will not transition (this can also be applied to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role that will cause the RT state to transition other than the replay role is stopped and displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 10 is not limited to only losses, and can be applied, for example, in a game in which the replay role is not won, when a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. That is, when a reel rotation failure does not occur, the following action will be taken (it can also be applied when a rotation failure and power outage do not occur in other actions). The reels start spinning -> the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state -> constant speed state maintenance process is executed -> acceptance of the stop button is enabled -> the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel -> the first reel is displayed as stopped -> the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel -> the second reel is displayed as stopped -> the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) -> the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state -> the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player -> the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal by the judgment process of step 1269 -> an automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, the automatic bet means that the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) that were bet in the game in which the replay role was won are automatically bet by the replay role being stopped and displayed, without the operation of the bet button (max bet button) or the insertion of game medals from the medal insertion slot. On the other hand, if there is no reel rotation failure in the game in which the replay role was won, the following action will occur. The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 continues to be lit).
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Action 11> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is halted → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for when the power is out is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The reel corresponds to a replay role as viewed by the player The symbol combination that corresponds to the replay symbol is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay symbol is displayed as stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay symbol is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if a symbol combination corresponding to a re-play role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine determines it to be a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a re-play role is displayed stopped, and the re-play lamp D290 will not be newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that will cause the RT state to transition when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) will be accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the RT state will not transition (this can also be applied to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role that will cause the RT state to transition other than the replay role is stopped and displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 11 is not limited to only losses, and can be applied, for example, in a game in which the replay role is not won, when a power outage occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. That is, when a power outage does not occur, the following action will be taken (when no rotation failure or power outage occurs in other actions, it can also be applied). The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → no automatic bet is made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. On the other hand, if no power outage occurs in a game in which a replay role is won, the following action will occur. The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 will continue to be lit).

<Action 12> The reels start spinning as a game in which a replay has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → Although the reel does not display the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as viewed by the player, the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit.The reel drive state may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the replay is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed, and when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, an automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By configuring in this way, a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player can be made, and even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the replay role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, it is difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the replay lamp D290. In addition, in action 12, if a replay role that would cause the RT state to transition if stopped and displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not stopped and displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13> The reels start spinning as a game in which a replay has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power outage is detected → Processing during power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → Although the reel does not display a stopped pattern combination corresponding to the replay role as viewed by the player, the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the pattern combination is normal → Power is restored → An automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit.The game may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the replay is won in the internal process of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed, and when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, an automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the replay role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the replay lamp D290. In addition, in action 13, if a replay role that would cause the RT state to transition if stopped and displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not stopped and displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14> The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has been won→the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state→constant speed state maintenance process is executed→acceptance of the stop button is enabled→the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel→the first reel appears stopped→the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel→the second reel appears stopped→the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted)→the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state→a reel rotation failure occurs→the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269→the RT state transitions. The above-mentioned action may be configured to occur. By configuring in this way, in a game in which an RT transition role is won, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the RT transition role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role can be displayed, and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is normally executed, the RT state will be transitioned even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game according to the transition of the game state that the gaming machine originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. In addition, the RT transition role is a role that transitions to a different RT state from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying a symbol combination in the predetermined RT state, and whether or not it becomes an RT transition role may differ depending on the RT state you are in. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined role A may be an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined role A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, the predetermined role A may be an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined role A may not be won.

<Effect 15> The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the RT state transitions (the RT state may transition after the power is restored, or the RT state may transition before the power is restored). By configuring in this way, in a game in which an RT transition role is won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the RT transition role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is normally executed, the RT state will be transitioned even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the game can proceed according to the transition of the game state that the gaming machine originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16> The reels start spinning as a game in which the player has not won a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment process of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role has not been won, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring in this way, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent a transition to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during an AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation, and a symbol combination that would cause a transition to the RT state (a fall) due to a reel rotation failure is displayed as if it were stopped, the RT state will not be transitioned, and a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player can be created, and the game can proceed according to the transition of the game state that the gaming machine originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17> The reels start spinning as a game in which the player has not won a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing when power is cut off is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role has not been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring in this way, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the transition to the RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during the AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation and a symbol combination that would cause the RT state to transition (fall) due to a reel rotation failure is displayed as if it were stopped, the RT state will not be transitioned, and it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game according to the transition of the game state that the gaming machine originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → The ready sound is not output from the speaker, and The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a ready sound is output from the speaker.The above-mentioned operation may be configured to occur. Furthermore, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the action is as follows: The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready sound is output from the speaker. The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops at the first and second stops; in other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the winning combination is a miss, a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop at the first or second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not complete a winning combination, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a winning combination sound will be output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to complete a winning combination. Even if the reel appears to be in an abnormal position due to a reel spin failure, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly detect that a reel spin failure has occurred.

<Action 19> The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → power is restored → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. Also, The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → power is restored → a ready-to-play sound is output from the speaker.The system may be configured to operate as described above. Furthermore, if no power interruption occurs, the action is as follows: The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready-to-play sound is output from the speaker. The reel starts spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. The timing for outputting the ready sound from the speaker may be before the end of the power-off process or after the power is restored after the power has been turned off. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination is a miss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop or the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a ready state sound is output, and even if the reel's apparent stop position is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect the occurrence of a reel rotation failure by the output from the speaker. Note that, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, but it may also be a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the first stop operation is performed).

<Action 20> The reels start spinning when the game is not in a bonus and has ended in a loss → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → From the player's perspective, the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position → From the player's perspective, the first and second reels are displayed as having a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role on the activated line → The bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker, and The reels start spinning while in a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker.It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. The reel starts spinning as a game that is not in the bonus and has lost → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is a tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are displayed as stopped (tenpai) on the pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed as stopped. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role drawing is a miss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, but the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state, the bonus confirmation ready state sound will not be output. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop or the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready position, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a bonus confirmation ready sound will be output. Even if the reel appears to stop at an abnormal position due to a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Note that, although this action illustrates a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Action 21> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → Power outage is detected → Processing during power outage is executed → From the player's perspective, the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position → From the player's perspective, the first and second reels are displayed as stopped with a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role on the active line → Power is restored → The ready sound is not output from the speaker Also, The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → power is restored → a ready-to-play sound is output from the speaker.The system may be configured to operate as described above. Furthermore, if no power interruption occurs, the action is as follows: The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready-to-play sound is output from the speaker. The reel starts spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. The timing for outputting the ready sound from the speaker may be before the end of the power-off process or after the power is restored after the power has been turned off. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role selection is a miss, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage. Similarly, in a game in which the winning combination is a miss, a power outage occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first or second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a ready state sound will be output. Even if the reel appears to stop at an abnormal position due to a power outage, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage by the output from the speaker. Note that, although this action illustrates an example in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be the case that the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the power outage processing is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Action 22> The reels start spinning when the game is not in the bonus state and is a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → the bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker. Also, The reels start spinning while in a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker.The above-mentioned operation may be configured to occur. Furthermore, if no power interruption occurs, the action is as follows: during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won, the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role appears stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. The reel starts spinning as a game that is not in the bonus and has lost → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is a tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are displayed as stopped (tenpai) on the pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed as stopped. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role selection is a miss and the game is not in the bonus state, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, but the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state, the bonus confirmation ready sound will not be output. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role drawing is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready position, if the bonus symbol is expected to reach a ready position when it stops at the expected stop position in this example, the bonus confirmation ready sound is output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power outage, the player can quickly notice that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage by the output from the speaker. Note that, in this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is exemplified, but the case where the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the power-off process is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed) may also be used.

<Action 23> The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specified replay role has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the specified replay role is not displayed as stopped → The max bet lamp does not light up, and The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is lit.It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, the action when the reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows: The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specified replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specified replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up. The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp turns on It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which a replay has been won, if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, the player can quickly realize that the operation of the Max Bet button is invalid because the Max Bet lamp does not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed. Also, in a game in which a replay has not been won, if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, the player can quickly realize that the operation of the Max Bet button is invalid because the Max Bet lamp lights up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed.

<Action 24> The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specified replay role has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for when the power is out is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the specified replay role is not displayed as stopped → The max bet lamp does not light up. Also, The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels begin to spin as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → a pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is lit.It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, if a power outage does not occur, the action is as follows: the number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specific replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specific replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up. The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp turns on It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring it in this way, in a game in which a replay has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed as stopped, the MAX BET lamp does not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed as stopped, so the player can quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is invalid. Also, in a game in which a replay has not been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed as stopped, the MAX BET lamp lights up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed as stopped.

<Action 25> A game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning role has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus ending condition, as follows: the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends. The game may be configured to act as described above. In addition, the action when no reel rotation failure occurs is as follows: the game is during bonus execution, and a winning role has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus end condition, and the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends. By configuring in this manner, even if a winning combination is won in the final bonus game and a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed, the bonus ends and a bonus end freeze is executed, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, so that the player can quickly realize that the bonus has ended normally and a gaming machine can be provided that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Action 26> A game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning role has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus ending condition. The reels begin to spin → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing during power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed as stopped → the bonus ends and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends.The game may be configured to act as described above. Furthermore, as an action when a power outage does not occur, the game is during bonus execution, and a winning role has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby satisfying the bonus end condition, and the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends. By configuring it in this way, even if a winning combination is won in the final bonus game and the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed, the bonus ends and the bonus end freeze is executed in the same way as if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination was displayed, allowing the player to quickly realize that the bonus has ended normally, and a gaming machine can be provided that does not cause any discomfort in the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration of the reel acceleration process in the reel type gaming machine according to the present example described above, if the execution period of the reel acceleration process when no drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process is A, if the execution period of the reel acceleration process until the drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process is B, if the execution period of the reel acceleration process after the drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process is C, then A is configured to be B + C. Also, if the number of interrupts of the reel acceleration process when no drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process is D, if the number of interrupts of the reel acceleration process until the drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process is E, if the number of interrupts of the reel acceleration process after the drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process is F, then D is configured to be E + F.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and sets error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, the lower byte of the calculated checksum, or its complement) in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process to wait for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the reel type gaming machine according to this example. The table in the figure shows the correspondence between the reel stop order indicated by the executed push order navigation and the instruction number (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S in this example). For example, the instruction number when announcing "middle → right → left" as the push order is "A5". Next, the left side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270, the advantageous zone display device YH, and the performance display device S40 when the push order is "left → middle → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"). Here, the push order display device D270 in this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. Also, when a medal is paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, when the push sequence display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit number, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the display on the push sequence display device D270 is the number of medals to be paid out or the push sequence navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish whether the display is the number of medals to be paid out or the push sequence navigation display, the push sequence display device D270 is configured to display "=" on the left digit, such as "=1", so that when the display on the push sequence display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and when the display on the push sequence display device D270 is "=" on the left and a number on the right, it is a display of the push sequence navigation, and it is configured to prevent misunderstanding by the player. Furthermore, in the advantageous zone display device YH provided in the lower right of the push sequence display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current play zone is the "advantageous zone" is lit. At the same time, the display "40 games remaining" indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" (or "AT state") is displayed on the performance display device S40. Also, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 when the push order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). In addition, since the current play area is the "advantageous area", the advantageous area indicator YH is lit, and the display "25 games remaining" indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous area" is displayed on the performance display device S40. Note that the segment display of the instruction number of the push order role (a condition device with a medal payout among condition devices in which the role displayed when stopped differs depending on the reel stop order, for example, a bell) and the push order replay role (a condition device related to the replay role among condition devices in which the role displayed when stopped differs depending on the reel stop order) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is not limited to 7 segments, and for example, an LED display may be used to light up multiple LEDs according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number to give an instruction. Note that the advantageous area indicator YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit number display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit up until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player wants to stop playing, he or she will visually check the credit number display device D200 to see if there are any medals remaining. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. In other words, by lighting it up before the settlement button D60 becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally quitting playing even though the next play will be in the "advantageous zone," making it a user-friendly gaming machine.

In addition, the notification mode of the game zone in the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this example, and may be configured to have a zone indicator similar to the advantageous zone indicator YH at the bottom right of both of the two 7-segment displays (two zone indicators). In such a configuration, when the left zone indicator is lit, it may be configured to notify that the current game zone is a "normal zone", and on the other hand, when the right zone indicator is lit, it may be configured to notify that the current game zone is an "advantageous zone". Furthermore, it may be configured to distinguish between the "normal zone" and the "advantageous zone" by the color or lighting mode when the zone indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal zone" and "red" in the "advantageous zone", or to light up in the "normal zone" and "blink" in the "advantageous zone"). Furthermore, it may be configured to change the display mode of the zone indicator depending on "playing inside BB during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "AT state", etc. in the "advantageous zone". Furthermore, the current play area may be configured to be recognized as a "standby area" by distinguishing it from a "normal area" and an "advantageous area." However, it is preferable to distinguish between the "normal area" and the "advantageous area" in an easy-to-distinguish manner, such as by using different area indicators, so that the player can easily recognize whether the current play area is an "advantageous area" or not.

In addition, the display on the performance display device S40 showing the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" may be configured not to display the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" during, for example, the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation" (not informing the player of the disadvantage of the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" being subtracted in a state where the player is relatively unprofitable). However, even in this configuration, it is preferable to light up the zone indicator and inform the player that he is in the "advantageous zone". At the same time, it is preferable to configure the zone indicator to be controlled by the main control board M, and to configure the zone indicator to be installed in a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S will be explained with reference to Figures 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing> First, FIG. 38 shows a subroutine that shows the sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start processing is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initializing the CPU and RAM, and calculating the checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated when the power was turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power was turned off. If the answer is Yes in step 2008, in other words, if the judgment process in step 2008 determines that the two checksum values match, then in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the board has recovered from a state in which a power outage occurred during the execution of one command process, which will be described later, i.e., whether the board has fully recovered.

If the answer is Yes in step 2010, in other words if it is determined that the system has fully recovered, then in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows an interrupt and returns processing to the one command process that was being executed when the power outage occurred.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2008, in other words, if the judgment process in the above-mentioned step 2008 determines that the two checksum values do not match, then in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a RAM clear. After executing the process in step 2014, or if the answer is No in step 2010, the process transitions to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing> Next, FIG. 39 shows a subroutine that shows the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop processing is called and executed after the sub-side program start processing shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows an interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a command reception process. This command reception process is a process for receiving various commands sent from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process, which will be described later. This one command process is a process that is executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. The specific process will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, it returns the process to step 2108. On the other hand, if it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, it returns the process to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power-off processing> Next, FIG. 40 shows a subroutine that shows the sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off processing is processing that starts when the sub-control board S detects a power outage.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If the answer is Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (such as the checksum calculation result and the address of the program that was being executed) and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. If it is determined that 500 ms have elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the power has been restored. If the answer is Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of interruptions. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being performed when the power was turned off. Note that if it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<One command processing> Next, FIG. 41 shows a subroutine that shows one command processing that is called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to operate the start lever. If the answer is No in step 2252, in other words, if it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, then in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the start lever operation performance-related decision process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the first reel stop, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for processing at the time of the first drum stop acceptance, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop, then in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to accept the second reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the second reel stop acceptance processing described below, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to accept the third reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the third reel stop, then in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the process to determine the performance related to the third drum stop, which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process to accept the third drum stop, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the stop of the third reel, then in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing to stop the stop display pattern. If the answer is Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the timing to stop the stop display pattern, then in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process at the time of the stop display pattern (not shown) and proceeds to step 7100. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the timing to stop the stop display pattern, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described below. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described below, and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the performance-related determination process at the time of operating the start lever, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is a "high probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the number of high probability games remaining at the present time (how many games are guaranteed in the high probability state) based on the high probability counter value command received from the main control board M. Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the battle performance execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether it is determined that a battle performance is to be executed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 3006, then in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-probability games, executes a stay stage transition lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not to change the stay stage), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). If the answer is No in step 3006, then proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3002, then in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "low probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 3010, then in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game, executes a stay stage transition lottery, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is "AT in progress state". If the answer is Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the AT in progress performance determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is "resurrection possible or not performance state". If the answer is Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the revival possible or not performance determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the preview performance and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state regarding the AT of the game, and the state regarding the AT of the next game, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). Note that the stay stage refers to the performance mainly consisting of the background performance displayed on the performance display device S40, and is configured so that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the stay stage is different, the tendency of various performances such as the background performance and preview performance will differ.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing the battle performance execution decision process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high-confidence games is 4 or more. If the answer is Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is a BB role. If the answer is Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a battle performance execution lottery (a lottery to execute a battle performance (win) or not) that is won with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the battle performance execution lottery executed in step 3056 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 3058, then in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a battle presentation (win) and proceeds to the next process (step 3006). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3058, then in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a presentation other than a battle presentation and proceeds to the next process (step 3006). Here, the battle presentation is a continuous presentation executed over multiple games, and is configured so that winning the battle presentation, that is, the execution of the battle presentation (win), confirms that the BB role has been won and that the AT lottery has been won. Note that the configuration of the battle presentation is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the battle presentation (win) can be executed when the BB role has been won even if the AT lottery has not been won (the state transitions to a "low probability state" or "high probability state" after the BB ends).

Also, if the answer is No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the condition device related to the game is a rare role. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A), and Winning-E (Watermelon B), which are roles that can be won in combination with the BB role. That is, when the rare role is stopped and displayed, the player has hope that it will be won at the same time as the BB role. If the answer is Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a fake battle performance execution lottery (a lottery to execute a battle performance (lose) or not) that is won with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the fake battle performance execution lottery executed in step 3066 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 3068, then in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a battle presentation (loss), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3006). Also, if the answer is No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, then in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a presentation other than a battle presentation, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3006). Here, the battle presentation (loss) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high probability games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, for example 4 or more, continuous effects such as battle effects can be executed across multiple games, whereas when the number of high probability games is less than a predetermined number, for example less than 4, continuous effects such as battle effects are not executed. This prevents the advantageous zone indicator YH from turning off due to a transition to a "low probability state" (setting of a "normal zone") even in the middle of executing a continuous effect, and by executing a battle effect only when it is possible to ensure that the advantageous zone indicator YH will remain lit until the battle effect ends, the player's expectations of winning the BB are not diminished, making for a user-friendly gaming machine.

In addition, when a rare combination is won, consecutive effects such as a battle effect (defeat) can be executed, so the frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and players can play with a constant sense of anticipation.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is only a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 consists of three types of tables: a table used when the game is in a "low probability state", a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is four or more, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is three or less.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" prescribes the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, the current current stage of the game, and the corresponding number of places. When in a "low probability state", the current current stage consists of two types of presentation stages, the desert stage and the town stage, and the stages to transition to consist of four types of presentation stages, the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "playing inside normal BB", and "high probability state".

When the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", the numbers 0 to 979 are assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. Also, when the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", the numbers 980 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

Furthermore, if the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", 0 to 19 are assigned as the number to be set when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", 20 to 999 are assigned as the number to be set when the town stage is maintained in that game.

In addition, if the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage is maintained in that game. If the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the number to be placed if the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, and there is a transition from the desert stage to the town stage in that game. If the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number to be placed if the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, and there is a transition from the desert stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed if the current current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, and there is a transition from the desert stage to the cave stage in that game.

When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 is assigned as the number to be entered when the town stage is maintained in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 is assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in that game.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is 4 or more stipulates the relationship between the current current stage, the current stage of the game, and the number of places. The current current stage and the stage to transition to consist of four types of presentation stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

When the current current stage is the desert stage and the game remains at the desert stage, a number between 0 and 879 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage, a number between 880 and 929 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the conference room stage, a number between 930 and 959 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the cave stage, a number between 960 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed.

When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the desert stage, a number between 0 and 879 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to maintain the town stage, a number between 880 and 929 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the conference room stage, a number between 930 and 959 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the cave stage, a number between 960 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage, a value between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage, a value between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is maintaining the conference room stage, a value between 100 and 949 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the cave stage, a value between 950 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the desert stage, a number between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the town stage, a number between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the conference room stage, a number between 100 and 199 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to remain in the cave stage, a number between 200 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of highly secured games is three or less prescribes the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, the current current stage of the game, and the number of places. The current current stage and the stage to transition to consist of four types of presentation stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "high probability state," "playing inside an advantageous BB," and "low probability state."

When the current stage is the desert stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "game in an advantageous BB" in the next game, the number of places to be set in the case where the desert stage is maintained in the game is assigned a value from 0 to 979. When the current stage is the desert stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "game in an advantageous BB" in the next game, the number of places to be set in the case where the game will transition from the desert stage to the town stage is assigned a value from 980 to 999.

When the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing inside an advantageous BB", 0 to 19 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing inside an advantageous BB", 20 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the town stage is maintained in that game.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 0 to 29 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 30 to 59 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 60 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the conference room stage is maintained in that game.

When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 0 to 29 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 30 to 59 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in that game. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 60 to 99 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the conference room stage in that game. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 100 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the cave stage is maintained in that game.

If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 0 to 499 if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 500 to 999 if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 0 to 499 if the game will transition from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 500 to 999 if the game will maintain the town stage.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to transition from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 499. If the current stage is the conference room stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to transition from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game is 500 to 999.

If the current stage is the cave stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the numbers 0 to 499 are assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the cave stage and there is a transition to a low probability state in the next game, the numbers 500 to 999 are assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in that game.

In this way, when in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the town stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when in the "high probability state", four stages, the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, while four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous zone", two stay stages can be selected in the "normal zone", and the two stay stages that can be selected in the "normal zone" can also be selected in the "advantageous zone". By configuring in this way, even in the "normal zone" where there is no hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can become a stay stage in the "advantageous zone", it is possible to proceed with the gaming machine without getting bored even in the "normal zone". In addition, when transitioning from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state", that is, when transitioning from the "advantageous zone" to the "normal zone", by selecting the performance stage selected in the "normal zone" at the "advantageous zone" stage, it is made difficult for the player to determine that the "advantageous zone" is transitioning to the "normal zone", and the player can continue playing with a sense of expectation.

In addition, some of the presentation stages selected in the "normal section" may overlap with the presentation stages selected in the "advantageous section" (there may be presentation stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but not in the "advantageous section").

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 3 or less, and when the number of high-security obstacle games decreases (below 3 games), the system is configured not to transition to a stay stage with higher expectations that is a "favorable zone" than the current stay stage (for example, from desert stage to conference room stage). This prevents the player from being disappointed by entering the "normal zone" after a small number of games despite having transitioned to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are arranged in order from "favorable zone" with low expectations (hard to select in the "favorable zone") to "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage."

The configuration of the stay stage is not limited to that in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage may be configured to suggest the expectation of being in the "favorable zone", the expectation of winning the AT lottery, and the expectation of winning the BB. As an example, the stay stage may be configured to shift in a game in which the BB role or rare role is won (including the case where the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the case where the AT lottery is not executed due to the win of a single rare role), and the expectation of winning the AT lottery may differ depending on the stay stage to which the player has shifted, and the order of the expectation may be "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation, or the expectation of winning the BB role may differ depending on the stay stage to which the player has shifted, and the order of the expectation may be "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation (for example, when the player shifts to the conference room stage, it is confirmed that the player is in the BB internal win or has won the AT lottery, etc.).

Next, Figure 45 is a subroutine showing the AT performance determination process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3100 of Figure 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of games remaining in the AT is 3 or less. If the answer is Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether this is the final game of the AT. If the answer is Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the continuation lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for the game to be an AT continuation prompting presentation (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words, a presentation informing the player that the AT status of the next game will be "AT in progress") or an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) (the AT continues and the initial value is not set in the AT counter M60, and the AT status of the next game will be "AT in progress" or "resurrection possibility presentation state"), and proceeds to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the ratio of the AT continuation prompting presentation (success) to the AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4 to 1. That is, in this embodiment, even if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation prompting effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the revival effect (success) will be executed in the next game corresponding to the first game of the next set, so that the player feels as if he or she has won the revival lottery (in reality, the continuation lottery is won, and the control on the main control board M side is the same as when the AT continuation prompting effect (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "revival possible or not performance state" (2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) lotteries are won in one game), but by configuring so that the revival effect (success) can be executed even if the continuation effect is won, the rate at which the revival effect (success) is executed when the revival effect is executed can be increased, and the player can increase his or her expectations for the revival effect.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation related to the game is an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation related to the game is an AT end stage presentation and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the next game in which the AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) was executed is a game. If the answer is Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation related to the game is a revival presentation (success) (a presentation mode similar to the revival presentation (success) executed in the "revival possibility presentation state", and in this process, a presentation related to the fact that the "AT in progress state" has continued), and proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3114, proceed to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of AT games has been added in that game. If the answer is Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to that game to be an added presentation (a presentation that notifies the player that the number of remaining AT games has been added, such as "+50 GET"), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to that game to be an AT in-play presentation (a presentation executed during the AT, such as "AT in-play state"), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300).

Next, Fig. 46 is a subroutine showing the revival possibility performance decision process called and executed in the process of step 3150 of Fig. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether or not the revival lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the performance related to the game is the revival performance (success) (the performance mode is the same as the performance executed in step 3116 described above, which is a performance that notifies the fact that the revival lottery has been won in the "revival possibility performance state", and the next game will transition to the "AT in progress state", and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60), and the next process (the process of step 2300) will be performed. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3152, at step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation for the game will be a revival presentation (failed) (a presentation that notifies the player that the revival lottery was not won in the "revival possible or not presentation state", and the next game will transition to a "low probability state"), and proceeds to the next processing (processing at step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" is also an advantageous zone; that is, even if the continuation lottery is not won in the final game of the AT (the final game of the "AT in progress" state), which is an "advantageous zone", the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" is configured to be extended in the next game, the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible". Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the revival effect will be successful just by checking whether or not the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit, and the player will have to pay attention to the result of the revival effect. Also, as mentioned above, the manner in which the lottery for the AT is executed differs between the "state in progress" and the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible". In other words, the manner in which the lottery for the AT is executed differs between the next game in which the continuation lottery in which a revival effect (success) is won and the game in which the revival lottery in which a revival effect (success) is won.

In this embodiment, the next game after the AT state ends is switched to the "state for revival possibility performance" of one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the "state for revival possibility performance", so that both the game in which the revival performance (success) and the game in which the revival performance (failure) are executed are set to the "favorable zone", that is, the favorable zone indicator YH is configured to light up, preventing the player from determining whether the AT will end without checking the result of the performance. However, such a configuration may be configured as follows. (1) The state regarding the AT is set to the "AT state" even in the one game in which the revival lottery is executed, and the revival flag is turned on in the one game in which the revival lottery is executed, and the revival flag is turned off in the game before the game in which the revival lottery is executed, thereby making it possible to perform a different lottery mode regarding the AT. (2) The revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether the "AT state" will end depending on whether the continuation lottery is won, and the timing of execution of the continuation lottery is set to a game before the final game of the AT (one game before the final game of the AT, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival performance (success) and a revival performance (failure) can be executed as the performance on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the performance, "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (success) → AT final game: performance indicating that the AT of the next set will start", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (continuation to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (success)", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (failure) → AT final game: revival performance (success)", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (failure) → AT final game: revival performance (failure)" and the like may be configured to be executed. In other words, the main control board M side determines whether the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether the continuation lottery is won or not, and the sub-control board S side performance may be configured to execute the AT continuation promotion performance and the revival performance. (3) In a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed, a performance is executed in the same performance mode as the revival performance (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the revival performance (success) is notified from the predetermined timing, that is, the player is notified that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In such a configuration, the predetermined timing may be: (1) a bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed, which can be executed if a continuation lottery is won; (2) a start lever operation timing for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, a performance in the same performance mode as the revival performance (loss) is not executed; (3) a timing at which the stop button is pressed to become the first stop for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed (a timing at which the first stop is turned on); (4) a timing at which the stop button is released after pressing the stop button to become the first stop for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed (a timing at which the first stop is turned on to off); (5) a timing at which the second stop is pressed to become the first stop for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed; The timing may be, for example, (1) the timing when the stop button which becomes the second stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is pressed (timing when the second stop is turned on), (2) the timing when the stop button which becomes the second stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is pressed and then released (timing when the second stop is turned on → off), (3) the timing when the stop button which becomes the third stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is pressed (timing when the third stop is turned on), (4) the timing when the stop button which becomes the third stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is pressed and then released (timing when the third stop is turned on → off), or (5) the timing when the bet button is operated (timing when a game medal is inserted) in the game next to the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed, or (6) the timing when the stop button which becomes the second stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is pressed and then released (timing when the second stop is turned on → off). Furthermore, if the timing among the various timings (1) to (10) above is determined by lottery, the advantageous zone indicator YH will continue to light up even if neither the continuation lottery nor the revival lottery is won after the timing of pressing the stop button for the first stop, so the player can play with anticipation that the AT will continue until the timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button for the third stop, or until the timing of operating the start lever for the game following the game in which the revival performance is executed.

<Start lever operation processing> Next, FIG. 47 shows a subroutine that shows the start lever operation processing that is called and executed in the processing of step 2300 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT status is in the AT state. If the answer is Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT status is in the AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT in progress processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later, and transitions to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. If the answer is Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the specialized precursor process at start lever operation described below, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not a "specialized precursor state", then in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is a "top-up specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a "top-up specialized state", then in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the top-up specialized processing upon start lever operation, which will be described later, and transitions to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not an "addition specialized state", then in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is "playing inside an advantageous BB". If the answer is Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to the AT is "playing inside an advantageous BB", then in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for processing inside an advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, and transitions to the next process (processing in step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not "playing inside an advantageous BB", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1". If the answer is Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is without push order navigation (a state related to the AT in which push order navigation does not occur, such as "low probability state", "playing inside a normal BB", "normal BB state", etc.). If the answer is Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is without push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether an avoidance command has been received. As mentioned above, the configuration is not such that the sub-control board S receives a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, or a forward push avoidance command to execute effects related to push order navigation. Instead, when the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to inform the sub-control board S that the AT addition lottery has been won and related to the number of games to be added to the AT, and when the sub-control board S receives the command, the sub-control board S determines the timing of execution of effects related to push order navigation and the presentation style.

If the answer is Yes in step 2312, in other words, if an avoidance command has been received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the establishment of the push order navigation display in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2110). Thus, in this embodiment, when the number of games has passed from a situation in which "RT1" and "AT is in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, transitioning to "RT1" and "low probability state" (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if a reverse push white 7 replay or a forward push black 7 replay is won, no AT game number addition occurs, so the push order is configured to be navigated so that the white sevens or black sevens do not form a straight line. In addition, if the number of games has passed from a state of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, transitioning to "RT1" and "low probability state" occurs, it is still considered to be an "advantageous zone" and push order navigation can occur in games in which the push order bell has been won, but the push order navigation may not occur in games in which the push order replay has been won.

If the answer is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, or No in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the performance image and background image based on the AT status in step 2316, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing during AT when start lever is operated> Next, FIG. 48 shows a subroutine that shows processing during AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2350 in FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in step 2352, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and checks the command related to the instruction number in step 2356. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (this also applies when the game area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M transmits a performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number. For example, this can be applied when the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display when the push order replay is configured to be displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers, and the display color related to the numbers is the same). Also, when configured in this way, the performance display device S40 may be configured to display a performance image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and different performance images may be displayed when the push order navigation related to the push order bell is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2358, in other words if the condition device for the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six possible push orders for the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A1, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, are displayed in a display mode surrounded by a circle.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, then in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replays D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2362, in other words if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2364 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order out of three options for push order replay on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three options for the push order, the information corresponds the first stop button to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Here, forward push avoidance commands and reverse push avoidance commands are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2366, in other words, if an avoidance command has been received, then in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding a winning combination in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as the push order navigation display.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then in step 2370, displays the background image during AT on the performance display device S40.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If the answer is Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games on the performance display device S40 in display mode B (a display mode that is less noticeable than display mode A described below).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push-in-order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2376, in other words if it has received a push-in-order command, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the occurrence of the push-in-order command in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push-in-order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2376, or if the processing of step 2378 has been executed, then in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command has been received, then in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the formation of a push order navigation display in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40.

If the answer is No in step 2380, or if the processing of step 2382 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is 4 or more, then in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of games remaining in the AT on the performance display device S40 in display mode A (a display mode that is more noticeable than the display mode B described above). Here, if the number is 4 or more, it is displayed in display mode A, and if the number is 3 or less, it is displayed in display mode B.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a push-in-order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2386, in other words if a push-in-order command has been received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40.

If the answer is No in step 2386, or if the processing of step 2388 has been executed, then in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40.

When the answer is No in step 2390 or when the process of step 2392 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that is more noticeable than display mode A, even if a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" along with an arrow image is not executed, and the push order navigation is executed in which the middle reel, in which the white seven and black seven are not displayed stopped on an invalid line, is set as the first stopped reel. By configuring in this way, when the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that incites the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is small in a situation where the number of remaining AT games is small, the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the display of the arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, even if the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is small, and a continuous performance (for example, a battle performance) is executed to provoke whether or not the "AT state" (the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed) will continue, the visibility of the battle performance can be prevented by configuring the display device not to display the arrow image or "Aim for 7!" during the execution of the battle performance. Also, by configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining AT games on the performance display device S40 becomes 0 and the battle performance is defeated and the "AT state" is displayed to end, if a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command has been received during the battle performance, the number of AT added games based on the forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command (based on winning the forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay) is announced at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the display of the end of the "AT state", that is, the number of AT games added is not announced in the game that won the AT addition lottery, but is announced at a later timing, which increases the interest of the game.

<Specialized Premonition Processing When Starting Lever is Operated> Next, FIG. 49 shows a subroutine that shows the specialized premonition processing when starting lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2400 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information about the condition device related to the game, in step 2404, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2406, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M may be configured to transmit the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options of the push order bell in the second number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A2, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum payout number are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups, for example, the first number display mode group may display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display the numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2412 whether the condition device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replays D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three options of push order replay on the performance display device S40 in the second number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, since the push order is three options, the information corresponds to the first stop button to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the performance display device S40, when the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center of the performance display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed in the vicinity of the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped on the performance display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not push order replay, then in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a push order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a push order command has been received, then in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as an arrow image on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push command has not been received, then in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2420, in other words if a reverse push instruction command has not been received, then in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2424, in other words if an avoidance command has been received, then in step 2426 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the occurrence in the second number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as the push order navigation display.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or if the answer is No in step 2424, in step 2428, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and in step S2430, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

<Specialized processing for adding extra power when the start lever is operated> Next, FIG. 50 shows a subroutine that shows the specialized processing for adding extra power when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2450 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game, in step 2454, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2456, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M may be configured to transmit the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6 and prize-winning-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2458, in other words if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six possible push orders for the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, "right → left → middle," are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first and second number display mode groups described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is push order replay. Here, push order replay is any of replay-D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three push orders for push order replay in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the performance display device S40, if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center of the performance display device S40, and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed close to the stop switch that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not a push order replay, then in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2466, in other words, if it has received a push order command, then in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40. In other words, since the push order is to push in order, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from left to right.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push command has not been received, then in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40. In other words, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from right to left.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the formation of the button on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the processing of step 2476 is executed whether the forward push avoidance command or the reverse push avoidance command has been received. For example, if the forward push avoidance command has been received, in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40, and information is displayed as if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, as the push order navigation display.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or if the answer is No at 2474, then at step 2480, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and at step 2482, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

<Processing during advantageous BB when the start lever is operated> Next, FIG. 51 shows a subroutine showing processing during advantageous BB when the start lever is operated that is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game, in step 2704, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2706, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M may be configured to transmit the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined number of games (5 games) have elapsed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB. If the answer is Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined number of games (5 games) have not elapsed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, then in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for that game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6, or prize-winning-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options of the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, when the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can acquire the maximum payout number are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups, for example, the first number display mode group may display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display the numbers in red, etc.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is push order replay. Here, push order replay is any of replay-D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three push orders for push order replay in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the performance display device S40, if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center of the performance display device S40, and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed close to the stop switch that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not push order replay, then in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to 7 replay has been received. Here, the forward push instruction command, reverse push instruction command, forward push avoidance command, and reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay has been received, then in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding the occurrence as a push order navigation display on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or if the answer is No in step 2718, in step 2722, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and in step S2724, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2708, in other words if a certain number of games (5 games) have passed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will notify the player that the BB has been won on the performance display device S40 (the push order navigation is not displayed in this process), and transition to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when the first drum stop is accepted> Next, FIG. 52 shows a subroutine that shows the processing when the first drum stop is accepted, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button has been operated based on the correct push order as the first stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2504, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the first stop in the push order navigation display and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2504, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order for the first stop, then in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push order navigation related to the forward push navigation or reverse push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replay is a general term for the forward push black 7 line replay and the reverse push white 7 line replay. If the answer is Yes in step 2508, then in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (it remains darkened during the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2508, in other words if the push order navigation for 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all push order navigation displays, executes a push order failure presentation, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when the second drum stop is accepted> Next, FIG. 53 shows a subroutine that shows the processing when the second drum stop is accepted, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, then in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the second stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the second stop in the push order navigation display and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all push order navigation displays, executes a push order failure presentation, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or if the answer is No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, the process immediately proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing for determining the performance-related aspects at the time of the third drum stop> Next, FIG. 54 shows a subroutine that shows the processing for determining the performance-related aspects at the time of the third drum stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 3200 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB role has won. If the answer is Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role has won, then in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB role has won during non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state"). If the answer is Yes in step 3204, in other words, if the BB role has won during non-AT, then in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start performance determination table, and determines and executes the BB start performance (the performance executed when the BB role wins) based on the AT state of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3204, in other words if the BB role was won during the AT ("AT state", "addition specialization state", "specialization preparation state" or "revival possibility performance state"), in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the AT BB start performance decision table, and determines and executes the BB start performance based on the state of the AT of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role is not won, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes a presentation based on the presentation executed in the game, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of Figure 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB in a non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: "Normal BB internal play" and "Advantageous BB internal play". There are three types of BB start effects: normal effect, high expectation effect, and premium effect. In addition, the expectation of transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends is configured to differ depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during a non-AT, and the order from the lowest expectation is "normal effect → high expectation effect → premium effect".

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is normal BB internal play, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "normal BB internal play", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "normal BB internal play", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside favorable BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 67/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside favorable BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 157/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside favorable BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 32/256.

In the "normal section," even if BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won or BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won, the premium effect will not be selected, and it is determined that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high expectation effect.

Even if you are in a favorable zone, if you win a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and it is set so that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high expectation effect.

When the player is in the "favorable zone" and has won BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), there is a possibility that the premium effect will be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player that the player has won BB with no setting difference and that the player will definitely move to the "AT in progress state" after the BB with no setting difference ends, by selecting the premium effect. In addition, when the player is in the "favorable zone" and has won BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), it is set so that the high expectation effect is more likely to be selected than the normal effect (the normal effect is less likely to be selected). In this way, the player can guess whether the AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, and can feel hopeful about winning the AT. In addition, the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) won in the "normal BB internal play" is the same as the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB without a setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) won in the "normal BB internal play". In addition, without being limited to this, the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) won in the "normal BB internal play" may be different from the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB without a setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) won in the "normal BB internal play". By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the allocation to be different depending on whether it is a BB start effect for a BB with a setting difference or a BB start effect for a BB without a setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There is one type of state related to AT: "Playing inside advantageous BB". There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The effect that can be added is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of BB, and the effect that cannot be added is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery will not be executed during the execution of BB. For BBs that are won during AT, there is no element of whether or not they will win the AT lottery, and whether or not an AT addition lottery will be executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during the AT, even in a BB with a setting difference where the AT addition lottery is not executed, game medals can be acquired, and after the BB ends, the player is in an AT that is advantageous to the player, so the BB that is executed is configured to clearly notify whether or not the AT addition lottery will be executed. Specific examples are described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that can be added is 0/256, and an effect that can be added will not be executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that cannot be added is 256/256, and an effect that cannot be added will always be executed. When the BB role is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that can be added is 256/256, and an effect that can be added will always be executed. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "Playing in favorable BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a non-addition effect is 0/256, and the non-addition effect will not be executed.

<Processing when the third drum stop is accepted> Next, FIG. 55 shows a subroutine that shows the processing when the third drum stop is accepted, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, then in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the third stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2606, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the third stop, then in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays "GET!" on the effect display device S40 as a successful push order effect. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2606, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order as the third stop, then in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display "GET!" as a successful push order effect.

If the answer is No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, if the answer is No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, or if the processing of step 2608 or 2610 is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of games to be added to the AT (the command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M sends a command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S may be configured to calculate the difference from the command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT received last time to determine whether the number of games has been added to the AT and the number of games to be added to the AT, and to display the number of games to be added to the AT.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has been received from the main side, then in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40 and transitions to the next process (the processing of step 2110). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S transitions to the next process (the processing of step 2110) without displaying the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40. In addition, the number of games added to the AT can be notified in the following manner: (1) the entire number of games added is notified in the game; (2) a portion of the number of games added is notified in the game, and the remaining number is notified in a game after the game; or (3) the number of games added is not notified in the game, but is notified in a game after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when a common bell is won (when a role that is not normally added is won), after multiple games (continuous performances) are played, when the number of remaining games on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", or when the bet button D220 or start lever D50 is operated in the next game after the game in which the number of remaining games becomes "0").

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "addition specialized state", the number of AT addition games will not be displayed even if you stop the machine according to the push order navigation (AT addition lottery is not held with the common bell).

By configuring as described above, the slot machine according to this embodiment can be configured to appropriately notify the player of the period advantageous to the player in a gaming machine configured to light up the advantageous zone indicator YH in the "advantageous zone". In addition, by providing a "state for revival possibility or non-existence presentation", when the continuation presentation is won and then the revival presentation (success) is executed, the state of the AT of the game in which the revival presentation (success) is executed is "state in AT", so the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit. On the other hand, even if the continuation presentation is not won and then the revival presentation (failure) is executed, the state of the AT of the game in which the revival presentation (failure) is executed is set to the "state for revival possibility or non-existence presentation" and the state of the AT is set to the "advantageous zone", so that the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the machine so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival presentation will be successful or not by visually checking the advantageous zone indicator YH in the game in which the revival presentation is executed, and a gaming machine configured to appropriately notify the player of the period advantageous to the player can be guaranteed to be a highly entertaining gaming machine.

In this example, the system is configured so that if a BB role is won in the "high probability state", the player can win the AT lottery, and after the BB ends, the player can transition to the "AT in progress state". However, the AT configuration is not limited to that of this example, and may be configured so that, for example, the player can win the AT lottery with a rare role such as a cherry (even if the role is not a BB role), and if the player wins the AT lottery, the player transitions to the "AT precursor state" as the AT-related state, and the player can transition to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is not displayed on the performance display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the performance display device SG by pressing the sub-input button SB, etc., and is a screen on which the player can select from multiple items and check various settings and information about the gaming machine. As an example of a method of selecting and deciding an item, the cross key SB2 (having four buttons: up button, down button, left button, and right button) is operated to move the cursor to the desired item, and the sub-input button SB is operated to decide the currently selected (cursor-placed) item, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed by deciding the selected item are menu screens. In addition, the menu screen may have multiple display formats; for example, the items selectable on the menu screen may differ depending on the game state, or the background image design may differ; in other words, even if there are such differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items selectable on the menu screen> Examples of items selectable on the menu screen are listed below. (1) Volume adjustment: The game machine may be configured so that the player can adjust the volume output from the game machine. For example, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment may be displayed, and then the right button of the cross key SB2 may be operated to increase the output volume, and the left button of the cross key SB2 may be operated to decrease the output volume. (2) Light intensity adjustment: The game machine may be configured so that the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50), for example. A screen corresponding to the light intensity adjustment may be displayed, and then the up button of the cross key SB2 may be operated to increase the light intensity (brightness), and the down button of the cross key SB2 may be operated to decrease the light intensity (brightness). (3) Character customization: The character that appears during the game (the main character, the voice of the push order navigation, the opponent character, the character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the performance display device S40, etc.) may be configured to be selectable and changeable, and after displaying a screen corresponding to the character customization, the cursor is moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub-input button SB is operated to confirm. (4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table. (5) Payout table: The payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute a replay or a winning combination by stopping the display) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. In addition, when the payout table is divided into multiple screens and displayed, for example, the payout table screen may be switched by the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is in a state in which it is possible to display the menu screen. Here, the menu screen displayable state is a state in which the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen, such as the operation of the sub-input button SB (which may be configured to display over time) is performed, and as a specific example, it may be configured as follows. (1) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed since the timing of the end of the game (the timing of turning the third stop button from on to off, the timing of display determination, the timing of the completion of the payout based on the winning, the timing of setting or sending a command related to the end of the game to the sub-control board S as the game end processing, the timing of the sub-control board S receiving the command related to the end of the game, etc.) without the game progressing (there is no new bet operation, there is no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the replay, there is no new operation of the start lever, there is no new start of the reel rotation, etc.) (until then, the menu screen is not displayed even if the sub-input button SB is operated). The betting operation includes both the betting by operating the bet button D220 and the betting by inserting a gaming medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (an automatic bet based on the stop display of the replay may also be included in the betting operation). (2-1) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of the game (when a gaming medal is bet, during the waiting period until the start of the reel rotation, during the reel rotation). (2-2) The menu screen may be displayed during the execution of the game (when a gaming medal is bet, etc.). (3) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of a predetermined performance (when a performance is being executed that notifies whether or not a bonus has been won, when a continuous performance is being executed over a plurality of games, when a performance is being executed that notifies whether or not an AT game number addition lottery has been won, etc.). (4) The menu screen may not be displayed during the stop display of the replay role. In addition, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (the LED provided inside the sub input button SB) may be configured to flash when the menu screen can be displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 7104, then in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation to display the menu screen is the operation of the sub-input button SB, but the operation to display the menu screen may be changed, or multiple operations to display the menu screen may be configured. If the answer is Yes in step 7106, then in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the menu screen on the performance display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the transition to the standby screen described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time it takes to transition from the menu screen to the standby screen described below, and the initial value is set when the menu screen begins to be displayed) to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example, which is longer than a predetermined time A described below) and starts the timer. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 7200).

In addition, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen termination condition has been satisfied. The menu screen termination condition is a condition for terminating the display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed on the performance display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and specific examples of the condition that may be satisfied include the following: (1) The condition may be satisfied when a new bet operation is performed, a new start lever operation is performed, or a new reel spinning is started. (2) The condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, the predetermined time B of 300 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen began to be displayed while the menu screen continues to be displayed. (3) It may be configured so that a specific item on the menu screen is selected and confirmed, and a specific operation is performed on the screen corresponding to the specific item. For example, by placing the cursor on the volume adjustment item and operating the sub-input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed, and after adjusting the desired volume by operating the cross key SB2, the volume is set to the selected volume, the display of the menu screen is terminated, and the screen before the menu screen was displayed (sometimes referred to as the normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes at step 7114, at step 7116 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays on the performance display device S40 the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed. As an example, if a screen showing the main character walking through a forest is displayed and the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB, when the display of the menu screen ends, the screen showing the main character walking through the forest will be displayed again. Next, at step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, at step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu wait timer timing flag and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7200).

Also, if the answer is No in step 7114, then in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 7122, then in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the menu standby timer to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 7200). Note that if the answer is No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, then the process also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 7200). Thus, in this embodiment, if the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated when the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is reset to the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a wait timer and a menu wait timer, are used as timers related to the display of the wait screen, but this is not limited thereto, and only one timer related to the display of the wait screen may be used. Specifically, only the wait timer may be used as the timer related to the display of the wait screen, and the above-mentioned predetermined time A (180 seconds) to be set in the wait timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) to be set in the menu wait timer may be set in the wait timer. As a specific example, the third stop button may be turned on and then off to set the wait timer to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then, when the sub input button SB is operated to start displaying the menu screen under a situation where the timer value of the wait timer is 100 seconds, the wait timer may be set to the predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen is hidden or not. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the performance display device SG when it is determined that no game has been played for a predetermined time (game is not progressing), and may include repeatedly playing moving images related to the story of the performance executed on the gaming machine, displaying a message saying "Power saving", or displaying a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer. Note that in this example, while a player's operation is required as a condition for displaying the aforementioned menu screen, the standby screen is configured to be displayed without requiring a player's operation.

If the answer is Yes in step 7202, then in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer described later is timing) is off. If the answer is Yes in step 7204, then in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. If the answer is Yes in step 7206, then in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time A (180 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above) to the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the transition to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the time when the game ends) and starts the timer. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag and proceeds to step 7212. In this embodiment, the condition for executing the processes of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the timing for ending the game has been reached. In addition, the condition may be that the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB on the menu screen (the display of the menu screen has ended).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the wait timer has reached 0. If the answer is Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a wait screen on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu wait timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the wait timer timing flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Note that if the answer is No in step 7206, the process also proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the menu wait timer timing flag is on. If the answer is Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the timer value of the menu wait timer has become 0. If the answer is Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a wait screen on the performance display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu wait timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the wait timer timing flag and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process proceeds to the next step (step 2110).

Also, if the answer is No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, then in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing end condition has not been met. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition under which the standby timer timing ends and the timer value of the standby timer is cleared to zero, and includes a new bet operation, a new operation of the start lever, a new start of reel rotation, etc. If the answer is Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212, whereas if the answer is No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

Also, if the answer is No in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen end condition has been satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, the standby screen end condition is a new bet operation, a new operation of the start lever, a new start of reel rotation, etc. In addition, the standby screen may be configured to be able to transition to a menu screen (display a menu screen), and for example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB when the standby screen is displayed. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the standby screen was displayed on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2110). As an example, when a screen showing the main character walking through the forest is displayed, if the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the screen showing the main character walking through the forest will be displayed again by executing a bet operation.

Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of the standby screen transition according to this embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated while the menu screen is displayable. After that, while the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) pass without any operation of the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels stop when the third stop button is operated to stop them. 3 minutes (predetermined time A, 180 seconds) pass from the timing when the player releases the third stop button, and since there is no operation of the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220 during that time, the standby screen is displayed. In this way, in this example, the standby screen is configured to be displayed when a predetermined time B has passed since the menu screen was displayed and when a predetermined time A has passed since the game ended (when the third stop button has been turned on and off), and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<<Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example>> Here, the configuration of the menu screen and standby screen applicable to the slot machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of this embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-mentioned embodiments, and that there is no problem in combining one or more of them as appropriate.

<Timing when the wait timer starts timing> The timing for setting an initial value in the wait timer that measures the time until the wait screen is displayed and starting timing may be configured as follows: (1) timing starts when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation; (2) timing starts when a display determination is performed; (3) timing starts when a payout based on a winning combination is completed; (4) timing starts when a command related to ending the game is set or sent to the sub-control board S as a game ending process; or (5) timing starts when the sub-control board S receives the command related to ending the game. Also, a predetermined time A (a timer value to be set in the wait timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as the initial value.

<Timing when the menu standby timer starts timing> The menu standby timer, which measures the time until the menu screen is displayed, may be configured to start timing from the moment the sub-input button SB is operated to display the menu screen as the timing for setting an initial value and starting timing. Also, a predetermined time B (a timer value to be set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as the initial value. Note that the predetermined time B to be set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A to be set in the standby timer described above (a timer value to be set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Configuration related to sub-input button> The menu standby timer may be configured to be reset to its initial value when the menu standby timer is timing. For example, the menu standby timer may be configured to be set to its initial value, a predetermined time B (a timer value to be set in the menu standby timer, e.g., 300 seconds), by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. As one example, the menu standby timer may be set to 300 seconds and timing may begin when the menu screen starts to be displayed, and 100 seconds later, when the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, the menu standby timer may be reset to 300 seconds by operating the cross key SB2. Also, the menu screen may be started to be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB, and the menu standby timer may be reset to its initial value by operating the cross key SB while the menu screen is being displayed (the screen to which the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 is operated after the menu screen is started to be displayed may also be the menu screen), or the menu standby timer may be reset to its initial value by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB while the menu screen is being displayed (the screen to which the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 is operated after the menu screen is started to be displayed may also be the menu screen).

<Configuration related to stop buttons> When the wait timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) may be turned on and then off as a final stop operation, and even if the stop buttons (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) are operated after that without a bet operation being performed, the wait timer may not be reset to its initial value. As an example, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) may be turned on and then off as a final stop operation, the wait timer may be set to 180 seconds and the timer may start timing, and then, when a bet operation is not performed and the timer value of the wait timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the wait timer may not be reset even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value remains at 100 seconds.

<Configuration for betting operation> When the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation while the waiting timer is timing, and then a betting operation is performed (when the bet button D220 is operated to place a bet, or when a gaming medal is inserted into the medal slot D170 to place a bet), the timing of the waiting timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. In other words, when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation while the waiting timer is timing, and then a betting operation is performed without performing any other operation, the waiting screen may be configured not to be displayed as time passes. Note that, in such a configuration, the waiting screen is not displayed as time passes from the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when a specific time (e.g., 100 seconds) has passed since the betting operation. By configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining game medals falls below the specified number (e.g., 3) (e.g., 1 medal) and the game ends with the remaining 1 game medal bet (e.g., by operating the bet button), or if the game ends with the player having less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bet has been made) and the game parlor staff operates the bet button while cleaning the game machine and places a bet, the sound will not be output at an unintended volume. Also, even if the third stop button is turned on and then off as the final stop operation and no bet operation is performed thereafter, the volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of turning off the third stop button (which may be the timing when the reels stop).

<Conditions for displaying the standby screen> The standby screen may be displayed on the condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer, the menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen becomes "1 → 0". By configuring in this way, when a bet operation is performed or some abnormality occurs in the timer measurement, even if the timer value reaches "0" (cleared to zero) without passing through "1", such as "20 → 0", the standby screen will not be displayed, and unintended display of the standby screen can be prevented (the standby screen may be displayed when the timer value is subsequently reset and becomes "1 → 0"). A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Configuration related to the settlement button> When the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation while the waiting timer is timing, and then when one or more credits remain, the settlement button is operated to settle the credits, the waiting screen may be configured to be displayed after a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the settlement button was operated or when the credit settlement is completed (when the last game medal is returned to the release port D240).

<Configuration related to the setting key switch> The third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) may be turned on and then off as the final stop operation, and then when a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned off and then on while the power is on, the standby screen may be displayed. Also, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) may be turned on and then off as the final stop operation, and then when the power is on, the front door may be opened and the setting key switch turned off and then on, and then when a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the front door was closed.

In addition, when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the setting key switch is turned off and then on while the power is on, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the front door is opened and the setting key switch is turned off and then on while the power is on, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the front door was closed after the setting key switch was turned on and then turned off. In this example, "turning on the stop button" means accepting the operation of the stop button while the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Configuration for when a specified error occurs> As a final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) is turned on and then off, and then a specified error on the main control board M (for example, an error that occurs when a gaming medal is stuck in the medal selector DS) occurs, and when a specified time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the specified error was released, the standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration related to front door> The standby timer may be started by turning on and then off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) as the final stop operation, and the standby timer may be configured to continue timing even if the front door is then opened and kept open. Also, the standby timer may be started by turning on and then off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) as the final stop operation, and the standby timer may be configured to continue timing even if the front door is then opened and closed.

<Configuration 1 for during AT> In a situation not during AT (for example, when the AT-related state is "normal game state"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation, the standby screen may be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation during AT (for example, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress state"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation, the standby screen may not be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of continuous performances, during the execution of a bonus, and during ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even if a predetermined time A has elapsed since the end of the final stop operation. In addition, when the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is "AT in progress"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation in a game in which push order navigation was executed, the standby screen may not be displayed, whereas when the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is "AT in progress"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation in a game in which push order navigation was not executed, the standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration 2 related to during AT> When the menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button or the like during AT (for example, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress"), (1) the standby screen can be displayed after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, and (2) the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) can be returned to after the predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 3 for during AT> In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to the AT is "normal game state"), the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation. In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to the AT is "normal game state"), the menu screen may be displayed, and the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of displaying the menu screen. In an AT state (for example, the state related to the AT is "in AT state"), the menu screen may be displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the start of displaying the menu screen, the normal screen during the AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen was displayed) may be restored. In other words, when the time values are compared, the predetermined time A may be configured so that "predetermined time A = predetermined time B < predetermined time C". Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and it is sufficient that the predetermined time C is the longest.

<Other configuration 1> A menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed may be configured as follows: (1) a screen identical to the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button; (2) a screen displayed by performing a predetermined operation (selecting and deciding on a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button; or (3) a screen different from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button. Also, the menu screen may continue to be displayed even if a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, while the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed may be restored when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button is displayed. Also, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is placed while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed, and when a bet button is operated while the standby screen is displayed, the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (when the standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on, the normal screen displayed during play) is displayed. Also, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is placed while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed, and when the standby screen is displayed and the number of game medals stored in the credit is the specified number of three or more, a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three medals to be bet with one operation) is operated to place a bet, the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (when the standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on, the normal screen displayed during play) is displayed, and when the standby screen is displayed and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three, a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three medals to bet with one operation) is operated to place a bet, the menu screen is displayed.

<Other configuration 2> There may be multiple display modes for the standby screen, and if a predetermined condition is not met (for example, a predetermined condition may be that a password is entered on the menu screen, and the game is continued from the previous game history), a video introducing a story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined condition is met, a video introducing a character is displayed as the standby screen. In addition, in both cases where the predetermined condition is not met and where the predetermined condition is met, a story introduction and a character introduction may be displayed as the standby screen, but the frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be different depending on whether the predetermined condition is met.

<Other Modifications> In this example, the machine may be configured to have a 1st BB role in which the 1st BB is executed when the winning combination is achieved, and a 2nd BB role in which the 2nd BB, which is less profitable for the player than the 1st BB, is executed when the winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, the machine may be configured to have a combination of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB that can be won in duplicate (a role of "1st BB + 2nd BB" is provided). In this configuration, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, a symbol combination (the 1st BB role) corresponding to the highly profitable execution of the 1st BB can be displayed in a stopped state, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, a symbol combination (the 2nd BB role) corresponding to the 2nd BB can be displayed in a stopped state (the winning of the 2nd BB can be carried over even during the execution of the 1st BB). Furthermore, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first when "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, for example, when the closing time of the game arcade is approaching and the less profitable 2nd BB is executed first, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game arcade closes while the 2nd BB is being executed, and the game has to be ended without being able to execute the highly profitable 1st BB.

After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified immediately, or may be notified after a latency period (after a certain number of games have elapsed without notification). If such a latency configuration is adopted, the probability of winning the replay may be increased during the latency period after the operation of the first BB is completed. In addition, during the latency period, a configuration may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, displaying "BB consecutive chance time!!" on the effect display device S40). In such a configuration, unless there is a case in which the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, the occurrence of the effect = the winning of the second BB is definite, so it is preferable to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB even after the operation of the first BB is completed when only the first BB is won (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above, for example, displaying "BB consecutive chance time!!" on the effect display device S40). In addition, even if only the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the performance suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB may not be stopped. In addition, after a false announcement of the winning of the second BB, the winning of the first BB may be announced (for example, the display of "BB consecutive chance time!!" → the display of "unfortunate" → "1st BB winning!!"). Furthermore, when a double win occurs during the AT and the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed, the performance display device S40 returns to the AT after preparing for the AT (after the return, the remaining number of games in the performance is reduced, etc.), but the internal reduction of the remaining number of games may be continued. In addition, when the first BB and the second BB are won in a double win, the payout number from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the performance display device S40, etc.

In this example, (1) when the first BB and the small role A are overlappingly won, the first BB is given priority for stop control. (2) When the first BB and the small role B are overlappingly won, the small role B is given priority for stop control. That is, a small role that is given priority over the BB role and a small role that is given priority for stop control may be provided. (3) When the first BB and the small role A are overlappingly won, when the small role A wins, or when some of the patterns (for example, at the first stop, at the second stop) of the pattern combination corresponding to the small role A stop, a notification corresponding to the small role A (notification that the small role A can win) is made. That is, the first BB role, which is normally given priority over the small role A, is notified, but if the first BB role cannot win (small role A can win) regardless of where the third stop is stopped, depending on the result of the first or second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first or second stop), a notification corresponding to the small role A is made. Also, if the small role A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small role A is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change during the game, and it is possible to prevent the content notified by the performance display device S40 or the like from being inconsistent with the role that actually wins. (4) If the first BB and the small role B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small role B is made during the rotation of all reels.

The device may also be configured to have a display (such as a 7-segment display) that displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and is controlled by the main control board M. When configured in this way, the effect display device S40 will perform a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when a replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on a winning line, an effect that is likely to be output when a watermelon is won (for example, a lamp will be lit green) will be executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that allows output (but not input) from the sub-control board S may be provided, and the configuration may have the following features: (1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from multiple levels using the sub-input button on the gaming machine. (2) Even when playing using the earphone jack, if an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided on the gaming machine). (3) When playing using the earphone jack, even if maximum volume is selected, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume that is not maximum.

In addition, during AT or BB execution, the gaming machine may be configured to output effect sounds even when the earphone jack is used to play. The volume for when the earphone jack is not in use and the volume for when the earphone jack is not in use may be stored separately. Even when the earphones are unplugged, the volume for when the earphone jack is in use may not be immediately cleared (returned to the initial value). For example, if no operation is performed for 10 minutes, both volumes may be cleared (returned to the initial value). However, if the earphones remain plugged in, the volume for when the earphone jack is in use does not need to be cleared (returned to the initial value). It is preferable that the earphone jack is provided in a location that does not interfere with play (for example, a location where the earphone cord does not get tangled around the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever when earphones are inserted into the earphone jack).

In this example, (1) the probability of winning the replay role may be changed between the end of BB when a specific number of coins or more are acquired during BB execution and the end of BB when a specific number of coins or less are acquired. (2) There may be multiple RT states to which the replay role is transitioned when an RT state (for example, RT1) in which the probability of winning the replay role is relatively high is terminated. For example, the replay role may be transitioned to "RT0" after the end of "RT1" or to "RT3" (a newly established RT state). (3) The RT state is transitioned when a specific role is won. In other words, the transition of the RT state is not made to a one-to-one correspondence with the winning, but is transitioned at a fixed probability regardless of the condition device or winning (for example, an RT transition lottery is executed at a fixed probability for each game). (4) It is possible to install an RT transition eye of 0 coins, to win multiple 0 coin roles, and to win multiple 0 coin roles. In other words, a 0-coin role is provided in which one or more coins will not be awarded regardless of the pressing order or the position at which the stop operation is performed, and the winning of the 0-coin role can cause a transition to the RT state, allowing for a double win of a 0-coin role and a 7-coin role, or a double win of a 0-coin role A and a 0-coin role B. When a double win of a 0-coin role occurs, the role can be configured so that, depending on the pressing order, either a 0-coin role that transitions to RT or a 0-coin role that does not transition to RT will be awarded. It is also possible to have a double win of a 0-coin role and a BB role, and give priority to the 0-coin role.

In addition, as in this example, when the push order for the push order bell has six options (six options: "left → center → right", "left → right → center", "center → left → right", "center → right → left", "right → left → center", and the push order for push order replay has three options (three options for the first stop: left, center, and right), the push order display on the push order display device D270 may be configured so that the push order navigation display for the push order bell and the push order navigation display for the push order replay are different, in other words, the six-option push order navigation display and the three-option push order navigation display are different. As an example, the push order display for six options may be configured to display "=1" for "left → center → right", "=2" for "left → right → center", "=3" for "center → left → right", "=4" for "center → right → left", "=5" for "right → left → center", and "=6" for "right → center → left", and the push order display for three options may be configured to display "=7" if the first stop is on the left, "=8" if the first stop is on the center, and "=9" if the first stop is on the right.

In addition, this example may be configured as follows. (1) The number of AT consumed games, which is the number of games consumed consecutively in the "AT state", "specialized precursor state" or "addition specialized state", is configured to be displayable on the performance display device, and if the "AT state" transitions from the "AT state" to the "normal gaming state" due to the number of remaining AT games being 0, and then the AT lottery is won again within a specific game and the state transitions to the "AT state", the previous number of AT consumed games is carried over and added, whereas if the "advantageous zone" continues for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1500 games), and then the "AT state" transitions from the "AT state" to the "normal gaming state" due to the state being in the "favorable zone" for a certain number of games (e.g., 1500 games), and then the AT lottery is won again within a specific game and the state transitions to the "AT state", the previous number of AT consumed games is not carried over and the number of AT consumed games is counted again from 0 games. (2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the reels start to spin, the performance display device S40 is configured to display a message urging the player to stop the reels (e.g., displaying "Please stop the reels"), and if the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time after the reels start to spin in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) the display areas of the push order navigation display and the message urging the player to stop the reels in the performance display device S40 do not overlap, and (2-2) the message urging the player to stop the reels is not displayed. (3) If the power is turned "on → off → on" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and/or display on the performance display device S40) is redisplayed at a timing before the reels reach a constant speed and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. (4) The frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game in which a common bell is won differs between a state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT, or the frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game in which a common bell is won differs between a state related to a certain AT in which push order navigation can occur and a state related to another AT in which push order navigation can occur. (5) In the RT state (in this example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning a replay is the highest, the percentage of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push order navigation does not occur. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. By configuring in this way, the player can progress through the game without getting bored during the AT. The above-mentioned configuration may be adopted.

Here, we will explain in detail the characteristics of the above-mentioned game sections.

≪Normal Zone≫ (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the performance display device S40. (3) Commands (signals) related to the condition device in which the push order causes differences in the player's profit margin are not sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. (4) A lottery for transition to the "favorable zone" can be executed except during the internal win of BB and when BB is being executed.

≪Waiting area≫ (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the performance display device S40. (3) The command (signal) related to the condition device that causes a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the push order is not sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. (4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous area" is not executed. (5) After BB wins in the "waiting state", it becomes the "advantageous area" from the next game.

≪Advantageous Zone≫ (1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) Push order navigation can be displayed on the performance display device S40. (3) A command (signal) related to a condition device in which the push order creates a difference in the player's profit margin can be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. (4) A lottery can be executed to change the performance of the "advantageous zone" (for example, to transition from a "high probability state" to an "AT in progress state" as an AT-related state), or a lottery to add to the number of AT games can be executed. (5) During the "advantageous zone", the advantageous zone indicator YH is always lit. (6) When the counter value of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the advantageous zone is configured so that the advantageous zone will not end unless BB or push order navigation is executed at least once in the advantageous zone. However, as an exception, if the advantageous zone continues for a predetermined number of consecutive games (in this example, 1500), the advantageous zone can end even if BB and push order navigation are not executed even once in the advantageous zone. (7) The measurement of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is executed for all games in the advantageous zone (for example, the counter value is incremented every game even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristics of the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" are described in detail below. (1) The presence or absence of the setting of the "favorable zone" is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence or absence of the setting of the "favorable zone" is not determined by the number of games played, etc. (2) When a condition device with a different lottery probability depending on the setting value is established, the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is not executed when the condition device is established. (3) When a certain condition device is established and the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the setting value is different. (4) The performance of the "favorable zone" does not differ depending on the setting value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 transitions to a "high probability state", and the setting 6 transitions to an "AT state", and there is no difference depending on the setting value). (5) If the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is won, it basically becomes the "favorable zone" from the next game (if the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is won with a BB role established in the "normal zone", the next game can be set to the "standby zone").

Here, the characteristics of the change in the performance of the "favorable zone" are described in detail below. (1) A lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" by referring to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all set values may be that a predetermined number of games has passed and a predetermined condition device has been established). (2) When a condition device with a different lottery probability depending on the set value is established, a lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" is not executed when the condition device is established. A lottery to add the number of AT games is not executed, either. (3) When a BB is internally won, a lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" is not executed. A lottery to add the number of AT games is not executed, either. (4) During the execution of a BB, when the lottery probability of the BB role that triggered the executed BB differs depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" is not executed during the execution of the BB. A lottery to add the number of AT games is not executed, either. (5) During the execution of a BB, if the lottery probability of the BB role that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous zone" may be executed during the execution of the BB. A lottery to add the number of AT games may also be executed.

The reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment may also have the following configurations. The following configurations may also be applied alone, or multiple configurations may be combined.

<<Point 1>> (1) The system is configured to have a "false high probability state" as a state related to the AT that is a "favorable zone" but is less likely to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state". (2) The consecutive performance is configured with at least a predetermined number of consecutive games. (3) The system has a normal role that does not win the AT lottery with 100% probability and a special role that wins the AT lottery with 100% probability, and when a consecutive performance is executed due to a normal role and the AT lottery is not won, if a special role is won during the consecutive performance, a performance is executed to inform the player that the AT lottery has been won even in the middle of the consecutive performance (the consecutive performance is replaced). (4) The more games remaining in the number of high-security obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a consecutive performance with a high expectation (expectation of winning a bonus, expectation of winning the AT lottery), and the fewer games remaining in the number of high-security obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a consecutive performance with a low expectation. (5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the high-security obstacle game number, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game-completed effect with a high expectation level (expectation level of winning a bonus, expectation level of winning an AT lottery). (6) When the number of remaining games in the high-security obstacle game number is a predetermined value (e.g., 4 games) or less, a consecutive effect that results in a loss is not executed, but a consecutive effect that results in a win (a bonus win, an AT lottery win) can be executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the high-security obstacle game number is a predetermined value (e.g., 4 games) or less, a one-game-completed effect can be executed in both the case of a loss and a win, but a consecutive effect can be executed only in the case of a win. (7) When the ceiling G number (1500 games) of the advantageous zone is a predetermined value or less, a consecutive effect is not executed. (8) The tendency to select an effect differs between the case where the ceiling G number of the advantageous zone is a predetermined value or less and the case where it is more than the predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of consecutive effects, expectation level of a big win of a predetermined effect, etc.). (9) If a new transition occurs to the "favorable zone" during a losing consecutive performance in the "normal zone" (for example, a performance resulting in a loss), (9-1) rewrites the consecutive performance (stage change performance in a game transitioning to the "favorable zone" such as "Turn around to see a character and hear a line suggesting a stage change"). The rate at which the performance is rewritten during a consecutive performance (loss) is higher than the rate at which the performance is rewritten during a consecutive performance (win). (9-2) Change the current stage after the consecutive performance is performed to the end. When a transition occurs to the "favorable zone" during the performance of a consecutive performance, the rate at which the sub-control board S notifies the player of the transition differs from the rate at which the sub-control board S notifies the player of the transition when a consecutive performance is not being performed.

<<Point 2>> (1) The player is allowed to select the stay stage (stage group A) that can be set in the "normal zone". For example, the selection can be made by operating the sub-input button. (2) The result of the lottery as to whether or not stay stage 1 of group A will be an "advantageous zone" is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on for the game, and the result of the lottery as to whether or not stay stage 2 of group A will be an "advantageous zone" is notified later at the end of the game (or when the next game is bet (when the start lever is operated if the re-play stop display is displayed)). (3) When the player moves from a state in which the player is in the "advantageous zone" and a stay stage other than group A stay stage to a "normal zone", a stay stage is selected from group A stay stage. When the player moves from a state in which the player is in the "advantageous zone" and a stay stage other than group A performance to a "normal zone", the stay stage is maintained. (4) The AT expectation degree when the advantageous zone indicator is off and the stay stage is group A differs from the AT expectation degree when the advantageous zone indicator is off and the stay stage is other than group A stay stage. For example, starting from those with low AT expectation, "the advantageous zone indicator goes off and the current stage is in group A → the advantageous zone indicator lights up and the current stage is in group A → the advantageous zone indicator lights up and the current stage is not in group A" (5). The rate at which a transition in the current stage occurs (from current stage in group A to current stage in group B) triggered by a performance in a game that has changed from a "normal zone" to an "advantageous zone" (including a performance that is completed in 1G and a continuous performance) differs from the rate at which a transition in the current stage occurs triggered by a performance in a game that has changed from an "advantageous zone" to a "normal zone".

<<Point 3>> (1) The greater the number of guaranteed games in the "favorable zone" (the number of remaining games in the number of high guaranteed games), the higher the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus), and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "favorable zone" (the number of remaining games in the number of high guaranteed games), the higher the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus). (2) When the remaining guaranteed games in the "favorable zone" are below a specified value (four games or less), the smaller the remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting a performance that transitions to a new stay stage. (3) If a performance with a high expectation is selected when not staying in a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus), the expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus) is higher than when a performance with a high expectation is selected when staying in a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus).

<<Point 4>> (1) When BB is won in the "Revival Possible/Invisible Performance State", (1-1) the AT addition lottery may be executed during BB, or it may not be executed. (1-2) After BB ends, the "AT in progress state" may be entered, or it may not be entered. (1-3) The AT addition lottery may be executed during BB, or it may not be executed. (1-4) When BB ends and the "AT in progress state" is entered, the number of remaining AT games may be subtracted by one game in the "Revival Possible/Invisible Performance State" or it may not be subtracted. (2) The AT addition lottery may be executed in the "Revival Possible/Invisible Performance State" or it may not be executed. When the AT addition lottery is executed, (3) when a reverse push white 7 replay or a forward push black 7 replay is won in the "Revival Possible/Invisible Performance State", an avoidance navigation is generated, and the number of added games is notified at the timing after the revival performance (success) is executed. (4) In the "revival possible/possible performance state", if a role that can move to the "advantageous zone" is won, the advantageous zone indicator goes out at the start of the next game, whereas in the "revival possible/possible performance state", if a role that can move to the "advantageous zone" is won in the next game when the revival lottery is not won, the advantageous zone indicator may light up at the start of the next game. (5) In the "revival possible/possible performance state", if the specification is such that the AT addition lottery is not performed even though the "revival possible/possible performance state" is an advantageous zone, (5-1) even if a role that can execute the AT addition lottery (e.g., watermelon A) is won in the "revival possible/possible performance state", the number of AT games is not added, but if a role that can be added in 1G ("AT in progress state") that executes the revival performance (success) (e.g., watermelon A) is won, the number of AT games may be added. (6) In the case where "3G of battle performance + 1G of revival performance (failure)" is planned to be executed as the performance at the end of the AT, if a bonus is won in the revival performance execution game and the revival performance (success) is executed, the number of AT games will not be added during the bonus, but if a bonus is won in the battle performance execution game (any of the 3G) and the revival performance (success) is executed, the number of AT games may be added during the bonus. Also, the performance tendency during the bonus may be different.

<<Point 5>> (1) When there are game states A and B as states related to the AT, which is a "favorable zone," (1-1) the expected probability of winning the AT addition lottery is "game state A > favorable state B" (game state A is relatively more likely to have the number of AT games added or the number of AT addition games is greater than game state B). (1-2) The number of additions that can be added when winning role X in game state A is different from the number of additions that can be added when winning role Y in game state A. (1-3) The number of additions that can be added when winning role X in game state B is the same as the number of additions that can be added when winning role Y in game state B.

<<Point 6>> (1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is different when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). (1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of "A < B < C", starting from the one that is least noticeable to the player. (2) When the "AT in progress" and "RT1" state changes to the "low probability state" and "RT1" where the AT has ended, if a push order role is won, the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the performance display device (displaying "???"). (3) In a game in which a fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, if the winning 18 (fall role) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. (4) When the power is restored from a power outage and the start lever is operated before the initial processing related to the display of the performance display device is completed, the push order navigation is executed by a voice (for example, "It's on the left!") from the speaker at a timing before the completion of the initial processing related to the display of the performance display device. (5) Even in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as a "specialized top-up state," if a falling role is won, a fall avoidance suggestion performance is displayed preferentially. (6) Even if a falling role is won in the "favorable zone," the "favorable zone" is maintained. (7) In a case where the falling role is configured as a push order role (whether or not the stop display is determined by the push order), if a push order role that is not a falling role (such as a push order bell) is won, the push order navigation is executed, and the player stops the game in a push order different from the push order navigation, the display of the performance display device may go dark, whereas if a falling role is won and the player stops the game in a push order different from the push order navigation, the display of the performance display device will not go dark (or the fall avoidance suggestion performance will not go dark).

<<Point 7>> (1) When configured to transition to "RT3" and "AT preparation state" after the end of BB related to the setting difference BB (similar to modified example 1 from this embodiment). (1-1) By winning a role with a high probability of winning in "RT3", the AT addition lottery is won (it may be won 100% or may be won with a specified probability). (1-2) The RT state to which the transition is made after the end of BB is made different depending on the type of BB role, and the execution mode of the AT addition lottery (role that executes the addition lottery, probability of winning the addition lottery, number of games added to the AT) is made different according to the role that is likely to appear in any RT state. (1-3) It is configured to be Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (high probability of replay), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3, and the winning rate of the addition or the average number of games added is different between Promotion Replay A and Promotion Replay B. (1-4) If bonus A goes to RT1 and bonus B goes to RT2, and there are promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the probability of winning promotion replay A and promotion replay B differs between RT1 and RT2. (1-5) If bonus A goes to RT1 and bonus B goes to RT2, and promotion replays and fall replays can be won, respectively, the probability of winning promotion replays and fall replays differs between RT1 and RT2. (1-6) After the setting difference BB ends, it transitions to a special RT state ("RT3" and "AT preparation state"), and then transitions to the "add-on specialized state" triggered by a promotion replay.

<<Point 8>> (1) In the case where it has 1 type BB-B1 and 1 type BB-B2, and is configured to transition to "RT3" after the end of 1 type BB-B1, and transition to "RT4" after the end of 1 type BB-B2. (1-1) The execution mode of the AT addition lottery (the role that executes the addition lottery, the probability of winning the addition lottery, and the number of AT addition games) is different between "RT3" and "RT4". (1-2) The BB start performance related to 1 type BB-B1 and the BB start performance related to 1 type BB-B2 have different performance tendencies (B with high expectation,
(2) In the "AT preparation state" and in "RT3", if the replay 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay 06, the game shifts to "RT4", and the treasure chest lost effect is not executed. In "RT4", the replay role that is promoted to "RT3" is won. In addition, if the game changes from "RT4" to "RT3", the treasure chest opening additional effect is not executed even if the replays E1 to E3 are won after that. (3) There are multiple types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and the RT state after the BB ends is made different depending on the type of BB, and the execution mode of the AT additional lottery when the promoted replay role is won differs depending on the RT state. When configured in this way, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made to differ depending on the type of BB (the number allocation differs between acquiring a gold treasure chest, acquiring a silver treasure chest, acquiring a bronze treasure chest, etc.).

<<Point 9>> (1) The percentage of times that the BB start effect related to a BB with a setting difference won during an AT and the start effect related to a BB with no setting difference won during an AT have the same effect pattern is different from the percentage of times that the BB start effect related to a BB with a setting difference won during a non-AT and the start effect related to a BB with no setting difference won during a non-AT have the same effect pattern.

<<Point 10>> (1) The probability that an effect suggesting a setting value will be selected when a BB with no setting difference is won in a "normal zone" is higher than the probability that an effect suggesting a setting value will be selected when a BB with a setting difference is won in a "favorable zone". (2) For a BB won during a non-AT, a different BB start effect is selected depending on the setting difference, but for a BB won during an AT, the same BB start effect is selected regardless of the setting difference. (3) The rate at which the BB start effect has the same effect pattern for a BB with a setting difference won during an AT and a BB with no setting difference won during an AT differs from the rate at which the BB start effect has the same effect pattern for a BB with a setting difference won during a non-AT and a BB with no setting difference won during a non-AT.

<<Point 11>> (1) When "No Setting Difference Role (role with no difference in winning rate depending on the setting value) + BB" is won, the probability of selecting "Advantageous Zone Indicator Lighting + Performance B", which can be executed when "No Setting Difference Role" is won, is higher than the probability of selecting "Advantageous Zone Indicator Lighting + Performance B", which can be executed when "No Setting Difference Role" is won {"When "Rare Role + BB", a performance encouraging the winning of BB (for example, a battle performance) is more likely to be executed than a performance encouraging the transition to a high probability state (for example, a performance that transitions to a stay stage where the player can stay in a high probability state)}. (2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, the transition to a high probability state is made with 100%, and the distribution of the number of games with high securing obstacles is distributed as "50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10% → 50G", and if 3G is selected, the battle is lost, and in other cases, the battle is won. Also, the expected length of the high probability game count (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who wins the battle. Also, in the above example, at the 20th high probability game, a performance is performed to tease whether or not it is possible to continue (a performance to tease whether it is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is confirmed that it will be 50 games).

<<Point 12>> (1) There is a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal zone", and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect varies depending on the setting value. (1-1) In the "advantageous zone", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed. (1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more likely to be executed in the "normal zone" than in the "advantageous zone". (1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with setting difference. (1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with setting difference. (1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed when there is a loss.

<<<<Configurations Applicable to This Example>>> The configurations applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example are described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described in detail below are applicable to all of the embodiments described above, and it should be noted that one of the configurations described in detail below may be applied, or multiple of the configurations described in detail below may be applied.

<<Memory map configuration>> First, referring to Figure 59, we will describe in detail the configuration of a portion of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M that is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. The areas shown in the figure are used in the following order, from the highest address: (1) "setting value data": an area for data related to a number that manages the setting stage; (2) "external signal system data": an area for storing information related to external signal output; (3) "RAM checksum data": an area for storing data used in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, which stores data calculated from data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off, and stores information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on; (4) "control command buffer": an area for storing command information to be sent to the sub-control board; (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer": an area for storing information used when the power is turned off and which stores data currently stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off, and stores information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off; (6) "unused area": an area for storing areas not used for playing; and (7) "saved data 1 to saved data 8": a RAM into which the data to be saved is likely to be written to the maximum extent possible by design using a CALL command, a PUSH command, etc. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected malfunction (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the stack pointer may point to an address higher than "7FF8H". In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" that was reserved as the area for data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, it is preferable to configure the address (address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may point to when the unexpected malfunction occurs so that data that does not affect the progress of the game (data with little effect) is stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing "setting value data" at an address at least one address away from "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" that was reserved as the area for data to be saved in advance, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage not only to players but also to gaming facilities. In addition, in the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used when the game is in progress after the power is restored, (4) "control command buffer" is data that is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if it becomes impossible to send commands to the sub-control board S, (3) "RAM checksum data" is data that is not used when the game is in progress after the power is restored, and (2) "external signal system data" is data to be sent to the hall computer, so it is data that has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "setting value data" is data related to setting values that affect the results of the game, so for example, if the setting value is changed to a low value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will be caused to the player. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will be caused to the game center. As described above, (1) "setting value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, (1) "setting value data" is the most significant data (data stored in a high address) in (1) to (7) in the figure. In other words, the addresses between (1) "setting value data" and (7) "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" store (2) "external signal system data," (3) "RAM checksum data," (4) "control command buffer," (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer," and (6) "unused area." By configuring in this manner, even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the amount of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design limit, the gaming machine can be configured to be less susceptible to abnormal conditions by including a RAM that is not used for play. In addition, the order of addresses in which the five data items (2) "External signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "Unused area" are stored can be changed without any problem. For example, the data can be stored in the order of "(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)" from the higher address, or in the order of "(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)" from the higher address. In addition, the (6) "Unused area" may not be provided. In addition, the data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above is data that will not prevent the insertion of game medals (no errors will occur that would prevent the insertion of game medals) even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed.

The area for storing the "setting value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59, may be configured to store the following data: (A) Total score data: an area for storing data on the number of game values that plays a role similar to the total number of game medals that can be inserted in a sealed reel type gaming machine that does not use actual game medals (when the total score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes) (B) Minimum play time: data for counting the minimum play time for one play (the counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (the minimum play time for one play is 4.1 seconds) (C) Number of coins acquired counter when BB is activated: BB (D) Counter for determining whether the condition (number of coins paid out) for ending the game is satisfied (counter value is subtracted in response to the value of the game value given to the player) (E) Counter for the number of coins acquired during MB operation: Counter for determining whether the condition (number of coins paid out) for ending the game is satisfied (counter value is subtracted in response to the value of the game value given to the player) Note that the above (A) to (D) and the "setting value data" may be configured to be stored in multiple (stored in different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. In addition, when multiple pieces of data are configured to be stored, it is preferable to configure the multiple pieces of data to be stored in addresses higher than the areas of (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (providing an area for storing them). By configuring in this way, a gaming machine that does not cause disadvantages to players or gaming facilities can be provided. Furthermore, if the address is higher than at least the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is designed to be "7FF8H", but if an unexpected malfunction (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the stack pointer may point to an address higher than "7FF8H". However, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming facilities.

<<Actions when the replay stop is displayed>> Next, referring to FIG. 60, the actions in a game in which a replay has been won that can be applied to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail. Note that the configuration illustrated below is an example of a configuration in which a gaming medal can be inserted even while the replay stop is displayed.

First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are on. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is turned on. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on as an automatic bet operation related to the stopped replay (when the replay is stopped and displayed, a bet is made without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button). Then, at the timing of (6) in the figure, operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and as an automatic betting operation related to the stopped re-play, the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up, and at approximately the same time as the lighting of the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up (the insert possible lamp D300 may be configured to flash).

Here, the key features of the action shown in the figure are explained in detail below.

<Configuration 1> The start lamp D180 and the 3 bet lamp D213 for the next game for which replay has been stopped are configured to light up at approximately the same time. If the insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when a player wants to insert a game medal, the player may visually see that the start lamp D180 has been turned on first and may think that the player cannot insert the game medal. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the insertion possible lamp D300, the player may think that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by turning on the insertion possible lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 at approximately the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's decision regarding the insertion of a game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and to prevent the insertion of an incorrect game medal or the operation of the start lever D50.

<Configuration 2> The 1 bet lamp D211 is always lit from the timing of the bet operation for the game in which replay is stopped, until the end of the game following the one in which replay is stopped. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won as soon as possible, which makes it possible to smoothly progress through the game.

<Configuration 3> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay has stopped, before the start lamp D180 lights up. In this way, the replay lamp D290 lights up first to notify the player that a replay has been selected, and then the start lamp D180 lights up to notify the player that the replay has been selected and the start lever D50 can now be operated, allowing the player to easily grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay has been stopped, before the insert possible lamp D300 lights up. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been selected, and then by lighting the insert possible lamp D300 to notify the player that a game medal can be inserted, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 5> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay is stopped, before the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won first, making it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won early on, which makes it possible to smooth the progress of the game.

<Configuration 6> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay is stopped, before the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won first, making it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won early on, which makes it possible to facilitate smooth game progress.

<Configuration 7> The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 for the next game in which the replay has been stopped are lit up so that the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit first, followed by the 3 bet lamp D213 (the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 do not light up at approximately the same time). By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Configuration 8> After the replay has stopped, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 turn off at approximately the same time. If multiple lamps (the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213) are on, it becomes difficult to understand the game status, so by turning off the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 at approximately the same time, the player can quickly understand the game status.

<Configuration 9> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped is set to precede the timing of turning off the 2 bet lamp D212 after the replay is stopped. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won first, making it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won early on, which makes it possible to smooth the progress of the game.

<Configuration 10> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped is set to precede the timing of turning off the 3 bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won first, making it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won early on, which makes it possible to smooth the progress of the game.

<Configuration 11> The start lamp D180 and the 3 bet lamp D213 for the next game for which replay has been stopped are turned on at approximately the same time. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified as soon as possible that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid, which allows the game to proceed smoothly.

<<Other Action 1>> Here, an action that differs from the configuration in FIG. 60 in a game in which a replay has been won that is applicable to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail below as Other Action 1.

<Configuration 12> The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 may be configured to be constantly lit from the timing of the bet operation for the game in which the replay is stopped, until the end of the game following the replay stop. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and since it is possible to notify the player that the replay has been won as soon as possible, it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game.

<Configuration 13> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped and the timing of turning off the 2 bet lamp D212 after the replay is stopped may be configured to be approximately the same. It is desired to inform the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2 bet lamp D212) continues to be lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game status. Therefore, by temporarily turning off the 2 bet lamp D212, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game status. Furthermore, by lighting the replay lamp D290 before the timing of turning on the 2 bet lamp D212 for the next game for which the replay is stopped (which may be the timing of turning on the insert possible lamp D300), it is possible to notify the player in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal.

<Configuration 14> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped and the timing of turning off the 3 bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped may be configured to be approximately the same. It is desired to inform the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3 bet lamp D213) continues to be lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game status. Therefore, by temporarily turning off the 2 bet lamp D212, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game status. Furthermore, by lighting the replay lamp D290 before the timing of turning on the 3 bet lamp D213 for the next game for which the replay is stopped (which may be the timing of turning on the insert possible lamp D300), it is possible to notify the player in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal.

<Configuration 15> In the case where a player wins a replay in a certain game and also wins a replay in the game following that certain game, the replay lamp D290 may be configured to light up based on the indication that the replay for that certain game has stopped, and to continue to light up until the end of the game following that certain game. In this way, by continuously lighting up the replay lamp D290, the player can be notified of the replay win as soon as possible, and the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Configuration 16> The third stop operation (or the display of a stopped symbol combination related to replay) may be used as a trigger to control various lamps such as the replay lamp D290, 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, 1 bet lamp D211, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300. By configuring in this way, notifications can be made using the lamps according to the timing of the game progress, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game.

<Configuration 17> The replay lamp D290, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 may be configured to light up at approximately the same time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamps are lighting up based on the replay stop indication.

<Configuration 18> The 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, and 1 bet lamp D211 may be configured to turn off substantially simultaneously based on the display that replay has stopped, and then the 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, and 1 bet lamp D211 may be configured to turn on substantially simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet in the event of winning replay is 3.

<Configuration 19> The 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, and 1 bet lamp D211 may be configured to turn off approximately simultaneously based on the replay being displayed as stopped, and then the 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, 1 bet lamp D211, replay lamp D290, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 may be configured to light up approximately simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet in the event of winning a replay is 3, and it is also possible to clearly notify that the lighting of the lamps is based on the replay being displayed as stopped.

<<Other Action 2>> Here, further, an action that differs from the configuration in FIG. 60 in a game in which a replay has been won that can be applied to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail below as Other Action 2 using FIG. 61 to FIG. 63.

<Diagram 2 of action when the replay stop is displayed> Next, referring to FIG. 61, the action that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the last reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on). At the timing of (1) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit at approximately the same time as the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, and at approximately the same time, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit. Then, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the insertion possible lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. Note that the 1 bed lamp D211 remains lit.

<Diagram 3 of the action when the replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this situation, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed as stopped at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the start lamp D180 and the insertion possible lamp D300 are lit almost simultaneously. Note that the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Diagram 4 of the action when the replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up and the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up at approximately the same time. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective. Note that the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Diagram 5 of Actions Related to Replay Stop Display> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the replay lamp D290 are turned on almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3 bed lamp D213, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 light up approximately simultaneously.

<Diagram 6 of action when replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit and, at approximately the same time, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Then, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit. Then, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. The 1 bed lamp D211 remains lit.

<Diagram 7 of the action when the replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this situation, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed as stopped. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the replay lamp D290, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 are lit almost simultaneously. Note that the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Diagram 8 of action when replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this situation, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, 3 bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 light up approximately simultaneously.

<Diagram 9 of action when replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this situation, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Then, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. The 1 bed lamp D211 remains lit.

<Diagram 10 of the action when the replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed as stopped at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the start lamp D180 and the insertion possible lamp D300 are lit almost simultaneously. Note that the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 remain lit.

In addition, among the configurations illustrated in Figures 61 to 63, those that have the same configurations as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19 can produce the same effects as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned configurations related to the timing of the stop display of the symbol combination related to replay, the timing of the operation of the stop button, the timing of the replay lamp D290 turning on and off, the timing of the 3 bet lamp D213 turning on and off, the timing of the 2 bet lamp D212 turning on and off, the timing of the 1 bet lamp D211 turning on and off, the timing of the start lamp D180 turning on, and the timing of the insert possible lamp D300 turning on can be combined with any of the configurations (timings).

Note that, although the above describes an example of a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even when the replay is stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that game medals cannot be inserted while the replay is stopped (this is applicable to all of the configurations described above). In such a configuration, the insertion permission lamp D300 will remain off while the replay is stopped.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "approximately simultaneous" means that it is sufficient for the player to recognize that the process is visually simultaneous. For example, if the process (light on/off timing) is executed within a period in which the interrupt process is executed 10 times, it is acceptable for the process to be approximately simultaneous.

<<Configuration of the bet button lamp>> The configuration of the bet button lamp S50 in the reel-type gaming machine of this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M processes the bet button D220 to change it from disabled to enabled, and then the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to turn on the bet button lamp S50 (the main control board M may be configured to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the bet button D220 has been enabled), and then the sub-control board S may be configured to execute a process to turn on the bet button lamp S50 by receiving the command to turn on the bet button lamp S50 sent from the main control board M. By configuring in this way, the bet button lamp S50 is managed to be turned on and off on the sub-control board S side, but the bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on when the bet button D220 is enabled according to the game situation on the main control board M side, and even if the player visually checks the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 to determine whether the bet (bet button D220) is enabled, there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<<Configuration of the stop button lamp>> The configuration of the stop button lamp S60 in the reel-type gaming machine of this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M processes the stop button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43) to change it from disabled to enabled, and then the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to turn on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button for which the enabling process has been executed) {the main control board M may be configured to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the stop button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43) has been enabled}, and then the sub-control board S, having received the command to turn on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from the main control board M, may be configured to execute a process to turn on the stop button lamp S60. By configuring it in this manner, the turning on and off of the stop button lamp S60 is managed on the sub-control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on when the stop button lamp S60 is valid depending on the game status on the main control board M side, and even if the player visually checks the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 to determine whether the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43) is valid, there is no discrepancy with the game status on the main control board M side.

<<Configuration of the reel unit RU applicable to this example>> As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the reel type gaming machine of this example has reels M50 (M51, M52, and M53) that can be rotated via the reel unit RU. Note that Figure 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the reel type gaming machine of this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has an approximately semi-cylindrical shape and is formed with an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the patterns of the three reels M51, M52, and M53 can be seen through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top part RU20 and a bottom part RU30, sandwiching an opening RU10. The reel unit RU can be mounted on the base part BU by placing the bottom part RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the base part BU, which will be described later.

<Through holes RU40> As shown in Figures 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<<Base unit BU>> The base unit BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a generally plate-like shape. The ends of the base unit BU are attached to the left side, right side, back, etc. of the rear box with screws or the like (not shown), and the base unit BU is fixed to the rear box. The base unit BU is attached to the rear box so that it extends horizontally. As mentioned above, the reel unit RU is placed on the base unit BU.

<Screw holes BU10> A plurality of, for example, three, screw holes BU10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end of the base part BU. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom part RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the base part BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53.

The number and positions of the through holes RU40 and screw holes BU10 need only correspond to each other and be arranged horizontally so that the reel unit RU can be stably placed on the base part BU. Also, the base part BU may be configured so that only the reel unit RU is attached to the base part BU using the screw holes BU10 (and screws BS) in the base part BU, or the base part BU may be configured so that both the reel unit RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) are attached to the base part BU using the screw holes BU10 (and screws BS) in the base part BU.

<<Method of fixing the reel unit RU>> As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the base part BU, and the reel unit RU is positioned so that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the corresponding screw hole BU10 of the base part BU. The screws BS are then screwed into the screw holes BU10 through the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU, thereby attaching and holding the reel unit RU at a fixed position on the base part BU. In this way, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base part BU.

In addition to the screws BS, the reel unit RU may be attached removably using a screw or bolt or other threaded member, such as a removable rivet, for example, a push rivet. It is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be removably attached to the base part BU using an engagement member, locking member, etc.

In this example, the reel unit RU is placed on the base BU, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reel unit RU may be configured to have through holes RU40 at the top and be fixed to the inside of the housing with screws BS (fixed so as to hang), or through holes RU40 may be provided on both side portions of the reel unit RU and be fixed to the inside of the housing with screws BS. It should be noted that even in such a configuration, the configuration regarding the position of the screws BS and the drop position of the screws BS described in detail below (for example, the configuration regarding the screws BS placed in the position closest to where the front door DU opens and closes) can be applied.

<<Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS>> Figure 66(a) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear right side, and Figure 66(b) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear left side. Note that Figures 66(a) and (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. These arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in Figures 66(a) and (b) for both positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as the main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank molded from ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged in a circular manner, and the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 form an opening H30. The opening H30 is formed to open upward. The medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 described above are introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 through the opening H30. The hopper H40 may be composed of multiple members, and the multiple members may be collectively referred to as the hopper H40, the main tank member, the main tank unit, or the like.

Furthermore, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom H52, a right inclined portion H54, and a left inclined portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is disposed on the right side of the hopper H40, and game medals introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 are guided toward the hopper bottom H52, which will be described later, by their own weight. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced to the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by their own weight. Furthermore, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover the upper portion of approximately the left half of the disk H50, which will be described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a situation in which multiple game medals are strung together at the hopper bottom H52 and cannot fall, and it is possible to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom H52.

By providing the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any game medals introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom H52. In this way, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as storage inclined portions that store game medals inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 is disposed on the hopper bottom H52 as a rotating body. The disk H50 is rotated by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the rotation of the disk H50 causes the game medals to be discharged from the game medal outlet H60. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide portion H62> A discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the inside of the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64. When the hopper H40 is placed in the rear box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located lower than the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be approximately constant, but is formed to slightly widen as it moves downward (from the left side to the right side).

The discharge guide portion H62 is a member for guiding the game medals at the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS before the game medals are stored in the hopper H40 and overflow from the hopper H40, thereby reducing the number of medals stored in the hopper H40. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS through the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges the game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as storage inclined portions that store the game medals inside the hopper H40, while the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges the game medals to the outside of the hopper H40, and has the opposite function to the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

Furthermore, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medals from the left side to the right side. That is, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have a downward rightward inclination. The final destination of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom H52, and the final destination of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS, but by making the inclination the same, the overall movement of the game medals in the hopper H40 can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A protruding wall H58 protruding upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is provided near the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The protruding wall H58 prevents medals placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS> The medal auxiliary tank HS has a roughly rectangular prism shape with a bottom and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the top, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<<Falling of screws BS of reel unit RU>> In a reel type gaming machine, a front door DU is attached to a rear box so as to be able to open and close (the front door DU and the rear box together may be referred to as a housing). The front door DU is attached to the rear box so as to be able to rotate around the left side of the front door DU (the left side as seen by the player) as the center of rotation. For this reason, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as seen by the player) has the greatest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact occurs due to contact or collision with the rear box and is transmitted to the rear box. Since an impact occurs on the right side of the reel type gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the reel type gaming machine is the greatest, and the impact tends to gradually weaken on the left side of the reel type gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base part BU by the screws BS. The screws BS are screwed into the screw holes BU10 of the base part BU at three places, the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is subjected to the greatest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to impact, and when it is unscrewed, the right screw BS will fall off. The center screw BS screwed into the center screw hole BU10 is also subjected to impact, and there is a possibility that it will loosen and fall off due to the impact. It is assumed that the left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 will be less susceptible to impact to some extent, but there is a natural possibility that it will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of impact propagation and the duration of use.

<<Position of the screws BS and the hopper H40 (1)>> As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are located at the bottom of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in Figure 64, of the three screws BS mentioned above, at least the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the right screw BS.

When the right screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The fallen right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and due to its own weight, it rolls along the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, preventing the fallen screw BS from entering the hopper H40 and preventing the fallen screw BS from interfering with the rotation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50, allowing the hopper H40 to operate stably.

In the above example, only the right screw BS was targeted, but the hopper H40 and reel unit RU may be positioned so that the three left screws BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS are all located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. If any screw BS falls off, the fallen screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. In addition, in this example, the screw BS for placing the reel unit RU on the base part BU is exemplified, but this is not limited to this, and components such as screws attached to the right side of the front door DU (the right side as seen from the player), which is prone to impact due to contact or collision with the back box, may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when they fall off.

<<Position of the screws BS and the hopper H40 (2)>> Figure 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in Figure 67, of the three screws BS mentioned above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. Note that in Figure 67, the same components as in Figure 64 are denoted with the same reference numerals.

If the right screw BS falls off due to impact, it will fall freely downward (arrow 2A) and be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS (without coming into contact with the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The fallen central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and due to its own weight, it rolls on and moves along the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

This prevents the fallen right screw BS and center screw BS from entering the hopper H40, and prevents the fallen screws BS from interfering with the rotation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50, allowing the hopper H40 to operate stably.

In the above example, the right screw BS and the center screw BS were the focus, but the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU may be positioned so that the left screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. If any screw BS falls out, the fallen screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As mentioned above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent screws BS that have fallen off and landed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or greater than the height at which the screws BS bounce back when they fall onto the inclined surface H64. This prevents the screws BS from falling onto the hopper bottom H52, and can prevent the screws BS from interfering with or damaging the operation of the disk H50.

In this way, even if the screws BS for attaching the reel unit RU become detached due to vibrations caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screws BS are configured to fall into the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40, allowing the amusement facility manager to easily collect the detached screws BS.

<<Hopper H400>> In the example shown in Figure 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes outside the hopper H40 (to the right of the right side wall H48 as seen by the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. By configuring the fallen right screw BS to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing inside the hopper H40, it can be used in common with the hopper H40 shown in Figure 64.

On the other hand, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 67, a hopper H400 may be used in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right (right side wall H480). A bottom opening H410 is formed in the bottom of the hopper H400 near the right side wall H480, and when a right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and is then stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS via the bottom opening H410. In this way, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the fallen right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H400.

<<Extension part RU50>> In the above example, if the screw BS falls off, it will fall freely towards the medal auxiliary tank HS below. In contrast, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 65, an extension part EN may be provided on the bottom of the reel unit RU or base part BU. By providing an extension part EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it will not fall immediately, but will be guided by the extension part EN before falling into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension part EN makes it possible to align the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, thereby increasing the freedom of positioning of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Configuration of the medal auxiliary tank HS>> <Through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes> As shown in FIG. 68, the medal auxiliary tank HS has at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes formed on the rear surface. In addition, two full detection electrodes DE and a conductivity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the bottom of the rear surface of the rear box. The two full detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend horizontally and parallel to each other, and are arranged to protrude forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is placed at the bottom of the rear box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the top portion UL (see FIG. 69(c)) of the stored medals gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69(c) is a cross-sectional view showing the state in which medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the top portion UL shown in FIG. 69(c) is a line (e.g., an envelope) that connects the contours of the medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS that are located in the top portion UL (for simplicity, the top portion UL is illustrated as a smooth curve). When the medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE are conductive through the multiple medals, an electrical circuit is formed between the two full detection electrodes DE. When the electrical circuit is formed, the conductivity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that the two full detection electrodes DE are conductive. In this way, it is possible to detect a medal full error when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE.

The number of full detection electrodes DE may be three or more, not just two. For example, if three are provided, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, a new full detection electrode is provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided full detection electrode is configured to be conductive to either one of the two full detection electrodes described above, thereby enabling a medal full error to be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to detect a medal full error even if game medals are not stored evenly in the medal auxiliary tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored unevenly on the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS).

<<Material of the screw BS and material of the medal>> The material of the screw BS is magnetic and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. The material of the medal is not magnetic and conductive. For example, it is made of plated brass or stainless steel. By configuring it in this way, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, it can be easily removed from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<<Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE>> The left screw BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the base part BU. Figure 69 (b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. This screw BS is used with a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see Figure 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see Figure 69 (a)) (total length BL of the screw BS < distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than the distance between the full detection electrodes DE, so the screw BS alone will not be conductive with the two full detection electrodes DE (the screw BS will not get caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Also, FIG. 69(a) is a plan view of the rear portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS, showing the fullness detection electrode DE protruding into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Relationship between length HR of seat of screw BS and diameter ED of full detection electrode DE>> The radial length HR of the seat of the screw BS (see Figure 69 (b)) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see Figure 69 (a)) (radial length HR of seat of screw BS < diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS falls off and falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not become caught on one of the full detection electrodes DE, and even if the screw BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it will be able to immediately detach, and the screw BS will not accidentally become conductive by itself.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69(c), when one of the two full detection electrodes DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69(c)) is in contact with medals already stored (top portion UL), even if the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side of FIG. 69(c)) temporarily comes into contact with the screw BS, the screw BS will not be hooked onto the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can immediately detach from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69(c)), so that a conductive circuit is not formed via the screw BS and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS will not be misjudged.

In this example, the reel unit RU has been described as an integrated unit that houses all three reels, but even if it is a separate unit that houses each of the three reels separately, it is still removably attached to the base part BU by the screws BS, and there is still the possibility that the screws BS may come off. For this reason, the same configuration as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screws BS can be adopted.

<<Configuration of the reel band>> Figure 70(a) is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. Figure 70(b) is a perspective view showing the reel band MO in a curved state. Figure 70(c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the gap M59 of the reel band MO. Figure 70(d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the "white seven" symbol. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and a BB is started when "white seven, white seven, white seven" are stopped and displayed on the pay line. The reel band MO has a thin, long, plate-like shape (strip-like). As described above, multiple symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO is flexible and can be curved. It is also translucent, and the symbols can be illuminated from behind by light emitted from the reel backlight.

The reel band MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so that they face each other, and are attached to the reel frame MW to form a ring-shaped (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two ring-shaped frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and with both centers located on the same rotation axis. The two frames are also arranged so that the distance between them is approximately the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Overlapped portion M58 and gap M59> The reel band MO is formed so that the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (overlapped portion M58) where parts of the reel band MO overlap is created near the first end M55 and the second end M57. In this way, the reel band MO can be attached around the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Furthermore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, parts of the reel band MO overlap, and a gap M59 is formed by the first end M55.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and the first end M55 forms a gap M59. When attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this manner, the reel band MO is first attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then, while gradually rotating the reel frame MW in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, the reel band MO is attached along one circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 to the first end M55, and finally, the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57 until the first end M55 is reached. When the reel band MO is attached in this order, the first end M55 is attached in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 overlaps the reel band MO.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is first attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while gradually rotating the reel frame MW in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the reel M50, the reel band MO is attached around the circumference of the reel frame MW from the first end M55 to the second end M57, and finally, the reel band MO is attached above the first end M55, finishing up to the second end M57. When the reel band MO is attached in this order, the second end M57 ends up being attached in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, overlapping the reel band MO.

Here, if the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW starting from the first end M55, and then the second end M57 is attached in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, resulting in a state in which the second end M57 overlaps the reel band MO, when a game is played and the reel M50 rotates, air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (causing high air resistance), making it easier for air to get in between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below it, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 becomes more likely to peel off gradually.

In contrast, if the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW starting from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the reel M50, resulting in a state in which the first end M55 overlaps the reel band MO, when a game is played and the reel M50 rotates, air is less likely to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is smaller), and air is less likely to get in between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it, resulting in the reel band MO near the first end M55 not easily peeling off, compared to the state in which the second end M57 overlaps the reel band MO described above.

In view of the above, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, it is preferable to start attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then finish attaching the first end M55 in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the reel M50, so that the first end M55 overlaps the reel band MO.

<Various Errors> In this way, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, an overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and a gap M59 is formed by either the first end M55 or the second end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of resin such as plastic, errors may occur during molding. Also, errors may occur due to deformation when assembling the reel frame MW. Furthermore, since the reel band MO is flexible, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, it may be attached with distortion or the like remaining in the reel band MO, or the size (outer circumference) of the reel frame MW may be slightly different from the design value. If a large symbol (for example, a "white seven") is configured to be positioned on the reel band MO below the overlapping portion M58, and the attachment position of the reel band MO shifts from the desired position due to these various errors, it is conceivable that the large symbol will be overlapped by the reel band MO above the overlapping portion M58, causing the large symbol to be covered by the upper reel band MO.

Also, depending on the game state, the player may press the button to aim for the bonus symbol, and if the bonus symbol is placed near the gap M59, when pressing the button to aim for the bonus symbol or when the bonus symbol is stopped, the player may also see the gap M59 when viewing the bonus symbol. If various errors as described above occur, it is expected that the player will not only see the symbol, but also the deviation of the gap M59 or the position of the symbol. When the bonus symbol is displayed as a symbol combination, it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player, so the player will focus on the bonus symbol with joy, but in that case, if the player sees the deviation of the gap M59 or the position of the symbol, the joy of the symbol combination that becomes the bonus symbol being displayed may be reduced.

<In the case of bonus symbols> To prevent this from happening, symbols smaller than the largest symbol, such as bonus symbols, are placed in the position closest to the gap M59. Specifically, if the longitudinal length of the symbol (longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO) of the longest symbol (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, a symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL (longitudinal length SL) is placed in the position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the symbols with short longitudinal lengths in the positions closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, even if various errors occur, these symbols can be arranged in a position away from the overlapping portion M58 (gap M59), and the symbols can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even if the various errors described above occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually noticing the shift in the gap M59 or the shift in the position of the symbols. In addition, in the same figure, the longitudinal length of the bell symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are illustrated as the same SL, but there is no problem if the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol are different as long as they are shorter than the longitudinal length LL of the bonus symbol (white seven). Furthermore, the symbols to be placed near the gap M59 are not limited to bell and cherry symbols, and may be any symbols other than bonus symbols. For example, replay symbols (symbols that can form a symbol combination corresponding to replay) or watermelon symbols (symbols that can form a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon) may be placed near the gap M59. In this example, the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the longitudinal length of the symbol (e.g., bell symbol) located near the gap M59, but this is not limited thereto, and the short-side length of the bonus symbol (white seven) may be longer than the short-side length of the symbol (e.g., bell symbol) located near the gap M59.

In the above example, the arrangement of the symbols was determined by comparing the longitudinal length LL of the symbol with the longest longitudinal length (such as a bonus symbol) with the longitudinal length SL of a symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL, but the arrangement of the symbols may also be determined by comparing the transverse length LT (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO) with the transverse length ST of a symbol whose transverse length is shorter than LT.

The aforementioned longitudinal lengths LL and SL are the difference in length between the part of the pattern that protrudes most to the top along the longitudinal direction and the part of the pattern that protrudes most to the bottom along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the transverse lengths LT and ST are the difference in length between the part of the pattern that protrudes most to the top along the transverse direction and the part of the pattern that protrudes most to the bottom along the transverse direction.

<In the case of small winning symbols> In addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols that do not stop on a winning line depending on the timing of operation of the stop button even if they win, in other words, symbols that are located at least in one or more places more than the maximum number of slip frames apart (sometimes called symbols corresponding to rare roles, symbols that may cause misses, etc.) are also symbols that are the target of eye-pressing and are symbols that players try to see. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, there are cases where the winning of the rare role is not announced before the stop button is operated, and even in such cases, since the player wants to win the rare role, the stop button is often operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is most likely to obtain the rare role (the most profitable for the player). In addition, there are gaming machines that have many winning roles that will pay out a small number of coins, such as one coin, when a winning role is won, and in such cases, the stop button is often operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player. Incidentally, operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) that is most profitable for the player is sometimes referred to as the optimal playing method.

Here, referring to Fig. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when playing using the optimal playing method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in Fig. 71, the activated lines are the top left reel, top middle reel, and top right reel (a straight line at the top), the middle left reel, middle middle reel, and middle right reel (a straight line at the middle), the bottom left reel, bottom middle reel, and bottom right reel (a straight line at the bottom), the top left reel, middle middle reel, and bottom right reel (a straight line going down to the right), and the bottom left reel, middle middle reel, and top right reel (a straight line going up to the right), for a total of five lines, with the specified number being three. In addition, the reels have a watermelon and a cherry as rare combinations, and when the watermelon combination wins, "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" are displayed in a straight line on the active line, and when the cherry combination wins, "cherry, any, any" (any means that any symbol is acceptable) are displayed in a straight line on the active line. In addition, since the watermelon and cherry symbols are both rare combinations, they are symbols that are spaced apart by at least one location that is greater than the maximum number of sliding frames.

Figure 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO. Note that only the left reel is illustrated in this figure. In the example shown in Figure 71, the reel band MO is arranged in the order of watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry, and these symbols are arranged at a position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the win of the rare role and easy to win the rare role, and when the rare role of watermelon or cherry is won, the rare role can be won by playing in the above-mentioned optimal playing method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, by operating the stop button during the three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row, it is possible to win the rare role regardless of whether the watermelon role or the cherry role is won. When the stop button is operated with this operation timing (optimum gameplay method), the range of nine frames from the cherry symbol on the top row to the watermelon symbol on the bottom row is the range that can be stopped and displayed, and as shown in the figure, no matter which of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (no matter which of the nine stopped display modes is used), it is positioned away from the first end M55 and the second end M57 (there is no gap M59 near the symbol positioned two frames above the watermelon, and there is no gap M59 near the symbol positioned two frames below the cherry), preventing the player from visually noticing the gap M59 or the position of the symbols being shifted.

As shown in the figure, by configuring the symbols that may be displayed when the stop button is operated to target a position on the reel that is likely to result in the rare combination not to be located near the first end M55 or the second end M57, it is possible to configure the first end M55 or the second end M57 not to be located in a position on the reel that is frequently displayed as a stopped symbol, and even if there is a shift in the gap M59 or the position of the symbol, it is possible to configure the shift in the gap M59 or the position of the symbol to be less noticeable to the player.

In this example, the number of steps in one revolution of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, 336÷20=16, so the remainder is 16, and so one reel is made up of 16 frames (symbols) with 17 steps and 4 frames (symbols) with 16 steps, as the distribution of the 20 frames (symbols). Also, since it is preferable for the appearance to be such that the gap M59 is as invisible as possible to the player, it is preferable for the frames (symbols) adjacent to the gap M59 to have a relatively small number of steps, 16 steps.

In addition, the configuration of the reel type gaming machine in this example may be configured so that it is not necessary to insert and pay out actual gaming medals used in general reel type gaming machines, and the game can be progressed using a digitized pseudo gaming medium. In addition, in such a configuration, since there is no need to insert and pay out actual gaming medals, it is possible to improve the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel type gaming machine (for example, by not having an insertion opening or a payout opening for gaming medals, and by sealing the gap into which a foreign object is inserted by integrating the front door and the back box, etc.), and to reduce the risk of using illegal gaming medals, and to improve security against fraudulent acts (so-called cheating acts) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed reel type gaming machine). It should be noted that the configuration of the enclosed reel type gaming machine can be applied to any of the above-mentioned embodiments (or configurations). Furthermore, the configuration may not include the credit and credit number display device D200. For example, the credit and total score (total score) may be combined into one total score, and the increase/decrease processing and display processing of the total score may be performed on the main control board M, the payout control board H (sometimes called the game value control board or game value control means), or other board.

In addition, the game machine may be configured to have "scores" as pseudo game media used to play games on an enclosed reel-type game machine, which correspond to the actual game medals used in a general reel-type game machine. The "scores" may also be referred to as "score information," "owned points," "owned points information," "game value," or "game value information." Physically real game medals can be handled directly by the player. In contrast, in an enclosed reel-type game machine, the player can play the game without directly handling actual game medals. The scores are not actual game medals, but pseudo game media that are digitized so that the CPU of the main control board or the like can perform calculations. In addition, "credits" are points that are temporarily stored in a state where they can be bet or settled, and are data that are mainly managed by the main control board M. In addition, "total points" are all points that can be inserted into an enclosed reel-type game machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. "Total points" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a typical reel-type game machine that uses physical game medals. When applying the configuration of an enclosed reel-type game machine to the above-mentioned embodiment, there is no problem in treating what is referred to as "game medals" in this specification as "scores," "score information," "points held," "points held information," "game value," "game value information," etc., and there is no problem in referring to them as "scores," "score information," "points held," "points held information," "game value," or "game value information" as appropriate. It is not necessary to have "credits." There is also no problem in replacing the credit number display device with a total point display device.

(Second embodiment) In this embodiment, the AT-related state that is advantageous to the player is configured to have an AT-in-progress state, and push order navigation is executed in the AT-in-progress state (so-called AT), providing an advantageous state to the player and improving the entertainment value of the game. However, the configuration of a gaming machine capable of executing an AT is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a reel-type gaming machine capable of executing an AT that is different from the configuration of this embodiment is defined as the second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) relating to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment in the figure are step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second); that is, after executing the condition device number management process described above in step 1450, in step 4100 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Furthermore, after executing the above-mentioned AT in-state start control process in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the freeze execution determination process at stop described below, and proceeds to step 3500. Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, a freeze (the reels do not start spinning for a specified time, and betting operations related to the next game cannot be performed for a specified time) can occur when the reels start to spin (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reels stop (when the final reel stops, when the third reel stops).

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution judgment process at the start of rotation, which is related to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPU MC of the main control board M judges whether the state related to the AT has newly become "AT in progress" from the game. Here, "newly becoming AT in progress" refers to the case where the state related to the AT has become "AT in progress" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as the first AT win), and examples include (1) winning BB in "high probability state" → transition to "advantageous BB inside state" → BB pattern (bonus pattern) is displayed stationary and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB ends and transition to a new "AT in progress state", (2) if a cherry is won in the "high probability state", there is a 1/2 chance of winning the AT lottery, and after winning the AT lottery, a premonition state {expectations regarding whether or not the AT lottery has been won} is entered. In the case where the state is configured to transition to a "premonition state" (which is a state related to the AT to be held by the player, and which may be configured to have a "false premonition state" which is a presentation style (background presentation, etc.) similar to that of the "premonition state" even if the AT lottery related to a cherry winning is not won), a game state transition such as when a cherry is won in the "high probability state", and the AT lottery based on the cherry winning is won, transitioning to the "premonition state" → a predetermined number of games which is the end condition of the "premonition state" has been played, and therefore a new "AT in-state" transition occurs, corresponds to "newly entering the AT in-state." On the other hand, examples of game state transitions that do not fall under "newly entered AT state" include (1) remaining in "AT state" → transition to "AT continuation battle state" {state where there is a possibility of transitioning back to "AT state" (winning consecutive games)} because the AT counter value becomes 0 → transition to "AT state" again, (2) winning BB in "AT state" → transition to "advantageous BB inside state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is displayed stationary and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB ends and transition to "AT state" again, etc., which do not fall under "newly entered AT state".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that, when turned on, causes a freeze to be executed when the reel starts spinning). Next, in step 4106, the CP
The UMC sets an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S receives this command, the AT start performance is executed on the sub-control board S), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1550). Note that even if the answer is No at step 4102, it also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1550). Note that the freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and it is possible to configure it to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution times).

Next, Figure 74 is a flowchart of the reel spin start preparation processing relating to the subroutine of step 1550 in Figure 72 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are steps 1568 (2nd) to 1574 (2nd), that is, in step 1568 (2nd), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the AT start freeze execution flag is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 1568 (2nd), in step 1570 (2nd), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (a decrement timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" is newly established and the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" ends) to the start freeze execution time (5 seconds in this example, the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" is newly established), starts the timer, and proceeds to step 1574 (2). Next, in step 1574 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1574 (2), proceed to step 1552. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1574 (2), the process of step 1574 (2) is repeatedly executed until the execution time of the freeze executed at the start of the "AT state" has elapsed. Note that if the answer is No in step 1568 (2), proceed to step 1552 as well.

In this way, in the second embodiment, a freeze (sometimes called a freeze at the start of the AT) is executed when a new "AT in progress state" is started. Details will be described later, but while the freeze is being executed, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of the AT is set to 5 seconds, but this execution time can be changed without any problems, and it is preferable to set it to match the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the end of the AT, which will be described later, is set to 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of the AT is configured to be longer than the freeze execution time at the end of the AT. In this way, by making the freeze execution time at the start of the AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of the AT, it is possible to create a highly interesting gaming machine that enhances the player's desire to play.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the stop-time freeze execution determination process relating to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" refers to the case where the AT counter value becomes "1→0" in a situation where the AT counter value is decrementing, such as in an "AT in progress state," and does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as in a situation where the AT-related state is a "normal gameplay state."

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes at step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 4202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 4204 whether the counter value for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone has newly become 0 in the game. "The counter value for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone has newly become 0" refers to a situation in which the counter value for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone is subtracted, such as in an "AT in progress" state, and the counter value for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone has become "1→0", and does not include a situation in which the counter value for the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone is always 0, such as in a state in which the AT-related state is a "normal gameplay state". If the answer is Yes at step 4204, the process proceeds to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, a timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" is newly established and the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" ends) to the end freeze execution time (3 seconds in this example, the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" ends) and starts the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, and the AT end performance is executed on the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0 or not. If the answer is Yes in step 4210, proceed to the next process (the process of step 3500). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeated until the execution time for the freeze at the end of the "AT in progress state" has elapsed. If the answer is No in step 4204, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of the AT start performance execution in the second embodiment. In this figure, we will explain in detail an example of a case where no power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance and a case where a power outage occurs.

First, in (a) of the figure, a detailed description will be given of the case where no power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start performance. First, the start lever D50 for the game in which the AT-related state is newly set to "AT in progress" is operated (the game start conditions are satisfied), and the AT start performance is started and the freeze is executed. In addition, as the performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp Execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during the execution of the AT start performance, the background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). In this example, the execution time of the AT start performance and the freeze is five seconds. After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp Execution!" is erased on the performance display device S40. In addition, the state in which only the background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is displayed on the performance display device S40 will be maintained for three seconds. After that, when four seconds have passed since the start of the freeze execution, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second as the performance mode of the AT start performance. After that, when five seconds have passed since the start of the freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect ends, and the reels start to rotate. When the AT start effect ends, the display of "AT50G START!!" on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the background effect dedicated to the AT start effect execution is switched to the background effect that can be displayed during the AT state. In addition, when the push order navigation described above is executed in the first game during the AT state, (1) the freeze execution starts → the freeze ends after five seconds → the reels start to rotate and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, (2) the freeze execution starts → the freeze ends after five seconds → the reels start to rotate → the reel drive state becomes a reel constant speed state and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. By configuring in this way, even if the timing at which the reels start to rotate becomes later than usual due to the execution of the freeze, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly operates the stop button corresponding to a push order different from the correct push order.

Next, in (b) of the same figure, a detailed description will be given of a case where a power outage occurs during the execution of an AT start performance. First, the start lever D50 for the game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress" is operated (the game start conditions are satisfied), and the AT start performance is started and a freeze is executed. In addition, as the performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp Execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during the execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). In this example, the execution time of the AT start performance and the freeze is five seconds (excluding the time during the power outage). After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp Execution!" is erased on the performance display device S40. In addition, the state in which only the background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is displayed on the performance display device S40 will be maintained for three seconds. After that, a power outage occurs when two seconds have passed since the start of the freeze execution (for example, the game center loses power). After that, when the power is restored, the performance display device S40 displays "AT50G START!!" for three seconds, and the freeze remains in effect. After that, when the total time from the start of the freeze execution, excluding the time during the power outage, reaches five seconds, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect ends, and the reels start spinning. Thus, in this example, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect) and the power is then restored, the freeze execution time will continue from the state before the power outage. As an example, if the freeze execution time is five seconds, and a power outage occurs one second after the freeze execution begins, the freeze will be executed for four seconds after the power is restored, and if a power outage occurs three seconds after the freeze execution begins, the freeze will be executed for two seconds after the power is restored.

In addition, like the execution time of the freeze, when a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance and then the power is restored, the execution time of the AT start performance will continue from the state before the power outage. On the other hand, the performance mode of the AT start performance will differ between when a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance and when a power outage does not occur. Specifically, when a power outage does not occur during the execution of the AT start performance, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the execution of the AT start performance, while when a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance, "AT50G START!!" will be displayed on the performance display device S40 after the recovery from the power outage regardless of the timing of the power outage. The display of "AT50G START!!" is sometimes referred to as the AT start time game number display. In addition, in the figure, the AT start game number display is illustrated to notify that the number of AT remaining games at the start of the AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display mode is not limited to this, and for example, in a case where an AT game number addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before the transition to the AT state, the AT remaining game number obtained by winning the AT game number addition lottery in the "advantageous BB state" and adding it to the AT initial game number of 50 games may be displayed on the performance display device S40 as the AT start game number display. As an example, when an AT remaining game number of 30 games is obtained by the AT game number addition lottery in the "advantageous BB state", it may be configured to display "AT80G START!!" as the AT start game number display. In addition, in the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but the AT end effect is also configured so that the effect mode of the AT end effect is different depending on whether a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT end effect or not (for example, if a power outage does not occur during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET XXX" is displayed 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect, while if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET XXX" is displayed after recovery from the power outage regardless of the timing of the power outage). In addition, if it is an effect displayed during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and if it is an effect that is displayed immediately after the power outage is restored, it is not limited to the display of the number of games at the start of the AT, and there is no problem as long as it can be visually recognized by the player to smoothly progress the game.

By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute a freeze when a new AT state is entered and when the AT state ends, and is configured to execute an AT start effect during freeze execution when a new AT state is entered, and execute an AT end effect during freeze execution when the AT state ends. In this configuration, if a power outage occurs during the execution of an AT start effect or an AT end effect, the display scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or AT end effect is configured to be displayed immediately after the power is restored. Even if an unintended power outage (e.g., a power outage at the gaming facility) occurs during the execution of a freeze, the information necessary for the player to understand the game situation, such as the number of games remaining in the AT, is configured to be displayed immediately, thereby preventing a situation in which the player is unable to understand the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the game moves to a new AT state and when the AT state ends, but the manner in which the freeze is executed is not limited to this, and it can be configured to be executed when the BB starts or ends, or it can be configured to be executed based on the winning condition device or the current game state.

In addition, from the configuration regarding the freeze in the slot machine according to this example described above, if the execution period of the freeze when no power interruption occurs during execution of the freeze is A, if a power interruption occurs during execution of the freeze, the execution period of the freeze until the power interruption occurs = B, if a power interruption occurs during execution of the freeze, the execution period of the freeze after the power interruption occurs = C, then it is configured so that A = B + C.

When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above will be executed.

<<<<<Configuration 2 applicable to this example>>>> Configurations applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example are described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described in detail below are applicable to all of the embodiments described above, and it should be noted that one of the configurations described in detail below may be applied, or multiple of the configurations described in detail below may be applied.

<<<<Lamp unit configuration>>> First, using Figures 77 and 78, we will describe in detail the configuration for lighting the lamp unit (a general term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example.

The LEDs of the lamp unit in this example are full-color LEDs (capable of lighting in multiple colors), and are configured so that the lighting color can be set for each LED through lighting control by the sub-control board S. The lamp unit is also configured to light up based on the lighting pattern of the gaming machine (details will be described later), and the lighting pattern may be set for each LED individually, or multiple LEDs may be grouped together and a lighting pattern may be set for that group.

In addition, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used to control the lighting of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC transmits a lighting pattern corresponding to each slave IC to multiple slave ICs, and each slave IC returns an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when it receives the data. Since each slave IC is connected to each other, data (lighting pattern) is transmitted in sequence starting from the master IC, and each slave IC obtains the data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. This configuration makes it possible to perform high-speed communication.

Figure 77 is an image of the lamp unit lighting configuration. In this figure, the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine of this example is described in detail. Note that the items shown in this figure are merely a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the element 1 column are not limited to only the eight items from "red" to "no color." First, as shown in Figure 77, there are six types of elements related to the lighting of the lamp unit, element 1 to element 6.

<Element 1> Element 1 is the lighting color, and has eight lighting colors as element 1: "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", and "no color". In addition, the lamp unit in this example is composed of multiple LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it indicates that all LEDs are lit in red, and when the lighting color is "red + blue", it indicates that, of the total number of LEDs, N, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). In addition, the combination of the order of the LEDs lit in red and the LEDs lit in blue may be only one way, or there may be multiple ways (if there are multiple ways, multiple lighting colors such as "red + blue 1" and "red + blue 2" may be provided as lighting colors). In addition, "no color" indicates that the light is off (not lit), and is the lighting color selected when the light is always off. As mentioned above, the number of items that make up elements 1 to 6 in the figure is merely a partial excerpt, and element 1 can be configured to have lighting colors that combine three or more colors, such as "red + blue + green."

<Element 2> Element 2 is the lighting time, and there are seven types of lighting times as element 2: "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "off". Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the light is always on, and "off" is the lighting time selected when the light is always off.

<Element 3> Element 3 is the off time, and there are seven types of off time: "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "never off". Note that "always" is the on time selected when the light is always off, and "never off" is the off time selected when the light is always on.

<Element 4> Element 4 is a lighting time pattern, which is composed of a combination of a lighting time, which is element 2, and a lighting time, which is element 3, and has seven types of lighting time patterns as element 4, namely, "0.1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", "0.1 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "0.2 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", "3 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "always on", and "always off". As an example of a lighting time pattern, in the case of "0.1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", it is composed of a lighting time of "0.1 sec" which is element 2 and a lighting time of "0.1 sec" which is element 3. Incidentally, "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the light is always on, and is composed of a lighting time of "always" which is element 2 and a lighting time of "never off" which is element 3. In addition, "always off" is the lighting time pattern that is selected when the light is always off, and is composed of the lighting time of "not lit" which is element 2, and the off time of "always" which is element 3.

<Element 5> Element 5 is a lighting element, which is composed of a combination of a lighting color which is element 1 and a lighting time pattern which is element 4. In other words, a lighting element is composed of a combination of a lighting color which is element 1, a lighting time which is element 2, and an off time which is element 3. Note that in the figure, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting element is referred to as the lighting element content, and the identification elements assigned to each lighting element content are illustrated as the lighting element type. The lighting elements are as follows: lighting element type a: "0.1 sec red on → 0.1 sec off" lighting element type b: "0.1 sec blue on → 0.1 sec off" lighting element type c: "0.1 sec red on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type d: "0.1 sec red + blue on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type e: "0.2 sec red + blue on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type f: "0.2 sec blue + green on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type g: "1 sec white on → 0.1 sec off" lighting element type h: "1 sec blue + white on → 0.1 sec off" "Lighting element type i: "Green on for 3 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds" Lighting element type j: "Blue + Green on for 3 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds" Lighting element type k: "Red on at all times" Lighting element type l: "Blue on at all times" Lighting element type m: "Green on at all times" Lighting element type n: "White on at all times" Lighting element type o: "Red + Green on at all times" Lighting element type p: "Blue + Green on at all times" Lighting element type q: "Blue + White on at all times" Lighting element type r: "Off at all times (no color)" There are 18 types of lighting elements as element 5. As an example of a lighting element, "Red on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" is configured by combining the lighting time pattern of element 1 "Red" and element 4 "On for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the off time). "Red + Green on at all times" is configured by combining element 1 "Red + Green" and element 4 "Off at all times". In addition, "Always off (no color)" is composed of element 1, "no color," and element 4, "always off."

<Element 6> Element 6 is a lighting pattern, and is composed of one or more lighting elements, which are element 5. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, the specific content of the lighting pattern is shown as the lighting pattern content, and the identification elements assigned to each lighting pattern content are shown as the lighting pattern type. The lighting patterns are Pattern 1: "a→a→a→a" Pattern 2: "b→b→b→b" Pattern 3: "a→b→a→b" Pattern 4: "a→a→g→g" Pattern 5: "g→f→j" Pattern 6: "i→h→b" Pattern 7: "g→f→b" Pattern 8: "i→j→g" Pattern 9: "g→g→g" Pattern 10: "k" Pattern 11: "l" Pattern 12: "m" Pattern 13: "n" Pattern 14: "o" Pattern 15: "p" Pattern 16: "q" Pattern 17: "r". There are 17 types of lighting patterns as element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: "a→a→a→a", element 5 "0.1 seconds red light on→0.1 seconds off" is repeated four times. In addition, in the case of pattern 8: "i→j→g", lighting element type i is executed as "3 seconds green light on→0.3 seconds off", lighting element type j is executed as "3 seconds blue + green light on→0.3 seconds off", and lighting element type g is executed as "1 second white light on→0.1 seconds off". The lighting patterns may be further combined to light the lamp unit as in pattern 1→pattern 4, or the lighting may be repeated as in pattern 1→pattern 4→pattern 1→pattern 4→pattern 1→... until the lighting end condition is satisfied, with "pattern 1→pattern 4". The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when the game situation changes, such as a predetermined error being cleared, or when a predetermined time has passed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine of this example is configured to light up with a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of element 5, which are configured by a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is configured by a combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the extinguishing time of element 3.

Note that while the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, this is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, and the contents of elements 1 to 6 may be changed (for example, element 1 may be set to lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, an example of a configuration for each game situation related to the lighting pattern of the lamp unit (sometimes referred to as the lamp unit lighting pattern), the lighting mode of the reel back lamp S30 (sometimes referred to as the back lamp lighting mode), and the sound output from the speaker S20 (sometimes referred to as the speaker sound) that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example is described in detail. Note that each item shown in the figure is merely a partial excerpt, and for example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the lighting pattern may be different depending on the type of BB (type of condition device related to BB) or the game state in which BB is won, or a lighting mode (lighting cycle) that combines multiple lighting patterns in one BB may be configured to be repeatedly executed until the BB ends. Also, as an example of an error, a medal empty error is illustrated, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error. In all of configurations 1 to 6, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected during normal play (when no error is occurring, when the power is not turned on, when the standby screen is not being displayed, when the setting confirmation mode is not being used, when the setting change mode is not being used, and when no bonus is being executed) are configured to be one or a combination of multiple of patterns 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 15, 16, and 17. Since the normal play is configured to have various game states such as a low probability state and an AT state, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected depending on the game state may be different. In other words, the lighting patterns may be configured to have lighting patterns that are not selected in a specific game state or lighting patterns that can be selected only in a specific game state. The time when the power is turned on refers to the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (immediately after the power is turned on).

<<Configuration 1>> <When an empty medal error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively low light intensity (less than normal light intensity) Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a sound dedicated to when an empty medal error occurs until the error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Outputs a sound dedicated to when power is turned on for a specified period of time <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit light Light pattern: Pattern 12 (always green)Backlight illumination: OffSpeaker sound: Sound exclusive to setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode>Lamp unit illumination pattern: Pattern 9 ("1 second white illumination → 0.1 second off" repeated three times)Backlight illumination: OffSpeaker sound: Sound exclusive to setting change mode <BB in progress>Lamp unit illumination pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white illumination → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green illumination → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 second blue illumination → 0.1 second off")Backlight illumination: Lights with normal light outputSpeaker sound: Loop (repeatedly plays) sound exclusive to BB in progress.As configured as above.The performance executed when the power is turned on may be configured to differ depending on the performance executed before the power outage occurred or the game state before the power outage occurred.

As in configuration 1, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit is configured to select only different lighting patterns during an error such as an empty medal error and during normal play, and the lighting color that constitutes the lighting pattern is configured to use red when an empty medal error occurs, but not red during normal play (configuration such that a specified lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), so that players and managers can easily distinguish between when an error occurs and when an error does not occur, and the business of the game arcade and the progress of play can be made smooth. In addition, by configuring the lighting pattern of the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns immediately after power-on and during normal play, players and managers can easily distinguish between when the power is turned on and during normal play, and the business of the game arcade and the progress of play can be made smooth. In addition, players will not mistakenly believe that an error has occurred even during normal play, and players can play without stress, and managers can clearly identify the gaming machine in which an error has occurred. In addition, by configuring the device to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during standby screen display and during normal play, players and managers can easily distinguish between standby screen display and normal play, which allows smooth business operations and game progress at the game arcade. In addition, power consumption caused by using flashy lighting patterns during standby screen display, even though the player is not playing, can be suppressed. In addition, by configuring the device to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during setting check mode and normal play, players and managers can easily distinguish between setting check mode and normal play, which allows smooth business operations and game progress at the game arcade. In addition, the manager can immediately distinguish an unintended setting check mode, and can quickly distinguish an unintended setting check mode, and can detect even if the setting key switch has been forgotten to be turned off. In addition, by configuring the device to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during the setting change mode and during normal play, players and managers can easily distinguish between the setting change mode and normal play, making it possible to smoothly operate the amusement arcade and progress in play. In addition, the manager can immediately distinguish between unintended setting change modes, making it possible to quickly distinguish between unintended setting change modes. In addition, by configuring the device to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during BB execution and normal play (a state in which BB is not being executed), players and managers can easily distinguish between BB execution and normal play (a state in which BB is not being executed), making it possible for players and managers to clearly distinguish the status of play.

As described above, the differences between when an error occurs in the lamp unit and during normal play, the differences between immediately after power is turned on and during normal play, the differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal play, the differences between the setting confirmation mode and during normal play, the differences between the setting change mode and during normal play, and the differences between when BB is being executed and during normal play may be configured to have a lighting color (element 1) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting off time (element 3) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during normal play, or may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during normal play.

<<Configuration 2>> <When an empty medal error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound when an empty medal error occurs until the error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (blinks) in a special pattern when the standby screen is displayed Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always on red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always on red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("White on for 1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue + green on for 0.2 sec → Off for 0.3 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light level Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) a sound dedicated to BB in progress. Configured as above.

<<Configuration 3>> <When medal empty error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeated four times of "red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) special sound when medal empty error occurs until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white light) Back lamp lighting mode: lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("white light on for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "blue + green light on for 0.2 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds" → "green light on for 3 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always on red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always on red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green on for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + white on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) a sound dedicated to BB in progress. Configured as above.

<<Configuration 4>><When medal empty error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lit) Back lamp lighting mode: lit with normal light Speaker sound: loop (repeatedly played) dedicated sound when medal empty error occurs until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lit) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lit) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Red lit for 0.1 sec → off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue lit for 0.1 sec → off for 0.1 sec" → "Red lit for 0.1 sec → off for 0.1 sec"" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Red on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Red on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green on for 3 sec → Off for 0.3 sec" → "Blue + white on for 1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Lit with normal light Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) a sound dedicated to when BB is in progress. Configured as above. The warning sound output from the speaker during an empty medal error and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode may be the same warning sound, and in addition to the warning sound, a voice saying "empty medal error has occurred" may be output from the speaker during an empty medal error, "setting confirmation mode in progress" may be output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and "setting change mode in progress" may be output from the speaker during the setting change mode. Similarly, for errors other than the empty medal error, a warning sound and a voice saying "XX error has occurred" may be output from the speaker.

<<Configuration 5>> <When empty medal error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: lit with normal light Speaker sound: loops (plays repeatedly) special sound when empty medal error occurs until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (not lit)) Back lamp lighting mode: lit → off (lights when normal play begins) Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (not lit)) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always on in white)Backlight illumination mode: Lights up with normal light outputSpeaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>Lamp unit illumination pattern: Pattern 13 (always on in white)Backlight illumination mode: Lights up with normal light outputSpeaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during setting change mode <BB in progress>Lamp unit illumination pattern: Pattern 5 ("White on for 1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue + green on for 0.2 sec → Off for 0.3 sec" → "Blue + green on for 3 sec → Off for 0.3 sec")Backlight illumination mode: Lights up with normal light outputSpeaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during BB in progress is looped (played repeatedly) as configured above.

<<Configuration 6>> <When medal empty error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeated four times of "red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: lit with normal light Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) special sound when medal empty error occurs until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (not lit)) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always on blue) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" → "red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" → "white light on for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "white light on for 1 second" On for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("Red on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Red on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue + green on for 0.2 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + green on for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during BB in progress is looped (played repeatedly) as configured above.

In the figure, six types of configurations, configuration 1 to configuration 6, are illustrated, but these configurations are merely examples, and the lamp unit lighting patterns, back lamp lighting modes, and sounds output from the speaker for each game situation may be combined from each configuration, or may be changed in any way. In addition, with regard to the lighting patterns of the lamp unit, it is preferable to configure it so that one of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) that is not selected during normal play is selected as the difference between when an error occurs and during normal play, the difference between immediately after power-on and during normal play, the difference between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal play, the difference between during the setting confirmation mode and during normal play, the difference between during the setting change mode and during normal play, and the difference between when BB is being executed and during normal play, which are related to the lamp unit.

In addition, in the figure, only an empty medal error is shown as an example of an error, but this is not limited to this. For display determination errors and door open errors, the differences between when an error occurs and during normal play, between immediately after power-on and during normal play, between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal play, between during setting confirmation mode and during normal play, between during setting change mode and during normal play, and between when BB is being executed and during normal play may be configured so that any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) that are not selected during normal play are selected as the differences related to the lamp unit, or any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error that has occurred, for example, any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different between an empty medal error and a display determination error.

In addition, when the replay role is stopped, the lighting mode of the lamp unit may be configured to notify the player that the symbol combination related to the replay role is stopped. Specifically, in a game executed in a specified game state, the lamp unit may be configured to light up when the replay role is won and the symbol combination related to the replay role is stopped, and any of elements 1 to 6 may be included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, but may not be included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when the replay role is not won and a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the replay role is stopped. By configuring in this way, the player can clearly recognize that he or she has won the replay role.

<<<<Configuration for opening the front door and dispensing>>> Next, the configuration for dispensing game medals applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 79. Note that "normal" in the figure indicates, for example, a case where WIN-B (common bell) is won in a "low probability state", a symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, WIN-04) is displayed in a stopped state, and 11 game medals are paid out. Also, for "payout occurring before the door is opened" and "payout occurring after the door is opened", examples are given of a case where WIN-B (common bell) is won, and a symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, WIN-04) is displayed in a stopped state. Note that the figure details a case where credits (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) are the upper limit (50 in this example).

<<Configuration 1>> <Normal Payout> A detailed description will be given of a case where a normal payout is performed in configuration 1. First, with two of the three reels stopped and the remaining reel spinning, the third stop button is pressed (pressing the third stop button is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning on), and winning 04 is displayed as stopped. After that, the third stop button becomes unpressed (the third stop button goes from pressed to unpressed when the player releases his finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that the third stop button going from pressed to unpressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button going from on to off), and a game medal corresponding to winning 04 is paid out, and a payout sound (sound B in the figure) corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output from speaker S20 for a predetermined period of time.

<When payout is performed before the door is opened> Next, a detailed description will be given of a case where payout is performed before the door is opened in configuration 1. First, when two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is spinning, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is displayed as stopped. After that, the third stop button is turned off from on, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 starts to output a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal. After that, while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 outputs a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) that notifies the user that the front door DU is open. That is, the payout sound and the front door open notification sound are output simultaneously. After that, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the payout sound ends, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. In addition, the front door DU is left open, that is, the front door open notification sound is configured to start being output when the front door DU is opened, and to end the output when a specific time has passed since the output opening even if the front door DU remains open thereafter. By configuring in this way, when the manager opens the front door DU to check or change the settings, the front door open notification sound is not prevented from continuing to be output until the setting check or setting change is completed, and the settings can be checked and changed without stress. In addition, in the same figure, the output of the front door open sound is shown to end at the same time as the output of the dispensing sound ends, but this is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the output end timing of the dispensing sound and the output end timing of the front door open sound are different.

<When a payout is performed after the door is opened> Next, a detailed description will be given of a case where a payout is performed after the door is opened in configuration 1. First, when two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning 04 is displayed stopped. After that, when the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) that notifies the speaker S20 that the front door DU is open is output. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off, the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, so that the front door opening notification sound is output. After that, when the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. After that, a specific time has passed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. After that, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the output of the dispensing sound, and the output of the dispensing sound ends.

By configuring in configuration 1 so that payout of game medals can be executed regardless of whether the front door DU is open, game medals can be paid out normally even in cases where the amusement facility manager forgets to close the front door DU (does not close it properly) when replenishing game medals in the gaming machine, and so no disadvantage is caused to the player. In addition, by configuring so that the front door open notification sound and the payout sound can be output simultaneously, the status of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. Note that when configuring as in configuration 1 above, it is preferable to use an output mode (tone, pitch, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish between the front door open notification sound and the payout sound.

<<Configuration 2>><NormalPayout> A case where normal payout is performed in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is spinning, the third stop button is pressed (pressing the third stop button is sometimes referred to as the third stop button being turned on), and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button becomes unpressed (the third stop button goes from being pressed to being unpressed by the player releasing his/her finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that the third stop button going from being pressed to being unpressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button going from being turned on to being turned off), and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and a payout sound (sound B in the figure) corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output from the speaker S20 for a predetermined time.

<When payout is performed before the door is opened> Next, a detailed description will be given of a case in configuration 2 where payout is performed before the door is opened. First, when two of the three reels are stopped and the remaining reel is spinning, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is displayed as stopped. After that, the third stop button is turned off, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 starts to output a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal. After that, while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 outputs a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) that notifies the user that the front door DU is open, and the output of the payout sound ends. After that, a specific time has passed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends while the front door open notification sound is being output.

<When a payout is performed after the door is opened> Next, a detailed description will be given of a case where a payout is performed after the door is opened in configuration 2. First, when two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is spinning, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is displayed stopped. After that, when the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) that notifies the speaker S20 that the front door DU is open is output. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off, the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output. After that, when the front door DU is open and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, but the payout sound corresponding to the payout is not output. After that, while the game medals are being paid out, a specific time has passed since the front door DU was opened, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends, and a payout sound corresponding to the winning 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the payout of the game medals corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

As in configuration 2, by configuring the payout of game medals to be executable regardless of whether the front door DU is open, game medals can be paid out normally even in cases where the manager of the gaming facility forgets to close the front door DU (does not close it properly) when replenishing game medals in the gaming machine, and the player is not disadvantaged. Also, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound not to be output at the same time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to judge the status of the gaming machine due to the tones of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound being mixed. Note that in configuration 2, the payout sound may be output even while the front door opening notification sound is being output, and the volume of the payout sound may be relatively small (including volume 0) compared to the volume of the front door opening notification sound.

<<Other configurations>> When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, the configuration may be such that the insertion of a game medal, the operation of the max bet button (in this example, the bet button D220), and the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 (sometimes referred to as the max bet lamp), the insertion possible lamp, and the bet lamps (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp) are valid even while the front door DU is open. In other words, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credits are increased or game medals are bet). When configured in this way, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a betting sound (or a medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of a gaming medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) (even when the front door DU is not open, a betting sound corresponding to the insertion of a gaming medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), or the speaker S20 may be configured not to output a betting sound corresponding to the insertion of a gaming medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button).

<<<<Configurations Related to Power Off and Payout>>> The following is an example of the effect that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example when the power is turned off while the third stop is pressed when a small win is won. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments of this example. The configuration detailed below illustrates a case where the credit is at the upper limit (e.g., 50), in other words, a case where game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 when a small win is won. The effect of the flashing reel backlight S30 is sometimes referred to as a backlamp effect.

<Configuration 1> In a game in which a small prize (for example, the common bell for prize 04) has been won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small prize → a power outage occurs while the third stop button is still pressed (e.g., a power outage occurs in the game arcade) → power is restored while the third stop button is still pressed → when power is restored, the game medal corresponding to the small prize is paid out. The above action may be configured to occur.

In addition, if the game progresses without a power outage and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a small prize, a backlight effect based on the winning of a small prize can be executed and a payout sound based on the winning of a small prize can be output. On the other hand, as in configuration 1 described above, if the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a small prize, the backlight effect based on the winning of a small prize is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of a small prize is not output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure it so that the player is not surprised by the sudden execution of the backlight effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

By configuring in this manner, even if a power outage occurs while the player is pressing the third stop and the power is immediately restored, it is possible to execute the payout of game medals based on the winning of a minor prize, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage. Furthermore, even if any of the specified operating members controlled by the main control board M (e.g., the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc.) is operated, the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed as long as other specified operating members are not operated. For example, when recovering from a power outage, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the payout of game medals based on the winning may not be executed. Furthermore, in such a configuration, (1) the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed by subsequently releasing the third stop button or the start lever (by subsequently releasing only one of the operating members controlled by the main control board M) or (2) the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed by subsequently releasing the third stop button and the start lever (by subsequently turning off all the operating members controlled by the main control board M).

Examples of situations in which the above-mentioned power outage may occur include when the power switch goes from on to off, when the cable supplying power is broken, when a power outage occurs in the amusement center, when the cable supplying power is pulled out of the socket, etc. In any case, the above-mentioned configuration can be applied.

<Configuration 2> In a game in which a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small prize → the front door DU is opened while the third stop button is still pressed (opening the front door DU causes a door open error) and a power outage occurs (such as turning off the power switch) → the power is restored while the third stop button is still pressed (such as turning on the power switch) → the front door DU is closed while the third stop button is still pressed to cancel the door open error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in a specified direction) → the door open error is cancelled and the game medal corresponding to the small prize is paid out. The above action may be configured to occur.

In addition, if the game progresses without a power outage and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a minor prize, a backlight effect based on the winning of a minor prize can be executed and a payout sound based on the winning of a minor prize can be output. On the other hand, as in configuration 2 described above, if the door opening error is released while the third stop button is pressed and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a minor prize, the backlight effect based on the winning of a minor prize is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of a minor prize is not output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure it so that the player is not surprised by the sudden execution of the backlight effect and the payout sound after the door opening error is released.

<Configuration 3> In a game in which a small prize (for example, the common bell for prize 04) has been won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small prize → the power is cut off while the third stop button is still pressed (e.g., a power outage occurs in the game arcade) → the finger is released from the third stop button (the third stop button is changed from on to off) → power is restored → When power is restored, the game medal corresponding to the small prize is paid out. The above configuration may also be performed.

In addition, if the game progresses without a power outage and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a small prize, a backlight effect based on the winning of a small prize can be executed and a payout sound based on the winning of a small prize can be output. On the other hand, as in configuration 3 described above, if a power outage occurs while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a small prize, the backlight effect based on the winning of a small prize is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of a small prize is not output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure it so that the player is not surprised by the sudden execution of the backlight effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored after the power outage.

In addition, when the configuration is configured as in the above configuration 1, 2, or 3, the payout process of the game medals based on the winning (the process executed in the game progress control process) may be executed as a process after the power is restored from the power failure before executing the process of determining whether the third stop button is pressed (whether it is on or not) (the process executed in the game progress control process). Also, as described above, the power failure may occur while the third stop button is pressed in a situation where a symbol combination that results in a winning minor role is displayed in a stopped state, and then the power failure is restored while the third stop button is pressed, and then the third stop button is released to execute the payout of the game medals based on the winning. In such a configuration, the payout sound corresponding to the payout and the backlight effect may not be output (if the payout of the game medals based on the winning is executed without going through a power failure, the payout sound is output and the backlight effect is executed).

<<<<Configurations related to setting confirmation mode and payout>>> The following is an example of the action when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is pressed when a small win is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all of the embodiments of this example. The configuration described in detail below illustrates a case where the credit is the upper limit (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 due to the winning of a small win. The configuration described in detail below illustrates a case where the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off in a situation where the reels are stopped, the power is turned on, and various operating members controlled by the main control board side such as the start lever, all stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), and the settlement button are not operated (not on), and the setting confirmation mode can be switched to. In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device S40 may be configured to notify the fact that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may not be configured to notify the same.

<Configuration 1> In a game in which a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small prize → the front door DU is opened while the third stop button is still pressed (opening the front door DU causes a door open error) and the setting key switch is turned on (does not transition to setting confirmation mode) → the front door DU is closed while the third stop button is still pressed to release the door open error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in a specified direction) → The above configuration may be used without transitioning to setting confirmation mode even if the third stop button is released.

In addition, in such a configuration, it may be configured so that betting is possible while the setting key switch remains on, the reels can start spinning by operating the start lever while a bet has been placed, and the reels can be stopped by operating the stop button (allowing the game to proceed). In addition, it may be configured so that betting is not possible (game medals cannot be inserted) while the setting key switch remains on, or betting is possible but the reels do not start spinning even when the start lever is operated. In other words, it may be configured so that the game cannot be played while the setting key switch remains on. In such a configuration, it is noted that the display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, it may be configured so that the setting confirmation mode can be entered when the front door DU is opened while the setting key switch remains on (after the action of the above configuration 1 occurs) and the pattern combination related to the replay is not displayed as stopped, or it may be configured so that the setting confirmation mode is not entered when the front door DU is opened while the pattern combination related to the replay is displayed as stopped. In addition, when the front door DU is opened and the setting confirmation mode is entered, the performance display device S40 may be configured to display the fact that the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

<<<<Configuration for lighting the max bet lamp>>> Next, referring to Figures 80 to 83, the action for lighting the max bet lamp (sometimes referred to as the bet button lamp S50) applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail. The configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which gaming medals can be inserted even when the replay stop display is on. The max bet lamp is a lamp that is located inside or near the max bet button, and is controlled by the sub-control board S or the main control board M, and indicates that operation of the max bet button is valid. In addition, in the same figure, the following is shown: ON when the MAX BET lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF when the MAX BET lamp is off, ON when the 1 BET lamp D211 is lit, OFF when the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2 BET lamp D212 is lit, OFF when the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3 BET lamp D213 is lit, OFF when the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing), and OFF when the start lamp D180 is off. Also, the figure shows an example in which game medals are inserted one by one through the medal insertion port D170 (a sensor that detects game medals inserted into the medal insertion port D170, such as the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, etc., detects the game medals one by one), but the bet button may be a 1 bet button that allows one game medal to bet with one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button, or a 2 bet button that allows two game medals to bet with one operation (off → on). In such a configuration, there is no problem in applying the same effect as inserting one game medal into the medal insertion port D170 (detection of one game medal by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, or the second insertion sensor D30s) to a single press of the 1 bet button.

<<Configuration 1>> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. When no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, and the MAX BET lamp is turned off. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned on and the 1 BET lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, and the MAX BET lamp is turned off. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned on and the 2 BET lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, and the MAX BET lamp is turned off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on, and the START lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the Max Bet lamp to go "off → on" each time a gaming medal is inserted, operation of the Max Bet button is invalid during the period in which the gaming medal is being guided from the medal insertion port D170 into the gaming machine, and by turning off the Max Bet lamp during this guidance period, the period in which the Max Bet button is valid can be accurately notified. Furthermore, by accurately notifying the player of the period in which the Max Bet button is valid, the player can know the period in which the Max Bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of gaming medals is invalid, and therefore it is possible to prevent a situation in which a gaming medal is inserted during this invalid period and the gaming medal is not inserted normally, and a fast-paced game progress can be achieved.

In addition, as in configuration 1, by configuring the 3 bet lamp D213 to light up after the third gaming medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out, the max bet lamp is off when the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, so the player can clearly recognize that the specified number of 3 gaming medals has been bet.

<<Configuration 2>> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. When no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 turns on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 turns on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, the 3 BET lamp D213 turns on, and the START lamp D180 turns on. After that, the MAX BET lamp turns off.

As in configuration 2, the MAX BET lamp is turned off after the third gaming medal is inserted and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, by configuring the 3 BET lamp D213 to turn on as soon as possible after the player operates the MAX BET button, the 3 BET lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, which allows the game to proceed smoothly and prevents the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance or behavior due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 3>> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 turns on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 turns on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp is off, and the START lamp D180 turns on. After that, the 3 BET lamp D213 turns on.

As in configuration 3, when the third gaming medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out before the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up, the start lamp D180 lights up at approximately the same time. This allows the player to be notified quickly that the next game can start, making the game progress smoothly and preventing the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance and behavior due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 4>> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, and the MAX BET lamp is turned off. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned on and the 1 BET lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, and the MAX BET lamp is turned off. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned on and the 2 BET lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, and the MAX BET lamp is turned off. After that, the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on and the START lamp D180 is turned on.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the MAX BET lamp is flashing, the 1 BET lamp D211 is lit, the 2 BET lamp D212 is lit, the 3 BET lamp D213 is lit, and the START lamp D180 is turned off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, and the 2 BET lamp D212 and the 3 BET lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, and the 2 BET lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on and the START lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned off before the timing when the MAX BET lamp turns on and off when it flashes (in the middle of being turned on). In addition, in the figure, the example shows a case where the Max Bet lamp is on and off repeatedly, and a third game medal is inserted, so the Max Bet lamp turns on and off when the third game medal is inserted. However, if the Max Bet lamp is off and a third game medal is inserted, the Max Bet lamp will remain off after the third game medal is inserted.

As in configuration 5, in a situation where no bet is made, the 1 bet lamp D211 and the 2 bet lamp D21
Even if the 2 and 3 bet lamps D213 are all configured to be lit, the player can grasp the current game situation (how many game medals have been bet) by varying the combination of lighting/extinguishing of the start lamp D180, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 depending on the number of game medals inserted (1st, 2nd, 3rd).

<<Configuration 6>> Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, and at the timing when the insertion of the gaming medal is detected (earlier than the timing when the START lamp D180 and the 3 BET lamp D213 are turned on in configuration 2), the START lamp D180 is turned on, and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned off.

As in configuration 6, the MAX BET lamp is turned off after the third gaming medal is inserted and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, by configuring the 3 BET lamp D213 to turn on as soon as possible after the player operates the MAX BET button, the 3 BET lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, which allows the game to proceed smoothly and prevents the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance or behavior due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 turns on. After that, the START lamp D180 turns on (starts blinking). After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 turns on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp turns off, and the 3 BET lamp D213 turns on.

As in configuration 6, after the third gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp is turned off and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on at approximately the same time. In other words, by configuring the 3 BET lamp D213 to turn on as soon as possible after the player operates the MAX BET button, the 3 BET lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, which allows the game to proceed smoothly and prevents the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance or behavior due to slow operation.

In the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 4, 6, and 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but as long as the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid, the max bet lamp may be configured to flash as in configuration 5. Also, in configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be configured to flash as in configuration 7. Similarly, in configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid, the start lamp D180 may be on = the start lamp D180 is flashing. Also, in configuration 7, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit. Also, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled by the sub-control board S side or the main control board M side.

<<<Configuration when settlement button is operated>>> Next, referring to Figures 84 to 87, the action when the settlement button D60 applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example is operated will be described in detail. The following configuration illustrates a case where three gaming medals have been bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, ON indicates that the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF indicates that the max bet lamp is off, ON indicates that a settlement button operation has been newly detected, OFF indicates that a settlement button operation has not been detected or that a settlement button operation has not been newly detected, ON indicates that the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, OFF indicates that the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, ON indicates that the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit, and OFF indicates that the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. The illustration shows that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 from OFF → ON → OFF, the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit is ON, the 3 bet lamp D213 is off is OFF, the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking) is ON, the start lamp D180 is off is OFF, the insert ready lamp D300 is lit (or blinking) is ON, the insert ready lamp D300 is off is OFF, and the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 from OFF → ON → OFF. Also, in the figure, an example is shown of inserting game medals one by one from the medal insertion port D170, but as the bet button, a 1 bet button that can bet one game medal with one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button, or a 2 bet button that can bet two game medals with one operation (off → on) may be provided, and in such a configuration, there is no problem in applying the same action as inserting one game medal into the medal insertion port D170 to a single press of the 1 bet button. Note that the configuration exemplified below may be configured so that game medals stored in the gaming machine can be liquidated even when the replay stop display is on, or may be configured so that game medals stored in the gaming machine cannot be liquidated when the replay stop display is on. In addition, the condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the bet game medals from the discharge port D240 (the condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated) may be that the settlement button has changed from "on to off," or that it has turned "on," or that it has been "on for 0.5 seconds or more."

<<Configuration 1>> First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insert possible lamp D300 are turned off, and the three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then, the four game medals that are credits stored in the gaming machine and displayed on the credit number display device D200 are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, the insertion possible lamp D300 lights up when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal that changes the display of the credit number display device D200 from 1 to 0) is paid out. Note that in the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the settlement process can be executed by turning the settlement button D60 from OFF to ON in a situation in which the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during a valid period), but the manner in which the settlement process is executed is not limited to this, and for example, the settlement process may be configured to be executed when the settlement button D60 turns from OFF to ON in a situation in which the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during a valid period) and the ON state continues for a predetermined time or more (when the settlement button D60 is pressed and held) (the same applies to Figures 85 to 87).

As in configuration 1, by configuring the bet medals to be settled (paid out) before the credits, even if the player leaves the seat immediately after confirming that the credits have reached 0 when finishing the game, the player will not forget to settle the bet medals. In particular, when finishing the game with a small number of credits, such as 1 to 2, the player is relatively likely to finish the game without winning enough medals, and the player's attention may be distracted. In such a case, in order to prevent the player from suffering an unintended disadvantage, the bet medals are configured to be settled (paid out) before the credits, and because of this configuration, in configuration 1, the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, 3 bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and insertion possible lamp D300 are turned off before the credit number displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted.

<<Configuration 2>> Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp is on and the three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the insert possible lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insert possible lamp D300 is turned on. In addition, in configuration 2, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medals are paid out but credits are not paid out, and if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once when the number of bet game medals is 0, credits are paid out.

As in configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the game medals that have been bet are paid out but credits are not paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, the max bet lamp is turned on at a timing before the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the deposit possible lamp D300 are turned off.By this, if the player operates the settlement button by mistake, only the game medals that have been bet are paid out, and since the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits, the game can be progressed smoothly by being informed as soon as possible that the max bet button can be operated.

<<Configuration 3>> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (OFF → ON), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 are turned off. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then, the four game medals that are credits stored in the gaming machine and displayed on the credit number display device D200 are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, after the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the 3 bet lamp D213 → 2 bet lamp D212 → 1 bet lamp D211 are turned off in this order. In addition, when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal that changes the display of the credit number display device D200 from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on.

<<Configuration 4>> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 are turned off, and the three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insert possible lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp is turned on. In addition, in configuration 4, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medals are paid out but credits are not paid out, and if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once when the number of bet game medals is 0, credits are paid out.

As in configuration 4, by configuring the machine to pay out the bet medals but not pay out credits, and by configuring the max bet lamp to light up after the insert possible lamp D300 lights up, if a player bets three medals and then wishes to change to a one medal bet, the player will operate the settlement button D60 once to settle the three bet medals, and then insert one medal or operate the one bet button. In such a case, by lighting the insert possible lamp D300 before the max bet lamp, the game can proceed smoothly.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. When three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insert possible lamp D300 are turned off, and the three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). After that, the insert possible lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp is turned on. In addition, in configuration 5, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medals are paid out but credits are not paid out, and if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once when the number of bet game medals is 0, credits are paid out.

<<Configuration 6>> Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. When three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process starts, the insert possible lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off. The three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then the four game medals, which are credits stored in the gaming machine and are displayed on the credit number display device D200, are paid out from the discharge port D240. After the settlement button D60 is operated, the 3 bet lamp D213 → 2 bet lamp D212 → 1 bet lamp D211 are turned off in that order. After the last game medal (the game medal that changes the display on the credit number display device D200 from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on. The max bet lamp remains off.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals have been bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. Then, when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 goes out. Then, the insert possible lamp D300 goes out and the three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts). Then, the 3 bet lamp D213 goes out. Then, the 2 bet lamp D212 goes out. Then, the 1 bet lamp D211 goes out. Then, the insert possible lamp D300 goes out. The max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet medals are paid out but credits are not paid out. In contrast, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once when the number of bet medals is 0, credits are paid out.

<<<<<Differences in operation depending on timing of power cut>>>> Figure 88 is a timing chart that explains the operation of the main control board M and the sub-control board S depending on the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut. Figure 88(a) is a timing chart that shows a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut, and Figure 88(b) is a timing chart that shows a second aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut.

The first mode is a mode in which a power outage occurs after the main program of the main control board M or the sub-program of the sub-control board S starts to execute. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which a power outage occurs before the main program of the main control board or the sub-program of the sub-control board starts to execute.

In this example, a power outage is a state in which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and may be a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state in which the power cable is unplugged, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, or a power outage. It also includes cases in which power supply is stopped unintentionally in an amusement arcade. The timing at which a power outage occurs is the timing at which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing at which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing at which the power cable is unplugged, the timing at which the power cable is disconnected, or the timing at which a power outage occurs. In this example, "the occurrence of a power outage" means that the power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects the occurrence of a power outage.

In Figures 88(a) and 88(b), ΔT1 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes called the off level) after a power outage occurs, ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, ΔT3 is the time from the time when the power outage occurs until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level, ΔT4 is the time from the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started, and ΔT5 is the time from the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the following relationships are established: ΔT5<ΔT1, ΔT2<ΔT3, ΔT5>ΔT3, ΔT4<ΔT5.

<<<<First mode>>><<Change in power supply state>> Power supply to the gaming machine begins at time t1, and a power outage occurs at time t3, causing power supply to the gaming machine to stop.

<<Operation of the main control board>> <Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board> As described above, power supply to the gaming machine starts at time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board at time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Note that in the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the time from when power supply to the main control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, but this is not limited thereto, and the time from when power supply to the main control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (to be random). Also, a case is illustrated in which the time from when power supply to the sub-control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, but this is not limited thereto, and the time from when power supply to the sub-control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (to be random). Even in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the minimum time (minimum time) from when power supply to the main control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level to be longer than the maximum time (maximum time) from when power supply to the sub-control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

Thereafter, a power outage occurs at time t3. Due to this power outage, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually drops from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and becomes approximately constant at the maintenance level from time t4. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, and even if a power outage occurs, the power supply unit E can output an approximately constant power supply voltage (maintenance level) for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5) (the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the voltage at the maintenance level is being supplied). In this example, the time during which the maintenance level is maintained from the start of execution of the power outage processing (detection of the power outage) (the time from time t4 to time t5) is a period of time that allows the timer interrupt processing to be executed at least 20 times (the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) is executed twice).
In the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is set to a time that allows the timer interrupt process to be executed at least 20 times, but the time from time t3 to time t5, in other words, the time from when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (the power outage occurs) until the power outage process cannot be executed, may be set to a time that allows the timer interrupt process to be executed at least 20 times.

Then, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and becomes the off level at time t6.

<Starting of main program> The main program executed by the main control board starts at time ta, which is ΔT5 after time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. Execution of this main program executes the main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 described above.

As described above, if the setting key switch is off in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046, and 1300 are executed, and a timer interrupt is started by the process of step 1040.

Also, if the setting key switch is on in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Starting a timer interrupt> If the setting key switch is off, a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13. If the setting key switch is on, a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1104 in FIG. 14. After the timer interrupt is started, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed at every predetermined period T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power outage> When a power outage occurs and the voltage continues to drop to a certain voltage, a power outage detection signal is output from the power supply unit E. The main control board M has an input port to which the power outage detection signal is input. The power outage detection signal is a high-level signal when no power outage has occurred, and is a low-level signal when a power outage has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects a power outage in the judgment process of step 1604 in FIG. 32. Specifically, the main control board M determines that a power outage has occurred if the data read from the input port is a low-level signal both times during two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

In this way, in this example, a power outage is detected by two successive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, if a power outage occurs after a timer interrupt is started by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. 14, the power outage can be detected. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs before the timer interrupt is started, it may not be possible to detect the power outage.

In this way, if a power outage occurs after execution of the main program has started, and a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or step 1104 in FIG. 14, the power outage can be detected by the interrupt processing. When a power outage is detected, the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<Operation of the sub-control board>> <Starting of sub-program> The sub-program executed on the sub-control board S starts from time tb, which is when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage became constant. Execution of this sub-program executes the sub-side program start process shown in Figure 38 above. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than the above-mentioned ΔT5, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S can receive commands sent from the main control board M without missing any. In the figure, the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the start of power supply to the main control board M and the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the start of power supply to the sub-control board S are shown as the same time tb, but the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the start of power supply to the main control board M to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to be different from the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the sub-control board S to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level. Even in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the sub-control board S to when the main program of the main control board M is started to be longer than the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the sub-control board S to when the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started, and it is preferable to configure the time from when the power supply voltage on the main control board M side reaches the supply level to when the main program of the main control board M is started to be longer than the time from when the power supply voltage on the sub-control board S side reaches the supply level to when the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started.

<<<<Second Mode>>> Figure 88 (b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut-off. The second mode is a mode in which power cut-off occurs before execution of the main program executed by the main control board M begins. In other words, this is a mode in which power cut-off occurs before ΔT5 has elapsed since time t2, when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

Thus, in the second mode, the power outage occurs before the main program starts to execute (before the timer interrupt is activated), so the main program cannot detect that the power outage has occurred, and the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 is not executed, causing the gaming machine to stop due to the power outage (the supply voltage reaches a low level).

<<Operation of the main control board>> <Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board> Power supply to the gaming machine begins at time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E begins supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

Then, a power outage occurs at time t13. Due to this power outage, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually drops from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and becomes approximately constant at the maintenance level from time t14. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M then gradually drops from time t15 and becomes the off level at time t16. For convenience of explanation, the voltage level is assumed to be approximately constant at the maintenance level, but in reality, the voltage level continues to gradually drop from the occurrence of the power outage, falls below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operational guarantee voltage level), and then becomes 0. In other words, in reality, the design is such that it takes 20 or more interrupts from the detection of the power outage until the voltage falls below the operational guarantee voltage level. It may also be designed to take 20 or more interrupts from the occurrence of the power outage until the voltage falls below the operational guarantee voltage level.

Thus, in the second aspect, execution of the main program is started after a power outage occurs, but the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be at the off level before a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or step 1104 in FIG. 14. Note that if a power outage occurs just before the main program is started (for example, the timing at which the main program is started after the time for one timer interrupt process has elapsed), the timer interrupt process can be started and the power outage process can be executed without any problems.

In addition, in the figure, the first and second modes are illustrated, but the configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example may be as follows: (1) A power interruption occurs immediately after power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after the time has elapsed since power supply to the main control board M is started and one timer interrupt process is executed) → the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level before execution of the main program is started (execution of the main program is not started); (2) Power supply to the main control board M is started → A power interruption occurs immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, after the time has elapsed since the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level and one timer interrupt process is executed) → the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level before execution of the main program is started (execution of the main program is not started).

<<<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state>>> Figure 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and Figure 89 (b) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the second mode.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first mode>> <State 1> First, in state 1 of FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine is in the normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being played or a state in which a game can be played, the setting key switch is "off," and the "power supply state" is "on."

<State 2> In state 2, a power outage occurs with the setting key switch remaining "off," and the "power supply state" becomes "off." At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in normal mode is saved in the memory area as the return address.

<State 3> In state 3, the "power supply state" remains "off" and the setting key switch is operated to switch it to "on."

<State 4> Next, in state 4, when the setting key switch is "on" and power is supplied, the "power supply state" switches to "on". When the "power supply state" turns "on", the main control board START (power on) process in FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, in the first mode, a power cut occurs after execution of the main program has started, and the main control board START (power on) process in FIG. 13 can be executed before the power cut occurs (next state 5).

In the judgment process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, and the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100, transitioning from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the memory area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. 14. In this way, when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", the mode transitions to the setting change mode, and the setting value can then be changed by operating the setting change switch or start lever. In addition, the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32 sends a setting change start command to the sub-control board S, making it possible for the sub-control board S to notify that the setting change mode is in progress.

<State 5> Next, in the setting change mode, if a power outage occurs while the setting change device control process is being executed, the "power supply state" changes to "off." When a power outage occurs, the power outage process in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is saved in the memory area as the return address by the processing in step 1902.

<State 6> In state 6, with the "power supply state" remaining in the "off" state, the setting key switch is operated to switch the setting key switch to "off".

<State 7> In state 7, with the setting key switch in the "off" position, power is supplied and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" is switched to "on", the main control board START (power on) process of Figure 13 is executed. In the judgment process of step 1014 in Figure 13, the setting key switch is judged to be "off", and the process of step 1022 is executed. This process of step 1022 returns to the return address saved in the memory area in state 5, and execution begins with the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the memory area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the processing of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Thus, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the basic action when transitioning to the setting change mode is to turn on the power supply by turning on the setting key switch while the power supply is off, but even if the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting change mode is stored as the return address and the setting change mode is entered. By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs during the setting change mode (for example, if the game arcade experiences a power outage), it is possible to return to the state before the power outage, making it difficult for abnormal operation of the gaming machine to occur.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second mode>> <State 1> In state 1 of FIG. 89(b), similar to the first mode, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being played or a state in which a game can be played, the setting key switch is "off," and the "power supply state" is "on."

<State 2> In state 2, as in the first mode, a power outage occurs with the setting key switch remaining "off," and the "power supply state" becomes "off." At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state is saved in the memory area as the return address.

<State 3> In state 3, the "power supply state" remains "off" and the setting key switch is operated to switch it to "on."

<State 4> In state 4, the setting key switch is in the "on" position, power is supplied, and the "power supply state" switches to "on."

<State 5> In state 5, when the setting key switch is "on", a power outage occurs and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second mode, a power outage occurs before the execution of the main program executed by the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to state 4 becomes "on" (for example, after the time for executing one timer interrupt process has elapsed), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, before the main control board START (power on) process in FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is started), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level (state 5). For this reason, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the memory area is not changed, and the return address saved in state 2 is saved in the memory area as it is.

<State 6> Next, in state 6, while the "power supply state" remains "off," the setting key switch is operated to switch the setting key switch to "off."

<State 7> In state 7, when the setting key switch is "off", power is supplied and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" is "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the judgment process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, it is judged that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. This process of step 1022 returns to the return address saved in the memory area in state 2, and execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the memory area in state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the second aspect, even if the "power supply state" is "on" with the setting key switch "on", if the power supply is "off" before the main program of the main control board M is executed, it is configured not to transition to the setting change mode even if the power supply is "on" after the setting key switch is "off". By configuring the gaming machine in the second manner, if a power outage occurs immediately after the gaming machine is turned on, there is a possibility that an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine if the gaming machine is switched into the setting change mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured not to switch into the setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on, making it possible to configure a gaming machine that is less likely to malfunction.

<<<<Control of medal award and payout sound output control>> As mentioned above, when a small win is won (when a symbol combination corresponding to a small win is stopped and displayed), the player is awarded the number of medals to be paid out that corresponds to the small win.

<<Medal Awarding Process>> The process of awarding medals includes a process of adding up the number of credits and awarding them, and a process of actually paying out gaming medals to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Processing for adding credits> When the current number of credits is less than the maximum number of credits that can be saved (e.g., less than 50), the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits. This process for adding credits is executed by the calculation processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout process> When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum number of credits that can be stored, the CPU C100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H, thereby granting medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<<Medal awarding modes>> Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be awarded, there are three types of modes: a mode in which only the credit number addition process is performed, a mode in which only the game medal payout process is performed, and a mode in which the credit number addition process is followed by the game medal payout process (both the credit number addition process and the medal payout process are performed).

<Mode in which only credit number addition processing is performed> If the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of credits that can be stored, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits that can be stored. If the maximum number of credits is not reached even after adding the number of payouts, only the credit number addition processing is performed and the medal awarding processing ends.

<Mode of transition from credit number addition process to game medal payout process> When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from credit number addition process to game medal payout process. The CPUC100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals, which is obtained by subtracting the added amount of credits from the payout number, from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added amount of credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning minor role.

In this way, when transitioning from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Medal payout process only> If the current number of credits is already the maximum number of credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 to pay out the number of medals from the medal payout device H.

<<Specific Example>> For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and 5 medals are to be awarded to the player, first, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the number of credits. Specifically, the CPUC100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device changes from 47 to 48 (first credit (time t1)) to 49 (second credit (time t2)) to 50 (third credit (time t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of credits that can be saved (50 medals) is reached, and no more credits can be added.

Next, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and pays out the remaining two medals from the medal payout device H, which is the amount of medals to be paid out (5 medals minus the three medals equivalent to the credit addition).

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process.

<<Various Times>> <Unit Processing Time for Credit Addition Process and Game Medal Payout Process> In the credit addition process by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, it takes a unit processing time a to increase the number of credits from m to m+1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2 - time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first credit) to 49 (second credit), and it takes time t3 - time t2 = a to increase the number of credits from 49 (second credit) to 50 (third credit). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is approximately constant.

Furthermore, in the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n+1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6 - time t4 = c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the process of paying out game medals, the unit processing time c is approximately constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined as the difference in timing between two successive addition processes. For example, unit processing time a is the difference between the timing (time t1) of the addition process (first image) from 47 to 48 and the timing (time t2) of the addition process (second image) from 48 to 49, or the difference between the timing (time t2) of the addition process (second image) from 48 to 49 and the timing (time t3) of the addition process (third image) from 49 to 50.

Furthermore, one unit processing time c can be defined as the difference in timing between the start of two successive payout processes. For example, unit processing time c is the difference between the start of processing for the fifth coin (time t6) and the start of the addition process for the fourth coin (time t4). In this way, unit processing times a and c can be defined to have a constant cycle. Note that the following definitions and the configuration illustrated in Figure 90 all exemplify the case where game medals are paid out when there is a sufficient amount of game medals stored in the medal payout device H and game medals are placed in all of the grooves of the disk D50.

The timing of the start of the payout process such as t4 and t6 is as follows:
(1) t4 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 changes from on to off when the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 changes from on to off when the fifth game medal is paid out; (2) t4 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on when the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on when the fifth game medal is paid out; (3) t4 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 changes from on to off when the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing when the second payout sensor H2 changes from on to off when the fifth game medal is paid out; (4) t4 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 changes from off to on when the fourth game medal is paid out. , t6 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 turns from off to on due to the payout of the fifth medal, (5) t4 is the timing when a part of the fourth payout medal is paid out from the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when a part of the fifth payout medal is paid out from the disk H50, (6) t4 is the timing when all of the fourth payout medal is paid out from the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when all of the fifth payout medal is paid out from the disk H50, (7) In the case where the payout process is executed for each payout of one medal, t4 is the start timing of the payout process for the fourth medal, and t6 is the start timing of the payout process for the fifth medal. The above configuration may be used. Details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings described above are merely design values, some deviations may occur when the gaming machine is actually in operation, and even in such cases, the comparison of time values and timings described in detail in this example are comparisons of design values. In addition, regardless of which of the above configurations is adopted, it is possible to configure the comparison of time values described below to be valid.

<Switching time e from credit number addition process to game medal payout process> As described above, the credit number is added until the credit number reaches the maximum number of credits stored, and if not all of the payout number has been awarded, the process switches to game medal payout process. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process.

<<Time comparison>>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c> The unit processing time a described above is different from unit processing time c. Unit processing time a is a time determined by the calculation processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M, and unit processing time c is made up of both the time required for the calculation processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. It is possible to make unit processing time c longer than unit processing time a. In this way, payout can be accurately controlled, including the drive time of the medal payout device H.

As mentioned above, the time required to drive the medal payout device H can be adjusted to make the unit processing time c equal to the unit processing time a. This makes it possible to speed up the payout process.

<Switching time e> The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By making the switching time e longer, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and to smoothly switch from the calculation process of the CPU C100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40.

The switching time e can also be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately, increasing the consumption of game medals, increasing the profits of the gaming facility, and improving the operating efficiency of the gaming machines.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the payout process of the game medals, the payout does not occur at a fixed cycle, and it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and anticipation as the game medals begin to be paid out into the medal tray.

The switching time e can also be made to coincide with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to coincide with the unit processing time a, medals can be awarded to the player at regular intervals, and the player can be assured that the process of adding credits and the process of paying out game medals result in the same amount of medals.

<<Output of game media dispensing sound>> When the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the credit addition process (time t1), it outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S. Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game media dispensing sound from the speaker S20.

In addition, when the payout of the game medals is completed (time t7), the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub-control board S. Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub-control board S ends the output of the game media provision sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and judges whether or not all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning minor role have been awarded to the player. When the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges that all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning minor role have been awarded, it ends the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S and ends the output of the game media provision sound from the speaker S20. In addition, if the game media dispensing sound is configured to be repeatedly played (output) at a fixed cycle, the output of the game media dispensing sound may be configured to immediately end when the sub-control board S receives the payout end command, or the output of the game media dispensing sound may be configured to end when the cycle of the game media dispensing sound output at the time the sub-control board S receives the payout end command ends.

The game medium granting sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by playing the unit granting sound data at least once. The unit granting sound data is pre-stored in the RAM of the sub-control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the playback time for one playback of the unit granting sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the unit granting sound data from the RAM and outputs the game medium granting sound from the speaker S20 by repeatedly playing the unit granting sound data multiple times from when the payout start command is received until when the payout end command is received.

<First Mode> The first mode of the game media dispensing sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit dispensing sound data is repeatedly played every playback time d from when the payout start command is received. By playing in this manner, the game media dispensing sound is output at a constant cycle. As described above, even when switching from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the game media dispensing sound is output at a constant cycle, so the player does not feel uncomfortable about the payout, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security by showing him or her that the credit number addition process and the game medal payout process both grant the same value.

<Second Mode> The second mode of the game medium dispensing sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which unit granting sound data is played every playback time d from when a payout start command is received, unit granting sound data is played for time f after the credit number addition process is completed, and then playback of the unit granting sound data is started again at time t4 when the game medal payout process begins. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium dispensing sound is output at a timing different from the fixed cycle, which gives the player a sense of excitement and anticipation as the game medals begin to be paid out into the medal tray.

If the hopper H40 runs out of game medals while game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H and a hopper error occurs (for example, if the processing of step 1279 is judged to be Yes), the sub-control board S stops outputting the game medium dispensing sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and it becomes possible to pay out, the main control board M again transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium dispensing sound. It is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium dispensing sound will continue to be output, but the volume of the game medium dispensing sound may be output at a lower volume (volume = 0) compared to the volume of the sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred, and when the hopper error is released, the output of the sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred is terminated and the volume of the game medium dispensing sound is returned to its original volume.

<<<<Arrangement of integrated circuits on the board>> Figure 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. Figure 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a printed circuit board MP that is roughly plate-like and rectangular. The front side of the printed circuit board MP is mainly equipped with the CPUC100, ICs, resistors, connectors, etc., while the back side of the printed circuit board MP is mainly formed with a circuit pattern made of conductors. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) has a rectangular shape consisting of two long ends ML1 and ML2 that are parallel to each other and run along the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 that are parallel to each other and run along the lateral direction.

In this example, the main control board M is mounted so as to stand upright within the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is mounted in an upright position, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged horizontally, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged vertically. The long end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the long end ML2 is located on the lower side. Furthermore, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end MS1 is located to the left of the short end MS2, and the short end MS2 is located to the right of the short end MS1.

Hereinafter, the long end ML1 side will be referred to as the upper side, the long end ML2 side will be referred to as the lower side, the short end MS1 side will be referred to as the left side, and the short end MS2 side will be referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100> CPUC100 has an elongated shape, with a longitudinal length of CLL and a lateral length of CSL. CPUC100 has multiple pins (not shown), which are formed to protrude from the main body. When CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by the multiple pins, and different electrical signals flow through the multiple pins. For this reason, when attaching CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, CPUC100 needs to be attached in the correct orientation to allow CPUC100 to perform the desired operation. The first pin of CPUC100 (1P shown in FIG. 91) is used as a reference pin for positioning CPUC100. A mark for visually identifying the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually identifying the orientation of CPUC100 are formed on the main body of CPUC100.

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in Fig. 91, by positioning the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 is positioned in the same direction as the IC described below, and the mistake of mounting the CPUC 100 in the wrong direction can be reduced when mounting the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP.

Furthermore, various text information (not shown) such as the model number and manufacturer name are generally printed on the main body of the CPUC100. The text information is printed along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC100, away from the first pin. It is preferable that the text information such as the model number and manufacturer name be easily visible when the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by positioning the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 can be positioned in an orientation that makes it easy to view the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc.

When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC 100 increase counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP.

<IC> Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, with a length in the longitudinal direction being ILL and a length in the lateral direction being ISL. Like the CPUC100, the IC also has multiple pins (not shown), which are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by the multiple pins, and different electrical signals flow through the multiple pins. For this reason, when attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in the correct orientation so that the IC will perform the desired operation. For this reason, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for positioning the IC. A mark is formed on the main body of the IC to visually identify the first pin (1P), and a notch (not shown) is formed to visually identify the orientation of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Furthermore, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the ICs so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, the orientation of all ICs is aligned, and mistakes such as installing the IC in the wrong orientation can be reduced when installing the ICs on the printed circuit board MP.

Furthermore, various text information (not shown), such as the model number and manufacturer name, is generally printed on the main body of the IC. The text information is printed at a distance from the first pin along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that the text information, such as the IC's model number and manufacturer name, be easily visible when the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by positioning the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC can also be positioned so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. are easily visible.

When an IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP.

<Resistors> Various resistors are attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections are made with other electronic components. The IC has a long shape, with the length in the longitudinal direction being RLL and the length in the lateral direction being RSL.

<Connector> A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections are made with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S etc. via the connector, and can send and receive various signals.

<Spacing between CPUC100 and IC> As shown by the dashed line in FIG. 91, only resistors are placed inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, and no IC is placed. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the short-side length CSL of the CPUC100. Various currents (currents that change over time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC100. In this way, by not placing the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC can be placed at a position separated by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL) from the CPUC100, and the noise emitted from the IC can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC100.

Also, the specified length from the outer periphery COR of CPUC100 may be at least the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor. Because a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can become a heat source, which may affect the operation of CPUC100. For this reason, by not placing the resistor inside the specified range CSR1 around CPUC100, the resistor can be placed at a position a certain distance away from CPUC100 (for example, the length RLL), and the heat generated by the resistor can be prevented from affecting the operation of CPUC100.

<Relationship between CPUC100 height, IC height, and other component height> Figure 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in Figure 91. As shown in Figure 92, CPUC100 height CHT is the highest, followed by IC height IHT, and resistor height RHT, the lowest. As shown in Figure 91, only components with heights less than CPUC100 height CHT are placed inside a predetermined range CSR2 around CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of CPUC100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor.

A mounting tool (not shown) is used to attach the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP. The mounting tool clamps the CPUC100 at its tip and brings it close to the printed circuit board MP for attachment. Because the mounting tool is designed to clamp the CPUC100 at its tip, the tip of the mounting tool is positioned around the CPUC100 when it is clamped. For this reason, when attaching the CPUC100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and space must be secured for the tip of the mounting tool so that it does not interfere with other electronic components.

For this reason, only components less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are placed in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing this, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, it will not interfere with other components. Area CSR2 is the range where the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor.

Note that only components with heights less than the CHT of CPUC100 are placed in the area surrounding the position where CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and components with heights equal to or greater than the CHT of CPUC100 may be attached outside the area on the printed circuit board MP surrounding the position where CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be components with heights less than the CHT of CPUC100.

In this way, by placing only electronic components that are lower than the height CHT of the CPUC100 inside the specified range CSR2 around the CPUC100, a space can be secured in which the tip of the mounting tool can be brought close, and the CPUC100 can be mounted to the printed circuit board MP using the mounting tool without damaging other electronic components.

In the above example, the main control board M was described as an example, but it can be applied to all boards on which electronic components such as a CPU or IC are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, door board D, reel board K, and power board E.

<<<<Configuration related to AT lottery>>> Next, referring to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all of the configurations described above when configured to have an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is a state in which the AT lottery can be held. Note that in this figure, there are not multiple game states with different probabilities of winning the AT lottery, such as a low probability state or a high probability state, and it is configured so that the AT lottery can be held only in one game state, such as the high probability state in this embodiment. Also, as a difference from this embodiment, it is configured so that the AT lottery is not held based on the winning of the BB.

If the answer is Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets "2" as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a specified RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery, which is provided to reduce the data capacity required to execute the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M judges whether the condition device related to the game is a condition device without a setting difference (a condition device without a setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the same figure, the condition devices without a setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (all replay roles may be used, or some replay roles may be used), and push order bell, and in this process, it is judged whether the condition device without a setting difference has been won. Note that a setting difference is provided for the lottery probability of a miss and a common bell (a setting difference is provided), but in this process, it is configured not to judge whether a miss or a common bell has been won. It is preferable to make the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type different from the RAM area for storing the winning number and performance group number. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that there is no confusion between the area for storing the winning number and the area for storing the performance group number, which are areas where information about condition devices with set differences in the winning probability and information about condition devices with no set differences in the winning probability are stored separately, and the area for storing the AT lottery type, which is an area where information about condition devices with set differences in the winning probability and information about condition devices with no set differences in the winning probability are stored without distinction.

If the answer is Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, temporarily stores (overwrites) it in the specified RAM area (the same RAM area as the specified RAM area related to step 1401-2), and proceeds to step 1401-5. Note that if the answer is No in step 1401-3, the process also proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when a condition device with no setting difference is won in a situation where an AT lottery can be executed, if watermelon B is won, the AT lottery type is set to "0", if cherry is won, the AT lottery type is set to "0", if watermelon A is won, the AT lottery type is set to "1", if replay is won, the AT lottery type is set to "2", and if push order bell is won, the AT lottery type is set to "2".

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", 18/256 when the AT lottery type is "1", and 1/256 when the AT lottery type is "2", and the order of likelihood of winning the AT lottery is "0 → 1 → 2". Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (e.g., 50) as the AT initial game number in the AT counter. Note that, unlike this embodiment, this modified example is configured to set the AT initial game number in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and is configured not to set the AT initial game number in the AT state start control process (if an AT game number addition is won, the AT game number may be added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be "AT in progress state" and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1430). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, it also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1430).

In conventional gaming machines, when the AT lottery is configured to have a common lottery process that does not reference the winning role, and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device with no setting difference is won (lottery process that references the winning role), it was necessary to execute the AT lottery at least twice. However, by providing an AT lottery type as shown in the figure, it is possible to execute the common lottery process that does not reference the winning role (corresponding to the process of step 1401-2 in the figure) and the lottery process that is executed when a condition device with no setting difference is won (corresponding to the process of step 1401-4 in the figure) in a single lottery process (corresponding to the process of step 1401-6 in the figure).

The above shows an example of a slot machine as an example of a gaming machine, but the above configuration can be applied to various gaming models such as pachinko machines, jan-ball machines, arrange ball machines, game machines, casino machines, etc.

In addition, among the above-mentioned configurations, the configurations related to settings such as the setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, setting key switch, and setting/reset button (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines that have setting values.

<<<<Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example>>> The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the manner in which push order navigation applicable to this example is executed is described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all embodiments.

Furthermore, with regard to the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is called push order navigation. (1) Push order navigation refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop buttons advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct the push order of "middle → left → right" by displaying "=3". In addition, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction or instruction display, and a game in which the push order navigation is executed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game. (2) Push order navigation refers to the display of (an image suggesting) the operation mode of the stop buttons advantageous to the player on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct (suggest) the push order of "left → middle → right" by displaying "123". (3) Push order navigation refers to the output of a sound suggesting the operation mode of the stop buttons advantageous to the player from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the output "left" can be output to indicate (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. (4) The reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) to suggest the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player, which is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button lights up, which can indicate (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. (5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) to suggest the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player, which is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel lights up, which can indicate (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

The following describes the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed and the timing at which the push order navigation ends in a game in which a push order role (a role in which the number of coins paid out and the transition mode to the RT state can differ depending on the push order, such as a push order bell or a push order replay role) has been determined as the winning role. When a push order role is determined as the winning role during the AT state, it is configured to be able to execute a push order navigation that notifies the player of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop buttons (the reel stop order and the operation timing of the stop buttons).

<<Configuration related to the start of displaying the push order navigation>> <Execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no wait> First, the following describes the execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no wait, in other words, when the start lever is operated to start a game when the minimum play time has elapsed (the timer value of the minimum play interval timer M70 is 0).

<Configuration 1> First, the configuration of Figure 94 will be described. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed if a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start spinning (executed in step 1260 of Figure 18). Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the case where stopping operations are performed in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) is illustrated (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

Then, immediately after executing the reel rotation process, "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of push order navigation on the push order display device D270, it is configured as follows: "=1": Instructs the push order of "left → middle → right"; "=2": Instructs the push order of "left → right → middle"; "=3": Instructs the push order of "middle → left → right"; "=4": Instructs the push order of "middle → right → left"; "=5": Instructs the push order of "right → left → middle"; "=6": Instructs the push order of "right → middle → left".

The display mode when executing push order navigation with the push order display device D270 is not limited to the display mode described above. For example, numbers may be displayed only in the right digits (lower digits) without displaying "=", or a display mode other than numbers corresponding to the stop buttons (or reels) may be displayed only in the right digits (lower digits). Also, the right digits (lower digits) may be configured to display corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next, and the left digits (higher digits) may be configured to display the push order for the entire game. When configured in this way, the display mode of the right digits (lower digits) may change with each stop operation of the stop button, while the left digits (higher digits) will have the same display mode regardless of the stop operation of the stop button.

After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" will be displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. Here, examples of push order navigation on the performance display device S40 are configured as follows: "123": Instructs the push order of "left → middle → right" "132": Instructs the push order of "left → right → middle" "213": Instructs the push order of "middle → left → right" "312": Instructs the push order of "middle → right → left" "231": Instructs the push order of "right → left → middle" "321": Instructs the push order of "right → middle → left".

The display mode when executing the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 is not limited to the display mode described above, and may be a display mode other than Arabic numerals, for example, Chinese numerals, or images of characters or symbols that are not numbers. In addition to the display mode corresponding to all stop buttons, push order navigation such as "1--" which indicates only the first stop (push order navigation that notifies the user that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) may also be executed.

Note that "display" may mean that all elements to be displayed have been completed, or that the elements to be displayed have started to be displayed. For example, displaying "123" on the performance display device S40 may mean that all elements to be displayed have been completed, or that the display of "123" has started on the performance display device S40 (e.g., an effect at the start of display has occurred). Similarly, "display end" may mean that all elements to be ended are no longer displayed, or that a display transition has started to prevent the elements to be ended from being displayed. For example, ending the display of "123" on the performance display device S40 may mean that all "123" is no longer displayed on the performance display device S40, or that a part of the display of "123" has started to be erased on the performance display device S40 (e.g., an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, "display erase" may mean that all elements to be erased are no longer displayed, or that a display transition has started to prevent the elements to be erased from being displayed. For example, erasing the display of "123" on the performance display device S40 may mean that all of "123" is no longer displayed on the performance display device S40, or that part of the display of "123" has begun to be erased on the performance display device S40 (such as an effect occurring when the display is erased). Similarly, erasing the display of "1" on the performance display device S40 may mean that after the left stop button is operated when all of "123" is displayed on the performance display device S40, "1" is no longer displayed on the performance display device S40, or that part of the display of "1" has begun to be erased on the performance display device S40 (such as an effect occurring when the display is erased).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40, operation of the stop button becomes valid. After the reels start spinning, the reel drive state changes from a reel acceleration state to a reel constant speed state, and operation of the stop button becomes valid. In instruction play, the player checks the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or performance display device S40 before operating the stop button. Therefore, by making it possible to display the push order navigation before the stop button becomes valid, as shown in the figure, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the stop button before checking the push order (and pressing the wrong order).

Also, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed (starts to be displayed) before the push order navigation in the performance display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 will be explained. When "Winning-A3" is determined as the winning role, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information as a control command to the sub-control board S in step 1622 as a timer interrupt processing. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command processing of step 2250 based on the command related to the winning/replay winning information received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M (executes the push order navigation display processing for displaying the push order navigation such as step 2360 as a command processing).

Here, the process of displaying the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S will be described in detail. First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, and then stores the command data, analyzes the command, and transmits a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the performance control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from receiving the command related to the winning/replay winning information to transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation. In addition, the performance control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, it executes a drawing process, which takes about 32 ms. Note that, as an example, the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side is a command related to the winning/replay winning information, but this is merely an example, and other commands such as a command related to the performance group number may be used, and it may be designed appropriately according to the execution timing of the desired performance.

In addition, when the push sequence display device D270 controlled by the main control board M displays the push sequence navigation, the push sequence display device D270 is configured to be dynamically lit, so if the timer interrupt processing period is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are lit sequentially for each timer interrupt processing, so it takes a maximum of about 10 ms for the lighting to be completed. Because of this configuration, the time from when a trigger to display the push sequence navigation occurs (for example, when a command related to winning information/replay winning information from the main control board M) on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S to when the display of the push sequence navigation is completed is longer than the time from when a trigger to display the push sequence navigation occurs (for example, when the start lever is operated) on the push sequence display device D270 controlled by the main control board M to when the display of the push sequence navigation is completed.

Here, the period during which the push order navigation display can be started in this example will be described in detail using the process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPUC100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to progress the game. In this example, the process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M will be described only in specific steps to simplify the explanation, but it should be noted that this is not the only possible step. For example, when the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines in the judgment process of step 1251 that the start lever D50 has been operated, it executes a reel rotation start preparation process in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing of step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing of step 6106 has been reached. Then, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state in steps 6108 and 6110, and the reel starts rotating. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 corresponds to the wait period until the reel starts spinning, and is a period that occurs because the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be guaranteed from the game start timing (reel start timing) to the next game start timing (reel start timing) by the game interval minimum time timer M70 as a predetermined condition is not met, and may also be called the minimum game time. Next, in step 6114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the reel acceleration state end timing of step 6114 has been reached. Then, in steps 6116 and 6118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state, performs processing to maintain the reel constant speed state, and then executes processing to enable the operation of the stop button. In this example, the push order navigation is configured to be displayed (starts to be displayed) at any timing during the period in which the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above process, in other words, at any timing from when the start lever is operated to when the stop button is operated.

In this way, the period from when the start lever D50 is operated until the operation of the stop button becomes valid has been explained according to the processing executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M. In this example, however, the period is defined separately according to the processing executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as follows: start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation becomes valid (also referred to as reel stop button operation becoming valid). For example, Figure 94 illustrates an example in which push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed immediately after the reel rotation start processing is executed, and push order navigation by the performance display device S40 is performed during the reel acceleration state.

94 shows an example of a case where the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state, but the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S, which then executes the drawing process to display the push order navigation during the reel acceleration state. The configuration for displaying the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side may be configured as follows: (1) Start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M executes the reel rotation start process to start the reel rotation → updates the reel drive state to an acceleration state → main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control board M sends a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information → the sub-control board S uses the command as a trigger to execute the drawing process and display the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M executes the reel rotation start process and starts reel rotation → Updates the reel drive state to an accelerated state → The main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to the winning information of the prize and replay to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning information of the prize and replay → The main control board M sends a predetermined command to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S executes the drawing process in response to the predetermined command and displays the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state (3) Start Lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M executes the reel rotation start process and starts reel rotation → updates the reel drive state to an accelerated state → main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control board M sends a command related to the winning information of the prize and replay to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning information of the prize and replay → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → the sub-control board S executes the drawing process in response to the command and displays the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M starts the reel rotation The initial process is executed to start the reel rotation → the reel drive state is updated to an accelerated state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting → the main control board M sends a command related to the winning information for winning prizes and replay to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning information for winning prizes and replay → the main control board M sends a specified command to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the specified command → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the sub-control board S executes the drawing process in response to the specified command and displays the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The above configuration may be used. In other words, the time value from when the sub-control board S receives a specified command from the main control board M to when it executes the drawing process may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S, or the timing when the main control board M sends a specified command to the sub-control board S may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S.

<Configuration 2> Next, the configuration of Figure 95 will be described. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start spinning. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the case where stopping operations are performed in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is the greatest) is illustrated (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

After that, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40, "=3" is dynamically lit up as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 is executed after the reel rotation start process is executed, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is executed just before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective.

<Effect 1> By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push sequence navigation displayed on the push sequence display device D270 and the performance display device S40 can be determined to be a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation becomes effective), which reliably prevents a situation in which the timing to start the push sequence navigation is delayed on both the push sequence display device D270 and the performance display device S40 and the player is unable to recognize the push sequence navigation no matter which display device he looks at, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that does not cause any disadvantage to the player.

<Effect 2> In addition, by configuring as shown in Figure 94 or Figure 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 can be made different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40, thereby avoiding the situation where the player must view two display devices at the same time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that reduces the burden on the player by allowing the player to view the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs.

<Configuration 3> In the AT state, when a push order role (push order bell, push order replay role, etc.) is determined as a winning role, as a performance means for notifying the push order, not only the performance display device S40, but also a configuration in which the push order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (middle decorative panel) as shown in Figures 97 and 98, or a sound output from the speaker S20, etc. are possible. In configuration 3, when an instruction game is executed, the reel window frame lamp D310 is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position (near the reel) corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is composed of an LED, etc., similar to the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 and the sound output from the speaker S20 are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S, similar to the performance display device S40. In other words, when the push order navigation is executed by these performance means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs step 2108 based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, in the same manner as in the case of the performance display device S40.
It is possible to execute push order navigation by executing command processing (referred to here as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in step 2250. Note that since it is preferable that the reel window frame lamps D310 are provided in positions that are as easily visible as possible to the player, it is preferable that they are provided corresponding to each reel, for example, above or below the reel window D160 (the space above or below the reel window D160 where the reels can be seen by the player).

Configuration 3 will be explained using Figure 97. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start spinning. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the case where stopping operations are performed in the order of "middle → left → right" to be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is the greatest) is illustrated (for example, when "Prize-A3" is won).

Then, immediately after the reel rotation start process is executed, the push sequence display device D270 dynamically lights up and displays (starts to display) "=3" as the push sequence navigation. After "=3" is displayed as the push sequence navigation on the push sequence display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights up (starts to light up) as the push sequence navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. Then, the performance display device S40 displays (starts to display) "213" as the push sequence navigation. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed is "push sequence display device → reel window frame lamp → performance display device", and the timing at which the push sequence navigation starts to be displayed by the reel window frame lamp D310 lighting up is later than that of the push sequence display device D270 and earlier than that of the performance display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, then stores the command data and performs command analysis processing in sequence, and then performs processing to send a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the performance control board (board in the sub-control board S) and processing to send a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S), and it takes about 16 ms from receiving the command related to the winning/replay winning information to sending the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and sending the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. Also, the performance control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, which takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the contents of the command, it immediately executes the lighting process (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning information for the prize/replay win to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S executes the push order navigation using the performance display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310 in response to receiving the command, the reel window frame lamp D310 is configured to display (light up) the push order navigation before the display of the push order navigation by the performance display device S40. Note that the command sent from the main control board M is not limited to a command related to the winning information for the prize/replay win, and may be a command related to the performance group number, etc.

In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display (light up) the push order navigation before the performance display device S40 displays the push order navigation, it is possible to provide a simple notification to the player more quickly, and prevent the player from operating the stop button before checking the push order (leading to the wrong push order).

The order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be configured as "push order display device → performance display device → reel window frame lamp." When configured in this way, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to the push order navigation to the performance control board after the sub-main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board, or the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 and the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310 may be different commands.

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is "push order display device → reel window frame lamp → performance display device", but the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed), it may be configured to be "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → performance display device", "performance display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp", "reel window frame lamp → performance display device → push order display device", or "performance display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board and the performance control board, the main control board M may be configured to display (start to display) the push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270, or the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 and the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310 may be different commands. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting, it is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starting display), such as (1) executing the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 first, (2) executing the push order navigation with the reel window frame lamp D310 first, or (3) executing the push order navigation with the performance display device S40 first.

<Effect> In this way, by determining the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 to a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → reel spinning starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button becomes effective) when the minimum playing time has elapsed, for example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, push order navigation can be performed using the lighting of a lamp (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided in which it is unlikely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation (the advantageous operation mode of the stop button).

<Configuration 4> Next, configuration 4 will be described, which is a configuration for performing push order navigation by audio output from the speaker S20. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the push order by audio during instruction play, for example, outputting lines such as "left," "middle," and "right" as audio from the speaker, and performing push order navigation corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation should be performed (the stop button to be operated).

Configuration 4 will be explained using Figure 98. When the AT state is in AT (a game state in which push order navigation is executed if a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start spinning. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the example shows a case in which stopping operations in the order of "middle → left → right" are most advantageous to the player (the largest number of coins are paid out) (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

Then, immediately after the reel rotation start process is executed, the push sequence display device D270 displays (starts displaying) "=3" as the push sequence navigation with dynamic lighting. After "=3" is displayed as the push sequence navigation on the push sequence display device D270, the speaker S20 outputs the voice "In" (a voice suggesting that the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation) as the push sequence navigation. Then, the performance display device S40 displays (starts displaying) "213" as the push sequence navigation. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed is "push sequence display device → voice → performance display device", and the timing at which the push sequence navigation notification by voice output starts is later than that of the push sequence display device D270 and earlier than that of the performance display device S40, similar to the reel window frame lamp D310.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, then stores the command data and performs command analysis processing in sequence, and then performs processing to transmit a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the performance control board (board in the sub-control board S) and processing to transmit a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub-control board S), and it takes about 16 ms from receiving the command related to the winning/replay winning information to transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and transmitting the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation. Also, the performance control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, which takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the audio control board receives a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, it immediately executes the audio output process (audio output process can be executed in a shorter time than drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M sends a command related to the winning information of the prize/replay win to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S executes the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 and the speaker S20 in response to receiving the command, the output (audio output) of the push order navigation by the speaker S20 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the performance display device S40. Note that the command sent from the main control board M is not limited to a command related to the winning information of the prize/replay win, and may be a command related to the performance group number, etc.

In this way, by configuring the speaker S20 to output (audio output) the push order navigation before the display of the push order navigation by the performance display device S40, simple notifications can be given to the player earlier, and the player can recognize the push order by the audio even if he is not looking at the performance display device S40, preventing the player from operating the stop button before checking the push order (leading to the player pressing the wrong button).

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is described as "push order display device → audio → performance display device", but the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed), it may be configured to be "push order display device → performance display device → audio". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to the push order navigation to the performance control board after the sub-main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the audio control board, or the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 and the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the audio from the speaker S20 may be different commands.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts displaying) can be configured as "audio → push order display device → performance display device", "audio → performance display device → push order display device", "performance display device → audio → push order display device", "performance display device → push order display device → audio", etc. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the audio control board and the performance control board, the main control board M can be configured to display (starts displaying) the push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270, or the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the audio from the speaker S20 can be different commands. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts displaying) can be changed, such as (1) executing the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 first, (2) executing the push order navigation by audio from the speaker S20 first, or (3) executing the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 first.

<Effect> In this way, by determining the start timing of the audio push order navigation to be a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → reel spinning starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button becomes effective) when the minimum playing time has elapsed, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed using audio (in this example, audio output from the speaker S20), etc., and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided in which it is unlikely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is a wait>> First, the execution mode of push order navigation when there is a wait, in other words, when the start lever is operated when the minimum play time has not elapsed (the timer value of the minimum play interval timer M70 is greater than 0), and then a game is started, will be described below.

<Configuration 1> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated when the AT state is in AT (a game state in which push order navigation is executed if a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the example shows a case in which stopping operations in the order of "middle → left → right" are most advantageous to the player (the largest number of coins will be paid out) (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

First, when the minimum play time has not yet elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 through timer interrupt processing, and executes processing to display (start displaying) the push order navigation "=3" with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270. After that, during the period before the minimum play time has elapsed, "213" is displayed (start displaying) as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation on the performance display device S40.

<Configuration 2> Next, configuration 2 of FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated when the AT state is in AT (a game state in which push order navigation is executed if a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the example shows a case in which stopping operations in the order of "middle → left → right" are most advantageous to the player (the largest number of coins will be paid out) (for example, when "Winning-A3" is won).

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process to display (start display) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 (executes the drawing process described above). After that, the minimum play time has elapsed, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the reels spinning, and the main control board M executes a process to display (start display) "=3" as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting before the reel drive state becomes a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective (just before the operation of the stop button becomes effective). In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In this case, the sub-control board S executes a process to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 based on receiving a command related to the performance group number, but the command that triggers the process to display (start displaying) the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 is not limited to this, and the command that triggers the process to display (start displaying) the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 can be determined according to the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (start displaying) on the performance display device S40.

<Configuration 3> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated when the AT state is in AT (a game state in which push order navigation is executed if a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the case where stopping operations are performed in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) is illustrated (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

When the start lever D50 is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed, the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 (executes the drawing process described above). After that, the main control board M executes a process to display (start displaying) "=3" as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting at the timing when the minimum play time has elapsed and the reel rotation start process is executed to start the reel rotation. In FIG. 101, if the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes more than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for five timer interrupt processes) until the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation of the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, if the start lever is operated when there is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for five timer interrupt processes) remaining before the minimum play time has elapsed, or if the start lever is operated when the minimum play time has elapsed, as described above, the time from when a trigger to display the push order navigation occurs (for example, when the start lever is operated) on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M to when the display of the push order navigation is completed is longer than the time from when a trigger to display the push order navigation occurs (for example, when the start lever is operated) on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M to when the display of the push order navigation is completed. Therefore, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the performance display device S40.

As described above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 has been explained, but the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is not limited to this. For example, as a variation of the timing at which the push order navigation in FIG. 99 is displayed (display starts), the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40 before the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 simultaneously during the period before the minimum play time has elapsed, or the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum play time has elapsed and the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40 after the minimum play time has elapsed, or the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40 during the period before the minimum play time has elapsed and the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 after the minimum play time has elapsed. The display (display starts) timing of the push order navigation may be configured to be divided across the period before and after the minimum play time has elapsed.

<Effect> In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is determined to be a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until operation of the stop button becomes effective). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the timing of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation different between the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40. The effects of differentiating the timing of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation between the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 are as follows: (1) When the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation in the performance display device S40. The push order navigation can be displayed (started displaying) in the push order display device D270 by a timer interrupt process (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after the start lever is operated and the main control board M determines the performance group number based on the determination of the winning role (here, the push order bell role), so that a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly notifies the player of information related to the push order navigation can be provided. (2) When the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, information related to the current game state or winning role is often configured to be suggested on the performance display device S40, so the player will proceed with the game while visually checking the performance display device S40. By configuring the performance display device S40, which has a larger size (display area) than the push order display device D270 and is easy for the player to see, to promptly notify the player of information related to the push order navigation, the player can check the push order navigation while still viewing the performance display device S40, even if the push order navigation is newly executed while viewing the performance display device S40, so that a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that reduces the burden on the player by not forcing the player to look at other displays every time the push order navigation is displayed. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he or she looks at, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that does not cause any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, by differentiating the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that reduces the burden on the player by allowing the player to view the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs.

<Configuration 4> Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 102 will be described. Note that in the configuration 4, there is a reel window frame lamp D310. The start lever is operated when the state related to the AT is in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order role is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. Note that in this game, a predetermined push order bell is won, and the case where the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, when "winning-A3" is won) is illustrated.

When the start lever D50 is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process to light (start lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as a push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. After that, it executes a process to display (start display) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is earlier than the performance display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub-control board S receives a command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 can be executed earlier than the process of drawing the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. After that, the minimum play time elapses, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the reels spinning, and then, before the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the push sequence display device D270 executes a process to dynamically light up "=3" (start display) as the push sequence navigation. In FIG. 102, the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp → performance display device → push sequence display device," and the timing at which the push sequence navigation starts to be displayed by lighting up the reel window frame lamp D310 is earlier than the push sequence display device D270 and earlier than the performance display device S40.

Even when configured as illustrated in FIG. 102, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are approximately 10 ms remaining until the minimum play time has elapsed), the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed may be "push sequence display device → reel window frame lamp → performance display device" or "reel window frame lamp → push sequence display device → performance display device." Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the performance display device S40, as described above, it takes approximately 32 ms from the time the sub-control board S receives a command related to the performance group number from the main control board M until the performance display device S40 displays (starts displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed). Therefore, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are approximately 10 ms left until the minimum play time has elapsed), the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 may be displayed (starts displaying) after the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310 is displayed.

Also, in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are about 10 ms left until the minimum play time has elapsed), it takes time for the sub-control board S to receive the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, so the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (starts to be displayed) after the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is displayed. As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 starts can be set appropriately as long as it is within the period from start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button is effective.

<Effect> In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display (light up) the push order navigation before the performance display device S40 displays the push order navigation, it is possible to provide a simple notification to the player more quickly, and prevent the player from operating the stop button before checking the push order (leading to the player pressing the wrong button).

In addition, even in gaming machines that are not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by turning on a lamp (in this example, turning on the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<Configuration 5> Next, configuration 5 of FIG. 103 will be described. Note that configuration 5 is configured to execute push order navigation by voice output from speaker S20 during instruction play. The start lever is operated when the AT-related state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won) and the minimum play time has not elapsed. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and an example is shown of a case where stopping operations in the order of "middle → left → right" are most advantageous to the player (the largest number of coins are paid out) (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing during the period when the minimum play time has not elapsed. After receiving the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of outputting the voice "It's in!" (a voice suggesting that the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation) as the push order navigation by outputting the voice from the speaker S20. Then, it executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The timing at which the push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 starts to be displayed is earlier than the timing of the performance display device S40. This is because when the sub-control board S receives a command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the voice output process from the speaker S20 is executed earlier than the process of drawing the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. After that, the minimum play time elapses, the reels start to spin, the operation of the stop button becomes valid, and the main control board M executes a process to display (start displaying) "=3" in dynamic lighting as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 before the reel rotation speed becomes constant and the operation of the stop button becomes valid. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "audio → performance display device → push order display device," and the timing at which the announcement of the push order navigation by audio output begins is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the performance display device S40.

Even when configured as illustrated in FIG. 103, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are approximately 10 ms remaining until the minimum play time has elapsed), the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed may be "push sequence display device → audio → performance display device" or "audio → push sequence display device → performance display device." Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the performance display device S40, as described above, it takes approximately 32 ms from the time the sub-control board S receives the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M until the performance display device S40 displays (starts displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed). Therefore, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are approximately 10 ms left until the minimum play time has elapsed), the push order navigation may be displayed (starts display) by the performance display device S40 after the push order navigation is displayed by the push order display device D270 or the push order navigation is announced by voice.

Also, in the case of speaker S20, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are about 10 ms remaining until the minimum play time has elapsed), it may take time for the sub-control board S to receive the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, so the push order navigation may be announced by voice from speaker S20 after the push order navigation is displayed by the push order display device D270.

As described above, the timing at which the push sequence navigation starts to be displayed on the push sequence display device D270 can be set appropriately within the period from start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button is valid.

<Effect> In this way, by determining the timing for the start of the audio push order navigation when the start lever is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed to a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button becomes effective), even in gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, for example, the push order navigation can be executed in a simple notification manner by audio (audio output from the speaker S20 in this example). Even if the push order navigation is executed while the player is focusing on the reels or stop buttons and not looking at the performance display device S40, the player can recognize the push order navigation by audio while keeping his/her eyes on the reels or stop buttons, so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided in which it is unlikely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

The timing for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing for displaying the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 have been described with and without a wait, but the timing for displaying the push order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. The timing for displaying the push order navigation can be appropriately determined as long as it is within the period from the start of the operation of the start lever D50 described above to the start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is effective. In addition, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a certain amount of time (e.g., 32 ms or more) from when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a certain command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M until the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40. Furthermore, the more frames of the drawing displayed on the performance display device S40, the more additional time will be required. The winning role is determined after the start lever D50 is operated, but considering the time required from when the winning role is determined until the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40 as described above, it is preferable to determine the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the performance display device S40 as follows, for example: the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (if there is a wait) → the start of reel rotation (if there is no wait) → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → the period until the operation of the stop button is effective. By determining it in this way, the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the push order display device D270 can be made different from the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the performance display device S40. It is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on each display device within these periods.

For example, during the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button is effective, an example of the order in which the push sequence navigation is notified by the push sequence display device D270, the performance display device S40, the sound, and the reel window frame lamp D310 is described as follows: (1) Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (2) Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (3) Push sequence display device → Sound → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push sequence display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Sound (6) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Performance display device (7) Performance display device → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (8) Performance display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (9) Performance display device → Sound → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Performance display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Sound (12) Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Push order Display device (13) Audio → Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio → Push sequence display device → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (15) Audio → Performance display device → Push sequence display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Audio → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device (17) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Performance display device (18) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Push sequence display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Audio → Performance It is possible to configure the timing at which the push sequence navigation is displayed (starts displaying) appropriately during the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button is effective, such as output display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Sound (22) Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Sound → Push sequence display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Push sequence display device → Performance display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Performance display device → Push sequence display device.

In addition, as one of the presentation means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is also possible to add a push order navigation in which the stop button lamps S60 controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) light up (blink) to suggest the operation mode of the stop buttons that is advantageous to the player. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the presentation group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the presentation group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process to light up (or blink) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button that is to perform the first stop operation. An example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts display) when the push order navigation using the stop button D40 is added is as follows: (25) Push order display device → Audio → Reel frame lamp → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) → Performance display device (26) Push order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) → Reel frame lamp → Performance display device (27) Push order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) and the reel frame lamp are approximately simultaneously → Performance display device, but the order here is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (27), the timing of the reel frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 lighting (blinking) is simultaneous, but it is also possible to configure the speaker S20 to output audio simultaneously. The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any way, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process (push order display device D270) related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M (push order display device D270), or the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S (performance display device S40, reel window frame lamp D310, voice from speaker S20, stop button D40).In addition, when executing push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60, it is preferable to control it so that only the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation is to be performed is turned on (blinked), rather than turning on (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels. For example, when executing the push order navigation "213": "center → left → right" using the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel is configured to light (blink) or go out based on the progress of the game, as follows: stop button lamp (on) corresponding to the center stop button D42 → operate the center stop button D42 → stop button lamp (off) corresponding to the center stop button D42 → stop button lamp (on) corresponding to the left stop button D41 → operate the left stop button D41 → stop button lamp (off) corresponding to the left stop button D41 → stop button lamp (on) corresponding to the right stop button D43 → operate the right stop button D43 → stop button lamp (off) corresponding to the right stop button D43.

In addition, while the above description concerns a case where the control of the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is performed by the sub-control board S, the control of the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be configured to be performed by the main control board M. Below, the start timing of the push order navigation by controlling the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) by the main control board M will be explained.

When the main control board M controls the stop button lamp S60, the start lever is operated, and the performance group number is determined based on the determination of the winning role (here, the push order bell role), and then the timer interrupt process (for example, if it is the first cycle after the determination of the performance group number, it takes about 2 ms for the stop button lamp S60 to be turned on) makes it possible to execute the process of turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60. By configuring in this way, an example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) in a configuration in which the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added is as follows: (28) Push order display device → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is turned on (blinking)) → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is turned on (blinking)) → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (30) The stop button lamp (only the first stop button is turned on (blinking)) and the push order display device are approximately simultaneous → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device, etc., but the order here is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 controlled on the main control board M side is started before the push order navigation using the performance display device S40, audio from the speaker S20, and reel window frame lamp D310 controlled on the sub-control board S side. However, the timing of executing the timer interrupt process for turning on (blinking) the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M side may be changed so that the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is started after the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side (e.g., the performance display device S40, audio from the speaker, and reel window frame lamp D310) has started. The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) can be determined in any way, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S (performance display device S40, reel window frame lamp D310, audio from speaker S20).

<<Configuration related to the end of the push order navigation display>> Next, the timing at which the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 ends will be described. The timing at which the push order navigation ends, like the timing at which the push order navigation starts, can be designed to a certain degree of freedom depending on the period at which the player ends the game. One example of the period at which the player ends the game is the timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated, all the reels come to a complete stop, and a win is made, the game ends when the payout of game medals based on the win is completed.

The period for ending the display of the push order navigation can be defined as any timing in the period of "operation (pressing) the third stop button → not pressing the third stop button → winning determination → payout completion based on winning," starting from the operation timing of the third stop button. Note that in this example, the timing for ending the push order navigation is configured to differ for each push order role (push order bell, push order replay role). For example, the timing for ending the display of the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 differs depending on whether the determined winning role is a push order bell or a push order replay role.

In addition, in configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the timing of the end of the push order navigation, it should be noted that the first stop button and the second stop button have already been pressed, and the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button of the performance display device S40 has also ended.

<Configuration 1> First, configuration 1 of FIG. 104 will be described. In a situation where the AT-related state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won), an instruction game is executed, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends, and the push order navigation disappearance effect for the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40. Note that in this game, a predetermined push order bell is won, and an example is shown of a case where stopping in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous for the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

Here, the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device ends. In the same figure, when "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40, the right stop button is operated, and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button changes from off to on, which is detected by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, and a command related to this detection is sent from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command related to this detection and executes processing to erase the display of "3", resulting in the display of "3" becoming transparent and then disappearing, displaying the push order navigation disappearance effect.

After that, when the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 ends). Here, the trigger for ending the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 is both "pressing the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is detected by interrupt processing on the main control board M to have changed from off to on), but in FIG. 104, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 completes erasing before the push order navigation in the performance display device S40. This is the same as when the push order navigation starts, and even if the timing for ending the push order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed," the end of the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 is delayed because the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs processing to display the drawing of multiple frames.

To go into more detail about the end of the push order navigation, in the push order display device D270, the push order navigation ends when the push order display device D270 turns on → starts to turn off → turns off completely, and in the performance display device S40, the push order navigation ends when the push order navigation is displayed → the push order navigation disappearance effect starts to be displayed → the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (disappearance completed). In this example, the timing when the push order display device D270 starts to turn off is referred to as the push order display device turning off, and the start of displaying the push order navigation disappearance effect is referred to as the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start). Note that the turning off of the push order display device may be replaced with the timing when the push order display device D270 completes turning off, or the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends. The timing between the turning off of the push order display device and the display (start of display) of the push order navigation disappearance effect may be: push order display device turning off → display (start of display) of the push order navigation disappearance effect, or it may be: display (start of display) of the push order disappearance effect → turning off of the push order display device, or the turning off of the push order display device and the display (start of display) of the push order navigation disappearance effect may be simultaneous.

Furthermore, the above description has been given of a configuration in which the display of the push order navigation ends when the third stop button is operated. The operation of the third stop button includes the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the timing when the interrupt processing on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on; hereinafter, this may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is pressed") and the state in which the third stop button is released after being pressed (the timing when the interrupt processing on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on, and then detects that it has changed from on to off; hereinafter, this may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"). It is also possible to configure the timing at which the push order navigation ends to be specified for each of these states. For example, the sequence of timing at which the push sequence navigation ends in the push sequence display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is described in more detail below (when the push sequence navigation does not end simultaneously): (1) An interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the push sequence display device is turned off → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the push sequence navigation disappearance effect is displayed (display starts) (2) An interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the push sequence display device is turned off → an interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on Detection → A command relating to the detection of the third stop button is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command → The push order navigation disappears effect is displayed (display starts) (3) The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → The push order display device is turned off → A command relating to the detection of the third stop button is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command → The push order navigation disappears effect (display starts) (4) The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → The main control board M sends a command relating to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command → The push order disappears Display of effect (display start) → Push sequence display device is turned off (5) The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → The main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command → Display of push sequence disappearance effect (display start) → The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → Push sequence display device is turned off (6) The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → The main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command → Push sequence disappearance effect (7) The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on, via interrupt processing → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the press order disappearance effect is displayed (display starts) and the press order display is turned off at the same time. (8) The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off, via interrupt processing → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the press order disappearance effect is displayed (display starts) and the press order display is turned off at the same time.

In addition, the display mode of the push order navigation when, for example, the first stop button or the second stop button is pressed, rather than when the third stop button is pressed, will be explained as a supplement. First, in the push order display device D270, the light continues to be on from the time the light starts to turn on until the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on (or on to off) and the light is turned off. On the other hand, in the performance display device S40, for example, when the first stop button is pressed (the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on (or on to off)), the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the first stop button to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S receives the command → the display of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) and the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (for example, display of "2") are changed (hereinafter also referred to as "change start of the display mode of the second reel push order navigation"). The order in which these are executed may be configured as follows: (9) display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button → start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation (10) start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation → display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button. Similarly, when the second stop button is operated, it can be configured as follows: (11) display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the second stop button (display mode has been changed) → start changing the display mode of the third reel push order navigation (12) start changing the display mode of the third reel push order navigation → display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the second stop button (display mode has been changed).

<Configuration 2> Next, configuration 2 of FIG. 105 will be described. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won), an instruction game is executed, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, in a situation in which the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the push order navigation disappearance effect for the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (starts to be displayed) on the performance display device S40. Note that in this game, a predetermined push order bell has been won, and an example is shown of a case in which stopping operations in the order of "middle → left → right" are most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

Then, while the right stop button is still pressed, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation ends in the performance display device S40). Then, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270.

<Configuration 3> Next, configuration 3 of Figure 106 will be described. In Figure 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is "3" instead of "=3". In other words, a number is displayed as the push order navigation in the digit on the right side of the push order display device D270, and the digit on the left side is not displayed. In addition, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation and the number of coins won.

When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won), an instruction game is executed, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the push order disappearance effect for the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40. Note that in this game, a predetermined push order bell has been won, and the case where the player is most advantageous (the number of payouts is large) by operating the stops in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, when "winning-A3" is won) is illustrated.

Then, while the right stop button is still pressed, the symbol combination associated with the push sequence bell (a symbol combination that will pay out 11 coins) is displayed as frozen, and the push sequence display device D270 displays "0." When the right stop button is then released, the payout associated with the symbol combination that is frozen and displayed begins, and the number of coins won is displayed on the push sequence display device D270 as follows: "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11." After "11" is displayed on the push sequence display device D270 (after displaying the number of coins won), the display on the push sequence display device D270 is turned off (displayed). In this way, when the push sequence display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push sequence navigation and the display of the number of coins acquired, and the display mode of the push sequence navigation display is configured to display a numerical value only in the lower digits of the push sequence display device D270, when a symbol combination that will result in a game medal being paid out in an instruction game is stopped and displayed, the push sequence display device D270 displays both the push sequence navigation and the display of the number of coins acquired, which may lead to the player mistaking the push sequence navigation or the number of coins acquired. Therefore, by configuring the push sequence display device D270 to display "0" between the end of the display of the push sequence navigation and the start of the display of the number of coins acquired, the player can recognize that the display of the number of coins acquired will start regardless of the number of coins paid out for the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, whether it is 1 coin or 11 coins). Note that the above "0" may be changed to a different numerical value, and it is preferable to display it in a different display mode from the display mode that can be displayed as the push sequence navigation.

The timing for the end of the push sequence navigation display of the push sequence display device D270 is set to "when the third stop button is not pressed (after separation)", that is, when the display switches from "3" (function of the push sequence display device) to "0" (function of the payout number display device), but it may also be set to, for example, the timing of "completion of payout based on winning" when the display of the push sequence display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the timing for the end of the push sequence navigation of the performance display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", it can be seen that the push sequence navigation of the performance display device S40 ends before the push sequence navigation of the push sequence display device D270.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", and "33" instead of "=3". The displayed push order navigation will be explained in detail. The left digits "1", "2", and "3" correspond to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (for example, "1" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the middle reel M52). The right digit "3" corresponds to the push order "middle → left → right" (corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the performance display device S40, as in the previous configuration. By configuring in this way, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "23" → "13" → "33", and when the stop button is operated according to the push order, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel should be stopped is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the push order navigation corresponding to the final stop operation (in this example, "33") disappears, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effect> In this way, by determining the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 to be a predetermined period (the period from operation (pressing) of the third stop button → not pressing the third stop button → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning), for example, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 different, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that reduces the burden on the player by allowing the player to view the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs.

In addition, if the trigger for ending the push order navigation display in the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display in the performance display device S40) is set to the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button changing from on to off (releasing the stop button) by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the push order navigation can be configured not to end until the stop button changes from on to off, even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) with high hopes for the outcome of the game. Here, if the push order navigation is configured to be erased immediately after the stop button changes from off to on, there is a possibility that an event will occur that will destroy the player's hopes that the outcome of the game will not be favorable to the player. Therefore, by configuring the push order navigation not to end until the stop button changes from on to off, the occurrence of an event that destroys the player's hopes that the outcome of the game will not be favorable to the player can be reduced.

<Configuration 4> Next, configuration 4 of FIG. 107 will be described. In a state related to the AT, in which the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order role is won) is in progress, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends. In this game, the example shows a case where the player has won a replay with a specific push order, and stopping the buttons in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the RT state with a high probability of winning the replay can be maintained) (for example, when the player has won "Replay-D2", a replay with three push orders in which the first stop in the middle is the most profitable).

Then, while the right stop button is still pressed, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation ends in the performance display device S40). Then, when the right stop button is released (the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off), the symbol combination related to replay is displayed as stopped, so an automatic bet is executed and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up (when an automatic bet is executed, for example, the 1 bet lamp D211 → 2 bet lamp D212 → 3 bet lamp D213 will light up in that order).

<Configuration 5> Next, configuration 5 of FIG. 108 will be described. In a state related to the AT, in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order role is won), an instruction game is executed, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, in a situation in which the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the main control board M side transmits a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40. In this game, the example shows a case where the player has won a specific push order replay and is able to maintain the RT state with a high probability of winning the replay by stopping the buttons in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, when the player has won "Replay-D2", a three-option push order replay in which the first stop in the middle is the most profitable).

Then, while the right stop button is still pressed, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 ends). Then, when the right stop button is released (the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off), an automatic bet is executed, the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, when the machine has configuration 1 in FIG. 104 and configuration 5 in FIG. 108, even if a player cannot distinguish between the push order bell role and the push order replay role in the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to determine which minor role has been won based on the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the timing of the end of the push order navigation in the case of the push order bell or the push order replay role as the push order role has been described. In the performance display device S40, the timing of the end of the push order navigation has been described only as an example of the case of "when the third stop button is pressed", but this is not limited to this. As the period in which the game ends, it is possible to arbitrarily set the timing of the end of the push order navigation if the third stop button is operated (pressed) → the third stop button is not pressed → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning. In addition, in the push order display device D270, the period in which the push order navigation ends is different depending on whether the winning role is the push order bell or the push order replay role. As an example of the case in which the winning role is the push order replay role, the timing of the end of the push order navigation is set to "when the 1 bet lamp is turned on", and the timing of the end of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 can be greatly changed by arbitrarily setting the timing of the lighting of the 1 bet lamp D211. As an example, if the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up at the start of the next game, it will be later than the end period of the push order navigation when the winning combination is the push order bell, which is "operate (press) the third stop button → do not press the third stop button → win determination → payout based on the win completed," and it will be "operate (press) the third stop button → do not press the third stop button → win determination → payout based on the win completed → when the 1 bet lamp is lit." Also, if the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up when the third stop button is not pressed, it will be "operate (press) the third stop button → do not press the third stop button → when the 1 bet lamp is lit → win determination → payout based on the win completed," and the winning combination will be included in the end period of the push order navigation when the push order bell is the push order.

Similar to the timing when the push sequence navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed), the order in which the push sequence navigation ends is also as follows: In the period from operation (pressing) of the third stop button → non-pressing of the third stop button → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning, an example of the order in which the push sequence navigation ends on the push sequence display device D270, performance display device S40, audio, and reel window frame lamp D310 is as follows: (1) Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (2) Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (3) Push sequence display device → Audio → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Sound (6) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Performance display device (7) Performance display device → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (8) Performance display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (9) Performance display device → Sound → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Performance display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Sound Voice (12) Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Voice → Press sequence display device (13) Voice → Press sequence display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Voice → Press sequence display device → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (15) Voice → Performance display device → Press sequence display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Press sequence display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Press sequence display device → Performance display device (18) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Press sequence display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Press sequence display device → Performance display device → Voice (20) Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Audio → Performance display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Push sequence display device → Audio (22) Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Audio → Push sequence display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Push sequence display device → Performance display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Performance display device → Push sequence display deviceIn this way, it is possible to configure the timing at which the push sequence navigation ends to be appropriately determined during the period of third stop button operation (press) → third stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout completion based on winning.

Also, as one of the presentation means controlled by the sub-control board S, an example of the order in which push order navigation ends, which includes push order navigation using the stop button lamps S60 controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43), is described below. Note that the process leading up to the end of push order navigation using the stop button lamps S60 is as follows: the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → the main control board M transmits a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button is turned off (starts to be turned off). In addition, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has changed from on to off → the main control board M transmits a command related to the operation of the first stop button to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button is turned off (starts to be turned off) and the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the second stop button is turned on (starts to be turned on). (25) Push sequence display device → performance display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → stop button (third stop button lamp is turned off) (26) Push sequence display device → performance display device → reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button (third stop button lamp is turned off) and the like can be configured. The timing of the end of the push sequence navigation by the stop button D40 may be before or after the push sequence display device D270, the performance display device S40, sound, and the reel window frame lamp D310, as in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310 which executes the push sequence navigation by turning on and off the lamp. Furthermore, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game will proceed based on the <<Configuration related to the start of displaying the push order navigation>> and the <<Configuration related to the end of displaying the push order navigation>>. A specific example of the flow of one game from when the push order navigation is displayed (display start) to when it ends is as follows: 1. Display of push order navigation (display start) Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (display start) (push order display device D270) → Display of push order navigation (display start) (performance display device S40) 2. From operation of the first stop button to operation of the second stop button 2-1. Performance display device S40 Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of the first stop button (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of the first stop button → Change of display mode of second reel push order navigation → Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of the second stop button (display mode has been changed) (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of the second stop button → Change of display mode of third reel push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270 The push order display device D270 is in a lit state. 3. Third stop button operation - end of push order navigation display Third stop button operation -> push order display device goes off -> display (start of display) of push order navigation disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the third stop button -> end of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the third stop button In this way, the flow of one game progresses. Note that the above-mentioned example is only an example, and for example, 1. In the display (start of display) of the push order navigation, a configuration including the reel window frame lamp D310 and the sound output from the speaker S20 may be used, and the timing of display (start of display) of the push order navigation and the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (start of display) are not limited to this. Also, 2. In the first stop button operation - second stop button operation, in the performance display device S40, the display (start of display) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to each stop button, and the order in which the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed are not limited to this. Also, 3. From the operation of the third stop button to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the order in which the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 end their display of the push order navigation is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends may be specified in more detail (it can be further divided into pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 can be made different, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to look at two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the push order navigation on each display device when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the burden on the player. By determining the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 to a predetermined period (the period from operation (press) of the third stop button → non-pressing of the third stop button → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning), for example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 can be made different, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to look at two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

<Display when push order is incorrect> Here, we will describe in detail an example of the configuration of the push order navigation display when a game in which push order navigation is executed is played with a push order (or different operation timing) different from the push order navigation. Here, we will show an example of a case in which the push order bell is won and a game is executed in which the correct push order is "left → middle → right."

In a situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button (the correct push order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated as the first stop operation, and as an interrupt process on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is detected to have changed from off to on → the main control board M side transmits a command related to the detection of the first stop button to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → the sub-control board S side executes a process to erase all the displays of "123" on the performance display device S40. It may be configured as above. As described above, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, when a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated, the sub-control board S side erases the push order navigation corresponding to all reels (or stop buttons), while the main control board M side is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. In addition, the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is configured to be erased when the third stop operation is performed (when it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off as an interrupt process on the main control board M side).

<<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> Next, the configuration related to reel stop control and push order navigation display control (performance display device S40) will be described. Note that in this game, an example is given of a case where a specific push order bell has been won, and stopping the reels in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous for the player (the largest number of coins will be paid out) (for example, when "Prize Winner-A3" has been won).

<Configuration 1> First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, an instruction game related to the push order bell is executed during the AT state, and "213" is displayed on the performance display device S40 as the push order navigation. The center stop button is pressed at the timing when the replay pattern number 11 is located in the middle of the center reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" on the center reel changes to the push order navigation disappearance effect. The center reel stop button remains pressed. In addition, the center reel is controlled to stop the patterns that make up the pattern combination that will pay out 11 coins, which is the maximum number of coins won, by performing the stop operation of the center reel, which is the correct push order. In this example, the center reel is configured to stop the bell number 15 in the middle row (effective line). In other words, when the center stop button is operated at this timing, a slip of the maximum number of frames (four frames in this example) from the replay A number 11 is generated, and the bell number 15 is controlled to stop and display on the winning line.

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor until the reel stops after the stop operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 35. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel transitions from the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <Reel rotation speed image> to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation was performed and the position of the symbols that make up the symbol combination related to the condition device that won in the game is calculated, and by determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols that make up the symbol combination related to the condition device that won in the game on the winning line within a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms), the rotation is continued so that the symbols that make up the symbol combination related to the condition device that won in the game are stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols that make up the symbol combination related to the condition device that won in the game approach the winning line, the reel transitions to the reel deceleration state (6), and the reel transitions to the reel stop state (7).

After that, as shown in the upper right of FIG. 109, the performance display device S40 erases the push order navigation disappearance effect for the middle reel (display ends), and continues the slip control for the middle reel to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. Note that the middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 109, the performance display device S40 changes the display mode to one that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed. The display mode that changes at this time can be any mode that allows the player to recognize the stop button that should be stopped (such as making the numbers change significantly, adding movement to the numbers, or making the numbers light up). Meanwhile, the middle reel continues the slip control to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. Note that the middle reel stop button is being pressed. The timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display ends), after the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display ends), or simultaneously with the push order navigation disappearance effect being erased (display ends).

Then, after the center stop button has been pressed for a predetermined time, the 15th bell on the center reel is displayed stopped on the winning line. The predetermined time here is the time during which maximum slip control of the center reel is performed (for example, 190 ms). In this way, in this example, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with the push order navigation, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed is erased before the reel on which the stop operation was performed is displayed stopped (before the next stop button operation becomes effective), and the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel to be stopped is changed.

Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at a position where the maximum number of slips occurs has been described. However, for example, if the stop operation is performed at a position where the symbols that make up the push order role can be stopped with 0-frame misses, the timing for changing to a display mode that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Note that even in the case of 0-frame misses, the display mode is configured to change to a display mode that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed before the timing when the next stop button operation becomes effective. By configuring in this way, even in the case of 0-frame misses, the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed is recognized and then the stop button is operated, which prevents the player from performing the stop operation by mistake in the push order. Also, it is more preferable to change the display mode to a display mode that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed as soon as possible, and it is preferable to do so as soon as possible even in the case of 0-frame misses.

In this example, the push order bell is described as an example, but it can be applied to all condition devices that generate push order navigation, not just the push order bell. In addition, as a performance means for notifying the push order, the reel window frame lamp D310 may be turned on or a sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, when push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 or a sound output from the speaker S20 is included, it is possible to configure the performance display device S40 to execute the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel before changing the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel (in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is turned on, and in the case of a sound, a line corresponding to the next reel is output as a sound).

In addition, in this example, as a configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, push order navigation by the performance display device S40 has been described as an example of a performance means for executing push order navigation, but it may also be configured to include push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, audio, and the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43). Push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is performed by turning on (flashing) or off the reel window frame lamp, push order navigation by audio is performed by outputting "left", "right", or "in the middle" from the speaker S20, and push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) is performed by turning on (flashing) or off the left stop button D41 corresponding to the reel.

For example, in this example, when the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> is configured to include the reel window frame lamp D310, sound, and stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43), (1) reel window frame lamp D310 (1-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (2) Sound (2-1) Outputting sound corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (3) Stop button D40 (3-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (4) Performance display device S40 (4-1) Displaying the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (end of display) (4-2) Change to the display mode that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next, it is possible to specify a configuration related to push order navigation for each performance means as described above. The order in which these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) are executed may be determined in any way. For example, the order may be determined for each performance means (for example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button → performance display device), or the order may be determined for each reel (for example, processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next), or a combination of these may be used.

Furthermore, the <<Configuration relating to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example is explained using Figure 109, and in Figure 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is explained as an example, but the configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to only the first stop operation. For example, it is also applicable when the second stop operation is performed or the third stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the third stop operation is performed, processing corresponding to the reel for which the next stop operation is to be performed (for example, a change to the "display mode that highlights the push order navigation" in the performance display device S40, and "lighting up the lamp corresponding to the reel for which the next stop operation is to be performed" in the reel window frame lamp D310) is not executed.

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, even if the player operates the stop buttons according to the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to that stop button executes stop control involving the maximum number of slips, the end of the push order navigation display corresponding to that stop button in the performance display device S40 (from the start to the end of the disappearance effect display) and the change in the display mode of the push order navigation display corresponding to the next stop button to be operated (start of highlighting) can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, preventing the player from accidentally operating the stop button before recognizing which stop button to operate next.

<<<<<Third embodiment Medal addition process by insertion sensor>>>>> Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of the process of adding up the game medals inserted into the medal insertion port D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and if a predetermined passing condition (the passing game medal meets the standard, is not determined to be an error, etc.) is met, the game medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without an error occurring. Then, a first insertion sensor D20s and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided further back from the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and when a game medal that meets the dimensional standard and is accepted passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, if it is determined that the game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credits can be added. When a gaming medal passes through, the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s detect the insertion of the gaming medal, and the signals (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s turns on, information on the time from when the first insertion sensor D20s turns on to when it turns off, information on the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s turns on, information on the time from when the second insertion sensor D30s turns on to when it turns off, etc.) are supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credits can be added can be determined by the on/off status of each of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<<<Third embodiment Timing chart of medal detection by insertion sensor>>> Figure 110 is a timing chart when a medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage of the medal (off → on) at timing 1 in the figure. Then, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage of the medal (off → on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings is supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signal. Then, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the medal (on → off) at timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the medal to when it finishes detecting the medal is calculated by the main control board M, and if A is within a predetermined range (4 ms ≦ A < 183 ms in the third embodiment), it is determined that the passage of the medal is detected normally. Furthermore, the time B from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal until the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and if B is within a predetermined range (2 ms≦B<115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal has been detected normally. Then, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s finishes detecting the game medal (ON→OFF) at timing 4 in the figure. The time C from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal until the second insertion sensor D30s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and if C is within a predetermined range (4 ms≦C<183 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal has been detected normally. In this way, it is determined whether the game medal is passing through the medal selector DS normally at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off, and further, the game medal inserted at either the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off is detected as a bet medal, and credits are added.

<<<<Third embodiment: an example of medal addition processing by an insertion sensor>>><<Configuration 1>> Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credit addition is performed will be described in detail. Figures 111 to 112 are flowcharts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the game progress control processing related to the subroutine of step 1200 in the third embodiment. Figure 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion processing is normally performed on the inserted game medal. Note that in the flowchart of Figure 111, the explanation of the same contents as in Figure 17 will be omitted (steps 1220 to 1225, and step 1232 and after). First, in Figure 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 1226-1 (4th), in step 1226-2 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is off (illustration in the upper middle part of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s turns from off to on when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-2 (4th), in step 1226-3 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on (illustration in the upper right part of FIG. 113: the second insertion sensor D30s turns from off to on when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), then in step 1226-6 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on (illustration in the lower left part of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s turns from on to off when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), then in step 1226-8 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted, and credit addition processing is performed. In step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off (illustration in the middle and lower parts of FIG. 113: the second insertion sensor D30s turns from on to off when the gaming medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that one gaming medal has been properly inserted, and if the number of bets meets the specified number, a process such as enabling the operation of the start lever D50 is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1> In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on has been described. Conventionally, the credit addition process was executed at the timing of "the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off", but by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been executed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges it to be an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to pay back the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and it is possible to prevent the game medal from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though the credit addition process has not been executed.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the credit addition process is not executed when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s turns on, cheating (e.g., credit cheating) using the first insertion sensor D20s, which is located closer to the medal insertion port 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s, can be prevented, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud and, ultimately, is user-friendly.

<<<<Third embodiment Subroutine due to insertion sensor error>>> Also, if the answer is No in step 1226-3 (4th), step 1226-6 (4th), or step 1226-9 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined condition for occurrence of a medal insertion error is satisfied in step 1226-4 (4th), step 1226-7 (4th), or step 1226-10 (4th). Here, the medal insertion error includes, for example, an inserted medal backflow error, an inserted number error, an inserted medal retention error, etc., and it is determined whether or not any error has occurred based on the on/off status (including time) of sensors such as the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor (the occurrence condition differs depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on the on/off detection of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in FIG. 110. If the answer is Yes in any of step 1226-4 (4th), step 1226-7 (4th), and step 1226-10 (4th), medal insertion error processing is executed in step 1226-5 (4th). FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (4th), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (4th), an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1226-14 (4th). In addition, in 1226-13 (4th), information related to the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is on is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board side. Also, the error non-detection command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), or when the error is not detected, the set process of the information may not be executed. The error process is executed according to the type of error that has occurred, but the error detection command may execute the set process only when any error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or may execute the set process when the type of error has changed from a state where a first error (e.g., an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (e.g., a paid medal retention error). In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the currently occurring error has been released. If it is determined that the error has been released, the currently occurring error flag is turned off in step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on detection of gaming medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been explained, but in detecting errors, it is also possible to detect errors based on detection of gaming medals by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s provided near the medal insertion slot D170 in the medal selector DS, for example, and an example of error detection based on detection of gaming medals by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s will be explained below.

<<<<Third embodiment: detection of errors based on insertion monitoring counter>>> <<Configuration 2>> An insertion acceptance sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 pass. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 mainly based on size and accepting only game medals that meet the standard size, and medals (or other foreign objects) that are determined to be incompatible by this function are configured to be paid back to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a game medal that meets the standard has passed, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s changes from off to on, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is on, it performs an addition process from 0 to 1 in a counter that counts the passage of game medals (hereinafter referred to as the insertion monitoring counter). Then, the main control board M performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0 in the insertion monitoring counter when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS, for example, when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off (corresponding to timing 4 in FIG. 110). At this time, for example, if some problem occurs with the insertion of the game medal during the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the counting process of the game medals in the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. For example, if the second insertion sensor D30s does not go from on to off, the subtraction process of the insertion monitoring counter is not performed, and the insertion monitoring counter continues to increment, an insertion medal retention error can be detected. Also, if the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off before the insertion reception sensor D10s, and the subtraction process of the insertion monitoring counter is performed first, causing the insertion monitoring counter to become negative, an insertion medal backflow error can be detected.

<Effects> In this way, by configuring the system so that error determination can be performed based on the detection of gaming medals by the three sensors, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, it becomes possible to reliably detect various errors related to the insertion of gaming medals, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud and, in turn, is user-friendly.

<<<<Third embodiment: Output of medal insertion sound>>> In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on has been described. However, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, an error may occur (for example, an inserted medal retention error due to the second insertion sensor D30s being on for an abnormally long time). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition process is executed when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, it is assumed that an error may occur after the credit addition process, for example. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition process and the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described in particular.

<<Configuration 3>> First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. To explain in detail, in the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting the upper limit of period B, 115 ms, from the upper limit of period C, 183 ms, gives 68 ms. In other words, during this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the process of "accept medal insertion -> set command related to medal insertion acceptance -> send command to the sub-control board -> set error detection command (if there is an error)," making it possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<Configuration 4>> As a variation of Timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M may perform the process of "setting a command related to medal insertion reception → executing the credit addition process → sending a command to the sub-control board → setting an error detection command (if an error exists)."

<Effect> With this configuration, a process related to medal insertion acceptance is executed when the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, and a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S by the subsequent timer interrupt process, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub-control board S. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal accumulation error occurs, it is determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred after the medal insertion sound has already been output (because the situation in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), so the player can hear the medal insertion sound before the error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error is output, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes anxious that the game medal was not inserted properly due to the inserted medal accumulation error and that a loss has been incurred.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, as timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time of performing the credit addition process until the error is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s, and during this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is configured not to intentionally send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. After that, an error detection command due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is set, and then a command related to medal insertion reception is sent to the sub-control board side. In other words, by configuring the CPU 100 of the main control board M to execute the process as follows: "Execute credit addition process → Detect error flag → Set error detection command → Send error detection command to the sub-control board side → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Send command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side", it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. At this time, it is preferable to configure the timing for sending the command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub side to be a timer interrupt process that is different from the time when the error detection command is sent.

<<Configuration 6>> As a variation of Timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M may perform the process of "detecting an error flag → setting an error detection command → sending an error detection command to the sub-control board → setting a command related to medal insertion acceptance → executing credit addition process → sending a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board."

<Effects> With this configuration, when the timing changes from "first insertion sensor D20s on and second insertion sensor D30s on → first insertion sensor D20s off and second insertion sensor D30s on", it is first determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred (because the state in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), an error detection command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and an error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error is output. After that, a process related to medal insertion acceptance is executed, and then a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub-control board S. If the state in which "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, it is determined that the inserted medal retention error has occurred before the medal insertion sound is output (because the state in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), so the player can hear the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error before the medal insertion sound is output and can quickly realize that the game medal has not been inserted normally.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, for timing C, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and after the error is cleared. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more between the credit addition process and the detection of an error by the second insertion sensor D30s, and during this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M does not intentionally send a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board, as in the second timing, but furthermore, after the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the insertion error flag in step 1226-15, a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent to the sub-control board. In other words, by configuring the CPU 100 of the main control board M to execute the process as follows: "Execute credit addition process → Detect error flag → Set error detection command → Send error detection command to sub-control board → ... (error release process during this time) ... → Set error not detected command → Send error not detected command to sub-control board → Set command related to medal insertion acceptance → Send command related to medal insertion acceptance to sub-control board," it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound after the error is released.

<<Configuration 8>> As a variation of timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M may perform the process as follows: "Detect an error flag → Set an error detection command → Send an error detection command to the sub-control board → ... (error release process during this time) ... → Set an error non-detection command → Send an error non-detection command to the sub-control board → Set a command related to medal insertion acceptance → Execute credit addition process → Send a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board."

<Effect> By configuring it in this manner, when the timing changes from "first insertion sensor D20s on and second insertion sensor D30s on → first insertion sensor D20s off and second insertion sensor D30s on", it is first determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred (because the situation where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and an error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error is output. After the error is resolved, an error non-detection command is sent to the sub-side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error ends. Then, after the process related to medal insertion acceptance has been executed, a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub-control board S. If the state of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal accumulation error occurs, it is determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred before the medal insertion sound is output (because the state of the first insertion sensor D20s being off and the second insertion sensor D30s being on continues for more than a predetermined time), and the error is then resolved and output of the error sound is terminated. This allows the player to hear the error sound relating to the inserted medal accumulation error before the medal insertion sound is output, and to hear the medal insertion sound after the error has been resolved, so the player can recognize that the game medals have been inserted normally after the error has been resolved.

<<<Third embodiment: Medal error detection by chute sensor>>> Next, as a third embodiment, detection of an error using the chute sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the flow path member of the medal after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment). In FIG. 114, the chute sensor D40s is provided below the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s detects whether the medal has been inserted normally, similar to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, but in particular, in the third embodiment, it is configured to detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been performed (for example, an inserted medal retention error, an inserted medal backflow error, etc.).

Error detection by the chute sensor D40s will now be described in detail. For example, consider the case where a game medal becomes stuck further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute main body that is connected to the hopper H40. The width of the path for the game medals in the chute main body is roughly the width of one game medal, and when one game medal becomes stuck in the path for the game medals in the chute main body, game medals that pass through the path thereafter become stuck one after another, resulting in an inserted medal stuck error. In the third embodiment, the position detected by the chute sensor D40s is three game medals away from the position where the game medals become stuck, but the position at which the chute sensor D40s can be provided is not limited to this.

The detection of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is similar to the detection of the game medal by the first throw-in sensor D20s and the second throw-in sensor D30s, in that when the game medal passes through, it is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and the signal (information on the timing when the shoot sensor D40s turns on, information on the time from when the shoot sensor D40s turns on to when it turns off, etc.) is supplied to the main control board M. The main control board M determines that the game medal has been inserted normally based on information on the signal detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and further information on the signal detected by the first throw-in sensor D20s and the second throw-in sensor D30s. Specifically, the main control board M compares the period from when the first throw-in sensor D20s or the second throw-in sensor D30s starts detecting the game medal to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting the game medal with a predetermined period (the time that the shoot sensor D40s should detect, hereinafter also referred to as the theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth gaming medal in FIG. 114, the period from when the fourth gaming medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s until the fourth gaming medal is detected by the chute sensor D40s is compared with the theoretical period, and if the difference in the periods exceeds the range that is not detected as an error, an error (a chute sensor medal retention error in the third embodiment) is detected. Note that the start timing of the theoretical period may be the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the gaming medal, the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s starts detecting the gaming medal, the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the gaming medal, or the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s finishes detecting the gaming medal.

<<Third embodiment: Timing chart of game medal detection by chute sensor>> Figure 115 is a timing chart when a game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s. For example, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage of a game medal (off → on) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage of a game medal (off → on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings, etc. are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signal. Then, assume that the chute sensor D40s detects the passage of a game medal (off → on) at timing 3 in the figure. The period D from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal until the chute sensor D40s starts detecting it, and the period E from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects the game medal until the chute sensor D40s starts detecting it are calculated by the main control board M, and these periods are taken as theoretical periods to determine whether the game medal has passed through the chute body normally based on the detection by the chute sensor D40s. In addition, by providing the chute sensor D40s, it is possible to detect errors that may occur after it is determined that the game medal has passed normally through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<Effects> With this configuration, it is possible to detect, for example, any error (chute sensor medal retention error) related to the passage of a game medal near the chute sensor D40s, and to notify the player that an error has occurred. Furthermore, the normal passage of a game medal by the chute sensor D40s is determined based on information related to the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s start detecting the game medal, so that if the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s do not detect the passage of a game medal, but the chute sensor D40s detects the passage of a game medal, that is, an error related to the backflow of inserted medals, can be reliably detected, making it possible to provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud, and ultimately a user-friendly game machine.

<<<<<Fourth embodiment: Medal return member>>>>> Next, as the fourth embodiment, we will explain an example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 through which the gaming medal passes when it is paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230.

First, Figs. 116 to 119 will be described to explain in detail the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment. Fig. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. Fig. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 (explained later) is provided. Fig. 118 is a trajectory diagram of the game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving opening D341 (explained later), and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. Fig. 119 depicts the trajectory of the game medals inside the side view of Fig. 117.

<<<<Front view of medal return member of fourth embodiment>>> Figure 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, when a medal selector DS, which detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and performs simple authenticity checks, returns game medals that have not been added to the bet or credit (game medals that reach the blocker while the blocker is off) to the medal receiving tray D230, the game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path), and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the second flow path), and are finally paid out to the medal receiving tray D230.

The medal return member D340 is configured to have at least a first flow path through which inappropriate game medals detected by the medal selector DS pass when returning them to the medal receiving tray D230, and a second flow path through which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass, and the game medals passing through the two flow paths are configured to merge as they pass through the medal return member D340 and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230.

The second flow path in the medal return member D340 is configured to have at least a medal receiving port D341 that receives game medals dispensed from the hopper H40, and a medal drop surface D342 on which game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is further configured to have a space surrounded by a medal non-drop surface D343 located opposite the medal drop surface D342, a wall surface on which the medal receiving port is provided, and the medal drop surface D342 on which game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall, and is configured so that the game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through this space.

The medal receiving opening D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. In addition, since the medal receiving opening D341 is open, game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 can reliably pass through the medal receiving opening D341. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as the edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer periphery of the shape of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as the edge). In defining the length and distance related to the medal receiving opening D341, the starting point is any position that corresponds to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal drop surface D342 is formed in an approximately rectangular shape, and the medal non-drop surface D343 located opposite the medal drop surface D342 is also formed in an approximately rectangular shape, but the shapes of the medal drop surface D342 and the medal non-drop surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving opening D341 is provided with an inclination in a downward rightward direction, and is configured to be inclined approximately parallel to the medal drop surface D342 onto which the game medals that collide with a collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116 fall. With this configuration, the game medals that are dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and fall onto the medal drop surface D342 slide down from the medal drop surface D342 due to gravity, and it is possible to reliably guide the game medals to the medal receiving tray D230. Note that the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal drop surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal drop surface D342 may be configured so that neither of them is inclined. Note that the inappropriate medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to fall from above toward the medal receiving tray D230 as seen by the player in a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction of the medal receiving opening D341.

<<<<Side view of medal return member of fourth embodiment, diagram of trajectory of game medal flow (perspective view)>>> Next, using Figures 117 and 118, the dimensional regulations for the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be explained. Figure 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 is provided. First, the thickness and diameter of the game medal are defined as a and b, respectively (see Figure 116). Note that it is preferable that the thickness of the game medal, a, is approximately 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and that the diameter of the game medal, b, is approximately 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm.

Next, the distance from the medal drop surface D342 on which the game medals fall after being dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341 is defined as c, the maximum distance from the medal non-drop surface D342 to the edge of the medal receiving opening in a direction perpendicular to the medal non-drop surface D343 is defined as d, the length of at least one direction of the base or height at the edge of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341, which is approximately rectangular in shape) is defined as e, and the maximum length of the medal drop surface D342 in a direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341 is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, certain conditions are set for the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions: c ≥ a... Equation (1) b > d... Equation (2) f ≥ 2b... Equation (3) b > e... Equation (4) In addition, in the fourth embodiment, game medals of either 25Φ size or 30Φ size can be used.

First, by satisfying formulas (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the first and second game medals from colliding. The distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be greater than the thickness a of the game medal, and there is a sufficient distance from the medal receiving opening D341 for the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H to collide with the collision part. Therefore, when the game medal falls freely under its own weight and collides with the collision part and falls onto the medal drop surface D342 (when the game medal is lying down), it is outside the area through which the next game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 will pass, and therefore collision can be prevented.

Next, by satisfying formula (4), it is possible to configure the game medal dispensed from the medal dispenser H of the hopper H40 (regardless of whether the game medal is lying down or standing up) so that it will not collide with the second game medal dispensed thereafter, and also so that the game medal dispensed from the medal dispenser H of the hopper H40 will not block the medal receiving opening D341.

Next, by satisfying formula (3), the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the medal, and it is possible to configure the device to prevent the first medal that hits the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341.

By regulating the dimensions of the medal return member D340 as in formulas (1) to (4), it is possible to smoothly dispense game medals from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and smoothly guide the game medals to the medal receiving tray D230. Figure 118 is a trajectory diagram of a game medal that is dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving opening D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of regulating the dimensions in formulas (1) to (4), it is possible to configure the medal return member D340 so that the first game medal dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal dispensed thereafter do not collide with each other, and the game medal dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving opening D341.

As shown in FIG. 117, in this example, the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341 on the outer side of the medal return member D340 is configured to have a protruding edge, but it may also be configured to have a protruding edge on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341 on the inner side of the medal return member D340. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H will flow back into the medal receiving opening D341 after colliding with the collision portion.

<<<<Fourth embodiment: Diagram of trajectory of game medal flow (side view)>>> In FIG. 118, the trajectory of the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving port D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be explained in more detail using FIG. 119. FIG. 119 illustrates the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal collides with a collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116. The interval between the release of the first game medal from the medal receiving port D341 and the release of the second game medal can be determined by the rotational speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H, and the rotational speed can be determined arbitrarily. However, as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. The timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H may be (1) approximately simultaneously with the timing at which the first game medal collides with the collision portion, (2) before (just before) the first game medal collides with the collision portion, or (3) after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. The distance f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted to match the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. As for the above (2), it is preferable that the timing is set to the timing after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H and passes through the medal receiving port D341, and then advances (is launched) in the horizontal direction by at least the diameter (above b) of the game medal. In addition, the more time has passed since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H when the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the lower the possibility that the first game medal and the second game medal will collide. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is set too long, the interval between the payout times of the game medals becomes too long, and the tempo at which the game medals are paid out becomes poor. In addition, since the size (depth) of the inside of the housing of the gaming machine is limited, it is difficult to ensure that the above f (the maximum length of the medal drop surface D342 in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341) is at least a predetermined distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable that the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. This configuration can prevent the first game medal from colliding with the collision portion and then colliding with the second game medal. It is preferable that the third and subsequent game medals paid out do not collide with each other, and it is preferable that at least the game medals paid out up to the maximum number of medals paid out in the design of the gaming machine (for example, 15 medals) do not collide with each other. It is possible to create an effect that the game medals to be paid out are less likely to get clogged in the return member D340, even if the medals do not collide with each other when the first and second medals are paid out, but collide with each other when the second and third medals are paid out. This means that in a gaming machine, two medals are paid out more frequently than three medals are paid out. In addition, the collision portion may be protected by, for example, metal, in order to increase the durability of the medal return member D340 against the collision of the game medals.

Next, as shown in the lower left, the first game medal collides with the collision section and then falls on the medal drop surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads toward the collision section in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, the configuration as shown in formula (1) can prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other. Next, as shown in the lower right, the first game medal that has fallen on the medal drop surface D342 is inclined in the inclination direction of the medal drop surface D342 due to gravity, and is guided to the medal tray D230 by falling from the medal drop surface D342. The second game medal collides with the collision section and then falls on the medal drop surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, the first game medal is configured to tilt due to gravity in the inclination direction of the medal drop surface D342, so that it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal, and further, to prevent the medal from colliding with the collision part and bouncing back into the opening of the medal receiving port D341, thereby preventing a backflow.

<<Effect 1>> The second game medal is released from the medal receiving opening D341 toward the collision section, and the first game medal collides with the collision section and then falls onto the medal drop surface D342. At this time, it is configured to satisfy formulas (1) and (3). In other words, the distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be greater than the thickness a of the game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H has a sufficient distance from the medal receiving opening D341 to collide with the collision section, so that the game medal falls freely under its own weight, and when the game medal that collides with the collision section falls onto the medal drop surface D342 (when the game medal is lying down), it is outside the area through which the next game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 passes, so collision can be prevented.

<<Effect 2>> For example, by configuring as in formula (2) and formula (4), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a medal that collides with the collision section and bounces off from entering the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 3>> For example, by configuring as in formula (3), it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, and it is possible to prevent the first gaming medal that hits the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<<Effect 4>> The first game medal that falls onto the medal drop surface D342 falls from the medal drop surface D342 and flows down towards the medal receiving tray D230, and the second game medal falls onto the medal drop surface D342 at approximately the same position as the first game medal fell, as shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 119. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a situation in which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 due to being stuck near the medal receiving opening D341.

<<Effect 5>> A gaming machine can be provided that can prevent damage and deterioration of the medal return member D340 because it has a cushioning material that cushions the impact of the impact part where the gaming medals that are paid out at high speed from the medal payout device H collide.

<<Effect 6>> When a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 collides with the collision section once and loses its initial momentum when paid out, it causes a collision between game medals (such as a collision between a game medal returned from the medal selector DS and a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, or a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40) and prevents the game medals from flowing down into the medal tray D230 in an unrhythmic manner, thereby providing a user-friendly gaming machine.

The collision portion against which the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H collide may be part of the front door DU or part of the medal return member D340, or the collision portion alone may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member.

In addition, in this example, the collision portion with which the game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H collide has a planar shape that is approximately perpendicular to the medal drop surface D342, but it is sufficient that the game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H collide and the collided game medals flow down toward the medal tray D230. For example, the medal drop surface D342 may be curved in shape and configured to play the same role as the collision portion, or any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision portion. Also, as described above, only the collision portion may be configured to be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member, and the collision portion may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>><<<<Fifth embodiment: Timing chart of driving control of medal payout device>>> Next, as the fifth embodiment, the driving control of the medal payout device H will be described. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to the detection of the hopper motor H80, which is driven when the game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, and the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. Details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later, but for the sake of explanation, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is set to the second payout sensor H2, and the second payout sensor H20s in FIG. 4 is set to the first payout sensor H1. In the initial position where the game medal is not paid out (the initial position when the disk is not rotating), the first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off. First, in the hopper motor H80, the hopper drive flag is in an ON state when the hopper motor H80 is driven. When the medal payout device H pays out game medals, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced by the discharge urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 to the discharge port D240, thereby paying out the game medals. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 are detected to be ON or OFF based on, for example, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70. Specifically, at the timing 1 in the figure, a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in an ON state is transmitted to the main control board M when the discharge urging means H70 has not yet been displaced to a position where the game medals are paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). Then, the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move to a position where the game medal is paid out, and the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move from the initial position, thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the OFF state to the main control board M (the first payout sensor H1 changes from ON to OFF). At the timing of 2 in the figure, the discharge biasing means H70 moves to a position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the payout position in the fifth embodiment), thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the ON state to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 changes from OFF to ON). Then, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medal is completed, and the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move to the initial position again, thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the OFF state to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 changes from ON to OFF). Then, at timing 4 in the figure, the release biasing means H70 is displaced back to the initial position, and a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is sent to the main control board M (the first payout sensor H1 changes from OFF to ON). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, for example, by detecting that the period from timing 1 to timing 2 is within the predetermined range A (A<26 ms), the period from timing 2 to timing 3 is within the predetermined range B (9 ms≦B<60 ms), and the period from timing 3 to timing 4 is within the predetermined range C (9 ms≦C<60), it is determined that the medal payout device H is functioning normally and that normal payout of game medals is being performed.

<<<Fifth embodiment: Medal payout by medal payout device - stopping of medal payout device>>><<Configuration>> Next, using Figure 121, a series of flows from the start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stopping of the medal payout device H will be explained. First, in Figure 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to concisely explain the series of flows from the payout of game medals to the stopping of the medal payout device H, the configuration related to the medal payout device H that is unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment has been eliminated as much as possible. Figure 121 is a front view of the disk H50 that rotates when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disk H50 has a plurality of circular cavities larger than the game medals, and the disk H50 is configured to cover and overlap the game medals, and the game medals are moved under the disk H50 by the rotation of the disk H50, so that the game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is before being driven, and the first payout sensor H1 is in an on state. In the fifth embodiment, this state is the initial position of the discharge biasing means H70, and for the sake of clarity, an initial position (disk H50) before the rotation of the disk H50 is provided on the outer periphery of the disk H50. This initial position (disk H50) is displaced in the rotation direction of the disk H50 every time a game medal is paid out. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and the explanation will start from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper diagram of Figure 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that at the initial position (disk H50), the disk has rotated by angle A from the position where the third game medal was paid out. In other words, when the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, the disk H50 rotates by angle A before the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position. Also, the disk H50 does not rotate before the release urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left part of Figure 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, and the release energizing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after the fourth game medal has been paid out, the release energizing means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position, but during this time, the disk H50 is not rotating, so it can be seen that it has rotated by angle A from the position where the fourth game medal was paid out, just as when the fourth game medal was paid out.

Then, as shown in the lower right, after the fifth game medal is dispensed, the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the dispense of the game medals is completed. After the hopper motor H80 is turned off, the rotation of the disk H50 stops, but the initial position (disk H50) stops at a position shifted in the rotation direction by angle B from the position where the fifth game medal was dispensed. The reason for this configuration is that, in particular, when the first game medal is dispensed, the hopper motor H80 does not immediately reach a constant speed state after the start of driving, but takes a certain amount of time to reach a constant speed state. In other words, if the release biasing means H70 is in the initial position when the first game medal (hopper motor H80 is in an accelerating state to constant speed state) is dispensed, there will be a delay by the amount that the hopper motor H80 is in an accelerating state, compared to when the second and subsequent game medals (hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state) are dispensed.

Here, a detailed description will be given of the process from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is dispensed. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 goes from a stopped state to a constant speed state via an accelerated state. Here, the rotation speed in the constant speed state is A (m/t). The accelerated state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from speed 0 to a constant speed A, and if the average rotation speed during the period from speed 0 to the constant speed state (period of the accelerated state) is B (m/t), then B<A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m/t) from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is dispensed is B<C<A.

Next, we will explain in detail the process from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is dispensed, it remains in a constant speed state from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed. Therefore, the average rotational speed from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed is A.

As described above, the average rotational speed A from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed is faster than the average rotational speed C from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is dispensed. Therefore, if the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is dispensed and the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed are the same, the time required from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is dispensed will be longer than the time required from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed.

As shown in Figure 121, in this example, after the last game medal (the fifth game medal in the figure) has been paid out as part of the game medal payout process, the disk H50 is shifted in the rotational direction by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) and stopped (the rotation distance becomes longer). By configuring it in this way, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be made shorter than the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out (the same distance is also the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out), and the time required from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be made closer (approximate) to the time required from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out, and the game medals can be paid out at a good tempo, allowing the player to play without feeling uncomfortable.

The width of deviation in the rotation direction when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven (angle B) depends on the period from the accelerated state to the constant speed state due to the drive of the hopper motor H80, and by considering the difference between the width of rotation in the accelerated state of the hopper motor H80 and the width of rotation in the constant speed state of the hopper motor H80 during this period, the extent to which the release urging means H70 will deviate in the rotation direction from the initial position to stop the disk H50 after the hopper motor H80 is driven is determined. The difference between the width of rotation in the accelerated state of the hopper motor H80 and the width of rotation in the constant speed state of the hopper motor H80 is sufficiently smaller than the width from the position corresponding to the initial position of the release urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80 to the position corresponding to the dispensing position of the release urging means H70, so it is preferable that angle B is sufficiently smaller than angle A. Even if the rotation direction is shifted by angle B, the detection of the gaming medals by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected, and the detection of the gaming medals is performed based on the timing chart in FIG. 120.

<<Effects>> With this configuration, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player receiving the payout of game medals can receive the game medals at approximately regular intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration of the fifth embodiment with the configuration of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to configure the game medals so that (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) medal jams due to collisions between game medals do not occur, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, after the last game medal is dispensed, the disk H50 is configured to stop at a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotational direction, thereby preventing a situation in which a fraudulent device is inserted through the ejection port D240 to fraudulently obtain game medals.

<<<<<Sixth embodiment Control when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is not possible>>>> Next, as the sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible will be described. Here, as a case in which communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M to the sub-control board S cannot be transmitted. The main control board M is configured to transmit various commands related to the game to the sub-control board based on the progress of the game, for example, in the game progress control process of FIG. 16, and also to transmit various commands from the main control board to the sub-control board periodically at a predetermined time (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) as a process related to a subroutine, as in step 1622 of FIG. 32. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute a performance based on the commands. In addition, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub-control board S is configured to be able to receive commands from the main control board M but unable to transmit commands to the main control board side. In the gaming machine, the main control board M and the sub-control board S each have a program related to execution processing (the program possessed by the main control board M is called the main side program, and the program possessed by the sub-control board S is called the sub-side program), and for example, the sub-control board S is configured to execute a performance by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. In other words, under a situation where it is unable to receive commands from the main control board M, the sub-control board S is unable to execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. A situation where the sub-control board S is unable to receive commands from the main control board M may occur, for example, due to a malfunction of a member caused by poor contact of a harness electrically connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible, the main side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game can be executed, and the game itself related to the main side program can be executed even if communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible. In addition, when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored from a situation in which communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is impossible, a command related to the process after communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board to the sub-control board based on the progress of the main side program, and the sub-control board S executes processing based on the command related to the process after communication is restored received from the main control board M. Below, using Figures 122 to 126, an example of the processing performed by the main control board M and the sub-control board S when communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible while various commands are being executed by the main control board M will be described as the sixth embodiment.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are one to one>>> Figure 122 shows a chronological flow of processing as an example of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible during processing related to settlement. First, the number of games is set to be the Nth game as a predetermined number of games, and processing is performed across the N+1th game. In the sixth embodiment, the processing performed by the main control board M, in particular, is to send commands based on the progress of the game to the sub-control board S, and the processing performed by the sub-control board S is to execute a performance based on the command received from the main control board M, which is one set of processing (one sequence in the sixth embodiment). Note that the sub-control board S does not execute a performance based on all commands received from the main control board M, and may or may not execute a performance based on the received command. For example, in Fig. 122 to Fig. 126, the sub-control board S executes a performance for each command transmitted by the main control board M as an example, but it is to be noted that the sub-control board S may execute a performance or may not execute a performance based on the reception of each command. When the settlement button is operated to settle the credits in a situation where one or more credits exist, the sound during settlement corresponding to the settlement of the game medals is output from the speaker S20, but the sound channel that outputs the sound during settlement is a channel that corresponds only to the sound during settlement. For example, the sub-control board S executes a performance based on a command received from the main control board M, but in particular, when executing a process of outputting sound from the speaker S20, the command received from the main control board M is associated with the sound channel of the speaker S20. In other words, sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. Note that the command and the sound channel do not have to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, multiple commands (such as a command to start settlement or multiple commands related to detecting certain errors) may be associated with one audio channel. By configuring in this way, even if the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure the device to output audio without increasing the number of channels.

<<Configuration 1>> FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, in processing sequence 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub-control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound during settlement from the speaker S20. In the case of the processing command and the channel being one-to-one when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the execution of the settlement-related processing, the audio channel that outputs the sound during settlement corresponds only to the command related to the start of settlement, and does not correspond to other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound during settlement, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, the case where the communication is cut off may be a case where the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, such as a poor connection of a harness electrically connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S. This is not limited to this. Any case may be possible as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound during settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and when it determines that the payout of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits has been completed, it sends a command related to the end of settlement to the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it executes the process of ending the output of the sound during settlement.

In sequence 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the end of settlement to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command related to the end of settlement to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it does not stop outputting the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. Note that while the main control board M is executing the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determining that the payout of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits has been completed, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, but the process performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payment of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits is completed, it restores communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the settlement process has been completed and sets the command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In sequence 3, when the Nth game play is started and it is determined that a game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M sends a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the insertion of a medal, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to medal insertion acceptance has ended, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game play.

In step 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start lever operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In step 5, upon determining that the reels have started spinning due to the start lever being operated, the main control board M sends a command to start the reels spinning to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command to start the reels spinning from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reels spinning, but because it cannot receive a command to end the settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during the settlement without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process to start the reels spinning has ended, and sets a command for the next process for the Nth game.

In sequence 6, the process related to starting the reels to spin has ended, and the player is now able to perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation for the first reel (the first reel being the first of the multiple reels that the player performs the stop operation on) has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 7, by determining that the operation to stop the second reel (the second reel being the reel on which the player performs the second stop operation among the multiple reels) has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In sequence 8, upon determining that the operation to stop the third reel (the third reel being the reel among multiple reels on which the player performs the third stop operation) has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game. The command set at this time is, as an example, a command related to stopping the displayed symbols, which is sent immediately after the stop button is operated to stop all reels and stop the displayed symbols, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, as a command for the sub-control board S to output a sound based on a command from the main control board M, a command related to the case where a winning combination (such as a push order bell role) that pays out game medals is determined to be won in the Nth game and a symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed based on the reel stop operation (referred to as a "command related to winning" in the sixth embodiment) is sent (as a command for the next process in the Nth game).

In step 9, by determining that the stop operation of all reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbols, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbols, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbols has ended and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, communication between the two boards is temporarily cut off, resulting in a situation in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that the sub-control board S has not received from the main control board M is a command related to the end of settlement, and is configured to continue to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement during the period from the insertion of a game medal for the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels.

Next, for the N+1th game, processing proceeds to orders 10 and 11. For order 10, similar to order 1 for the Nth game, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to start settlement. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that settlement is in progress from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound indicating that settlement is in progress output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound indicating that settlement was output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by sending a command based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button for the N+1th game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S starts outputting the sound during settlement based on the command related to the start of settlement for the N+1th game received from the main control board M, while ending the output of the sound during the settlement for the Nth game (the processing of the sub-control board S is as follows: output of sound during settlement for the Nth game → receive command related to the start of settlement for the N+1th game → end output of sound during settlement for the Nth game → start output of sound during settlement for the N+1th game).

In step 11, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and when it determines that the payout of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits has been completed, it sends a command to end the settlement to the sub-control board. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes the process of ending the output of the sound during the settlement for the N+1th game.

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player will not notice that the audio output has ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred with the gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the game is not stopped as an error but the game can continue to progress on the main control board M, communication between the two sides is restored without temporarily cutting off power to the game machine to deal with an error, providing a user-friendly game machine in which sound output can be terminated while the game is progressing.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are not one-to-one >>> <<Configuration 2>> Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, in processing sequence 1, the main control board M sends a command based on the start of settlement to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that settlement is in progress from the speaker S20 based on the received command. In <<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are not one-to-one >>, the audio channel that outputs the sound indicating that settlement is in progress corresponds not only to commands based on detection of the operation of the settlement button, but also to other commands (here, "error detection command due to detection of the door open error flag"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound indicating that settlement is in progress, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound during settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and when it determines that the payout of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits has been completed, it sends a command related to the end of settlement to the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it executes the process of ending the output of the sound during settlement.

In sequence 2, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S regarding the completion of settlement, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to the sub-control board S regarding the completion of settlement. At this time, because the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end settlement from the main control board M, it does not stop outputting the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. Note that while the main control board M is executing the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determining that the payout of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits has been completed, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, but the process performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is continuing.

The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payment of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits is completed, it restores communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the settlement process has been completed and sets the command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In sequence 3, when the Nth game play is started and it is determined that a game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M sends a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the insertion of a medal, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to medal insertion acceptance has ended, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game play.

In step 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 5, upon determining that the reels have started spinning as a result of the start lever being operated, the main control board M sends a command to start the reels spinning to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command to start the reels spinning from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reels spinning, but because it cannot receive a command to end the settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during the settlement without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process to start the reels spinning has ended, and sets a command for the next process for the Nth game.

In step 6, let us assume that the process related to starting the reels to spin has ended, and the player is now able to perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the operation to stop the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to completing the settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during inspection. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 7, by determining that the operation to stop the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 8, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing of the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, a command related to the stopping of the stopped display pattern, which is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the displayed pattern, is used as an example, but it is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to send a command related to winning or the like (as a command for the next processing of the Nth game) as a command for outputting sound based on a command from the main control board M.

In step 9, by determining that the stop operation of all reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbols, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbols, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbols has ended and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, communication between the two boards is temporarily cut off, resulting in a situation in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that the sub-control board S has not received from the main control board M is a command related to the end of settlement, and is configured to continue to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement during the period from the insertion of a game medal for the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels.

Next, the process proceeds to sequence 10 for the N+1 game. Assume that a specific error occurs in sequence 10. A door open error is described as an example of the error at this time, but the error is not limited to this and may be any error such as an abnormal insertion error, an abnormal withdrawal error, or an insertion reception sensor retention error. When the main control board M determines that a door open error has occurred, particularly because the front door DU is open, it transmits an error detection command based on the detection of a door open error flag to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the error detection command based on the detection of a door open error flag, the sub-control board S performs processing to output a door open error notification sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, the sub-control board S is configured to end the output of the sound during settlement in the Nth game and start outputting the door open error notification sound in the N+1th game by receiving an error detection command due to detection of the door open error flag in the N+1th game while the sound during settlement is being continued from the Nth game.

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, when an error occurs, for example, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with multiple commands, such as commands related to error detection, an error notification sound can be reliably output, reliably informing the player that an error has occurred, and by restoring communication between the two, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided in which audio output can be terminated as the game progresses.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off while the minimum play time has not elapsed When the command and the channel are one to one>>><<Configuration 3>> Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible while the minimum play time from when the start lever D50 is operated to when the reels start spinning has not elapsed will be described. First, in processing sequence 1, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation (here referred to as a wait sound) from the speaker S20. In the sixth embodiment, when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the period when the minimum play time has not yet elapsed, the voice channel that outputs the wait sound only corresponds to the command related to the start lever operation, and does not correspond to other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the wait sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, the case where the communication is cut off may be a case where the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, such as a poor connection of the harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub-control board S. Any case may be possible as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the wait sound, the main control board M determines that a state in which preparations for starting the reel spinning has begun based on the operation of the start lever (here referred to as the start of the reel spinning start waiting state), and sends a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning waiting state. The sub-control board S is configured to execute a process to end the output of the wait sound by receiving the command to start the reel spinning start waiting state.

In sequence 2, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state. At this time, because the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to start the reel spinning standby state from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the wait sound and continues to output the wait sound. Note that while the main control board M is executing the process to start the reel spinning standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, but the process performed by the main control board M, which is responsible for the progress of the game, is ongoing.

After the main control board M completes the process for starting the reel spin start waiting state based on the detection of the start lever operation, it restores communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command for starting the reel spin start waiting state from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process for starting the reel spin start waiting state has ended, and sets the command for the next process for the Nth game.

In step 3, upon determining that the reels have started spinning due to the start lever operation, the main control board M sends a command to start the reels spinning to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command to start the reels spinning from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reels spinning, but because it cannot receive a command to start the reels spinning start waiting state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of the reels spinning has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In sequence 4, let us assume that the process related to starting the reels to spin has ended, and the player is now able to perform the reel stop operation. Having determined that the operation to stop the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to entering the waiting state for the reels to start spinning from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 5, by determining that the operation to stop the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the start of the reel spin start waiting state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 6, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel, while continuing to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound since it cannot receive a command related to the start of the reel spin start waiting state from the main control board M. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As an example of the command to be set at this time, a command related to the stop of the stop display pattern that is transmitted immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display pattern is used as an example, but it is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning or the like (as a command for the next process of the Nth game) as a command for outputting a sound based on a command from the main control board M.

In step 7, by determining that all reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to stop the stop display symbols. Based on receiving the command to stop the stop display symbols, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display symbols, but because it cannot receive a command to start the reel spin start waiting state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process to stop the stop display symbols has been completed, and terminates the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, communication between the two boards is temporarily cut off, resulting in a situation in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that the sub-control board S has not received from the main control board M is a command to start the reel spin start waiting state, and is configured to continue to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound during the period from the insertion of the game medal in the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels.

Next, for the N+1th game, processing proceeds to steps 8 and 9. In step 8, the main control board M determines that a game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, and sends a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the insertion of a medal, but because it cannot receive a command related to entering the waiting state for the reel to start spinning for the Nth game from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to medal insertion acceptance has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing for the N+1th game.

In step 9, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving the command to start the reel spinning standby state. At this time, the wait sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the wait sound output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by transmitting a command to start the reel spinning standby state in the N+1th game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S starts outputting the wait sound based on the command to start the reel spinning standby state in the N+1th game received from the main control board M, while the output of the wait sound for the Nth game ends (the processing of the sub-control board S is as follows: output of the wait sound for the Nth game → reception of a command to start the reel spinning standby state for the N+1th game → end of output of the wait sound for the Nth game → start of output of the wait sound for the N+1th game).

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player will not notice that the audio output has ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred with the gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the game is not stopped as an error but the game can continue to progress on the main control board M, communication between the two sides is restored without temporarily cutting off power to the game machine to deal with an error, providing a user-friendly game machine in which sound output can be terminated while the game is progressing.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of payout processing When the command and the channel are not one-to-one >>> <<Configuration 4>> Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible while game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40 will be described. First, as processing sequence 1, when a winning role (e.g., a push order bell role, etc.) in which game medals are paid out is won in the Nth game and game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S relating to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. Based on receiving the command to start medal payout from the hopper H40, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (here referred to as a medal payout sound) relating to the payout of game medals from the speaker S20. In the sixth embodiment, when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the execution of the payout process, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is assumed to correspond to not only the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40, but also other commands (here, the command is assumed to be related to the operation of the start lever). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the winning, and by determining that the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning have been paid out from the hopper H40, sends a command related to the end of the payout of game medals from the hopper H40 to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of the payout of medals from the hopper H40, and executes the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In step 2, a command to end medal payout from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40 to the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, so it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Note that while the main control board M is counting the number of game medals paid out related to the winning and has finished determining which game medals should be paid out from the hopper H40 as a result of the winning, the processing performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is continuing.

The main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the winning, and after it has determined that the number of game medals to be paid out from the hopper H40 for that winning has been paid out, it restores communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received a command from the main control board M for completing the medal payout, but the main control board M has determined that the number of game medals to be paid out from the hopper H40 for that winning has been paid out, so processing of the Nth game is complete and a command for the N+1th game is set.

Next, for the N+1th game, processing proceeds to steps 3 and 4. In step 3, upon determining that a game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M sends a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the insertion of a medal, but because it cannot receive a command related to ending medal payout for the Nth game from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to medal insertion acceptance has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing for the N+1th game.

In step 4, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spin standby state. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving the command to start the reel spin standby state. As described above, the command to start medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command to start the reel spin standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, while the medal payout sound is continuing to be output from the Nth game, the sub-control board S is configured to end output of the medal payout sound for the Nth game and start output of the wait sound for the N+1th game by receiving a command to start the reel spin standby state for the N+1th game.

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player will not notice that the audio output has ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred with the gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, by associating multiple commands, such as commands related to the progress of a game, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the audio output to be terminated as the game progresses by restoring communication between the two.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of payout processing When the command and the channel are one to one>>><<Configuration 5>> Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible for a predetermined period (here, until the reel starts to rotate (acceleration processing is performed)) from the state in which game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40 will be described. First, as processing sequence 1, when a winning role (for example, a push order bell role, etc.) in which game medals are paid out is won in the Nth game and game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to start paying out medals from the hopper H40. Based on receiving the command to start paying out medals from the hopper H40, the sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20. In the sixth embodiment, when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the execution of the payout process, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound only supports commands related to the start of medal payout, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the winning, and determines that the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning has been paid out from the hopper H40, and transmits a command related to the end of the payout of the game medals from the hopper H40 to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of the payout of the game medals from the hopper H40, thereby executing the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In sequence 2, a command to end the payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to end the payout of medals from the hopper H40 to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end the payout of medals from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the medal payout sound and continues to output the medal payout sound. Note that while the main control board M is counting the number of game medals paid out related to the winning and has finished determining which game medals are to be paid out from the hopper H40 due to the winning, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is ongoing.

Next, for the N+1th game, the process proceeds from sequence 3 to sequence 10. In sequence 3, by determining that a game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot transmit the command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to medal insertion reception from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the insertion of the medal, but it continues to output the medal dispensing sound without terminating the output of the medal dispensing sound. In other words, since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to medal insertion reception, so it continues to output only the medal dispensing sound.

In step 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, so it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, but it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. In other words, because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to ending medal payout from the hopper H40, the command related to medal insertion acceptance, and the command related to the start lever operation, so it continues to output only the medal payout sound.

In sequence 5, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to start the reel spinning standby state from the main control board M, so it cannot output the wait sound, but it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. In other words, because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40, the command to accept medal insertion, the command to operate the start lever, or the command to start the reel spinning standby state, so it continues to output only the medal payout sound.

After the main control board M determines that the reels have started waiting to start spinning, it restores communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received from the main control board M the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40, the command to accept medal insertion, the command to operate the start lever, or the command to start waiting to start spinning, but the main control board M determines that the reels are ready to start spinning based on the operation of the start lever, and sets the command for the next process for the N+1th game.

In step 6, upon determining that the reels have started spinning due to the start lever operation, the main control board M sends a command to start the reels spinning to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command to start the reels spinning from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reels spinning, but because it cannot receive a command to end the medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process to start the reels spinning has ended, and sets a command for the next process for the N+1th game.

In sequence 7, the process related to starting the reels to spin has ended, and the player is now able to perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the operation to stop the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to ending the payout of medals from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1th game.

In step 8, by determining that the operation to stop the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1th game.

In step 9, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing of the Nth game. Note that, for the sake of simplicity, the next processing of the N+1th game is set to a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40, but it is also possible to configure the main control board M to transmit a command related to the stop of the stop display pattern or a command related to winning, for example, as the command to be sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S during this time.

In sequence 10, when a winning combination (such as a push order bell combination) that results in the payment of game medals in the N+1th game is determined and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to start the payment of game medals from the hopper H40. Based on receiving the command to start the payment of medals from the hopper H40, the sub-control board S outputs a medal payment sound from the speaker S20. At this time, the medal payment sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payment sound output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by transmitting a command from the main control board M to the sub-control board S regarding the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N+1th game, the sub-control board S starts outputting the medal payout sound based on the command regarding the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N+1th game received from the main control board M, while ending the output of the medal payout sound for the Nth game (the processing of the sub-control board S is as follows: output of medal payout sound for the Nth game → reception of a command regarding the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N+1th game → ending output of medal payout sound for the Nth game → starting output of medal payout sound for the N+1th game).

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player will not notice that the audio output has ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred with the gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the game is not stopped as an error but the game can continue to progress on the main control board M, communication between the two sides is restored without temporarily cutting off power to the game machine to deal with an error, providing a user-friendly game machine in which sound output can be terminated while the game is progressing.

<<Configuration related to the number of places applicable to this example>> Here, the configuration related to the number of places of the internal lottery that can be applied to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the following configuration can be applied to all embodiments in this example.

First, we will use Figure 127 to explain in detail the configuration related to the numbers that can be applied to this example.

<When BB is not activated> The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has 1 type BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and 2 type BB (sometimes referred to as MB), and as roles related to 1 type BB (a role in which a symbol combination in which 1 type BB is activated after winning can be displayed as a stop symbol, sometimes referred to as a 1 type BB role), it has "1 type BB alone" (a condition device in which the 1 type BB role is won alone) and "1 type BB + cherry" (a condition device in which the 1 type BB role and cherry are won in combination). In addition, as roles related to 2 type BB (a role in which a symbol combination in which 2 type BB is activated after winning can be displayed as a stop symbol, sometimes referred to as a 2 type BB role), it has "2 type BB alone" (a condition device in which the 2 type BB role is won alone) and "2 type BB + cherry" (a condition device in which the 2 type BB role and cherry are won in combination).

In addition, there are four types of winning combinations (combinations that, when stopped, will result in the payment of game medals) - bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry - and the bell with the highest winning number (10400/65536) is sometimes called the main minor combination.

The "BB not activated" table at the top of the figure is a table regarding the number of medals placed when Type 1 BB and Type 2 BB are not activated (sometimes referred to as normal gameplay state, etc.). The "Number of medals inserted" is the number of medals inserted assuming that the game is played with a bet of 3 medals in order to calculate the various expected values described below. The specified number of medals when Type 1 BB and Type 2 BB are activated is 2 medals, but the "Number of medals inserted" is set to 3. The "Number of medals paid out" is the number of medals paid out when the "Number of medals inserted" is set to 3. For example, when playing with Type 1 BB activated, only roles that result in a payout of 15 medals with a bet of 2 medals can be won, but since the "Number of medals inserted" is assumed to be 3, the "Number of medals paid out" is also "15 x 3 ÷ 2 = 22.5".

The "number of pieces" is the number of pieces that is determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65536. The "probability" is the probability that the condition device is determined by an internal lottery.

The "number of games" is the number of games required to calculate various expected values, which will be described later. For "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + Cherry", "2 type BB alone", and "2 type BB + Cherry", the "number of games" is 1 because they are examples of a case where a symbol combination related to 1 type BB or 2 type BB is stopped and displayed in a game where 1 type BB or 2 type BB is won. In addition, for "1 type combined", the "number of games" is 24 because they are examples of a case where a symbol combination that activates 1 type BB is stopped and displayed after "1 type BB alone" or "1 type BB + Cherry" is won, and then 2 type BB is executed (consumed). In addition, for "2 types combined", the "number of games" is 8 because they are examples of a case where a symbol combination that activates 2 type BB is stopped and displayed after "2 type BB alone" or "2 type BB + Cherry" is won.

The "expected number of coins inserted" is the expected number of coins inserted per game, taking into account the probability determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by "number of coins inserted x probability x number of games." The "expected number of coins paid out" is the expected number of coins paid out per game, taking into account the probability determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by "number of coins paid out x probability x number of games."

The configuration in the figure may also be applied when playing as follows:

<Game Method 1> This is a game method in which the game is executed in a game method that is most profitable for the player. In a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, and not a push order role such as a push order bell, the game is executed in a stop operation mode (the operation mode of the stop button, including the order in which the stop button is pressed, the timing of the stop button operation, etc.) that stops and displays (wins) a symbol combination that will result in the payout of game medals. In a game in which a push order role such as a push order bell is won (not shown in the figure, but it may be configured to have a push order role), the game is executed in a stop operation mode that will result in the greatest number of medals being paid out.

<Game Method 2> In games where a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, rather than a push order role such as a push order bell, the game is executed in a stop operation mode (the operation mode of the stop button, including the order in which the stop button is pressed, the timing of the stop button operation, etc.) that causes a symbol combination that will result in the payout of game medals to be stopped and displayed (a prize is won). In games where a push order role such as a push order bell is won (not shown in the figure, but it may be configured to have a push order role), the game is executed in a random stop operation mode (the order in which the stop button is pressed and the timing of the stop button operation are random) regardless of whether push order navigation is executed or not. Note that random means, for example, that for the order in which the stop button is pressed, all six types of push orders are selected in equal proportions, and for the stop timings, all 20 stop operation timings are selected in equal proportions.

"Inside" refers to a game after winning either "1st type BB alone", "1st type BB + cherry", "2nd type BB alone", or "2nd type BB + cherry", and in which the symbol combinations that activate 1st type BB or 2nd type BB, as well as the symbol combinations related to bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays are not displayed (games in which the small prize or replay was not won while the winning of 1st type BB or 2nd type BB was carried over). In the figure, a game in which the small prize or replay was not won while the winning of 1st type BB or 2nd type BB was carried over was played at 290/65536, the "expected number of inputs" was approximately 0.013275146, and the "expected number of payouts" was 0.

<When BB 1 is in operation> The second row from the top of the figure shows "When BB 1 is in operation" which is a table regarding the number of bets when BB 1 is in operation. When BB 1 is in operation, the specified number is two, and it is configured to win either bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry without winning a miss. In addition, the "payout number" is 15 for all of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, making bell the most likely to win (the most likely to be determined). In addition, one or more (or all) of the "placed numbers" that will win watermelon, symbol, and cherry may be configured to be the same as when BB is not in operation. As mentioned above, in games when BB 1 is in operation, 15 coins are paid out for a bet of two coins in all games, so the expected payout number when the specified number is three coins (the "payout number" of "total of 1 type" when BB is not in operation) is 22.5.

<2-kind BB in operation> "2-kind BB in operation" shown at the bottom of the figure is a table regarding the number of coins placed when 2-kind BB is in operation. When 2-kind BB is in operation, the specified number is 2 coins, and when the game is executed in a specified stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the push order of "left → center → right"), only the symbol combination related to bells is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the "number of coins paid out" when the symbol combination related to bells is displayed in a stopped state is 15. As mentioned above, in games when 2-kind BB is in operation, 15 coins are paid out for a bet of 2 coins in all games, so the expected number of coins paid out when the specified number is 3 coins (the "number of coins paid out" of "2-kind combined" when "BB is not in operation") is 22.5.

<When BB is not in operation> Let us again go into detail about "when BB is not in operation." "No replay" refers to the four types of winning combinations: bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, while "including replay" refers to the five types of combinations: bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay. The "winning OUT" when "no replay" is the sum of the expected payout values of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, which is approximately 1.237258911. Also, the "winning ball payout rate" when "no replay" is the value obtained by dividing the "sum of the expected payout values (winning OUT)" by the "sum of the expected number of inserted balls of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry" and multiplying it by 100, i.e., the payout rate of the winning combinations, which is approximately 222.8%.

The "winning OUT" when "replay is included" is the sum of the expected payout values of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays, and is approximately 1.649246216. Note that even if a symbol combination related to replay is displayed as a stop, game medals are not actually paid out, but if a game is played with a bet of three medals and a symbol combination related to replay is displayed as a stop, an automatic bet of three medals is executed, so the "payout number" related to replay is 3. Also, the "winning ball payout rate" when "replay is included" is the value obtained by dividing the "sum of the expected payout values (winning OUT)" by the "sum of the expected number of inserts of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays" and multiplying the result by 100, i.e., the payout rate of winning roles and replays, which is approximately 170.5%.

The "1-type combined ball rate" is the value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts for "1-type combined" by the expected number of inserts, multiplied by 100, resulting in 750.0%. The "2-type combined ball rate" is the value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts for "2-type combined" by the expected number of inserts, multiplied by 100, resulting in 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values> When comparing the above values, the following relationships are observed. (1) "Expected number of payouts" for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for the combined "without replay" (Winning OUT) (2) "Expected number of payouts" for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for the combined "with replay" (Winning OUT) (3) Expected number of payouts for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for main minor feature (4) "Expected number of inserts" for "inside" < "Expected number of inserts" for main minor feature (5) "Expected number of inserts" for "inside" < "Expected number of inserts" for "replay"

In addition, when the Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can win is smaller than when the Type 1 BB is activated, and the Type 1 BB is configured not to be won while the Type 2 BB is activated, which raises concerns that the player's expectations for the game will be diminished. Therefore, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of the "2 types combined" to be less than the "expected number of payouts" of the combined "no replay" as in (1) above, the "expected number of payouts" of minor roles can be made higher than when the Type 2 BB is activated, and even when the Type 2 BB is activated, the player is more likely to feel that the BB is not activated (bonus is not activated) rather than that the BB is activated (bonus is activated), allowing the player to play without being aware that they are in a special state.

In addition, when Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can win is fewer than when Type 1 BB is activated, and Type 1 BB is configured not to be won while Type 2 BB is activated, which raises concerns that the player's expectations for the game will be diminished. Therefore, by designing it so that the "expected payout value" of the "2 types combined" is less than the "expected payout value" of the combined "including replays" as in (2) above, it is possible to make the "expected payout value" of minor roles higher than when Type 2 BB is activated, and even when Type 2 BB is activated, the player is more likely to feel that the BB is not activated (bonus is not activated) rather than that the BB is activated (bonus is activated), allowing the player to play without being aware that they are in a special state.

In addition, when Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can win is fewer than when Type 1 BB is activated, and Type 1 BB is configured not to be won while Type 2 BB is activated, which raises concerns that the player's expectations for the game will be diminished. Therefore, by designing it so that the "expected payout value" of the "2 types combined" is less than the "expected payout value" of the main minor feature as in (3) above, it is possible to make the "expected payout value" of the main minor feature higher than when Type 2 BB is activated, and even when Type 2 BB is activated, the player is more likely to feel that the BB is not activated (bonus is not activated) rather than that the BB is activated (bonus is activated), allowing the player to play without being aware that they are in a special state.

In addition, a gaming machine having one or more of the above configurations (1) to (3) may be configured to lower the payout rate (combined payout rate of two types) when the type 2 BB is in operation, such as by setting the specified number to two and the average number of payouts per game to two. By configuring it in this way, the effect of having the above configurations (1) to (3) can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, if a player with low skill, such as a player who cannot press the buttons by eye, plays during the "internal" state, the winning symbol combination for the Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB may not be displayed, raising concerns that the player with low skill may be significantly disadvantaged. Therefore, by designing the "expected number of balls inserted" during the "internal" state < the "expected number of balls inserted" for the main minor symbols as in (4) above, it is possible to increase the proportion of games in which the main minor symbol, the bell, is inserted, even during the "internal" state, making it possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause disadvantages even when played by a player with low skill.

Furthermore, if a player with low skill, such as a player who cannot press buttons by eye, plays during the "internal" state, the winning symbol combination for Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB may not be displayed, raising concerns that the player with low skill may be significantly disadvantaged. Therefore, by designing the "expected number of inserts" during the "internal" state < the "expected number of inserts" for "replay" as in (5) above, it is possible to increase the proportion of games in which a replay wins, even during the "internal" state, and to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause disadvantages even when played by a player with low skill.

<<<<Seventh embodiment: Gate technology>>> Next, as the seventh embodiment, we will explain the gate mechanism of the main board case M40 that stores the main control board M installed inside the gaming machine (cabinet). Note that in the seventh embodiment, the entrance part where the resin material (plastic) flows in when molding the main board case M40 is called the gate.

<<Molding of the main board case>> As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is made of a resin material (plastic). The main board case M40 is generally molded by an injection molding method in which the resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) for forming a specific shape, and a molded product is obtained through a cooling and solidifying process. The molding method of the main board case M40 is not limited to the injection molding method, but may be any molding method that pours the resin material (plastic) from the gate and molds it, such as a blow molding method in which a cylindrical plastic hollow body is sandwiched between molds, air is blown into it, and the molded product is obtained through a cooling and solidifying process by adhering it to the mold wall surface. After the resin material (plastic) is injected, the gate is cut, and the cut part has a slight recess compared to a flat surface without a gate.

<<Gate method>> When injecting resin material (plastic) through a gate during injection molding, various constraints are placed on the gate. Examples of constraints include the inflow speed of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), and the size and shape of the gate portion M80. In other words, a high-quality molded product can be obtained by determining optimal conditions (inflow speed, temperature, size and shape of the gate) according to the size of the main board case M40 to be molded, and then going through a molding process according to those conditions.

The methods for injecting the resin material (plastic) can be broadly divided into restrictive gates, which limit the inflow of the resin material (plastic) by making the gate as small as possible, and non-restrictive gates, which allow the resin material (plastic) to flow directly without going through a gate. The gates of the various case components used in gaming machines can be made small to a certain extent from the standpoint of size, and restrictive gates are often used in consideration of the aesthetics of the finished product, but in the seventh embodiment, as long as the main board case M40 has a gate, it does not matter what method is used for injecting the resin material (plastic).

<<Gate type>> When resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate using a restriction gate, there are various types of gates with different characteristics. Examples include the side gate type, in which the resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate located on the side of the molded product, the pin gate type, in which multiple molded products are molded from one mold, and the submarine gate type, in which the resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate located in a tunnel shape in the mold. The main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be molded using any of these gate types.

The main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is molded as described above, and the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

<<Configuration of the main board case M40>> First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main board case M40 is molded from a resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main board case M40 (for example, the front surface that can be seen by players and game center managers when the front door DU is opened) is pasted with, for example, a model seal, which is a seal member that lists the model information of the game machine, and other seal members (not shown) that contain information related to the game machine, such as a crimping record sheet that records the anti-theft measures taken at the production factory. In addition, it has a gate portion M80 that includes a gate mark (state after the gate is cut) where the resin material (plastic) was injected. Note that the shape of the surface of the main board case M40 in FIG. 128 is one example and is not limited to this. For example, it may be a square, rectangular, or trapezoidal shape.

<<Diagram of accommodating main control board M>> Next, Figure 129 is a front view of the main control board M accommodated in the main board case M40. When accommodating the main control board M in the main board case M40, it is common to accommodate the main control board M by sandwiching it between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown), and furthermore, the main board case M40 and the other case members are integrated by engaging screws (screws) so that the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40.

The main control board M is equipped with a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element with CPU functions, other IC elements IC01-IC05 that do not have CPU functions, resistors R1-R6, capacitors C01-C02, and connectors CN01-CN04. The main control board M is also equipped with a setting display LEDM90 that can display setting values, and a performance display device SH, described below, in which four-digit segments are arranged in a horizontal row. Note that the main control board M may also be equipped with other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs, but these are not shown in the figure.

<<Gate arrangement of main board case M40>> The main board case M40 is arranged to cover the main control board M (the dotted line area in Figure 129 corresponds to the main board case M40), and since the main board case M40 is made from plastic, it is configured so that the components mounted on the main control board M can be seen through the main board case M40.

As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have a gate portion M80 on its surface. These gate portions M80 are preferably arranged in positions that do not impede the visibility of the components arranged on the main control board M. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, one example is a pattern in which the gate portions M80 are arranged in positions that do not impede the visibility of the model seal, performance display device SH, setting display LEDM90, etc., which can be seen by the amusement facility manager or the National Police Agency through the main board case M40. More specifically, the gate portions M80 are not arranged at positions where the model seal, performance display device SH, and setting display LEDM90 are projected onto the main board case M40 in a direction perpendicular to the main control board M.

<Effect> By positioning the gate portion M80 in this manner, it is possible to ensure that the gate portion M80 does not impede visibility when the player's manager checks information related to the gaming machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LEDM90. In addition, by configuring the gate portion M80 so that it is not positioned in a position that overlaps with various sealing members such as model seals, it is possible to make it difficult for the sealing members to peel off.

Also, it is preferable not to place the gate portion M80 at the position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the vertical direction relative to the main control board M (place the gate portion M80 at a position other than the projected position). Details will be described later, but since the gate portion M80 is a fragile part of the main board case M40, there is a possibility that so-called cheating may be performed on the main control board M inside the main board case M40 through the gate portion M80. Therefore, by configuring the CPUMC so that the gate portion M80 is not placed at the position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the vertical direction relative to the main control board M (place the gate portion M80 at a position other than the projected position), the gate portion M80 can be kept away from the CPUMC, which has a main control chip C that controls the operation of the gaming machine and an internal ROMC110 that stores a program related to the operation control of the gaming machine, and which affects the results of the game, and so-called cheating such as program tampering can be prevented from being performed through the gate portion M80.

In addition, when current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such IC elements are installed near the CPUMC, there is a risk that the noise generated from the IC elements may adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC to some extent, so it is preferable not to place IC elements (IC01 to IC15) etc. near the CPUMC.

In the seventh embodiment, no IC elements are placed near the CPUMC on the main control board M. Specifically, all IC elements are placed within the vicinity of the CPUMC (here, at a distance of at least W1 (the dotted imaginary boundary in FIG. 129) from the outer periphery of the CPUMC package body, which is the length of the short side of the top surface of the rectangular package body. Note that W1 is at least the length of one resistor (R1 to R6) (the length when mounted).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are positioned at a distance of W1 or more from the CPUMC. By configuring it in this way, even if noise is generated from the IC elements, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise will adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC.

<<Structure of Gate Section M80>> Next, the structure of the gate section M80 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 130 is an oblique view of the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment and a side view of the main board case M40 as viewed from the direction of side A. As described in Figure 128, the main board case M40 has the gate section M80 on its surface (the surface that is visible to players and the amusement facility manager when the front door DU is opened, for example), and the gate section M80 has a slight recess compared to the portion of the surface other than the gate section M80.

In the side view of main board case M40 in Figure 130, main board case side A (the surface mentioned above) has a gate portion M80, and main board case side B does not have a gate portion. Here, main board case side A will be described in detail. Main board case side A is the side closer to the front door DU direction from the center of the short axis in the side view of main board case M40 in Figure 130, for example, and main board case side B is the side closer to the main control board M direction based on the center of the short axis. In other words, main board case side A is the side closer to the front door DU, and similarly main board case side B is the side closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the main board case side B side from the center of the short axis.

Figure 131 shows the details of the structure of the gate portion M80. Note that the detailed structure of the gate portion M80 of the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<<Structural pattern 1 of gate portion M80>> First, in the first structural pattern of gate portion M80, the main board case B side is configured to be flat. As shown in the upper part of Figure 131, gate portion M80 is configured with one convex portion and two concave portions, and is a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion relative to the horizontal extension of main board case A side (part other than gate portion M80). In this case, it is preferable that the relationship between A and B is A<B. It should be noted that the one convex portion that configures gate portion M80 is the gate mark after the gate has been cut. It may also be designed so that A=0.

<Effect 1> By having the protruding portion of the gate portion M80 spaced a distance A from the main board case A surface, for example, when removing the main board case M40 from the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent accidents such as an inspector's hand slipping when holding the part related to the gate portion M80 and dropping the main board case M40.

<Effect 2> In addition, because the recess of the gate portion M80 is a distance B away from the main board case A surface, it is possible for the resin (plastic) to flow smoothly when molding the main board case M40.

<Effect 3> In addition, because the main board case B surface directly below the gate portion M80 on the main board case A surface is flat, when the main control board M is viewed through the main board case M40, it is possible to view the main control board M without reducing visibility due to light refraction, even when viewing from the surface related to the gate portion M80.

<<Structural Pattern 2 of Gate Section M80>> Next, in the second structural pattern of gate section M80, main board case B is configured to be recessed (bulging outward from main board case M40). The gate section M80 in the lower part of the figure is configured with one convex section and two concave sections on the main board case A side, and is similar to the first pattern in that the tip of the convex section is a distance A away from the main board case A side (flat surface) with respect to a plane obtained by extending main board case A side (part other than gate section M80) in the horizontal direction, and the tip of the concave section is a distance B away from the main board case A side (flat surface).

The main board case B side is recessed, and the distance from the deepest part of the recess (the part that bulges outward the most) to the protrusion on the main board case A side is C, and the distance from the tip of the recess on the main board case B side to the surface of the main board case B side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally is D. It is preferable that the relationship between C and D is D<C. In the seventh embodiment, the distance from the surface of the main board case A side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally to the surface of the main board case B side (parts other than the gate part M80) is also C, but this is not limited to this. For example, the distance from the surface of the main board case A side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally to the surface of the main board case B side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally is C', and C<C', C>C', or C≒C' may be used.

<Effect> In this way, since the tip of the recess on the main board case B side is a distance D away from the surface obtained by extending the main board case B side (parts other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the strength of the member related to the gate portion M80 on the main board case A side, for example. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed compared to a flat surface, and is thinner by the distance of the recess (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1) when a force is applied that tries to destroy the main board case M40, so that it is configured to prevent it from being easily destroyed compared to a surface obtained by extending the main board case A side (parts other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction. In this way, since the main board case B side is recessed a predetermined distance even from the surface related to the gate portion M80, it is possible to maintain the same material strength as the parts other than the gate portion M80 on the main board case A side.

In the seventh embodiment, the arrangement and configuration of the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 have been described in detail above, but this configuration can also be applied to the other case members mentioned above (case members that sandwich the main board case M40 and the main control board M), making it possible to obtain the same effect as the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 described above.

<<<<<Eighth embodiment: Power outage and sensor detection>>>> Next, as the eighth embodiment, we will explain the relationship between the processing at the time of power outage and the processing related to detection of the passage of a game medal (in the eighth embodiment, the credit addition processing of the game medal related to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2) when a power outage occurs in any of the following states: before the sensors related to detection of a game medal installed inside the gaming machine (for example, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2) detect the passage of a game medal and the sensor is in an off state, or after detecting a notification of a game medal and the sensor is in an off->on state, or even after a game medal has passed through the sensor's detection area and the sensor is in an on->off state.

<<<<Relationship between power-off processing and medal credit addition processing>>> First, a medal inserted through the medal insertion port D170 passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (off → on → off) in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the medal, and the medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without generating an error.

The timing of the credit addition of the game medals is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, based on the description of step S1226-8, when the first insertion sensor D20s changes from on to off and the second insertion sensor D30s changes from off to on, the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals and can be added to the credits. However, this is not limited to this, and the inserted game medals may be detected as bet medals and can be added to the credits when either the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s changes from on to off. The timing of the credit addition of the game medals in the eighth embodiment described in detail below is configured to be able to be added to the credits when the first insertion sensor D20s changes from on to off and the second insertion sensor D30s changes from off to on. As described above, in this example, "the occurrence of a power outage" means that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects the occurrence of a power outage.

The time from when a power outage occurs until when the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor installed. Note that the time from when a power outage occurs until when the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (e.g., room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a rare possibility that an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, under basic conditions, more than 90% are designed to fall within the range of the design value. In the following, the time is expressed as this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the illustrated range occurs as a comparison of time values, it does not deviate from the design value. The same is true for other than the time from when a power outage occurs until when the power outage is detected, and it can be applied to various configurations exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H.

To define the relationship between the processing at the time of power failure and the credit addition processing of game medals, the time from when the power failure occurs until the power failure is detected is defined as T1, the time from when the insertion acceptance sensor D10s goes from OFF to ON until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF is defined as T2, and the time from when the first insertion sensor D20s goes from OFF to ON until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to ON is defined as T3. The relationship between T1, T2, and T3 that is applicable to this example is described in detail below. Note that, although details will be given later, it should be noted that the starting point of T2 is merely an example.

<<Action pattern 1 of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing>> Figure 133 is an example of an action pattern of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion that this configuration has are the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the medals at these sensors is illustrated. Note that in this action pattern, the timing at which various events occur is (a1) to (a8), and progresses from (a1) to (a8) as time passes.

When power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the coin insertion reception sensor D10s changes from off to on at time (a1). Also, the first coin insertion sensor D20s and the second coin insertion sensor D30s are both off. Next, at time (a2), the coin insertion reception sensor D10s changes from on to off. Next, at time (a3), a power outage occurs. Next, at time (a4), the first coin insertion sensor D20s changes from off to on.

Next, at the timing of (a5), the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on (the first input sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (a6), the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (a7), the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after a gaming medal passes through the input acceptance sensor D10s and the input acceptance sensor D10s turns from on to off, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process after the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off at the timing of (a7), so that the credit addition process can be executed normally. In the eighth embodiment, the interrupt process for detecting a power outage is configured to execute the power outage process in the same interrupt process, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute the power outage detection and power outage process in separate interrupts.

In addition, in the figure, the relationship between the aforementioned periods T1, T2, and T3 is T3<T1<T2. By making T3<T1, it is possible to execute the power-off process after executing the credit addition process. Also, the relationships of T1<T2 and T3<T2 are clear based on the flow-down process of the gaming medals.

<Effect> In this way, even if a power outage occurs while a gaming medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after it passes the insertion reception sensor D10s), the power outage processing is performed after the credit addition process for the gaming medal is executed, so that the inserted gaming medal can be reliably added to the credits, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though the gaming medal was inserted inside the gaming machine (and not returned) because the blocker is on.

The configuration regarding the insertion sensor and power interruption may be as follows (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3). (1-1) A power interruption occurs after the insertion acceptance sensor D10s changes from off to on (timing (a3) in FIG. 133). (1-2) The gaming machine detects the power interruption and executes the power interruption process before the first insertion sensor D20s changes from off to on (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133). (1-3) The blocker changes from on to off, so that the gaming medal can be returned without executing the credit addition process. (2-1) A power interruption occurs after the insertion acceptance sensor D10s changes from off to on (timing (a3) in FIG. 133). (2-2) The gaming machine detects the power interruption and executes the power interruption process before the second insertion sensor D30s changes from off to on (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133). (2-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, the game medals can be returned without executing the credit addition process.

<<Action pattern 2 of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing>> Figure 134 is an example of an action pattern of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion that this configuration has are the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the medals at these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timing at which various events occur is represented as (b1) to (b8), and progresses from (b1) to (b8) as time passes.

When power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the coin insertion reception sensor D10s changes from off to on at timing (b1). Also, the first coin insertion sensor D20s and the second coin insertion sensor D30s are both off. Next, at timing (b2), the coin insertion reception sensor D10s changes from on to off. Next, at timing (b3), the first coin insertion sensor D20s changes from off to on. Next, at timing (a4), a power outage occurs.

Next, at the timing of (b5), the second input sensor D30s is turned from OFF to ON (the first input sensor D20s remains ON). Next, at the timing of (b6), the first input sensor D20s is turned from ON to
The second input sensor D30s is turned off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (b7), the second input sensor D30s is turned on→off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after the gaming medal reaches the first input sensor D20s and the first input sensor D20s is turned off→on, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes a power outage process after the second input sensor D30s is turned on→off at the timing of (b7), so that the credit addition process can be executed normally.

In addition, in the figure, the relationship between the aforementioned periods T1, T2, and T3 is T3<T1<T2. Note that the configuration may be such that T1<T3<T2 holds. In either configuration, as shown in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after the first input sensor D20s turns from off to on at timing (b3), the power outage processing can be executed after the credit addition processing is completed.

<Effect> In this way, even if a power outage occurs while a gaming medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first insertion sensor D20s changes from OFF to ON), the power outage processing is performed after the credit addition processing of the gaming medal is executed, so that the inserted gaming medal can be reliably added to the credits, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though the gaming medal was inserted inside the gaming machine (and not returned) because the blocker is ON.

<<Modified Example of Operation Pattern of Power-Off Processing and Gaming Medals Credit Addition Processing>> As a modified example of the operation pattern of power-off processing and gaming medal credit addition processing, for example, if the timing of power-off occurrence is such that the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the power-off processing is executed after the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off, i.e., the power-off processing is executed after the credit addition processing is executed.

<Effect> Even if a power outage occurs while a gaming medal is inserted, the inserted gaming medal can be reliably added to the credits by performing the power outage processing after the credit addition processing of the gaming medal is executed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the credits are not added even though the gaming medal has been inserted into the gaming machine.

Also, as a modified example of the action pattern of the power-off process and the credit addition process of the gaming medal, it is possible to configure the timing of detecting the power-off to be different. For example, the timing of the power-off occurrence is the same as <<Action pattern 1 of the power-off process and the credit addition process of the gaming medal>>, and the timing of detecting the power-off is the timing when the gaming medal passes the insertion reception sensor D10s and before it reaches the first insertion sensor D20s. Based on the occurrence timing of various events based on pattern 1, as a processing flow, under a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, at the timing of (a1), the insertion reception sensor D10s turns from off to on. Also, both the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the insertion reception sensor D10s turns from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a3), a power-off occurs. Next, at the timing of (a4), the gaming machine detects the power-off, the power-off process is executed, and then the blocker turns off. By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs immediately after an inserted gaming medal passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s, the power outage processing can be executed before the gaming medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s, so the credit addition processing is not executed and the blocker is turned off, so the gaming medal is returned from the return port, preventing an event that would cause a disadvantage to the player.

<Effect> In this way, by executing the power-off process before the gaming medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s, if a power outage occurs and the credit addition process for the inserted gaming medal cannot be executed, the gaming medal can be returned to the player, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though the gaming medal has been inserted into the gaming machine.

In the eighth embodiment, T2 is defined as "the time from when the insertion reception sensor D10s goes from OFF to ON until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF", but this is not limited to this. T2 may be defined as "the time from when the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port becomes invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF", or T2 may be defined as "the time from when half of the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port becomes invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF", or T2 may be defined as "the time from when part of the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port becomes invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF".

<<<<Relationship between processing during power outage and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>>> Next, the relationship between the timing of counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter and the timing of a situation in which power may not be supplied to the gaming machine due to a power outage will be described. Referring to FIG. 135, a diagram showing the medal flow path member (called the chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the medal in the medal selector DS. In FIG. 135, a chute sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. The chute sensor D40s is a sensor related to detection of whether medals have been inserted normally, similar to the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s described above, and is configured to be able to detect errors that have occurred after the credit addition process has already been performed (for example, an inserted medal retention error, an inserted medal backflow error, etc.).

The timing of the counting process by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medals is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 in the insertion monitoring counter when the second insertion sensor D30s changes from on to off. Then, the game medals flow down the path in the medal selector DS, and for example, the insertion monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0 when the chute sensor D40s changes from off to on. The timing of the addition (subtraction) process of the game medals by the insertion monitoring counter is not limited to this. As described later, for example, the insertion monitoring counter may perform an addition process from 0 to 1 when the first insertion sensor changes from off to on, and the insertion monitoring counter may perform a subtraction process from 1 to 0 when the chute sensor D40s changes from on to off, as long as it is a configuration that can monitor whether the game medals have passed normally. Also, the counting process of the game medals by the insertion monitoring counter may be performed in the order of subtraction → addition (0 → -1, then -1 → 0) instead of in the order of addition → subtraction. In addition, the configuration for determining that an error has occurred using the input monitoring counter may be configured to determine that an error has occurred when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C<-3 or C<3", for example.

To define the relationship between the power-off process and the counting process by the medal insertion monitoring counter, the time from when the power-off occurs until the power-off is detected is T4, and the time from when the second insertion sensor D30s turns on → off until the shoot sensor D40s turns off → on is T5, and the relationship between T4 and T5 is described in detail below. The time from when the power-off occurs until the power-off is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor to be installed. The time from when the power-off occurs until the power-off is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (e.g., room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur in rare cases, 90% or more of the time is set to fall within the range of the design value under basic conditions. In the following, the time is expressed as this design value (design time), and even if an event occurs that deviates from the range shown as an example of a comparison of time values, it does not deviate from the design value. The same applies to other times besides the time from when a power outage occurs to when the power outage is detected, and it can be applied to the various configurations illustrated in this example, such as the time it takes for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H.

<<Operation pattern 1 of processing when power is turned off and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>> Figure 136 is an example of an operation pattern of processing when power is turned off and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter, reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion shown in the figure are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of a medal (on or off). The insertion monitoring counter is also configured to perform addition and subtraction processing at specified timing (in this operation pattern, addition processing is performed when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and subtraction processing is performed when the shoot sensor D40s goes from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (c1) to (c6), and the flow of the process is as follows: when power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, a power outage occurs at the timing of (c1) (the timings of the various sensors at this time are the first insertion sensor D20s on, the second insertion sensor D30s off, and the shoot sensor D40s off). Next, at the timing of (c2), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from off to on. Next, at the timing of (c3), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and the addition process of the game medals is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s goes from on to off at the timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at the timing of (c4), the shot sensor D40s turns from off to on, the medal subtraction process is executed by the medal insertion monitoring counter, and the medal insertion monitoring counter value turns from 1 to 0.

Next, at the timing (c5), the shot sensor D40s changes from on to off. Next, at the timing (c6), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Note that in the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process for when the power is out are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but this is not limited to this, and the process for detecting a power outage and the process for when the power is out can also be executed within separate interrupt processes. Also, in the figure, the process for decrementing the counter value of the input monitoring counter is executed at the timing (c4), but the process for decrementing the counter value of the input monitoring counter can also be configured to be executed at the timing (C5) (the timing when the shot sensor changes from on to off).

In this way, in the same figure, even if a power outage occurs before the gaming medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s, the gaming machine will detect the power outage and execute the power outage processing after the shoot sensor D40s turns from on to off at timing (c5), so that the credit addition process and the addition/subtraction process of the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter can be executed normally.

In addition, in the figure, the relationship between the aforementioned periods T4 and T5 is T4>T5. By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs just before the addition process of the insertion monitoring counter is executed (the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is off), the power outage processing can be configured to be executed after the addition process and subtraction process by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal is completed.

<Effect> By performing power-off processing after the medal insertion monitoring counter has executed the counting process (0→1→0), it becomes possible for the medal insertion monitoring counter to properly execute the medal counting process based on detection by various sensors, and it becomes possible to properly detect errors related to the chute sensor D40s.

<<Effect pattern 2 of processing when power is cut off and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>> Figure 137 is an example of an effect pattern of processing when power is cut off and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter, reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. In this effect pattern, the timing of detecting a power cut is configured to be different from that of effect pattern 1. The sensors here are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of a medal (on or off). In addition, the insertion monitoring counter performs addition and subtraction processing at specified timings (in this effect pattern, addition processing is performed when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and subtraction processing is performed when the shoot sensor D40s goes from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are designated as (d1) to (d5), and the flow of the process is as follows: a power outage occurs at the timing of (d1) (the timings of the various sensors at this time are the first insertion sensor D20s on, the second insertion sensor D30s off, and the shoot sensor D40s off). Next, at the timing of (d2), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from off to on. Next, at the timing of (d3), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and an addition process of the game medals is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s goes from on to off at the timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, at (d4), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. Next, at the timing of (d5), the game medal reaches the chute sensor D40s, but since the power-off process has already been executed, the game medal is not detected by the chute sensor D40s. Note that the example in the figure illustrates a case in which the game medal passes through the blocker before the blocker is turned off.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of power outage are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but this is not limited thereto, and the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of power outage can also be executed within separate interrupt processes.

In this way, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs before the game medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s, the gaming machine detects the power outage at the timing of (d4) and executes the power outage processing, so the subtraction processing of the insertion monitoring counter cannot be executed before the power outage processing is executed, but the credit addition processing can be executed before the power outage processing is executed. Also, the insertion monitoring counter is configured to, for example, result in an error when the counter value reaches 5 (even if the counter value is shifted by the insertion of one game medal, the error is not immediately detected), so even if a power outage occurs during the operation of the gaming center, a single power outage will not be judged as an error related to the insertion monitoring counter, and so as long as the credit addition processing can be executed normally, normal play can be guaranteed to continue.

<<Action pattern 3 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>> Figure 138 is an example of the action pattern of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing of detecting the power failure is different from <<Action pattern 1 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>>, and the timing of counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter is configured to be the same as <<Action pattern 1 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>>. In addition, in this action pattern, the medal insertion monitoring counter performs an addition process when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and performs a subtraction process when the chute sensor D40s goes from off to on. The sensors here are the second insertion sensor D30s and the chute sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected the passage of a medal (on or off). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are designated (e1) to (e6), and the process flow is as follows: at the timing (e1), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from off to on. Next, at the timing (e2), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and the insertion monitoring counter executes an increment process for the game medals, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, at the timing between (e2) and (e3), the first insertion sensor D20s goes from on to off. Next, a power outage occurs at the timing (e3). Next, at the timing (e4), the shoot sensor D40s goes from off to on, and the insertion monitoring counter executes a subtraction process for the game medals, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing (e5), the shoot sensor D40s goes from on to off. Next, at the timing (e6), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of power outage are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but this is not limited thereto, and the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of power outage can also be executed within separate interrupt processes.

In this way, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after the gaming medal has passed the second insertion sensor D30s and the credit addition process has been executed, the gaming machine detects the power outage at timing (e6) and executes the power outage process, so the gaming machine can be configured to execute the power outage process after executing the addition process and subtraction process of the insertion monitoring counter.

Furthermore, in the figure, it is preferable that the relationship between the aforementioned periods T4 and T5 is T4>T5. Because the detection of a power outage is performed after the shoot sensor D40s has switched from on to off, it is preferable that the period T4 from the occurrence of a power outage to the detection of the power outage is longer than the period during which the medal counting process (addition and subtraction) is performed by the insertion monitoring counter (for example, the period (e2) to (e4)). This configuration makes it possible to increase the possibility that the medal counting process by the insertion monitoring counter can be reliably performed before the power outage processing can be performed.

By configuring it in this way, by performing power-off processing after the counting process is performed by the medal insertion monitoring counter, it becomes possible to normally execute the medal counting process by the medal insertion monitoring counter based on detection by various sensors, and it becomes possible to reliably detect errors related to the chute sensor D40s.

In addition, in FIG. 136 to FIG. 138, the timing of the increment process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off, and the timing of the decrement process is the timing when the shoot sensor D40s turns from off to on, but this is not limited to this and may be configured as follows, and any combination of the timing of the increment process and the timing of the decrement process is acceptable. (A1) Timing of increment process of the input monitoring counter: first input sensor D20s off to on (A2) Timing of increment process of the input monitoring counter: first input sensor D20s on to off (A3) Timing of increment process of the input monitoring counter: second input sensor D30s off to on (A4) Timing of increment process of the input monitoring counter: second input sensor D30s on to off (B1) Timing of decrement process of the input monitoring counter: shoot sensor D40s off to on (B2) Timing of decrement process of the input monitoring counter: shoot sensor D40s on to off

Note that in Figures 136 to 138, the configuration of the deposit monitoring counter for a gaming machine having a shoot sensor D40s has been described in detail, but the configuration of the deposit monitoring counter may also be applied to a gaming machine having a deposit acceptance sensor D10s, in which case the timing of the addition and subtraction processes of the deposit monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and any combination of the timing of the addition and subtraction processes is acceptable. (C1) Timing of increment process of the insertion monitoring counter: insertion acceptance sensor D10s off → on (C2) Timing of increment process of the insertion monitoring counter: insertion acceptance sensor D10s on → off (D1) Timing of decrement process of the insertion monitoring counter: first insertion sensor D20s off → on (D2) Timing of decrement process of the insertion monitoring counter: first insertion sensor D20s on → off (D3) Timing of decrement process of the insertion monitoring counter: second insertion sensor D30s off → on (D4) Timing of decrement process of the insertion monitoring counter: second insertion sensor D30s on → off Also, if the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by 1 when a gaming medal passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s and then the gaming medal is returned because the blocker is off, the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter will remain incremented by 1. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to correct the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter to 0 when the blocker is subsequently turned from off to on, so that the insertion monitoring counter determination process executed while the gaming medal is being inserted does not result in an abnormality.

In addition, in this example, the input monitoring counter is configured to add 1 to the counter value and then subtract 1 from it, but the input monitoring counter may be configured to subtract 1 from the counter value and then add 1 to it (the counter value transitions from 0 to -1 to 0), and any of the configurations described above can be applied.

<<<<Relationship between Processing at Power Outage and Processing to Count the Number of Game Medals Paid Out>>> Next, the timing of the processing to count the number of game medals paid out will be described with reference to FIG. 139 as a timing when power may not be supplied to the gaming machine due to a power outage. The processing to count the number of game medals paid out is performed, for example, at timing 4 in FIG. 120. Specifically, the payout number count processing is performed at the timing when the release biasing means H70 is displaced to the initial position again and a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is sent to the main control board M. Note that the payout number count processing is generally performed using an addition processing that adds up the number of game medals normally paid out, such as 0 → 1 → 2 .... Note that the payout count processing is a processing that counts 1 (it may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that the gaming machine has executed the payout of one game medal.

The time from when a power outage occurs until when the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor to be installed. The time from when a power outage occurs until when the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur in rare cases, more than 90% of the events are designed to be within the range of the design value under basic conditions. In the following, the time is expressed as this design value (design time), and even if an event occurs that deviates from the range exemplified as a comparison of time values, it does not deviate from the design value. The same is true for other than the time from when a power outage occurs until when the power outage is detected, and it can be applied to various configurations exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H.

In addition, in the same figure and Figure 120, the first dispensing sensor H10s in Figure 4 is the second dispensing sensor H2, and the second dispensing sensor H20s in Figure 4 is the first dispensing sensor H1, and when the release urging means H70 is in the initial position, the first dispensing sensor H1 = on and the second dispensing sensor H2 = off. That is, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70, the sensor states are as follows: first dispensing sensor H1 = on and second dispensing sensor H2 = off (initial position) first dispensing sensor H1 = off and second dispensing sensor H2 = off first dispensing sensor H1 = off and second dispensing sensor H2 = on first dispensing sensor H1 = off and second dispensing sensor H2 = off first dispensing sensor H1 = on and second dispensing sensor H2 = off (initial position).

<<Effect pattern of power-off processing and payout medal count processing>> Figure 139 is an example of the effect pattern of power-off processing and payout medal count processing, reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. In this effect pattern, the timing at which a power outage occurs is as follows:Effect pattern A: The first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is offEffect pattern B: The first payout sensor H1 is on→off and the second payout sensor H2 is off. The relationship between the power-off processing and payout medal count processing will be explained using two effect patterns.

<<Operation Pattern A of Processing When Power is Cut Off and Processing to Count the Number of Game Medals Paid Out>> First, the processing flow of operation pattern A is as follows: first, the release energizing means H70 starts to move from its initial position, and then a power cut occurs (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off). After that, due to the displacement of the release energizing means H70, the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off, the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = on, the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off, the first payout sensor H1 = on and the second payout sensor H2 = off (initial position), and the payout number count processing is executed.

Then, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. Note that in the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to detect the power outage and execute the power outage processing at the same interrupt interval, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to detect the power outage and execute the power outage processing by separate interrupts.

<Effect> By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs after the release biasing means H70 starts to move from its initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of payout medals not being counted even though the medals have been paid out.

<<Operation pattern B of processing when power is cut off and processing to count the number of game medals paid out>> First, the processing flow of operation pattern B is as follows: the release biasing means H70 starts to move from its initial position, and after the first payout sensor H1 = on and the second payout sensor H2 = off (initial position) the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off, a power cut occurs. After that, due to the displacement of the release biasing means H70, the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = on the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off the first payout sensor H1 = on and the second payout sensor H2 = off (initial position), and the payout number count processing is executed.

Then, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. Note that in the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to detect the power outage and execute the power outage processing at the same interrupt interval, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to detect the power outage and execute the power outage processing at separate interrupt processing execution timings.

<Effect> By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs after the release biasing means H70 starts to move from its initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of payout medals not being counted even though the medals have been paid out.

The execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout count process is not limited to the configuration in the figure, and may be (1) the timing when the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off → the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = on, or (2) the timing when the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = on → the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off.

<<<<Ninth embodiment: Stop button operation and reel stop control>>> Next, the configuration related to the stop button and reel control that can be applied to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail below as the ninth embodiment.

In the ninth embodiment, the reel stop control in the operation of the reel stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) will be described. The operation control of the stepping motor related to the reel stop control is as described above, but it is configured so that after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state", which is the reel drive state shown in FIG. 35 (6), in particular, all phases of the stepping motor (e.g., four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) to stop the rotation of the reel, thereby stopping the reel. In the ninth embodiment, the process of exciting all phases (e.g., four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) in this way (four-phase excitation) may be referred to as "four-phase excitation process".

In a reel-type gaming machine, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute control to stop the spinning reels based on information indicating that the stop button sensors built into each stop button (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) have changed from off to on or on to off in response to the operation of the stop buttons. Note that the operation of the stop buttons in the ninth embodiment refers to a physical operation, such as pressing the left stop button D41 or releasing the left stop button D41 from a pressed state. Also, a state in which the stop button is not being operated may be referred to as, for example, a state in which the stop button is not pressed. Also, when the stop button sensor changes from off to on in a situation in which the stop button is active, it may be referred to as the operation of the stop button being accepted.

In the ninth embodiment, the operation of the stop button for stopping the reel that is rotating and the reel stop control will be mainly described. Note that in the ninth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the reel stop control, two patterns are broadly distinguished: Pattern 1: 4-phase excitation processing is executed after the stop button sensor changes from on to off; and Pattern 2: 4-phase excitation processing is executed before the stop button sensor changes from on to off. In the ninth embodiment, the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the reel stop control has these two patterns. Note that, as mentioned above, the 4-phase excitation processing is the control of the step motor that is executed when the reel drive state becomes a reel deceleration state.

The operation of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) and the timing when the stop button sensor changes from off to on and from on to off will be described. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and is configured to change from off to on when the stop button is pressed a predetermined distance from the initial position (the position corresponding to the non-operated state) (off at the initial position). When the stop button sensor changes from off to on, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute the reel spin stop process related to the flow of FIG. 34. Note that, as will be described in detail later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition for the stop button sensor to change from off to on can be changed as appropriate. As an example, it may be the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed, or it may be half the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed.

<<Pattern in which the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off>> Figure 140 is an example of an image diagram that depicts a time series of operations to stop a reel that is spinning. In Figure 140, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stopping in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each event that is the focus. In the ninth embodiment, the reel that is first to be stopped among the reels that are spinning is illustrated as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the first reel to be stopped is illustrated as the left stop button D41, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reel that is first to be stopped may be the center reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the first reel to be stopped may be the center stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that this configuration is not only applicable to the reel and stop button related to the first stop, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop related to all push orders.

The figure also illustrates a case where the left reel rotates the maximum designed distance (also called maximum slippage) after the left stop button is operated (the stop button sensor goes from off to on) and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state before stopping. Note that when the left stop button is operated (the stop button sensor goes from off to on) and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state before the left reel stops in the case of rotating the maximum designed distance, if the maximum slippage time according to the regulations is set to 190 ms, the time value (sometimes called slippage time) is designed with some margin so as not to exceed the maximum value according to the regulations. In this example, the maximum designed slippage time is set to 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to 185 ms is set to the maximum designed distance.

(a1) to (f1) in Figure 140 will be explained in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 has not been operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is spinning (left reel M51 is spinning).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operated or slid), and when the left stop button D41 is pressed down a distance x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor turns from off to on. Here, the distance the left stop button D41 is pressed down from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured to be pressed down a maximum distance d from the initial position, and the relationship of the pressed down distance is 0<x<d. At the timing of (b1), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant). When the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, a process for stopping the reel (left reel M51) is executed regardless of the operation status of the stop button (such as the time it takes to be pressed down), and the reel (left reel M51) moves a maximum designed distance from the timing of (b1) and stops.

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 reaches a state (c1) where it is pressed down a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position. At (c1), the left stop button sensor remains on, and the reel drive state of the left reel M51 maintains a reel deceleration standby state. Note that the time value from (b1) to (c1) varies depending on the manner in which the player operates the left stop button D41, but this example illustrates a case in which a stop operation is performed on the left stop button D41 within a short period of time (e.g., 5 ms), which is a typical time value required when a player performs a stop operation on the left stop button D41.

Then, immediately after the state (c1) is reached, the left stop button D41 is released, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force of the left stop button D41. At (d1), which is the state where the left stop button D41 has returned to a distance of x from the initial position (more precisely, the timing when it is less than x), the left button sensor turns from ON to OFF. Note that both (b1) and (d1) show the state where the left stop button is located at a distance of x from the initial position, but the distance of x from the initial position indicates the on/off of the stop button sensor, so more precisely, the stop button sensor is ON at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and OFF at a distance less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and the stop button sensor may be configured to be ON when the stop button is in the initial position, and ON when the stop button is not in the initial position (when the stop button is pressed even a little). Note that the time it takes for the left stop button D41 to return to the initial position from the position where it is pressed the maximum distance d varies depending on the spring constant of the spring of the left stop button D41.

Also, in (d1), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 remains in the reel deceleration standby state.

Then, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button, and when the left stop button returns to the initial position (e1), the left stop button sensor remains off, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be either before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position. In addition, to go into more detail about the four-phase excitation of the step motor, when the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (when the stop pattern and the passing pattern match), the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is set to 100 (a value equivalent to about 223.5 ms), and then the four-phase excitation is turned on. More precisely, the four-phase excitation is turned on about 0.5 ms after the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state. After that, the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by an interrupt process executed while the four-phase excitation is turned on, and when the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter becomes 0, the four-phase excitation is turned off.

Then, the left stop button remains in its initial position, and the step motor for the left reel is decelerated by four-phase excitation, causing the left reel to stop at a position where it has rotated the maximum distance designed as described above, and operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid (acceptance of the stop operation becomes valid).

In addition, in the figure, after the operation of one stop button is accepted, the operation of stop buttons other than that one stop button is not valid (stop operations are not accepted) until the reel corresponding to that one stop button stops (the stop control ends).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the first stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the first stop button has stopped, thereby preventing the step motor from being overloaded by controlling the drive of the multiple reels at the timing of one. Even with this configuration, when the first stop button is released immediately after the stop operation is performed (when the button is pressed the maximum distance d from the initial position and released immediately), the design value of the shortest time required from the release until the stop button sensor turns from on to off can be shorter than the design value of the time from the stop button turning from off to on until the four-phase excitation of the step motor ends. In other words, even when the first stop button is released immediately after the stop operation is performed, the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position before the reel rotates the maximum distance in design and stops, in other words, before the stop operation of the other stop buttons becomes effective, so that the player can perform the stop operation of the stop button corresponding to the other reel as soon as the reel on which the other stop operation was performed stops.

Note that when the stop button 1 is released immediately after performing the stop operation, the time value for the shortest time required from the release until the stop button sensor changes from on to off, and the time value from the stop button changing from off to on until the four-phase excitation of the step motor ends will vary slightly depending on the environment (e.g., room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. Also, although there is a rare possibility that an event may occur that deviates significantly from the design value, under basic conditions, more than 90% of the time will be within the range of the design value. In this example, the time expressed is this design value (design time), and even if an event occurs that deviates from the range shown as an example of a comparison of time values, it will not deviate from the design value.

In the figure, the stop button is excited in a configuration in which it is pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and then immediately released, and the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel rotates the maximum designed distance and stops, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to satisfy the situation in which the stop button sensor goes from on to off before the reel rotates the maximum designed distance and stops after being pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and then immediately released.

<<Pattern 1 in which the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off>> Figure 141 is an example of an image diagram depicting a time series of operations to stop a reel that is spinning. In Figure 141, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stopping in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a2) to (f2) for each event to be focused on. In the ninth embodiment, the reel that is first to be stopped among the reels that are spinning is illustrated as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the first reel to be stopped is illustrated as the left stop button D41, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reel that is first to be stopped may be the center reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the first reel to be stopped may be the center stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that this configuration is not only applicable to the reel and stop button related to the first stop, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop related to all push orders.

The figure also shows an example of a case where the left stop button is operated (the stop button sensor changes from OFF to ON), the reel drive state changes from a constant reel speed state to a reel deceleration standby state, and the left reel rotates the maximum designed distance (also called maximum slippage) before stopping.

(a2) to (f2) in Figure 141 will be explained in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 has not been operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is spinning (left reel M51 is spinning).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes called operated or slid) until it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b2), at which point the left stop button sensor turns from OFF to ON. At the timing of (b2), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from a reel constant speed state to a reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down a maximum distance d from the initial position (c2). At (c2), the left stop button sensor remains on, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be either before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position, as long as the reel is spinning at (c2).

Then, immediately after the state (c2) is reached, the left stop button D41 is released, and the left reel slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button D41, returning to a distance of y from the initial position (d2), at which point the left reel stops at a position rotated the maximum distance (also called maximum slip) designed for rotation after the reel drive state changes from a reel constant speed state to a reel deceleration standby state. Note that the distance y may be y<d, or y=x.

Then, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button, and when the left stop button is a distance from the initial position less than x (e2), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. The left stop button D41 then slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button D41, and at (f2) the left stop button D41 returns to its initial position, and the stop operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid. Note that the timing at which the stop operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid is not limited to this, and may be the timing at which the left stop button D41 turns from on to off (and the left reel is stopped).

In addition, in the figure, after the operation of one stop button is accepted, the operation of stop buttons other than that one stop button is not valid (stop operations are not accepted) until the reel corresponding to that one stop button stops (the stop control ends).

In this way, after accepting the operation of stop button 1, the other stop buttons do not become effective until the reel corresponding to that stop button has stopped, thereby preventing a situation in which excessive strain is placed on the step motor by controlling the drive of multiple reels at timing 1. Furthermore, with this configuration, even if stop button 1 is operated and then immediately released (if it is pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and then released immediately), the first stop button is configured to return to its initial position after the reel has rotated the maximum designed distance and stopped, so as long as the stop button has returned to its initial position, the player can operate the other stop buttons to stop, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

<<Pattern 2 in which the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off>> FIG. 142 is an example of an image diagram depicting a time series of operations to stop a reel that is being rotated. In FIG. 142, the operation of the stop button in the ninth embodiment to the reel stop is divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each event to be focused on. In the ninth embodiment, the reel that is being rotated is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel that is being rotated is the left stop button D41, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reel that is being rotated first may be the center reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel that is being rotated first may be the center stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that this configuration is not only applicable to the reel and stop button related to the first stop, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop related to all push orders.

The figure also shows an example of a case where the left stop button is operated (the stop button sensor changes from OFF to ON), the reel drive state changes from a constant reel speed state to a reel deceleration standby state, and the left reel rotates the maximum designed distance (also called maximum slippage) before stopping.

(a3) to (f3) in Figure 142 will be explained in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 has not been operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is spinning (left reel M51 is spinning).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes called operated or slid) until it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b3), at which point the left stop button sensor turns from OFF to ON. At the timing of (b3), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from a reel constant speed state to a reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down a distance y from the initial position (c3). By the time (c3) is reached, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 has changed from a reel deceleration standby state to a reel deceleration state, and at (c3), the left reel M51 stops. The left stop button sensor remains on. Note that the distance y should be y<d.

Then, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down a maximum distance d from the initial position (d3). At (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

Then, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button, and when the left stop button is a distance less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. The left stop button D41 then slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button D41, and at (f3) the left stop button D41 returns to its initial position, and the stop operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid. Note that the timing at which the stop operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid is not limited to this, and may be the timing at which the left stop button D41 turns from on to off (and the left reel is stopped).

In addition, in the figure, after the operation of one stop button is accepted, the operation of stop buttons other than that one stop button is not valid (stop operations are not accepted) until the reel corresponding to that one stop button stops (the stop control ends).

In this way, after accepting the operation of stop button 1, the other stop buttons are not made valid until the reel corresponding to that stop button has stopped, thereby preventing a situation in which excessive strain is placed on the step motor by controlling the drive of multiple reels at timing 1. Even with this configuration, even if the stop operation of stop button 1 is performed and then immediately released (if it is pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and then immediately released), the stop button 1 is configured to return to its initial position after the reel has rotated the maximum designed distance and stopped, so as long as the stop button has returned to its initial position, the player can operate the other stop buttons to stop, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

<<<<<10th embodiment: performance display device SH>>>> The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to include a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine, such as the ratio of game features. A configuration including a performance display device SH is described in detail below as the 10th embodiment.

First, using FIG. 143, we will illustrate an example of the display of the performance display device SH that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example. The performance display device SH is formed with four-digit segments arranged in a horizontal row, with the top two digits (the two digits on the left) being the identification segment SH10, and the bottom two digits (the two digits on the right) being the ratio segment SH20. The identification segment SH10 is configured to display information that can identify the currently displayed item, and the ratio segment SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. In addition, a dot point SH30 is provided at the bottom right of the lower digit (the digit on the right) of the identification segment SH10, and the presence or absence of the dot point SH30 makes it easy to distinguish between the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20. It is not necessary to provide the dot point SH30.

<<<<Installation Position>>> The performance display device SH may be installed directly on the main control board M. If so configured, it is desirable to install it in a position where visibility is not hindered by stickers or the like attached to the main board case M40 that covers the main control board M.

<<<<Display Items>>> The following items are examples of items to be displayed on the performance display device SH. (a) = Cumulative favorable zone ratio The "cumulative favorable zone ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of times played in the favorable zone to the total number of times played (cumulative number of times played), and can be calculated by "cumulative number of times played in the favorable zone ÷ total number of times played × 100 (%)". As an example, if the game progresses as follows: "Start of gaming machine operation → Normal zone A → Advantageous zone A → Normal zone B → Advantageous zone B", it can be calculated by "(number of times played in favorable zone A + number of times played in favorable zone B) ÷ (number of times played in normal zone A + number of times played in favorable zone A + number of times played in normal zone B + number of times played in favorable zone B) × 100 (%)".

Note that "cumulative" refers to the cumulative total from the start of measurement for display on the performance display device SH to the execution of calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, such as from the start of operation of the gaming machine in the gaming facility to the execution of calculations for the items to be displayed on the most recent performance display device SH, or from a specified measurement start timing to the execution of calculations for the items to be displayed on the most recent performance display device SH.

(b) = Continuous feature ratio for 6000 games The "continuous feature ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated to the total number of payouts, and the "continuous feature ratio for 6000 games" can be calculated by "the number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games ÷ the total number of payouts during 6000 games × 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of payouts of game medals when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 6000, and the number of payouts due to other triggers is 8000, it is calculated as "6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100 ≒ 42.9 (%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to the 6000 games prior to the most recent calculation of the continuous feature ratio.

(c) = Device ratio over 6,000 games "Device ratio" is the ratio of the sum of the number of payouts paid out by special devices and normal devices to the total number of payouts, and "device ratio over 6,000 games" can be calculated as "(number of payouts when a first type special device is activated during 6,000 games + number of payouts when a second type special device is activated during 6,000 games + number of payouts when a normal device is activated during 6,000 games) ÷ total number of payouts during 6,000 games × 100 (%)." As an example, if the number of game medals paid out when a first-class special feature is activated during 6000 games is 5000, the number of game medals paid out when a second-class special feature is activated during 6000 games is 3000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers during 6000 games is 8000, the calculation is "(5000 + 3000) ÷ (5000 + 3000 + 8000) x 100 = 50 (%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to the 6000 games prior to the most recent calculation of the feature ratio.

(d) = Cumulative consecutive feature ratio The "cumulative consecutive feature ratio" can be calculated by "cumulative number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated ÷ cumulative total number of payouts × 100 (%)." As an example, if the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first type special feature is activated is 600,000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers is 800,000, it is calculated as "600,000 ÷ (600,000 + 800,000) × 100 ≒ 42.9 (%)."

(e) = Cumulative feature ratio The "cumulative feature ratio" can be calculated as "(cumulative number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated + cumulative number of payouts when the second type special feature is activated + cumulative number of payouts when the normal feature is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of payouts × 100 (%)." As an example, if the cumulative number of payouts of game medals when the first type special feature is activated is 500,000, the cumulative number of payouts of game medals when the second type special feature is activated is 300,000, and the cumulative number of payouts due to other triggers is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000 + 300,000) ÷ (500,000 + 300,000 + 800,000) × 100 = 50 (%)."

In addition, "7U" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous zone ratio is displayed, "6Y" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the consecutive feature ratio over 6000 games is displayed, "7Y" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the feature ratio over 6000 games is displayed, "6A" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative consecutive feature ratio is displayed, and "7A" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative feature ratio is displayed.

In FIG. 143, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio is displayed as (a), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio may be displayed as (a). Here, the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is a ratio that can be calculated by {cumulative payout number in a game in which the push order navigation (sometimes called an instruction) on the main control board M is executed + cumulative payout number by the feature} ÷ total cumulative payout number × 100 (%), and whether the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is to be displayed on the performance display device SH can be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, if the player performs the stop operation in a push order different from the push order navigation and therefore fewer game medals are paid out than the number of medals that would be paid out for a winning symbol combination if the player performed the stop operation according to the push order navigation, the number of medals that would be paid out for a winning symbol combination if the player performed the stop operation according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of medals to be paid out in the game in which the push order navigation is executed.

<<<<Display Mode>>> The display mode of the performance display device SH may be configured as follows: - The display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (a)..." approximately every 5 seconds. Note that the interval at which the display is switched may be changed without any problem, and the display may be configured to switch every 3 seconds, for example. - For non-applicable items, "- -" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that a non-applicable item is, for example, the advantageous zone ratio in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous zone.・The ratio display numerical value {advantageous zone ratio (%), consecutive feature ratio (%), feature ratio (%), displayed in ratio segment SH20} is displayed with the decimal point discarded (if it is 100%, it will be displayed as "99"). ・If the ratio display numerical value is an advantageous zone ratio of 70%, a consecutive feature ratio of 60%, or a feature ratio of 70% or more, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed flashing. ・If the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games, the ratio display will display "00". ・If the cumulative number of games is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 will be displayed flashing when the consecutive feature ratio for 6000 games and the feature ratio for 6000 games are displayed flashing (including non-applicable items (for example, in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous zone, since there is no advantageous zone ratio, the advantageous zone ratio is a non-applicable item)). ・If the cumulative number of games is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will be displayed flashing when displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio. In addition, if the cumulative number of games is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment is flashed when the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the cumulative feature ratio are displayed (including the case of a gaming machine without consecutive features). That is, the cumulative number of games is configured to be measurable for 175,000 games or more in order to display the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and the cumulative number of games is configured to be measurable for 17,500 games or more in order to display the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the cumulative feature ratio.

In the tenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to be able to display the above-mentioned information (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e). The configuration in which the main control board (CPU MC of the main control board M) performs the processes of calculating and displaying the information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) is described in detail below.

<<<<Memory Map>>> First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described using FIG. 144. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of this, the space from "0000H" to "27FFH" is assigned to the built-in ROM C110, the space from "2800H" to "28FFH" is assigned to the register area built into each circuit in the main control chip C, the space from "F000H" to "F2FFH" is assigned to the built-in RAM C120, and the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH" is assigned to the XCS decode area (an area that executes decoding to interpret a given machine language as an internal representation). By having the CPU C100 execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to access the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROM C110 has a first ROM area which is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area which is an area that mainly controls processes that differ from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related processes, and the first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity present in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU C100 is configured to be larger than the data capacity present in the second ROM area and accessed by the CPU C100).

The first ROM area also has a first control area in which program code (a set of instruction codes for the CPUC100) is stored, a first data area in which program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPUC100 based on this program code) is stored, an area in which various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored, and a program management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation settings for the random number generation circuit C140, operation settings for the watchdog timer C222, etc.) are stored. Note that the figure shows a memory map image of the first ROM area, but the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of unused areas are merely examples.

The second ROM area also has a second control area in which program code (a set of instruction codes for CPUC100) is stored, and a second data area in which program data used by the program (read by CPUC100 processing based on this program code) is stored, and the second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, the program code capacity present in the second control area and accessed by CPUC100 is smaller than the program code capacity present in the first control area and accessed by CPUC100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area (in other words, the program data capacity present in the second data area and accessed by CPUC100 is smaller than the program data capacity present in the first data area and accessed by CPUC100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on the progress of the game, a second RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on processing that differs from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related information, and a stack area which is used when the program needs to store data internally, with the first RAM area being allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH", the second RAM area being allocated to the space from "F200H" to "F2C9H", and the stack area being allocated to the space from "F2CAH" to "F2FFH" (however, the number of bytes in each area is merely an example).

The first RAM area has a first working area which is a working area for temporarily storing information mainly related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area has a second working area which is a working area for temporarily storing information mainly related to errors, and a checksum area which is a working area for detecting errors in the information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area. In this embodiment, only the second RAM area has a checksum area (the first RAM area does not have one), and the checksum area is configured to manage the checksums of both the first RAM area and the second RAM area (the total of the information temporarily stored in both). In this embodiment, as described later, when calculating the checksum, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but this is not limited to this, and the checksum may be calculated for the area excluding the unused area (the first working area and the second working area). In addition, the method of error detection is not limited to a checksum check, and other methods (such as a parity check) may be used. In that case, the checksum area becomes an area for storing information for error detection (such as a parity bit) required when using these methods.

The addresses of the areas in which various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) are stored can be addresses after the addresses of the built-in RAM without any problem. In addition, there is no problem in changing the addresses of unused areas, but it is preferable to provide an unused area between the first data area and the second control area (at the addresses between them). In other words, in the case of a memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 144, the program code present in the first control area and accessed by the CPUC 100 and the program code present in the second control area and accessed by the CPUC 100 are arranged separately on the memory map (with non-contiguous addresses), and since there is an unused area between them, the arrangement positions of the two program codes can be visually clearly separated on the program source code or dump list (the same can be said when there is an unused area between them).

Here, with regard to the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent programs, etc., modified by fraudulent acts from being written, it is preferable to configure it so that there are no unused areas (unfilled areas) (for example, by filling all unused areas with 0s, and writing used areas to lower addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraudulent acts, it is preferable to configure the first control area and the first data area so that there are no unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications, data used only for testing in the development stage, etc.). In addition, it is preferable to configure the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first working area, and the second working area so that they use areas to lower addresses and no unused areas are provided within the areas (addresses within the areas) (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area, which is in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H", are not used as unused areas). In this example, all bits in the unused area are set to "0", and any bit in the area other than the unused area is set to "1" (not "0").

In the tenth embodiment, in particular, when the main control board (CPU MC of the main control board M) performs calculation processing for information to be displayed on the performance display device SH, or the display processing for displaying information on the performance display device SH, the processing is configured to be performed in the second ROM/RAM area. Details of the processing performed in the second ROM/RAM area are explained below.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Figure 145 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the subroutine of step 1600 in the tenth embodiment (the execution timing of this subroutine is the same as in the other embodiments). The processing of this subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (e.g., backing up data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of the power interruption detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power interruption is currently detected (in the current interrupt processing). If the answer is No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power interruption processing described below. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (updating various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updating the storage area for each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data refers to information related to the detection of the settlement button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (i.e., the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and switches the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag on and off according to the sampling results of each input port data (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, it is possible to detect that the front door DU is open without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel drive control process (a process related to the control of the drive of the reel M50, which will be described in detail later) for all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60, and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1612, then in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. If the answer is No in step 1612, then proceeds to step 1614 as well. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, then the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether all error flags are off (not shown, but all error flags such as the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted medal number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are off). If the answer is Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has not been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information on the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the on error flag is transmitted to the sub side. Also, the error non-detection command may be set only when the error is released from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), and when the error is not detected, the setting process of the information may not be executed (step 1618 may not be performed). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or may execute the setting process when the type of error changes from a state in which a first error (e.g., an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (e.g., a paid medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (a command for the sub-side) (for example, if a control command has been set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control command will be transmitted). Here, the commands transmitted to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the first reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the first stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the timing of the third reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the winning/replay winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the first reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the second reel stop acceptance (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second ... There are commands such as those sent immediately after the bar operation (only during the favorable zone), those related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the state of the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the high security obstacle counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the number of games remaining in the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the game zone (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Note that, as information related to errors output by the external signal, door opening error, input abnormality error, payout abnormality error, input reception sensor retention error, etc. are output, although not shown. The door open error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is configured to be an error when the insertion reception sensor detects retention of a game medal. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs output data of an LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units, a specific 7-segment LED unit is turned on, and a specific segment of the 7-segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set if an abnormality occurs in the random number generating circuit). Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. If the answer is Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update status of the built-in random number is normal (whether an abnormality flag bit indicating the update status abnormality is not set).

If the answer is Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (13), the CPU MC of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM/RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Although not shown, when processing in the second ROM/RAM area is called, the CPU MC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and sets up the second stack area for use. Next, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes processing to create and output a signal for external output from the first RAM area and register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

Then, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a count upper limit check process to check whether the counter value of the counter related to the total number of games played up to now (sometimes referred to as the total game number counter) and the counter value of the counter related to the total number of game medals paid out up to now (sometimes referred to as the total payout counter) have reached a predetermined upper limit value. In detail, the count upper limit check process is performed, for example, based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the calculation process for a predetermined number of repetitions at the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total game number counter set in a predetermined register (HL register) in the second ROM/RAM area. The data of the number of repetitions and the count upper limit flag can be stored, for example, in the B register or C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the total number of games played up to the present. In detail, the CPU MC counts the number of games played by adding the additional value (set to 1 in this case) stored in the A register, which serves as an unused area, to the address of the total number of games played counter set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area, and updates the result of the addition as data at the address set in the specified register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone up to now. The number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone is the cumulative number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone. In detail, the process of counting the number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone is as follows: first, if the bit relating to the flag indicating that the zone is advantageous is "1" among the data stored at the address of the play zone flag set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area, the address of the advantageous zone play counter is set in a DE register, for example. After that, the process of adding data is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data at the address set in the specified register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a count process of the cumulative number of payouts up to now and the number of payouts during 6000 games. The number of payouts is the total number of payouts regardless of the trigger for paying out the game medals. In detail, in step 1637-1 (13th), if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register is not "0", the address of the total payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of payouts and counter for the number of payouts during 6000 games) is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the process of adding data (here, adding the number of payouts) is performed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data at the address set in the specified register.

Next, in step 1637-5 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts of the reel up to now and the number of payouts of the reel during 6000 games. The details of the counting process of the number of payouts of the reel are as follows: first, data of the reel operation status flag is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a specified logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the reel is in operation. Then, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the address of the reel payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of payouts of the reel and counter for the number of payouts of the reel during 6000 games) is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the reel payout number buffer is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, similar to step 1637-2 (13th), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the result of the addition is updated as the data at the address set in a specified register. Note that the "gimmicks" in this process refer to the first type special gimmick, the second type special gimmick, and the normal gimmick.

Next, in step 1637-6 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of consecutive payouts up to now and the number of consecutive payouts during 6000 games.
The data of the RB operation status flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the RB is in operation. Then, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the address of the continuous feature payout counter (a counter for the cumulative number of consecutive feature payouts and a counter for the number of consecutive feature payouts during 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the continuous feature payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, a process of adding data (here, adding the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. Note that the "continuous feature" in this process is a first type special feature (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a ratio calculation process. Note that the ratio here refers to the following: (1-1) Accumulative ratio of advantageous zones: Number of times played in advantageous zones ÷ Total number of times played × 100 (%) (1-2) Accumulative ratio of devices with instructions: {Number of payouts in games in which push order navigation (sometimes called instructions) on the main control board M is executed + Number of payouts by devices} ÷ Total number of payouts × 100 (%) (2) Accumulative ratio of consecutive devices: Accumulative number of payouts during operation of the first type special device ÷ Total number of payouts × 100 (%) (3) Accumulative ratio of devices: (Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the first type special device + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the second type special device + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the normal device) ÷ Total number of payouts × 100 (%) (4) Accumulative ratio of devices over 6,000 games: Number of payouts during 6000 games during the operation of the first type special feature ÷ total number of payouts during 6000 games × 100 (%) (5) Feature ratio during 6000 games: (Number of payouts during 6000 games during the operation of the first type special feature + number of payouts during 6000 games during the operation of the second type special feature + number of payouts during 6000 games during the operation of the normal feature) ÷ total number of payouts during 6000 games × 100 (%) The above (1-1) to (5) are the targets of ratio calculation in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the ratio calculation process is performed for each game in the advantageous zone ratio of (1-1) and the instruction-included feature ratio of (1-2), and the ratio calculation process is performed for each 400 games in (2) to (5), but it may also be configured to perform the ratio calculation process for each game in (2) to (5), for example. As mentioned above, either (1-1) or (1-2) above can be calculated and displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

Figure 146 is a flow chart of the subroutine for the ratio calculation process by the CPU MC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (13th). First, in step 1637-7-1 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1637-7-2 (13th), the data set in the specified register in step 1637-7-1 (13th) (the data here is data relating to the calculation number of the favorable zone ratio) is acquired. Next, a specified comparison operation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (13th) to determine whether or not it is a calculation number relating to the calculation of the favorable zone ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous zone ratio (determined as No), then in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the data (for example, 2 bytes) stored in the 400 game counter is set in a specified register, and it is determined whether the value of the data at this time is "0" or not. If the value of the data is "0", in other words, if the number of games at this time is a multiple of 400 games (determined as Yes), then in step 1637-7-5 (13th), the address data of the ratio calculation address table previously stored in the second ROM is set in a specified register. Then, in step 1637-7-6 (13th), a specified calculation process is performed to calculate the ratio for the set address data.

Then, in step 1637-7-7 (13th), the data obtained by the calculation process is set in the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set. Then, in step 1637-7-8 (13th), it is determined whether the ratio is 100% or not based on the data obtained by the calculation process, and if the ratio is 100%, in step 1637-7-9 (13th), data for displaying the ratio as 99% is set in a specified register (for example, it may be the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set) as described above (because the ratio segment SH20 is two digits). Then, in step 1637-7-10 (13th), the obtained ratio data is saved in the HL register and the process moves to the next step.

If the answer is Yes at step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-5 (13th), if the answer is No at step 1637-7-4 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-9 (13th), and if the answer is No at step 1637-7-8 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-10 (13th).

Next, in step 1637-8 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a ratio display process. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the subroutine of the ratio display process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-8 (13th). First, in step 1637-8-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in, for example, the D register. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (13th), it is determined whether or not a display request for 1000 digits in the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that a display request for 1000 digits in the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-3 (13th), it is determined whether or not a display request for 100 digits in the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that a request to display 100 digits on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is obtained and a specified calculation process is performed. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (13th), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a request to display 1 digit on the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a request to display 1 digit on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-6 (13th), a logical AND operation is performed on the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set (for example, an operation such as swapping the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (13th), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (for example, the HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (13th), a specified calculation process is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the data obtained by the calculation is obtained. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (13th), data related to the blink request flag that has been stored in advance is stored in a specified register, and the process moves to the next step.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart in FIG. 145, next, in step 1637-9 (13th), the main control board M returns to the call source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt end processing and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described above.

<<Variation 1 of processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, a variation will be described in which the calculation processing of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH, or the display processing to display information on the performance display device SH, is processed in the second ROM/RAM area. As variation 1 of <<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> in the tenth embodiment (sometimes referred to as variation 1 from the tenth embodiment), it is possible to configure it to be executed, for example, in the game progress control processing of the main control board M (Figures 16 to 18). Below, a variation of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area will be described.

Figure 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) relating to the subroutine of step 1200 in Figure 14 in modified example 1 from the tenth embodiment. Note that detailed explanations will be omitted for processes similar to those in Figure 18. Also, the content of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) is similar to that of the tenth embodiment, so detailed explanations will be omitted. Note that unlike the tenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is executed by interrupt processing, in modified example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM/RAM area related to the performance display device SH is executed by main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, processing different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 148, the calculation process of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game zone transition control process of step 3500 is performed. Note that the timing of the calculation process of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is within the main loop processing, it may be executed, for example, before the game zone transition control process of step 3500 is performed.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> To explain the flowchart, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game area transition control process, and then in step 3501, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM/RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 3501-1 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a count upper limit check process. Next, in step 3501-2 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a number of plays count process. Next, in step 3501-3 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a number of plays in the advantageous zone count process. Next, in step 3501-4 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a number of payout count process. Next, in step 3501-5 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a number of payout count process. Next, in step 3501-6 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process to count the number of consecutive payouts. Next, in step 3501-7 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a ratio calculation process. Next, in step 3501-8 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM/RAM area.

In this way, in the first modification of the tenth embodiment, the calculation process related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation process of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH), which is the process in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as a main loop process. Also, although the details will be described later, the display process on the performance display device SH, which is the process in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as an interrupt process.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game end process and moves on to the next process.

Next, FIG. 149 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in a first modified example from the tenth embodiment. The content of the display processing on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is the same as in the tenth embodiment, so details are omitted.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Specifically, if the update status of the built-in random number is normal (Yes) in step 1636, in step 1637 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU C100 of the main control board M calls the ratio display process of the second ROM/RAM area as the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1637-1 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the ratio display process. Next, in step 1637-2 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU C100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes interrupt end processing and moves on to the next process.

In this way, in the first modified example from the tenth embodiment, as processing related to the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, calculation processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is executed as main loop processing, and display processing on the performance display device SH is executed as interrupt processing.

By configuring it in this way, in modified example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the display process on the performance display device SH that needs to be constantly executed (updated) is executed by interrupt processing, while the calculation process related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH that does not need to be constantly executed (updated) is executed as main loop processing for each game, thereby making it possible to reduce the amount of data used without executing unnecessary processing.

<<<<Tenth embodiment: Test display of performance display device SH>>> Next, the test display of the performance display device SH will be described. In the tenth embodiment and a first modified example from the tenth embodiment, the configuration relating to the display on the performance display device SH is configured to have a test display mode for checking whether any problems have occurred in the segments of the performance display device SH (for example, whether the lit parts of the segments are lit evenly, etc.). The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be executed (displayed) at the following times: (1) Display starts when the power is turned on, and ends within 5 seconds. (2) Display starts when the setting change device control process starts (start of setting change mode), and ends within 5 seconds. (3) Display starts when the setting check mode starts, and is constantly displayed during the setting check mode. (4) Display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, and is displayed until the error (abnormality) is resolved.

Figure 150 is an example of a test display on the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in test display mode. First, test display pattern 1 will be described. Test display pattern 1 illustrates a case where a test display is executed when the power is turned on. As described above, when a test display is executed when the power is turned on, it is preferable to end the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display, but this figure illustrates a case where the test display ends 5 seconds after the display starts.

<<Tenth embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 1>> Test display pattern 1 is composed of three display modes: lighting pattern (a), lighting pattern (b), and off pattern (c) (this is the display mode at the end of the test display). Lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which a part of identification segment SH10 and a part of ratio segment SH20 are lit. Lighting pattern (b) is also a display mode in which a part of identification segment SH10 and a part of ratio segment SH20 are lit, and lighting pattern (a) and lighting pattern (b) are executed alternately, so that all segments of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, making it possible to find segments that are broken and do not light up, etc. The lighting patterns constituting the test display pattern are not limited to (a) and (b), but it is preferable that the test display be a lighting pattern that results in a display mode in which at least all of the lighting points (segments) of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit by the time the test display ends (it is also acceptable to combine the two lighting patterns to result in a display mode in which all of the lighting points of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit).

In addition, the test display pattern 1 is configured so that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are displayed alternately in the order of (a) → (b) → (a) ..., and the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the power is turned on (0 seconds), the test display of the performance display device SH is ended when the display mode of the off pattern (c) which notifies the end of the test display is displayed 5 seconds later. Note that, since the lighting period of each lighting pattern in the test display pattern 1 is 0.5 seconds, for example, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 1 second, and the number of lighting cycles that can be test displayed in the 5-second test display period is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, the test display is ended after the display mode of the lighting pattern (b) is displayed for 0.5 seconds.

In the figure, when the test display is completed, the discrimination segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off as shown in (c), but this is not limited to the above, and when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to display the display pattern described above in FIG. 143 (for example, the display may start from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<10th embodiment: Test display of performance display device SH: Modification of test display pattern 1>> A modification of the test display as a configuration of the performance display device SH that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example is described in detail below.

The lighting period of each of the lighting patterns (a) and (b) shown in FIG. 143 is 1 second. If this is set, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds, and when the second lighting cycle is completed, 4 seconds have passed, and the next lighting cycle (the third lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, the lighting cycle (a) → (b) → (a) may be executed twice to end the test display, in other words, the test display may be configured to end when the last lighting cycle that can be executed within 5 seconds is executed, or the test display may be ended by lighting for 1 second (a) after executing the lighting cycle (a) → (b) → (a) twice, in other words, the lighting cycle is executed repeatedly for a predetermined 5 seconds, and the test display may be ended when the 5 seconds have passed.

<<Tenth embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 2>> Next, test display pattern 2 will be described. Test display pattern 2 is executed during setting confirmation mode or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. Note that the game machine of this example may be configured to execute a test display during all errors (or some of the errors) that may occur.

Test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes: on pattern (d), on pattern (e), and off pattern (c) (display mode at the end of the test display). On pattern (d) is a display mode in which all lit areas of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are lit. On pattern (e) is a display mode in which all lit areas of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are turned off. In this way, by alternately executing on pattern (d) and on pattern (e) as the test display pattern, all segments of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, and it is configured to be possible to find segments that are not lit due to a malfunction.

In addition, test display pattern 2 is configured so that, for example, lighting pattern (d) and lighting pattern (e) are alternately lit as in (d) → (e) → (d) ..., with the lighting period of each lighting pattern being 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the setting check mode is entered (0 seconds), the test display is alternately performed for 0.3 seconds as in (d) → (e) → (d) .... When the setting check mode ends at a predetermined timing (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting check mode is entered), the test display also ends. In other words, when the test display end condition is met, the test display ends regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

In the figure, when the test display is completed, the discrimination segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off as shown in (c), but this is not limited to the above, and when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to display the display pattern described above in FIG. 143 (for example, the display may start from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<Tenth embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3>> Next, Figure 151 shows test display pattern 3. Compared to test display pattern 1 and test display pattern 2, test display in the case where the timing at which the test display can be executed overlaps will be described as test display pattern 3. Note that the display mode of the lighting patterns in the test display and the lighting period of each lighting pattern are the same as test display pattern 1 and test display pattern 2. Figure 151 will be described in detail below.

First, the period during which test display pattern 3 is performed will be explained. As with test display pattern 1, the starting point (0 seconds) is the timing when the power is turned on. Then, within 5 seconds of turning the power on (here, 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on), the setting check mode is entered. In other words, before the test display that was started when the power was turned on ends due to the passage of time, the start of the setting check mode is used as an opportunity to satisfy the start condition for the test display. Then, starting from the timing when the setting check mode is entered, after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting check mode is entered), the setting check mode ends and the test display ends.

In the test display pattern 3, the setting check mode is entered 2.7 seconds after the power-on timing, so the setting check mode does not start at the end timing of the lighting cycle described above. Even in such a case, when the test display starts with the start of the setting check mode as a trigger, the performance display device SH is configured to be lit as a test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically, the test display is executed as follows: Lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → Lighting for 0.5 seconds (b) → Lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → Lighting for 0.5 seconds (b) → Lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → Lighting for 0.2 seconds (b) → Setting check mode is entered, Lighting for 0.3 seconds (a) → Lighting for 0.3 seconds (b) → ... → Test display ends when the setting check mode ends.

<<10th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Variation example 1>> In test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from the time the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds, which exceeds the range of 5 seconds which is the test period after power is turned on. However, if the setting confirmation mode ends earlier, for example, if the period of the test display related to the setting confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the period from the time the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, which does not exceed the range of 5 seconds which is the test period after power is turned on. In such a situation, the test display may be configured not to be executed from the end of the setting check mode until the end of the test display period after power-on (the test display may be ended when the setting check mode is ended regardless of the end timing of the setting check mode), or the test display after power-on may be resumed for 0.8 seconds, which is the remaining period of the test display period after power-on (until 5 seconds have passed since power-on), or the test display after power-on may be resumed until the end of the test display triggered by power-on. Note that when the test display after power-on is resumed, for example, the test display may be performed for 0.8 seconds from (a) → (b) → (a) ... according to the display mode of the test display pattern 1, starting from the end of the setting check mode (at this time, it is determined that the test display in the setting check mode has ended and the power has been turned on again, but the test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds).

<<10th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Variation 2>> The configuration in which the test displays overlap, illustrated as Variation 2 of test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is merely an example and can be applied to all combinations in which the test displays are executed in an overlapping manner.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the display is configured to execute the four test displays as described above: (1) the display starts when the power is turned on and ends within five seconds; (2) the display starts when the setting change device control process starts (the setting change mode starts) and ends within five seconds; (3) the display starts when the setting check mode starts and is constantly displayed during the setting check mode; and (4) the display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M and is displayed until the error (abnormality) is resolved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be configured to execute only one or more of the test displays. It should be noted that even in such a configuration, any of the configurations related to the test displays described above may be applied.

Furthermore, the test display in (3) above may be configured to execute a similar test display during the setting change mode and during the setting confirmation mode (the test display ends when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends). Furthermore, the 5-second display period for (1) and (2) above is merely an example, and there is no problem if the time value is changed.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the lighting pattern (1) and the lighting pattern (3) are different lighting patterns, but this is not limited to this, and they may be the same lighting pattern (on time and off time).

Note that the lighting pattern of the test display can be a pattern other than the one described above, but it is preferable to configure it so that it can be distinguished from the normal lighting pattern described above in FIG. 143 (so that the administrator can visually recognize it) (by making the period for switching the lighting mode different, by making the segments that are lit different, etc.).

Note that even when the performance display device SH is performing a test display, the performance display device SH may be configured to be able to perform calculation processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation processing of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH). A specific example of such a configuration may be as follows: (1) A power outage occurs → (2) The operation of the last stopped reel is accepted → (3) Processing at the time of power outage is performed before the calculation processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is performed → (4) The power supply to the gaming machine becomes zero → (5) The power outage is restored → (6) The performance display device SH enters the test display mode → (7) Calculation processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH during the test display mode → (8) The test display mode ends → (9) Information to be displayed on the performance display device SH currently corresponding to the latest calculation result is displayed on the performance display device SH. Note that the information displayed on the performance display device SH in the above (9) may be different from the information before the power outage occurred because it displays information after the calculation processing is performed. In addition, even if a power outage occurs after the last stopped reel is received, if the power outage processing is executed before the calculation processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is executed, the above process from (3) onwards will be the same.

<<Eleventh embodiment: Configuration related to limiting and automatic settlement>> As a configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example, the configuration related to the gaming machine capable of executing a gaming progress suitable for the business form desired by the manager of the gaming facility will be described in detail below.

Examples of the business formats of game arcades include (1) quantitative: when a predetermined number of balls are won, game progress stops and operation of the gaming machines for that day is terminated; (2) one-time exchange: game ends once at a specific timing; and (3) lucky number system: if a specific bonus is awarded, game can continue, but if a specific bonus is awarded, game ends once. Various business formats such as these are possible. Gaming machines that can set and implement caps and automatic settlements are suitable as a configuration for gaming machines that can realize such business formats.

Note that "stopping" means stopping the game progress when a certain condition is met, and "automatic settlement" means executing the settlement process without the player's intervention when a specific condition is met. Also, stopping the game progress means that the operation of the start lever is invalidated, or bets are invalidated (the blocker is turned off, making it impossible to insert game medals, and the operation of the bet button is invalidated).

Here, as an example of the action when a game is stopped after a certain game has ended, the reels related to a certain game start to rotate, then a stopping operation is performed to stop each reel, and finally a stopping operation is performed on the reel that is still rotating (here, the right reel M53), and the reel drive state of the right reel M53 changes from a reel deceleration standby state to a reel deceleration state (the pattern to be stopped and the passing pattern match), the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is set to 100 (a value equivalent to approximately 223.5 ms), and the four-phase excitation of the step motor is then turned on. Thereafter, the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by an interrupt process executed while the four-phase excitation is turned on. (1) If the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out, the stopping process is not executed when the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90), but is executed when it becomes less than 90. If the certain game is a game in which game medals are paid out, the stopping process is executed after the payout of the game medals has ended (after the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter has reached 0). (2) Regardless of whether the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out or not, the stopping process is executed after the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter has reached 0 (after the payout of the game medals has ended). The above configuration may be adopted. In addition, when configured as in (1) above, since there is a possibility that the reel is moving (spinning) between the time when the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter goes from 100 to 90, the game can be configured not to execute the stop processing, and to execute the stop processing after the reel goes below 90, at which point it is completely stopped. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reel has stopped and the game is over, and allows the player to recognize more quickly that it is not necessary to insert a game medal for the next game.

Furthermore, the settlement process related to automatic settlement (the settlement process executed when certain conditions are met) and the settlement process executed by operating the settlement button may be configured to be executable as the same process, or may be configured to be executable as separate, different processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 152, we will describe in detail the configuration related to limiting and automatic settlement that can be applied to this example.

First, the predetermined conditions for the stoppage that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) when all applicable BBs end, (3) when BB1 ends, (4) when BB2 ends, (5) difference in number of coins exceeds 500 coins, (6) difference in number of coins exceeds 1000 coins, (7) when 3 or more AT sets end, and (8) when a specific AT ends.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for automatic settlement that can be selected in this example are configured to be selectable from nine items: (1) none, (2) when all applicable BBs end, (3) when BB1 ends, (4) when BB2 ends, (5) difference in number of sheets is more than 500 sheets, (6) difference in number of sheets is more than 1000 sheets, (7) when 3 or more AT sets end, (8) when a specific AT ends, and (9) when the game is stopped.

In regard to (5) and (6) above, if the difference in number of sheets exceeds a prescribed number, and the player is in an advantageous state such as during BB or during an advantageous period, the system may be configured to determine that a prescribed or specific condition has been met at the time when the advantageous state ends. In addition, in this example, the difference in number of sheets is set to 500 or 1000 sheets, but the administrator may be able to set any number. In addition, the difference in number may be counted by providing a counter (sometimes called an MY counter or difference number counter) that can count the maximum difference in one advantageous period at which the advantageous period is forcibly ended, and the difference in number may be counted using the counter, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference in number controlled by a main control board M different from the counter may be used. In addition, the prescribed condition may be a difference of 500 or more or a difference of 1000 or more, rather than a difference of more than 500 or more than 1000 sheets.

Note that since the MY counter is updated only for each bet number, for example, when the bet number is "3", a predetermined game is played with three coins, and the counter value of the MY counter reaches 500 coins as the limit number, but the actual number of coins won may be less than 500 coins because a game other than a three-coin bet was played before the reaching timing. If the game is configured to be stopped based on the counter value of the MY counter, as described above, the game may be stopped even if the actual number of coins won is small. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the difference number other than the MY counter and counting the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for any number of bets, it is possible to ensure consistency between the actual number of coins won and the execution of the limit. Note that, since a two-coin bet game (a game other than a three-coin bet) is a game that is disadvantageous to the player by design, the two-coin bet game may be considered as some kind of strategy/fraud and the limit may be based on the MY counter.

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable to set it as the timing when the AT (or ART) has continued for three or more sets and the AT and advantageous zone end. In addition, if there is an AT that is not managed by the number of sets, a condition may be that it continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

The specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous to the player, such as an AT that is likely to allow the player to win a predetermined number of game medals or more (e.g., 500 or more).

In addition, information regarding the predetermined conditions for limiting and the specific conditions for automatic settlement is stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referenced when the power is turned on to determine the predetermined conditions and the specific conditions. The dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM/RAM area.

The timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition by referencing a specific RAM area is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may be when the setting change mode ends, when the limit/automatic settlement setting mode ends, when the setting/reset button M30 is operated, when a decision item is selected during the limit/automatic settlement setting mode, etc., or may be configured to be able to be determined at multiple times.

In addition, the method of changing the predetermined conditions and the specific conditions stored in the specific RAM area is configured to allow the settings to be changed by operating a stop button or the like during the setting change mode.

Note that the predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 152 are merely examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Also, it may be configured so that only one item is determined as a condition, or it may be configured so that multiple items are determined as conditions.

Examples of changes to the specified condition or specific condition may be configured as follows. (1) It is suitable for cases where the specified bonus state that is satisfied when the player is in a relatively unfavorable state (the expected value of winning game medals is negative (the number of medals inserted is greater than the number of medals paid out), the probability of winning the AT is low, etc.) during the execution of the specified bonus that is satisfied when the specified bonus starts is relatively unfavorable state (the expected value of winning game medals is negative (the number of medals inserted is greater than the number of medals paid out), the probability of winning the AT is low, etc.). (3) It is suitable for cases where the winning rate of the lottery to move to the favorable zone in the normal zone that is satisfied when moving from the normal zone to the favorable zone is high (for example, 99/100).

Next, referring to Figures 153 to 155, an example of how to change the predetermined conditions and the specific conditions will be described in detail.

First, Figure 153 is an image diagram of the transition between each mode. When switching to the setting change mode, "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" is displayed on the performance display device S40, as shown in (a) in the figure. After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the performance display device S40 displays the aforementioned options for the specified conditions as "Limit Setting Mode," as shown in (b) in the figure. Note that in (b), as no limit has been set, the specified condition is "None," and the cursor has selected "1 None." Note that if the specified condition is set to "None," the limit will not be executed.

Then, by operating the right stop button D43, the performance display device S40 displays the aforementioned specific condition options as "automatic settlement setting mode" as shown in (c) in the figure. Note that in (c), automatic settlement has not been set, so the specific condition is "none" and the cursor has selected "1 none." Note that if the specific condition is set to "none," automatic settlement will not be executed.

Then, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (d) in the figure, the "alert setting mode" is set to "1 No" or "2 Yes" in the performance display device S40. When "No" is set as the "alert setting mode", the performance display device S40 does not issue an alert related to the limit or automatic settlement even when the limit or automatic settlement occurs, but when "Yes" is set as the "alert setting mode", the performance display device S40 is configured to issue an alert related to the limit or automatic settlement when the limit or automatic settlement occurs.

When the right stop button D43 is operated to change modes, the cursor position may be configured to select the top "1 None," or to select the currently determined setting of a specified condition, a specific condition, or the notification setting mode.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the mode will again change to the "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" (a) in the figure, and thereafter, each time the right stop button D43 is operated, the mode will change in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) ....

In this example, the right stop button D43 is used as the operation member for mode transition, but this is merely an example, and the left stop button D41 or the center stop button D42 could also be used.

Next, FIG. 154 is an image diagram of selecting an item within a mode. This figure shows an example of the configuration related to the operation when selecting an item within mode 1 in the "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" described above in FIG. 153.

By switching to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 while the "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" is displayed, the performance display device S40 displays the aforementioned options for the specified conditions as the "Limit Setting Mode" as shown in (e) in the figure (similar to (b) in Figure 153). Note that in (b), as no limit has been set, the specified condition is "None" and the cursor has selected "1 None". Note that if the specified condition is set to "None", the limit will not be executed.

Then, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" moves as shown in (f) in the figure, and "2 When all target BBs end" is selected.

Then, by operating the right stop button D43, the performance display device S40 displays the aforementioned specific condition options as "automatic settlement setting mode" as shown in (g) in the figure. Note that in (g), since automatic settlement has not been set, the specific condition is "none" and the cursor has selected "1 none." Note that if the specific condition is set to "none," automatic settlement will not be executed.

Then, by operating the left stop button D41, the performance display device S40 displays the above-mentioned predetermined condition options as "Limit Setting Mode" as shown in (h) in the figure. That is, the mode transitions in the order of "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" → "Limit Setting Mode" → "Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" → "Notification Setting Mode" → "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" with each operation of the right stop button D43, but the mode transition is configured to transition to the previous mode by operating the left stop button D41. In addition, the cursor in the current mode can be moved (in this example, it moves down by one). Note that since the cursor selected "2 When all BBs of the target are completed" in (f), the cursor also selects "2 When all BBs of the target are completed" when transitioning to (h). In addition, this is not limited to this, and when a new mode transition occurs, the cursor may be configured to always select the initial position (such as "1 None").

In addition, the method of determining the setting of the predetermined condition, the specific condition, and the presence or absence of a notification in Fig. 153 and Fig. 154 (the method of changing the information stored in the specific RAM) may be configured as follows: (1) The item selected by the cursor at the time of the mode transition is determined. (2) The item is determined when the cursor continues to be selected for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds). (3) The item selected by the cursor while in each mode is determined by accepting the operation of a predetermined operating member (such as the start lever). (4) The item selected by the cursor while in each mode is determined by a setting confirmation operation during the setting change mode (e.g., accepting the operation of the start lever). (5) The item selected by the cursor while in each mode is determined by turning the setting key switch from on to off as an operation to end the setting change mode. The above configurations may be configured.

Also, in a state where settings related to the limit (setting of a specified condition, sometimes referred to as setting of the limit function) and settings related to automatic settlement (setting of a specific condition, sometimes referred to as setting of the automatic settlement function) are possible, such as the "limit/automatic settlement setting mode" exemplified in FIG. 153 and FIG. 154, whether the limit function is enabled and whether the automatic settlement function is enabled when determined in the current situation may be displayed on a display unit (e.g., the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of a display mode, the validity/invalidity of the limit function may be displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270, with "A" indicating validity and "F" indicating invalidity, and the validity/invalidity of the automatic settlement function may be displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270. More specifically, the display mode is as follows. Stop function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Enabled, Payout number display D270 displays "AA" Stop function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Payout number display D270 displays "AF" Stop function: Disabled, Automatic settlement function: Enabled, Payout number display D270 displays "FA" Stop function: Disabled, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Payout number display D270 displays "FF"

The display of whether the limit function and the automatic settlement function are enabled or disabled as described above may be configured to be displayed in the limit/automatic settlement setting mode before the limit function and the automatic settlement function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, when a value other than "1 None" is selected in the limit setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "A", when "1 None" is selected in the limit setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "F", when a value other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "A", and when "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "F".

In addition, when the validity/invalidity of the limit function and the automatic settlement function is determined, the above-mentioned validity/invalidity of the limit function and the automatic settlement function may be displayed. In such a configuration, for example, when a value other than "1 None" is determined in the limit setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the determination, when "1 None" is determined in the limit setting mode, "F" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time from the determination, when a value other than "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode, "A" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time from the determination, and when "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode, "F" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time from the determination.

The indication of whether the stop function and the automatic settlement function are enabled or disabled as described above may be configured to be displayed on a display unit controlled by the main control board M other than the payout number display device D270. Also, the display mode is merely an example, and it may be appropriately displayed in a display mode that is not used for displaying the number of game medals to be paid out, displaying the push order navigation, displaying credits, etc.

In addition, when the enable/disable indication of the limit-play function and the automatic settlement function as described above is displayed on the display unit controlled by the main control board M, the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S (e.g., the performance display device S40) may also be configured to (simultaneously) display the enable/disable indication of the limit-play function and the automatic settlement function. When configured in this way, the display mode on the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S may be appropriately displayed in a display mode that makes it easy for the manager of the amusement facility to recognize whether the limit-play function and the automatic settlement function are enabled/disabled.

Next, Figure 155 is a display image diagram on the performance display device S40 when the "alert setting mode" is determined to be "2 Yes" and the "limit setting mode" is determined to be "3 At the end of BB1", and the limit is actually reached.

As shown in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays "BB1 Ended", which was the trigger for the limit, "300 coins won", which is the number of game medals won in BB1, and "Limited time, please call an attendant", which is displayed when the "Notification Setting Mode" is set to "2 Yes". In this way, when the "Notification Setting Mode" is set to "2 Yes", the player is notified that the limit has been reached, allowing the player to continue playing without becoming confused. Also, although not shown, when automatic settlement is executed, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information that automatic settlement has been executed.

Note that the configuration of the operating members illustrated in the eleventh embodiment is merely an example, and any combination of operating members that are controlled by the main control board M will suffice.

In addition, the method for canceling the limit when play is stopped can be configured so that it cannot be cancelled by the player but can be cancelled by the administrator, and may be configured so that it can be cancelled by opening the front door DU (turning the key for opening the front door DU from OFF to ON) or by operating the setting/reset button M30, for example.

In addition, when automatic settlement is performed, the game can be played (game medals can be inserted) as soon as settlement is completed, just as when the player operates the settlement switch, or the game can be played after an administrator operates the game, just like when the game is stopped.

Note that the conditions for transitioning to the "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" illustrated in Figures 153 to 155 are merely examples, and other transition conditions may also be (1) transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, (2) pressing and holding the set/reset button M30 (e.g., keeping it on for 3 seconds) when all reels are stopped, or (3) opening the front door DU and operating any of the operating members controlled by the main control board M. Note that when configured as in (2) or (3) above, the game arcade can transition to the limit/automatic settlement setting mode even while it is open, and settings related to limit and automatic settlement can be switched.

In addition, the information in the specific RAM area mentioned above may be configured to be cleared when a setting change is made, or it may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other applicable configurations related to caps and automatic settlement> Configurations related to caps and automatic settlement that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example are described in detail below. It should be noted that one or more of the configurations described in detail below can be applied to all embodiments of this example.

It may be configured to execute the process of stopping the game and automatic settlement after executing the process related to turning on and off the advantageous zone indicator YH. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to align the lighting or off status of the advantageous zone indicator YH with the play zone of the next game.

If the system is configured to satisfy the specified condition or the specific condition when the difference in number of coins is greater than or equal to a specified value (e.g., 500 coins) and the state that is advantageous to the player ends, the cap flag or automatic settlement flag may be turned on when the difference in number of coins exceeds the specified value, and if the difference in number of coins then falls below the specified value again before the state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., the advantageous period) ends, the cap flag or automatic settlement flag may be turned off (cap or automatic settlement is not executed) or may remain on (cap or automatic settlement is executed). As a specific example, when one of "5. Difference in number of sheets over 500," "6. Difference in number of sheets over 1000," "5. Difference in number of sheets 500 or more," and "6. Difference in number of sheets 1000 or more" is set (determined) as the predetermined condition, even if a certain game is played and the difference in number of sheets meets the predetermined condition, if a certain game ends while a certain bonus is being played (sometimes referred to as a certain game state), the game may not be stopped immediately (a flag may be turned on) and the stopping process may be performed when the certain bonus ends.

When a game is configured to stop due to a limit or automatic settlement, if a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed in a game that is limited to a limit or automatic settlement, the game may be configured to stop or automatically settle before an automatic bet related to the replay is executed, or the game may be configured to stop or automatically settle after an automatic bet is executed.

Even if play is stopped due to a limit or automatic settlement, a menu screen or QR code (registered trademark) may be displayed by the player operating an operating member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB. By configuring in this way, even if play is stopped due to a limit without the player realizing that play will be stopped, the game history can be saved without any problems. Furthermore, when configured in this way, data related to the game history may be retained even if a power outage occurs.

If the system is configured so that a standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time has passed without operating any operating member (without progressing in the game) from the start of the display of an end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous zone end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that notifies the player that a favorable state has ended, the system may be configured so that if the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to a limit, the standby screen is not displayed even after the predetermined time has passed. Also, if a power outage occurs while the end screen is being displayed, the system may be configured so that a normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and standby screen) or the standby screen is displayed after power is restored.

If the conditions for outputting an external signal related to the limit or automatic settlement are met when play is stopped due to limit or automatic settlement, the external signal may be configured to continue to be output even when play is stopped due to limit or automatic settlement.

If play is stopped due to a limit or automatic settlement, the lamp unit may be turned on red and the back lamp turned off when play is stopped, so that the manager of the amusement facility can easily recognize that play has stopped, and the lights may be turned on and off in a lighting mode that is easily distinguished from when play is progressing (a combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp).

The audio data during settlement may be the same or different for settlement performed by the player operating the settlement button and for automatic settlement.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electronically stored in the credit and one or more game medals have been bet, (1) when automatic settlement is executed, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled. (2) When automatic settlement is executed, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, only the game medals bet are settled. (3) When automatic settlement is executed, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, only the game medals stored in the credit are settled.

As described above in Figures 153 and 154, if the conditions for terminating the limit/automatic settlement setting mode are met while setting the limit/automatic settlement setting mode (if play starts, if a power outage occurs, etc.), the system may be configured to execute a process to confirm the item that was selected (selected by the cursor) in the limit/automatic settlement setting mode.

It may be configured to have a mechanical switch that can be physically switched on and off. As an example, a mechanical switch for limiting play and a mechanical switch for automatic settlement may be provided, and in such a configuration, the predetermined condition and the specific condition may be conditions that are predefined in the gaming machine. In addition, a mechanical switch related to limiting play or automatic settlement may be provided, and the limiting play or automatic settlement may be set in the limiting play/automatic settlement setting mode described above (can be set by software). Note that, in the case of having a mechanical switch, the execution condition for limiting play or automatic settlement is set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine in this example is configured to display an error on a display unit (e.g., payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (e.g., when an inserted medal retention error is detected), but (1) when play is stopped due to limiting or automatic settlement, the display unit does not display that play has stopped. (2) when play is stopped due to limiting or automatic settlement, the display unit displays a different display mode from when an error was detected. (3) when play is stopped due to limiting or automatic settlement, the display unit displays a display mode similar to when an error was detected. The above configuration may also be used.

If a specified error (e.g., an error of inserted medals being stuck) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the execution of the settlement process may be stopped and a specified error state is entered (a notification related to the specified error is issued). Furthermore, if configured in this way, the payout related to the settlement process may be stopped immediately after the payout sensor detects the payout of the first game medal after the detection of the specified error (when the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor are turned on and off, it is deemed that one game medal has been paid out).

If a specified error (for example, an error of inserted medals being stuck) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the system may be configured to enter a specified error state (execute a notification related to the specified error) after the settlement process is completed. Furthermore, if configured in this way and game play is stopped (a stop-play process is executed) after the automatic settlement is executed, it is possible to execute a notification related to the stop of play (a notification related to the stop of play) even in the specified error state by entering a specified error state after the stop-play process is executed.

If a specified error (for example, an error of inserted medals being stuck) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the system is configured to enter a specified error state (execute a notification related to the specified error) after the settlement process is completed, and if the game is configured to stop after the automatic settlement is executed (execute a stop-play process), the system may be configured to enter the specified error state before executing the stop-play process. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the user that an error state has occurred.

If a specific error (e.g., an inserted coin retention error) is detected after the reels have stopped for a game that will end, but before the game ending process is executed, a specific error state will be created after the game ending process is executed, making it possible to issue a notification related to the game ending (notification related to the game stopping) even in the specific error state.

If a specified error (e.g., an inserted coin retention error) is detected after the reels for the game that will end, but before the game ending process is executed, the system may be configured to enter a specified error state before the game ending process is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the user that an error state exists.

When play is stopped due to a limit or automatic settlement, the operation of the operating members controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB, may be disabled.

When play is stopped due to a limit or automatic settlement, it is preferable to configure the blocker to be turned off (so that game medals cannot pass through).

In a situation where a notification related to a limit or automatic settlement is being executed (for example, a notification is being issued by the performance control device S40), if a predetermined error (for example, an error of inserted medals being stuck) is detected, an error notification may be executed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In addition, when an error notification is executed in such a case, (1) the notification related to the limit or automatic settlement is terminated and an error notification is executed (the notification may be a display on the performance display device S40 or a voice from a speaker) (1-1) If the error is subsequently released and the game due to the limit or automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to the limit or automatic settlement is resumed (1-2) If the error is subsequently released and the game due to the limit or automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to the limit or automatic settlement is not resumed (2) In order to allow both the notification related to the limit or automatic settlement and the error notification to be recognized, the notification related to the limit or automatic settlement and the error notification may be issued in different areas (or partially overlapping areas) of the performance display device S40 as described above. In this example, even when play is stopped due to a limit or automatic settlement, the system is configured to be able to execute a process for determining whether or not a specified error has occurred.

In the limit/automatic settlement setting mode, in other words, even when any of the screens (a) to (d) in FIG. 153 is displayed on the performance display device S40, the volume and light intensity may be adjusted, or a new screen not shown in FIG. 153 (e.g., (e) different from (a) to (d)) may be provided, and the volume and light intensity may be adjusted while the new screen is displayed.

When the limit is set (a situation where a value other than "1 None" has been determined in the limit setting mode), the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects (effects that suggest the current setting value, and whose execution and frequency vary depending on the current setting value) may be configured to be relatively higher than when the limit is not set (a situation where "1 None" has been determined in the limit setting mode), and by configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play when the limit is set.

When the specified condition for executing the stop processing and the specific condition for executing the automatic settlement processing are set as the same condition, if the same condition is met, the stop processing may be configured to be executed after the automatic settlement processing is executed. Also, when configured in this way, the stop processing may be configured to be executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement processing is paid out (passing the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor).

When only the capping function is active (predetermined conditions for capping are set, and specific conditions for automatic settlement are not set), or when the predetermined conditions for executing the capping process and the specific conditions for executing the automatic settlement process are set as different conditions, if the capping process is executed, the settlement process may be executed by operating the settlement button during capping.

The system may be configured so that while the settlement process related to the automatic settlement is being executed, the settlement process by operating the settlement button is not executed (no new settlement process is executed by operating the settlement button).

Note that the situation in which the above-mentioned limit setting is in progress may be referred to as "the limit function is active," and the situation in which the above-mentioned limit setting is not in progress may be referred to as "the limit function is inactive" or "the limit function is not active." Furthermore, determining the specified conditions may be referred to as "satisfying the specified conditions," and the options for the specified conditions described above in Figure 152 and the like may be referred to as "specific condition candidates," and the specific condition candidates may or may not include "1 None." Furthermore, satisfying the determined specified conditions may be referred to as "satisfying the specific conditions."

Furthermore, the specified conditions of "5. Difference in number of coins over 500" and "6. Difference in number of coins over 1000" described above in FIG. 152 may be referred to as "the number of gaming media acquired in a specified period exceeds a specified number", and the specified conditions of "5. Difference in number of coins or more 500" and "6. Difference in number of coins or more 1000" may be referred to as "the number of gaming media acquired in a specified period is equal to or greater than a specified number".

In addition, as described above in FIG. 152, in this example, the selection candidates for the predetermined conditions related to the cap (sometimes referred to as specific condition A selection candidates) and the selection candidates for the specific conditions related to automatic settlement (sometimes referred to as specific condition B selection candidates) are configured to overlap partially, but the selection candidates for the predetermined conditions related to the cap and the selection candidates for the specific conditions related to automatic settlement may be any of the above: (1) all candidates are different, (2) all candidates are the same, or (3) only partially the same. It should be noted that even when configured as in (2) or (3) above, the determined (set) predetermined conditions and the determined (set) specific conditions can be the same or different.

The above-mentioned stop function can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines. Specific examples of the stop processing include stopping the firing function (game balls will no longer be fired even if the firing handle D44 is operated) and disabling the entry of game balls into various ball entry ports (game balls will not be paid out even if a ball enters a winning port, or a random number will not be obtained even if a ball enters a ball entry port). Alternatives to the difference in number of coins in a reel-type gaming machine include the difference number obtained by accumulating the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out related to winning (the number of balls fired is subtracted from the number of balls paid out related to winning), and the total number of balls paid out, which is the accumulated number of balls paid out related to winning.

(Twelfth embodiment) In the tenth embodiment, a configuration having a performance display device SH was described in detail, but the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example is not limited to that of the tenth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example will be described in detail below as the twelfth embodiment.

First, Figure 156 shows an example of the display of the performance display device SH in the 12th embodiment. In this figure, only the differences from the 10th embodiment will be described in detail.

<Display mode> The display mode of the performance display device SH in the 12th embodiment is configured as follows:

Display items include (a) cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated feature ratio, (b) consecutive feature ratio over 6,000 games, (c) feature ratio over 6,000 games, (d) cumulative consecutive feature ratio, (e) cumulative feature ratio, and (f) cumulative feature etc. state ratio.

In the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) → (a)..." for about 5 seconds each. If a power outage occurs in the middle of a lighting pattern, the following configuration may be used. Here, a case where a power outage occurs 2 seconds after lighting pattern (c) is reached is illustrated. (1) Lighting starts from the beginning of display item (a). (2) Lighting starts from the beginning of display item (c). (3) Lighting resumes 2 seconds after display item (c). The above configuration may be used. If the above configurations (2) and (3) are used, lighting may be started from the beginning of display item (a) when RAM clear is executed (when the setting change mode ends).

The cumulative number of plays may be the number of plays since the power was turned on, the number of plays since the RAM was cleared, the number of plays since the device was shipped from the factory, or the number of plays backed up in a specified RAM area.

(f) = Cumulative ratio of the state of the reels, etc. The "cumulative ratio of the state of the reels, etc." can be calculated as "(cumulative number of times played when the first type special reels are activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special reels are activated + cumulative number of times played when the normal reels are activated + cumulative number of times played when the first type special reels are not activated when the first type continuous operation device for reels is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special reels are not activated when the second type continuous operation device for reels is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of times played × 100 (%)." As an example, if the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature is activated is 300 games, the cumulative number of games played when the second type special feature is activated is 100 games, the cumulative number of games played when the normal feature is activated is 100 games, the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature is not activated when the first type feature continuous activation device is activated is 200 games, the cumulative number of games played when the second type special feature is not activated when the second type feature continuous activation device is activated is 50 games, and the cumulative total number of games played is 30,000 games, the calculation is "(300 + 100 + 100 + 200 + 50) ÷ (30,000) x 100 = 2.5 (%)".

When calculating the cumulative feature state ratio described above, if the gaming machine does not have a second-class special feature in its specifications, the cumulative number of games played when the second-class special feature is activated and the cumulative number of games played when the second-class special feature is not activated when the second-class feature continuous operation device is activated are not used, and the calculation is made as follows: "(cumulative number of games played when the first-class special feature is activated + cumulative number of games played when the normal feature is activated + cumulative number of games played when the first-class special feature is not activated when the first-class feature continuous operation device is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of games played × 100 (%)." In this way, when calculating the display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, the display items are calculated without using elements that are not included in the gaming machine's specifications (the same applies to display items other than the cumulative feature state ratio).

As described above, in the 12th embodiment, games played inside BB or RB (such as RT2 in FIG. 28) are not counted (the number of games played is not counted) as the numerator for calculating the cumulative ratio of the state of the game devices, etc. (the cumulative number of games played when the first type special game device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special game device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the normal game device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the first type special game device is not activated when the first type game device continuous activation device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special game device is not activated when the second type game device continuous activation device is activated).

In addition, when the memory area storing the total number of plays, which is the denominator information used when calculating the display items, is the upper limit value (for example, if the memory area is a 3-byte memory area, it is "FFFFFF (H)"), and the update process is "+1" and the digits overflow, the total number of plays may be configured not to be updated from the next game onwards. In such a configuration, the numerator information, the cumulative number of plays when the first type special device is activated, may be configured not to be updated, or "1" may be stored in the memory area storing information that the total number of plays has overflowed. In addition, the memory area storing the total number of plays may be configured to manage whether the display in the performance display device SH is turned on or blinked (the memory area used for lighting/blinking management may be used together with the memory area used for calculating the display items). In addition, the configuration regarding the overflow is not limited to only the memory area storing the total number of plays, and can be applied to any information used when calculating the display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH.

The "5H" ("5H.") displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative ratio of the status of the reels, etc. is displayed.

In addition, in the performance display device SH of the 12th embodiment, if the ratio display value is 50% or more of the cumulative reel state ratio, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed flashing.

Also, as mentioned above, the display item (a) may be configured to display either the cumulative favorable zone ratio or the cumulative command-included feature ratio, and when the cumulative favorable zone ratio is displayed, "7P" ("7P.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10, and when the cumulative command-included feature ratio is displayed, "7U" ("7U.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10.

As described above in the tenth embodiment, the process related to the performance display monitor SH according to the twelfth embodiment may be executed as a process in the second ROM/RAM area.
The ratio calculation process of -7 (13th) is executed as a process in the second ROM/RAM area. As described above, when calculating the "cumulative ratio of the state of the reels, etc.", it is calculated as "(cumulative number of times of playing when the first type special reels are activated + cumulative number of times of playing when the second type special reels are activated + cumulative number of times of playing when the normal reels are activated + cumulative number of times of playing when the first type special reels are not activated when the first type consecutive reels are activated + cumulative number of times of playing when the second type special reels are not activated when the second type consecutive reels are activated) ÷ cumulative total number of times of playing × 100 (%)." The "cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the normal feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is not activated when the first type feature continuous operation device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is not activated when the second type feature continuous operation device is activated" used as the numerator and the "cumulative total number of times played" used as the denominator are stored in the second RAM area.

Here, during the period from when the power is turned on and the checksum is referenced and the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal (e.g., after the processing of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 is executed) until the power-off processing is executed and the checksum is calculated (e.g., before the processing of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) (in other words, during the period when game play can be executed, during the period when game play is being executed, during the setting change mode period, or during the setting confirmation mode period), noise occurs, causing the numerator data used to calculate the "cumulative role status ratio", in other words, the "cumulative number of times played when the first type special role is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special role is activated + cumulative number of times played when the normal role is activated + cumulative number of times played when the first type special role is not activated when the first type role continuous operating device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special role continuous operating device is activated" stored in the second RAM area. Even if an abnormality occurs in one or more pieces of information of "number of times played when the special device is not operating" and the value is changed, so that the numerator "cumulative number of times played when the first type special device is operating + cumulative number of times played when the second type special device is operating + cumulative number of times played when the normal device is operating + cumulative number of times played when the first type special device is not operating when the first type continuous device for special devices is operating + cumulative number of times played when the second type special device is not operating when the second type continuous device for special devices is operating" becomes a larger value than the denominator "cumulative total number of times played," in the 12th embodiment, a calculation is performed on the "cumulative ratio of the state of the special devices, etc." in the ratio calculation process, which is a process in the second ROM/RAM area, and a display process {for example, the ratio display process of step 1637-8 (13th)} is performed on the performance display monitor SH based on the result of the calculation process (the same process is performed as when no noise occurs). The "accumulated ratio of the state of the reels, etc." is merely an example, and the accumulated ratio of the advantageous zone, the accumulated ratio of the reels with instructions, the ratio of consecutive reels for 6000 games, the ratio of reels for 6000 games, the accumulated ratio of consecutive reels, and the accumulated ratio of reels may be configured to have the same effect as the "accumulated ratio of the state of the reels, etc." described above when noise occurs and the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area changes. In other words, during the period from when the power is turned on and the power-off recovery data is judged to be normal by referring to the checksum (for example, after the processing of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 is executed) until the checksum is calculated by executing the power-off processing (for example, before the processing of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) (in other words, during the period when the game can be played, the period when the game is being played, the period in the setting change mode, and the period in the setting confirmation mode), the judgment as to whether the numerator value is greater than the denominator value (error check processing) is not executed. With this configuration, even if the numerator value becomes larger than the denominator value due to noise or other factors while playing near closing time, the game can continue without causing any disadvantage to the player due to the error.

Note that, during the period from when the power-off process is executed to calculate the checksum (for example, after the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) until the power is turned on and the checksum is referenced to determine whether the power-off recovery data is normal (for example, before the processes of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 are executed) (in other words, during the period when the power is off), if an abnormality occurs in one or more pieces of information in the numerator data or denominator data used to calculate the "cumulative reels, etc. state ratio" and the value is changed due to the occurrence of noise, (1) if the result of the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if the result of the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM is initialized including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area, or (2) if the result of the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if the result of the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM is initialized without including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area.

Note that the configuration related to the action when the above noise occurs has been described in detail as an example for calculating the "cumulative role status ratio," but the configuration related to the action when noise occurs that can be applied to this example is not limited to only calculating the "cumulative role status ratio," but can also be applied to calculating the "cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio," the "consecutive role ratio for 6000 games," the "role ratio for 6000 games," the "cumulative consecutive role ratio," and the "cumulative role ratio."

In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration relating to the display in the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the twelfth embodiment can also be applied to gaming machines that do not have a performance display device SH. More specifically, gaming machines that do not have a performance display device SH may be configured to perform calculations of the display items and transmit the calculation results from the gaming machine to an external device, as in the twelfth embodiment, or may be configured to measure (count) information used to calculate the display items and transmit the measurement results (count results) from the gaming machine to an external device (calculation is performed outside the gaming machine).

(Thirteenth embodiment) The reel type gaming machine of this example may be a medal-less reel type gaming machine that does not use gaming medals. An example of such a configuration is described in detail below as the thirteenth embodiment. Note that any of the configurations described above may be applied as a configuration that does not affect whether gaming medals are used or not. Note that a medal-less reel type gaming machine is a reel type gaming machine that does not use gaming medals (including physical medals and metal pieces for detection by a sensor) and uses points.

<<<<Functional block diagram of a medal-less reel type gaming machine>>> First, FIG. 157 is a functional block diagram applicable to the medal-less reel type gaming machine of this example. The figure shows a hardware interface illustrating the physical connection via a cable, and a software interface illustrating the mode of command transmission.

<<Inside the gaming machine>> Inside the medal-less reel-type gaming machine are a main control board that controls the progress of the game, a payout control board that controls the points, and a connection terminal board that can transmit and receive information to and from the outside of the gaming machine. Although not shown, there may also be an external terminal board for outputting external signals to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Main control board> When the 1 bet button is operated in an enabled state, a 1 coin insertion switch signal, which is a signal to bet 1 point, is sent to the main control board. If a 1 coin insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board when 1 point has already been bet, the number of bets becomes 2 points. When the 3 bet button (sometimes called the max bet button) is operated in an enabled state, a 3 coin insertion switch signal, which is a signal to bet 3 points, is sent to the main control board. The specified number of points for the gaming machine in the figure is 3 points. When the return button is operated in an enabled state, a return button signal is sent to the main control board to return the bet points to the player. The bet points are sent to the payout control board described later, and the payout control board adds points as a return of points (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as returning to the payout control board or returning to the payout control board), and the returned points are added to the total score display device and displayed.

The main control board also transmits data on the number of coins inserted, which is information related to the display of the points bet, to the number of coins inserted display device, thereby displaying the points bet on the number of coins inserted display device. When points are awarded to a player as a result of a winning combination being stopped and displayed (as a result of winning), the main control board transmits data on the number of winning prizes, which is information related to the display of the number of winning prizes, to the number of winning prizes display device, thereby displaying the points to be awarded on the number of winning prizes display device. As an example of the display mode, if the points to be awarded are 8 points, the points to be awarded may be displayed directly and immediately, such as "0 → 8", or the points to be awarded in stages, such as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 8" (the "0" in the above example may be hidden).

In addition, although not shown, the main control board may be configured to transmit to the external terminal board a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (inserted), an operating status, which is a signal indicating the status of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is in progress), a door opening signal, which is a signal indicating the opening of the front door, and a security signal, which is a signal indicating the occurrence of an error.

The main control board is also configured to be able to send and receive control commands to and from the payout control board (two-way communication is possible). Here, the control commands are commands related to the progress of the game, such as commands related to the payout of points, commands related to the settlement of points, input request commands to request the input of points, and commands regarding the number of electromagnetic medals related to the points stored in the gaming machine. The payout control board is also configured to be able to send a play possible signal, which is a command indicating that the game can currently proceed, to the main control board.

The main control board and the payout control board may also be connected to the connection terminal board without going through the external terminal board. In this case too, the number of parts can be reduced, the configuration can be simplified, and signal degradation can be prevented to enable proper communication. When the main control board and the payout control board are connected to the connection terminal board via the external terminal board, the external terminal board connects the main control board to the rental machine via the connection terminal board. The external terminal board receives a medal insertion signal, operating status, door opening signal, and security signal from the main control board. The external terminal board also receives a medal payout signal from the payout control board, which is a signal indicating that points will be paid out (awarded to the player). The external terminal board is also configured to be able to output to the outside of the gaming machine (in this example, a rental machine) a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (inserted), an operating status signal indicating the status of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is in progress), a door opening signal indicating the opening of the front door, a security signal indicating the occurrence of an error, and a medal payout signal indicating that points have been paid out (granted to the player).

<Payout control board> The payout control board is connected to the main control board so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. In addition, the payout control board is electrically connected to an external terminal board, a total score display device, and a counting button (sometimes referred to as a settlement button). When the counting button is operated in an enabled state, a counting button signal, which is a signal indicating that a settlement operation has been performed, is transmitted to the payout control board. In addition, the payout control board is capable of transmitting game medal number data, which is information regarding the display of the current total score possessed by the player, to the total score display device, and is configured so that the total score is displayed on the total score display device. In addition, when the counting button is operated to execute the settlement of the score, (1) it may be configured to settle both the bet score and the score stored in the payout control board (the score stored in the payout control board and displayed on the total score display device), or (2) it may be configured to settle only the bet score when there is a bet score, and settle the score stored in the payout control board when there is no bet score. Also, when the counting button is operated to settle the points, only a part or all of the points stored in the payout control board may be settled. Furthermore, if an error occurs in the gaming machine or a game is being played, the operation of the counting button can be disabled to prevent the settlement process from being executed. In this way, the points can be added or subtracted at the appropriate timing, and doubts about the validity of the calculation results can be avoided. Note that even if an error occurs or a game is being played, the counting button may be enabled to allow the settlement process to be executed at any time.

In this example, the total score display device described above is configured to display a score equivalent to the total number of game medals in a game machine that uses game medals, including the game medals electrically stored in the storage device (the game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200) and the game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal tray D230, but this is not limited to this, and the total score display device and the storage device may be used together. When configured in this way, the total score display device will display a score equivalent to the number of game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal tray D230, in a game machine that uses game medals.

<<Lending machine operation unit>> The components provided in the lending machine operation unit located outside the medal-less reel-type gaming machine are described in detail below. When the replay switch is operated while in an enabled state, a replay switch signal, which is a signal indicating that the replay switch has been operated, is sent to the lending machine. By sending the replay switch signal to the lending machine, the points related to the replay in which the player plays using the points accumulated from the previous play (for example, points electrically stored on a membership card) are stored in the gaming machine (for example, stored in the memory area of the payout control board). Furthermore, if the gaming machine is configured so that a predetermined number of points (e.g., 50 points) is stored in response to a single operation of the replay switch, if the points stored by the player in the previous game are less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 50 points), (1) the replay switch signal is not sent to the lending machine, (2) no points are stored (added) to the gaming machine, or (3) points less than the predetermined number are stored (added) to the gaming machine.

When the lending button is operated in an enabled state, a lending button signal is sent to the lending machine, which is a signal used to store the points to be lent in the lending machine. When the lending button signal is sent to the gaming machine, the points are transferred from the card in which the points purchased by the player on the day are stored to the gaming machine. When the lending button is operated once to store a predetermined number of points (e.g., 50 points) in the gaming machine, if the points stored in the card are less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 50 points), the following may be configured: (1) the lending button signal is not sent to the lending machine, (2) the points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, or (3) points less than the predetermined number are stored (added) in the gaming machine. When the return switch is operated in an enabled state, the card in which the points purchased by the player on the day are stored is returned to the player (the remaining points that have not been lent are stored). The game machine may also be configured so that a player can change the points that are stored in the game machine by operating the loan button once.

The lending machine also transmits remaining points data, which is information related to the display of the points stored in the card purchased on the day, to the remaining points display device, so that the points (sometimes referred to as remaining points) stored in the card purchased on the day are displayed on the remaining points display device (when the card purchased on the day is inserted in the lending machine). When the points can be lent out (the points can be transferred to the gaming machine), the lending machine transmits a lendable LED signal to the lendable LED, so that the lendable LED becomes available for lending (for example, lit), allowing the player to recognize that the card is available for lending. The available status may be lit and the unavailable status may be turned off, or the available status may be lit in green and the unavailable status may be lit in red. As an example of whether or not a card is available for lending, the card may be configured to be available for lending when points are stored in the member card inserted in the lending machine or the card purchased on the day (a predetermined number of points or more are stored).

If communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is not possible, it is preferable to not allow the game to proceed, for the sake of score management. For example, the game can be prevented from proceeding by not accepting operation of the start lever or bet button.

<<Rental Machines>> The rental machines are also configured to transmit to the hall computer the following: ball output performance information, which is various information related to the ball output of the gaming machine; a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (deposited); a medal payout signal, which is a signal indicating that points will be paid out (awarded to the player); an operating status, which is a signal related to the status of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is in progress); a door opening signal, which is a signal related to the opening of the front door; and a security signal, which is a signal related to the occurrence of an error. The rental machines are also configured to transmit to the management computer, each company center, and gaming machine information center information related to the maximum number of coins difference on the day (sometimes referred to as MY), gaming machine installation information (described later), and the like.

As shown in the figure, the main control board, payout control board, connection terminal board on the gaming machine side, connection terminal board on the lending machine side, SC board, hall computer, management computer, company centers, and gaming machine information center are connected by connection cables. Here, the communication mode between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side will be described in detail using Figure 158.

Figure 158 is an example of the communication contents of a connection cable used for communication between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side. The connector of the connection cable is composed of nine pins, (1) pin 1 is used as an insulating GND (pin for isolating from GND) for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (2) pin 2 is used as a GND (sometimes called ground) for the transmission signal transmitted using pin 6 for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (3) pin 3 is used as a GND for the reception signal transmitted using pin 7 for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (4) pin 4 is used as a connection confirmation signal to confirm that the lending machine is connected to the gaming machine (payout control board) for signals transmitted from the payout control board side (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. (5) Pin 5 is used as an insulating GND (pin for isolating from GND) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). (6) Pin 6 is used as a signal (transmitting signal) transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine) to the SC board (lend machine) for a signal transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. (7) Pin 7 is used as a signal (receiving signal) received by the payout control board (gaming machine) from the SC board (lend machine) for a signal transmitted from the SC board (lend machine) to the payout control board (gaming machine). (8) Pin 8 is used as an insulating 5V (pin for isolating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). (9) Pin 9 is used as an insulating 5V (pin for isolating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). In addition, pins 6 and 2 are twisted (the cables are twisted together), and pins 7 and 3 are twisted (the cables are twisted together).

In this example, the signal sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine is sent from pin 6, in other words, all the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine are sent from pin 6, but this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine.

In this example, the signal sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine is sent from pin 7, in other words, all of the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine are sent from pin 7, but this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 159 illustrates the contents of the gaming machine information notification command (sometimes called gaming machine information notification). The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158.

The command length of the gaming machine information notification command is variable and may differ depending on the command content, but it is composed of multiple bytes. The transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and is composed of the command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0xXX to 0xYY (X and Y are arbitrary numbers). The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x01. The serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The gaming machine type information of No. 4 is information indicating the type of gaming machine and is 1 byte of data. The gaming information type of No. 5 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 gaming machine performance information, 0x01 gaming machine installation information, and 0x02 HC fraud monitoring information (HC is hall computer). The gaming machine information in number 6 is either gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information, and is 40 or 42 bytes of data, in other words, 2 bytes or more of data. The checksum in number 7 is 1 byte of data. The above serial number is sometimes called the serial number.

Furthermore, with regard to the command length mentioned above, if gaming machine performance information or HC/fraud monitoring information, which is 40 bytes, is sent as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x2E", and if gaming machine installation information, which is 42 bytes, is sent as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x30".

The gaming machine type information in No. 4 above is composed of a code, gaming machine, group name, and management medium, and a specific example is as follows: 0x01: slot machine, group A, gaming medal 0x02: slot machine, group B, gaming medal.

Furthermore, the gaming machine information in No. 6 above is configured to transmit one type of content corresponding to the gaming machine information type in No. 5 above. For example, if No. 5 above is gaming machine performance information, then No. 6 above will transmit information regarding the gaming status, etc. as the content of the gaming machine performance information. Furthermore, the content of the gaming machine installation information includes the manufacturer code of the main control board CPU, the manufacturer code of the payout control board CPU, product code, chip ID number, etc., and the content of the HC/fraud monitoring information includes IN/OUT information, gaming status, etc.

The contents of the gaming machine performance information include, for example, display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH ("cumulative role status ratio", "cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio", "continuous role ratio for 6000 games", "role ratio for 6000 games", "
The gaming machine may be configured to transmit information such as "accumulated consecutive feature ratio,""accumulated feature ratio," and information used to calculate the display items (which may also be referred to as elements, for example, the cumulative number of plays when the first type special feature is activated, the total number of plays, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine as gaming machine performance information.

As a more specific example of the configuration of the gaming machine performance information, it may be configured as follows. Total points inserted: The accumulated points inserted since the power was turned on (IN, sometimes called the total points inserted), and is 2-byte data. Total points paid out: The accumulated points paid out since the power was turned on (OUT, sometimes called the total points inserted), and is 2-byte data. If a replay role is won and an automatic bet is executed when the replay symbol stops (after the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed), IN = 0 points. Also, when the replay symbol stops (a game in which the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed), OUT = 0 points. In this way, the total points inserted and the total points paid out are calculated by accumulating IN and OUT from the time the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the total points inserted and the total points paid out are cleared, and are accumulated and calculated again from 0 after the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, the IN/OUT of the game center in one day can be output to the outside of the game machine in a simple manner. MY in one business day: This is a value obtained by subtracting the largest difference number for the player from the smallest difference number for the player from the time the power is turned on until it is turned off again, and is 2-byte data. In addition, if a power outage occurs and the power is restored afterwards, MY in one business day is cleared. In addition, it may be the counter value of the MY counter described above. Accumulated number of payouts of the special feature: The accumulated number of payouts of the special feature is "the accumulated number of payouts during the operation of the first type special feature + the accumulated number of payouts during the operation of the second type special feature + the accumulated number of payouts during the operation of the normal feature", and is 2-byte data. In addition, even if a power outage occurs and the power is restored normally afterwards, or after a setting change is made under a situation where no RAM abnormality occurs, the accumulated number of payouts of the special feature is not cleared. Accumulated consecutive payout number: The accumulated consecutive payout number is the accumulated payout number during the operation of the first type special feature, and is 2-byte data. The accumulated consecutive payout number is not cleared even if the power is turned off and then returned to normal, or after the setting is changed under a situation where no RAM abnormality occurs. Accumulated feature ratio: The accumulated feature ratio is "(accumulated payout number during the operation of the first type special feature + accumulated payout number during the operation of the second type special feature + accumulated payout number during the operation of the normal feature) ÷ accumulated total payout number × 100 (%)", and is 1-byte data. The accumulated feature ratio is not cleared even if the power is turned off and then returned to normal, or after the setting is changed under a situation where no RAM abnormality occurs. Accumulative consecutive feature ratio: The cumulative consecutive feature ratio is "the cumulative number of payouts during the operation of the first type special feature ÷ the cumulative total number of payouts × 100 (%)" and is 1 byte of data. The cumulative consecutive feature ratio is not cleared even if the power is turned off and then the power is restored to normal, or even after the settings are changed under conditions where no RAM abnormality occurs. Accumulative instruction-included feature ratio or cumulative favorable zone ratio: The cumulative favorable zone ratio is "the number of games played in the favorable zone ÷ the total number of games played × 100 (%)", and the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is "{the number of payouts in the game in which the push order navigation (sometimes called instruction) on the main control board M is executed + the number of payouts by the feature} ÷ the total number of payouts × 100 (%)", and whether the instruction-included feature ratio or the favorable zone ratio is displayed can be determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine, and is 1 byte of data. In addition, even if a power outage occurs and the power is restored to normal afterwards, or after a setting change is made under circumstances where no RAM abnormality occurs, the cumulative instruction-included role ratio or cumulative favorable zone ratio is not cleared. Role, etc. status ratio: The role, etc. status ratio is "(the cumulative number of games played when the first type special role is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special role is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the normal role is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the first type special role is not activated when the first type consecutive role activation device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special role is not activated when the second type consecutive role activation device is activated) ÷ the cumulative total number of games played × 100 (%)", and is 1 byte of data. In addition, even if a power outage occurs and the power is restored to normal afterwards, or after a setting change is made under circumstances where no RAM abnormality occurs, the role, etc. status ratio is not cleared. The cumulative ratio of the features, the cumulative ratio of consecutive features, the cumulative ratio of features with instructions, the cumulative ratio of advantageous zones, and the ratio of features, etc., are rounded down to the nearest whole number. The number of payouts may be referred to as payout points or payout points. The cumulative ratio of features, the cumulative ratio of consecutive features, the cumulative ratio of features with instructions, the cumulative ratio of advantageous zones, and the ratio of features, etc., in the gaming machine performance information may be configured to transmit data used when displaying on the performance display device. When calculating the ratio of features, etc., if one game is played in a situation where both the first type special feature and the first type feature continuous operation device are in operation, 1 is added to the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature is in operation, and 1 is not added to the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature is not in operation when the first type feature continuous operation device is in operation, so that 1 is added to the numerator of the above formula (not 2 is added). In other words, if either the reel is operating or the reel continuous operation device is operating, 1 is added to the RAM memory area that stores the numerator of the above formula.

The HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured to transmit error information, and in such a case, it may be configured as follows. (1) Error information related to the main control board and error information related to the dispensing control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of error information related to the main control board and 1 byte of error information related to the dispensing control board is configured to be transmitted. (2) Recoverable error information related to the main control board and non-recoverable error information related to the main control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of recoverable error information related to the main control board and 1 byte of non-recoverable error information related to the main control board is configured to be transmitted. (3) Recoverable error information related to the main control board, non-recoverable error information related to the main control board, and error information related to the dispensing control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, the HC/fraud monitoring information can be transmitted, including 1 byte of recoverable error information on the main control board, 1 byte of unrecoverable error information on the main control board, and 1 byte of error information on the dispensing control board.

Note that, although the medal-less reel-type gaming machine in this example is configured to have a payout control board, this is not limited thereto, and the machine may not have a payout control board, and the configuration performed by the payout control board in this example may be configured to be executable by the main control board.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command, it is calculated from the command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming information type, and gaming machine information, but the gaming machine information is 2 bytes or more of data. For example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information as gaming machine information, the gaming machine performance information is 40 bytes of data, but the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is calculated using 40 pieces of 1 byte data obtained by dividing the 1st byte through the 40th byte, as well as the command length, command type, serial number, and gaming machine information type, which are 1 byte of data. By configuring in this way, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte even if the command contains 2 bytes or more of data.

Next, Figure 160 illustrates the contents of the counting notification command (sometimes called a counting notification). The counting notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in Figure 158, and is a command that can be sent based on the operation of the counting button.

The count notification command has a command length of 7 bytes, and is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. It is composed of the command length, command type, counting serial number, count points, counting cumulative points, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x07. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x02. The counting serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFF. The counting points of No. 4 are 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFA. The counting cumulative points of No. 5 are 2 bytes of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFFFF. The checksum of No. 6 is 1 byte of data. The counting serial number is sometimes called the counting serial number, and is sometimes collectively called the serial number and lending serial number.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the count notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the count notification command, it is calculated from the command length, command type, count serial number, count score, and count cumulative score, but the count cumulative score is 2 bytes or more of data. For example, the count cumulative score is 2 bytes of data, but the checksum of the count notification command is calculated using 1 byte of data obtained by dividing the first byte and the second byte into two, and the command length, command type, count serial number, and count score, which are 1 byte of data. By configuring it in this way, even if the command contains 2 bytes or more of data, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte. The count cumulative score has an upper limit of 9999, which will be described in detail later.

Next, FIG. 161 illustrates the contents of the loan notification command (sometimes called a loan notification). The loan notification command is a command that the gaming machine receives from the loan machine as a receiving signal sent using pin 7 of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158, and is a command that can be sent based on the operation of the loan button.

The command length of the loan notification command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the loan machine to the gaming machine. It is composed of the command length, command type, loan serial number, loan points, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x05. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x13. The loan serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFF. The loan points of No. 4 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFF. The checksum of No. 5 is 1 byte of data. The above loan serial number is sometimes called the loan serial number, and is sometimes collectively called the serial number together with the serial number and counting serial number.

Next, FIG. 162 illustrates the contents of the loan receipt result response command (sometimes referred to as the loan receipt result response). The loan receipt result response command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the loan machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158.

The command length of the loan receipt result response command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and it is composed of the command length, command type, loan serial number, loan point receipt result, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows: The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0x05. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x13. The loan serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The loan point receipt result of No. 4 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00: normal, 0x01: abnormal (other values are judged as abnormal). The checksum of No. 5 is 1 byte of data.

Next, Figure 163 shows the flow for notifying gaming machine information. This figure illustrates the transmission and reception of information between the slot machine side and the lending machine side. This figure also illustrates the case where HC and fraud monitoring information is sent as a gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

First, the gaming machine is powered on, and a gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine at a specified timing. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification immediately after powering on is 0. After that, about 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The counting serial number in the counting notification immediately after powering on is 0. After that, within 170 ms, a loan notification is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. The loan serial number in the loan notification immediately after powering on is 0. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The loan serial number in the loan receipt result response immediately after powering on is 0. After that, at a timing when more than 20 ms have passed and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is 1.

Thus, in this example, the gaming machine information notification is configured so that the serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent, going from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255. Similarly, the counting serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent, going from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255. Similarly, the loan serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent (each time a loan notification is sent), going from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255.

After that, a gaming machine information notification is sent approximately every 300 ms, and a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending receipt result responses are sent and received, and approximately 300 ms after a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but the serial number is configured to be 1. In other words, the serial number is 0 only immediately after the power is turned on, and thereafter it is configured to progress as follows: "1 → 2 → ... → 255 → 1 → 2 → ...".

Note that, although not shown, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine every 30 seconds as a gaming machine information notification, and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine every 120 seconds. When the timing of transmission of any of the gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information overlaps, it may be configured as follows: (1) a priority is set and only commands with a high priority are transmitted, or (2) all are transmitted in a single interrupt process. Note that, as a specific example of the priority when configured as in (1) above, it may be configured in order from highest priority as "gaming machine performance information → gaming machine installation information → HC/fraud monitoring information", or it may be configured in order from highest priority as "HC/fraud monitoring information → gaming machine installation information → gaming machine performance information".

In this way, in this example, a serial number is provided for the gaming machine information notification, and the configuration is such that the consistency of the commands can be achieved by the serial number (for example, if the serial number of the gaming machine information notification following a gaming machine information notification with serial number 5 is not 6, it can be determined that there is an abnormality). The serial number is configured to be stored in a specified memory area.

In addition, when transmitting a serial number, a special addition process is performed on the previously transmitted serial number (the serial number stored in a specified memory area) and then transmitted. (1) When the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 255), the result of the special addition process is "N+1". (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, 255 in this example), the result of the special addition process is "1". By configuring it in this way, when a serial number of 0 is transmitted, a device outside the gaming machine can also recognize that the gaming machine has been powered off, making it possible to quickly detect any fraudulent activity.

Here, the special addition process will be described in detail. First, the conventional general addition process will be described in detail. In the case of N=100, (A1) when a normal addition process of adding "+1" to "100(D)" is performed, the result is "101(D)". (A2) Also, when a normal addition process of adding "+1" to "255(D)" corresponding to M is performed, a carry occurs and the result is "0(D)". On the other hand, when a special addition process is performed, (B1) when a special addition process of adding "+1" to "100(D)" is performed, the result is "101(D)". (B2) Also, when a special addition process of adding "+1" to "255(D)" corresponding to M is performed, a carry occurs by first performing a normal addition process of adding "+1", the result is "0(D)", and the carry causes the carry flag to become 1. The special addition process in this example is configured so that when the carry flag becomes 1, the calculation result is an arbitrary value of "1 (D)", so when the special addition process of "+1" is performed on "255 (D)", which corresponds to M, the calculation result becomes "1 (D)".

Note that the special addition process in this example is configured so that when the carry flag becomes 1, the calculation result becomes an arbitrary value of "1 (D)", but the arbitrary value can be changed without any problems, and it may be configured to become "100 (D)".

Note that the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number in this example may be 2-byte information, and even in such a configuration, (1) when the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 65535), the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1." (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, which is 65535 in this example), the result of executing the special addition process is "1." It may also be configured as follows.

Note that while the serial numbers related to gaming machine information notifications have been described in detail here, the same applies to the counting serial numbers related to counting notifications and the loan serial numbers related to loan notifications.

The timing for executing the special addition process described above may be any timing between after the gaming machine information notification is sent and before the next gaming machine information notification is sent. In other words, the special addition process is configured to be executed after the serial number is sent in order to update the next serial number.

Furthermore, when the memory area for storing the serial number related to the gaming machine information notification is the first memory area and the memory area for storing the counting serial number related to the counting notification is the second memory area, the first memory area and the second memory area may be configured to be continuous.Furthermore, when the gaming machine is configured to have a memory area for storing the loan serial number related to the loan notification and the memory area for storing the loan serial number related to the loan notification is the third memory area, the first memory area and the third memory area may be configured to be continuous, or the second memory area and the third memory area may be configured to be continuous. In addition, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, as described above, the device may be configured to execute a process to reset the serial number stored in the first memory area, the counting serial number stored in the second memory area, and the loan serial number stored in the third memory area to zero (if the gaming machine does not have a third memory area, the device may be configured to execute a process to reset the first memory area and the second memory area to zero).

For example, if the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area are configured to have consecutive addresses, and the serial number is "F1A0", the counting serial number is "F1A1", and the loan serial number is "F1A2", when the power is turned from off to on and a process is executed to clear the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number to 0, the address corresponding to the serial number, "F1A0", is specified to execute the zero clear, and then the process of similarly clearing the next address to 0 is repeated twice, thereby clearing the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number to 0, and the data capacity required for the program can be reduced compared to when the addresses of the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number are specified and cleared to 0.

In addition, the information on the performance display device may be configured to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (rental machine, SC board) as a gaming machine information notification. In such a configuration, the information on the performance display device may be transmitted as gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information among the gaming machine information notifications. The information on the performance display device may be configured as follows. (1) The display items described above in FIG. 156 and the like (accumulated advantageous zone ratio, accumulated instruction-included role ratio, continuous role ratio for 6000 games, role ratio for 6000 games, accumulated continuous role ratio, accumulated role ratio, accumulated role etc. state ratio) are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are calculated within the gaming machine, and the calculation results are transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. (2) The elements for displaying the display items described above in FIG. 156 and the like (elements used for calculation such as the accumulated number of games played when the first type special role is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are not calculated within the gaming machine but are transmitted and are calculated outside the gaming machine (for example, on the SC board). (3) The display items (accumulated advantageous zone ratio, accumulated indicated feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio for 6000 games, feature ratio for 6000 games, accumulated consecutive feature ratio, accumulated feature ratio, accumulated feature etc. state ratio) described above in FIG. 156 and the like and elements for displaying the display items (elements used for calculation such as the accumulated number of games played when the first type special feature is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine is configured to be able to send gaming machine information notifications to the outside at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 300 ms). When the gaming machine information notification is sent to the outside, it then sends a counting notification. However, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, it does not send a counting notification after that. Also, when configured in this way, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, it is configured such that the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button is not performed thereafter.

Also, the gaming machine may be configured so that the IN/OUT information can be transmitted outside the gaming machine as a gaming machine information notification. In such a case, the gaming machine information notification may be transmitted as gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information. The IN/OUT information may be configured as follows. (1) After the start lever operation is accepted for the next game in which the replay role is won and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine transmits to the outside as a gaming machine information notification the fact that the game is after the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed (sometimes referred to as replay operation status information) and the IN information of the number of bets in that game (e.g., 3 points). (2) After the replay role is won and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine transmits to the outside as a gaming machine information notification the fact that the game is after the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed. (3) When a replay role is won and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, OUT information indicating that the number of points is 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification, and then, after the operation of the start lever is accepted for the next game in which the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, IN information indicating that the number of points is 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification.

Next, FIG. 164 shows the flow of the loan notification command. The figure illustrates a configuration that can be applied to the slot machine of this example for sending and receiving information between the slot machine and the loan machine.

<A: Configuration 1 in which the lending button can be enabled while the reels are rotating> A certain game is executed and the reels start rotating. After that, the lending button of the lending machine is turned from OFF to ON while the reels are rotating. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points. As described above, the "total score" is all the scores that can be inserted into a medal-less reel gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of gaming medals placed on the medal tray of a general reel gaming machine that uses actual gaming medals. When applying the configuration of a medal-less reel gaming machine to the above-mentioned embodiment, there is no problem in treating what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification as "scores", "score information", "possessed points", "possessed points information", "gaming value", "gaming value information", etc., and there is no problem in referring to them as "scores", "score information", "possessed points", "possessed points information", "gaming value", and "gaming value information" as appropriate. There is no problem in not having "credits". The stored total score is configured to be displayed on the total score display device.

Then, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and cumulative counting score = 0, which is counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a lending notification containing information on lending score = 50, which is lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response containing information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is lending serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed and approximately 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, another gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1.

<B: Configuration 2 in which the loan button can be enabled while the reels are spinning> A game is played and the reels start spinning. Then, while the reels are spinning, the loan button on the loan machine is turned from OFF to ON. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 9980 points.

Then, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 9980, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 0, which is counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan points of 50 are not added to the total score, and the total score remains at 9980 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 9980 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed and approximately 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, another gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1.

The configurations A and B above allow points to be lent out by operating the lending button even while the reels are spinning, but the upper limit of the total points in the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this example is 9999, and in cases where the upper limit is not exceeded even when 50 points, which are points added based on the operation of the lending button, are added as in A above, 50 points are lent out and added to the total points (30 + 50 = 80), whereas in cases where the upper limit of the total points is exceeded when 50 points, which are points added based on the operation of the lending button, are added as in B above, 50 points are not lent out (are not added), and the total points remain at 9980.

By configuring as in A and B above, it is possible to configure the system so that the points can be loaned out even while the reels are spinning, so that the next game can be played as smoothly as possible, and it is also possible to configure the system so that the total points do not exceed the upper limit.

In the figure, an example is shown of a configuration in which the lending of points is not performed if the total score exceeds the upper limit when 50 points are added based on the operation of the lending button, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the lending of points is not performed (lendment is not performed even if the lending button is operated) if the total score reaches a predetermined value (for example, 9950).

In addition, in the figure, the configuration is such that the loan points are not added to the total points, and the gaming machine sends a loan receipt result response containing information indicating that the loan point receipt result is abnormal; however, this is not limited to this, and the lending machine may send information indicating that the loan points are 0 as a loan notification to the gaming machine. In other words, if the lending machine determines that the loan points can be added, the lending machine may send information indicating that the loan points are 50 as a loan notification to the gaming machine, and if the loan points are not to be added, the lending machine may send information indicating that the loan points are 0 as a loan notification to the gaming machine.

<C: Configuration 1 in which the loan button is not enabled while the reels are spinning> A game is played and the reels start spinning. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points.

Then, a gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information on total score = 30 (serial number n) and information that the lending button cannot be operated (information indicating that operation of the lending button is invalid because the reels are spinning), and approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information on counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 0 (counting serial number m), and then within 170 ms, a lending notification is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine, containing information on lending points = 0 (lending serial number p).

Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is the loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and the total score remains at 30 (the total score display device also displays 30 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers.

Then, while the reels are spinning, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from OFF to ON. Then, at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the previous rental receipt result response and about 300 ms after the timing of the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information on total score = 30 and information on the rental button not being operable (information that the operation of the rental button is invalid because the reels are spinning). Then, about 100 ms later, a counting notification including information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting cumulative points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification including information on rental serial number p+1 and rental points = 0 is sent from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. In this way, in the configuration of C, information indicating that the rental button cannot be operated is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, so the rental points are sent as 0 from the rental machine to the gaming machine.

Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information indicating that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 (the total score display device also shows 30 points).

In this way, while the reels are spinning, a gaming machine information notification including information that the loan button cannot be operated (information indicating that operation of the loan button is invalid because the reels are spinning) is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the period during which play is in progress and the loan operation.

In addition, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total points based on the sending of the loan receipt result response, but it may also be configured to add the loan points to the total points based on the receiving of the loan notification.

<D: Configuration in which the bet button may be disabled during lending> Next, FIG. 165 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, the bet button is enabled, and a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side. After about 100 ms, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms thereafter, a lending notification containing information on lending score = 0, which is the lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response containing information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is the lending serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and the total score remains at 30 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 30 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers.

Then, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. Then, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 30. Then, about 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, containing information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and then within 170 ms, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, containing information on rental points = 50, and containing rental serial number p+1. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response with loan serial number p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, including information that the loan point receipt result is normal, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also shows 80 points).

In this configuration, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 200 ms) immediately after the total score is added. This is when 20 ms or more has passed since the previous loan receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lender machine, and then, as a predetermined period of time has passed since the total score was added, the bet button is enabled again.

In this way, in the configuration of D, when the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation, the bet button is configured to be disabled for a predetermined period of time. During the invalid period of the bet button, the player may be notified that the lending of the score is being performed. For example, the display of the total score display device may be configured to flash, or the display of the total score may be displayed to increase stepwise from 30 to 80. Also, the sub-control board S may be configured to output a sound corresponding to the increase in the total score. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to 200 ms, and may be changed as appropriate. Note that the timing at which the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation and the predetermined period during which the bet button is disabled may be configured to overlap, or may not overlap (the bet button is disabled immediately after the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation).

In addition, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total score when the loan receipt result response is sent, but it may also be configured to add the loan points to the total score when the loan notification is received. Also, while it is configured to disable operation of the bet button for a predetermined period of time from the time the loan receipt result response is sent, it may also be configured to disable operation of the bet button for a predetermined period of time from the time the loan notification is received.

Furthermore, as described above, in the configuration of D, when the gaming machine receives a loan notification including a loan point value of 1 or more and the total points are added, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time, whereas when the gaming machine receives a loan notification including information that the loan points are 0 and the total points are not added, the bet button is not disabled (the button does not go from enabled to disabled upon receipt of the loan notification). By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the device so that processes that affect the game, such as the process of adding to the total points and the betting process, are not executed in duplicate.

In the figure, a configuration in which the bet button is disabled for a specified time when points are lent is described in detail, but it is not limited to the bet button, and the start lever, insertion of a game medal, and start of reel spinning may also be configured to be disabled for a specified time when points are lent.

Note that if the machine is being loaned out when the gaming machine information notification is sent, and the loan ends before the loan notification command is received, the system is configured to allow points to be added based on the loan operation.

The bet buttons described above also include the max bet button described above, and can be applied to the configuration related to the lighting of the max bet lamp described above in Figures 80 to 83. In other words, it is possible to combine this with the configuration described above in Figures 80 to 83, such as configuring the max bet lamp to be turned off during the period when the bet buttons described above are disabled.

<E: Configuration 1 for loan receipt result response> Next, FIG. 166 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the loan button is turned from off to on. After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which is the loan serial number 5, is sent from the loaner machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is the loan serial number 5, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Note that n and m above may be different numbers or may be the same number.

Then, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. Then, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 80. Then, approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, which contains information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and then within 170 ms, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, which contains information on rental points = 50, and contains information on rental serial number 1. Within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, including information that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, resulting in loan serial number 1, and the loan points are not added to the total score, leaving the total score at 80 points (the total score display device also remains at 80 points). Thus, in the configuration of E, if a loan notification with loan serial number 5 is received, and then the next loan notification is received, and the loan notification with loan serial number 1 is received due to noise or other factors, even though the loan notification should actually be number 6 (if a loan notification with a different loan serial number is received), a loan receipt result response is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine indicating that there is an abnormality, and the total score is not added.

<F: Configuration 2 for loan receipt result response> The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the loan button is turned from off to on. After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which is loan serial number 255, is sent from the loaner machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number 255, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Note that n and m above may be different numbers or may be the same number.

Then, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. Then, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 80. Then, approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, which contains information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and then within 170 ms, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, which contains information on rental points = 50, and contains information on rental serial number 1. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response including information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number 1, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 80 + 50 = 130 points (the total score display device also displays 130 points). Thus, in the configuration of F, when a loan notification with loan serial number 255 is received and then the next loan notification is received, the loan serial number is 1, and in this example, the upper limit of the loan serial number is 255, and the number following 255 is 1, so that the next time after 255, a loan notification with the correct loan serial number, 1, is received, and so a loan receipt result response including information that the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. In this way, by cycling through the rental serial numbers from 1 to 255, it is possible to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the outside world without putting a strain on the capacity of the memory area that stores the rental serial numbers.

<A: Flow 1 for counting notification command> Next, in FIG. 167, the flow for counting notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notification including information of total score = 200, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the counting button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and becomes 200 → 150 (the display of the total score display device and the subtraction of the total score based on the operation of the counting button are sometimes referred to as being settled, settlement processing being executed, etc.). After that, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification including information of counting score = 50 and counting cumulative score = 50, which is the serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting score of 50 is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 150 points. The timing of subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be approximately 20 ms after the count button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing when a long press of the count button is detected, or the timing when the count notification is sent.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

Then, the counting button remains on, and at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous transmission of the rental receipt result response and about 300 ms after the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information on total score = 150. Then, about 300 ms after the timing of the subtraction of the display on the total score display device, the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and it becomes 150 → 100. Then, about 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a counting notification with counting serial number m+1 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, including information on counting points = 50 and counting cumulative points = 100, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 100.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also displays 150 points).

Then, the counting button turns from on to off, and more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt response was sent, and about 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+2, and contains information that the total score = 100. Then, about 300 ms after the previous subtraction timing of the total score display device, because the counting button was turned off, the display on the total score display device is not subtracted. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification was sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information that the counting serial number is m+2, the counting points = 0, and the counting cumulative points = 100, and the total score remains at 100 points.

Within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification with rental serial number p+2 and information that the rental points = 0 is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine. Within 10 ms thereafter, a rental receipt result response with rental serial number p+2 and information that the rental points receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, and the total score remains at 100 points (the total score display device also remains at 100 points). Then, at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent and about 300 ms after the timing of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+3, and it contains information that the total score = 100.

<B: Flow 2 for counting notification command> The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 200, which becomes serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lender machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms pass with the counting button kept on, and the display on the total score display device is decremented by 50, changing from 200 to 150. After that, the counting button is turned on → off, and about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 50 and cumulative counting score = 50, which becomes counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lender machine, and the counting score of 50 is subtracted from the total score, making the total score 150. In this way, in the configuration of B, even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after the gaming machine information notification is sent, and then a long press of the counting button is detected (20 ms has passed since the counting button was turned from OFF to ON) and the counting button is turned ON to OFF before the counting notification is sent, a counting notification containing information that count points = 50 and cumulative count points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the count points of 50 are subtracted from the total points, making the total points 150 points.

The timing for subtracting the display of the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be approximately 20 ms after the counting button is turned from OFF to ON, in other words, the timing when a long press of the counting button is detected, or the timing when the counting notification is sent. When configured in this way, the system is configured as follows. (1) Even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after sending a gaming machine information notification, and then turned ON to OFF before sending the counting notification, the total score and the display of the total score display device can be updated at the timing when a long press of the counting button is detected. (2) Even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after sending a gaming machine information notification, and then turned ON to OFF before sending the counting notification, the total score and the display of the total score display device can be updated at the timing when the counting notification is sent.

The total score display device may also be configured to be able to both store the total score and display the total score. Even in this case, the total score and the display of the total score may be updated approximately 20 ms after the count button is turned off and then on, in other words, when it detects that the count button has been pressed and held down, or the total score and the display of the total score may be updated when a count notification is sent.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

Then, more than 20 ms after the previous rental receipt response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and it contains information that the total score is 150.

By configuring it in this way, even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned from ON to OFF before sending the counting notification, the display of the total score and total score display device can be updated, and the counting points and cumulative counting points can be sent outside the gaming machine via the counting notification. Even if the player stops operating the counting button (takes his/her hand off) at the time when he/she appears to recognize that the settlement has been made, information can be sent accurately outside the gaming machine.

The counting button in this example may also be configured as follows. <Configuration 1> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a predetermined time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notice including a predetermined number of counting points is sent (2) The gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notice to the rental machine at predetermined intervals (3) When the gaming machine information notice is sent, the counting notice is sent after the predetermined time has elapsed (4) If the counting button is turned from on to off after sending the gaming machine information notice and before receiving the rental notice, the total score is subtracted the next time the counting notice is sent.

<Configuration 2> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a predetermined time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notice containing a predetermined number of counting points is sent. (2) The gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notice to the rental machine at predetermined intervals. (3) When a gaming machine information notice is sent, a counting notice is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. (4) If the counting button is turned on and then off after sending the gaming machine information notice and before receiving the rental notice, the total score is not subtracted the next time the counting notice is sent.

<Configuration 3> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a predetermined time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notice containing a predetermined number of counting points is sent. (2) The gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notice to the rental machine at predetermined intervals. (3) When a gaming machine information notice is sent, a counting notice is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. (4) After sending the gaming machine information notice, even if the counting button is turned from off to on, the total score is not subtracted the next time the counting notice is sent.

<Configuration 4> (1) When the counting button is enabled and operated continuously for a certain period of time, the total points are subtracted and a counting notification command including the counting points is sent. (2) If a power outage occurs while the counting button is on, and the power is restored afterwards with the counting button still pressed, the total points are not subtracted.

<Configuration 5> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a certain period of time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification command including the counting score is sent. (2) If the counting button is pressed during the wait (minimum time between plays timer value > 0), the reels start spinning, and if the counting button is kept pressed, the stop button cannot be operated. In addition, the total score is not subtracted.

<Configuration 6> During the aforementioned freeze at the start of rotation or freeze at the stop, the settlement process based on the operation of the counting button may be made executable, or the settlement process based on the operation of the counting button may not be made executable. In addition, during the aforementioned freeze at the start of rotation or freeze at the stop, the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button may be made executable, or the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button may not be made executable.

<Configuration 7-1> It may be configured so that score settlement can be performed when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred). By configuring in this way, the player or manager can execute score settlement at any time, regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not. <Configuration 7-2> It may be configured so that score settlement is not performed when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent situations that are disadvantageous to the gaming facility by configuring so that score settlement is not executed even if the front door DU is open and fraud has been committed inside the gaming machine.

<Configuration 8-1> If the front door DU is opened (a door open error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), the system may be configured to continue to settle the scores. By configuring the system in this way, the player or administrator can settle the scores at any time, regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not.

<Configuration 8-2> If the front door DU is opened (a door open error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), the system may be configured so that score settlement is not executed. By configuring in this way, even if the front door DU is opened and fraud is committed inside the gaming machine, the score settlement is not executed, thereby preventing situations that are detrimental to the gaming facility.

<Configuration 9-1> If a power outage occurs while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), and then the power is turned on again with the counting button still on (the counting button is pressed and held), the cumulative count points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the cumulative count points and other information related to the settlement after the power is turned on. <Configuration 9-2> If a power outage occurs while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), and then the counting button is turned off (the counting button is not operated), and then the power is turned on again, the cumulative count points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the cumulative count points and other information related to the settlement after the power is turned on.

<Configuration 10> The device may be configured so that settlement is not performed even if the counting button is operated (pressed) while the power is off, and the power is turned on while the counting button is still pressed (pressed and held). In other words, when settlement is performed based on the counting button, the device may be configured so that settlement is performed by detecting the counting button changing from OFF to ON and then keeping it ON for a predetermined period of time or more (detecting a long press).

<<Configuration related to door opening error>> In addition, the configuration related to the door opening error in this example may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1> Even when the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred), the gaming machine may be configured to be able to transmit and receive signals sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) and information sent from the outside (rented machine) and received by the gaming machine. More specifically, the gaming machine may be configured to be able to transmit or receive gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, loan notifications, and loan receipt result responses even when the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred).

<Configuration 2> In the case of an unrecoverable error (for example, an error that occurs when the checksum after power is turned on is abnormal), the above-mentioned gaming machine may be configured not to send or receive signals to be sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) and information sent from the outside (rented machine) and received by the gaming machine. More specifically, the gaming machine may be configured not to send or receive gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, loan notifications, and loan receipt result responses when the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred).

In this example, as described above, the interval for transmitting HC/fraud monitoring information from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) is set to 300 ms. In other words, the interval for transmitting gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) is set to 300 ms. Also, as described above in FIG. 35, when the reel is rotated, the reel acceleration process is executed, and then the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, in other words, the reel acceleration state is shifted to the reel constant speed state. As described above, one rotation (one lap) of the reel is 336 steps, and the execution interval of the interrupt process is about 2.23 ms.
In the constant reel speed state, one interrupt process rotates one step, so the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the constant reel speed state is 2.23 x 336 ≈ 749 ms. In this way, in this example, the gaming machine information notification can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) at least twice in the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the constant reel speed state. By configuring in this way, even if the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise or the like, the gaming machine information notification can be transmitted from the gaming machine at least one more time within the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the constant reel speed state, so that the information transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be more accurate. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 35, the average reel rotation speed in the reel acceleration state is slower than the average reel rotation speed in the reel constant speed state, and therefore the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution from the start of reel rotation, going from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, is longer than the 749 ms required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state described above. Therefore, even if the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise or the like during the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution from the start of reel rotation, going from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, it is possible to send at least one more gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine within the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state, and therefore the information sent to the outside of the gaming machine can be made more accurate.

<Establishment of normal lending> In the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this example, (1) it may be determined that normal lending has been established when the gaming machine transmits information including a normality as a loan receipt result response to the lending machine side, or (2) it may be configured to determine that normal lending has been established when the lending machine normally receives a loan receipt result response from the gaming machine side.

<Achievement of normal counting> In the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this example, (1) the gaming machine transmits information to the lending machine side as a counting notification, including a counting point of 1 or more, and determines that normal counting has been achieved when a lending notification is normally received from the lending machine side; (2) the lending machine may be configured to receive information from the gaming machine side as a counting notification, including a counting point of 1 or more, and determine that normal counting has been achieved when a lending notification is normally received from the gaming machine side.

(Example of modification from the 13th embodiment) In the 13th embodiment described above, the configuration of a medal-less reel type gaming machine that does not use gaming medals was described in detail. The configuration of the medal-less reel type gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of the 13th embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a medal-less reel type gaming machine that can be applied to this example will be described in detail below as an example of modification from the 13th embodiment. Note that any of the configurations described above may be applied as a configuration that does not affect whether gaming medals are used or not, and it may be combined with the configuration of the 13th embodiment described above. Note that a medal-less reel type gaming machine is a reel type gaming machine that does not use gaming medals (including physical medals and metal pieces for detection by a sensor) and uses points.

In the following, what is referred to as a "game machine" may be replaced with a "main control board" or a "payout control board." Furthermore, what is referred to as a "lending machine" may be replaced with a "SC board."

The main control board may be configured to execute one or more of the error determination process and the error display process in the second ROM/RAM area. Specifically, the error determination process may be executed by a program stored in the second ROM, and the error display may be executed by a program stored in the first ROM. The dispensing control board may also be provided with areas equivalent to the first ROM/RAM area and the second ROM/RAM area, and one or more of the error determination process and the error display process may be executed in the second ROM/RAM area of the dispensing control board. Specifically, the error determination process may be executed by a program stored in the second ROM, and the error display may be executed by a program stored in the first ROM.

A counting LED display may be provided near or inside the counting button, and when the counting button operation is valid (score settlement process can be executed), the counting LED display may display that the counting button operation is valid (for example, displaying "settlement possible"). Also, the LED lamp may be turned on and off to notify that the counting button operation is valid. When configured in this way, the counting process (sometimes referred to as settlement process) may be executed when the counting button operation is accepted while the counting button operation is valid, or the counting process (settlement process) may be executed when a long press of the counting button is accepted while the counting button operation is valid.

<Configuration 1 for counting process> In a state where three points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process (sometimes called settlement process) can be executed (a state where the operation of the counting button is valid), if the operation of the counting button is not accepted immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet points are counted, but the points stored in the total score display device may not be counted. More specifically, if the operation of the counting button is not accepted immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet number of three points is counted, and the counting process ends with the total score remaining at 30 points. Note that in a situation where the number of bets is 0 and the total score is 30 points, if the operation of the counting button is not accepted immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the total score of 30 points may be counted.

<Configuration 2 for counting process> When 3 points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process can be executed (counting button operation is valid), if the counting button operation is accepted and then immediately no longer accepted (for example, "off -> on for 10 ms -> off"), only a portion of the betted points may be counted, and the points stored in the total score display device may not be counted. More specifically, if the counting button operation is accepted and then immediately no longer accepted (for example, "off -> on for 0.1 seconds -> off"), the number of bets becomes 2 points, 1 point is counted, and the counting process ends with the total score remaining at 30 points.

<Configuration 3 for counting process> When 3 points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process can be executed (counting button operation is valid), if the counting button operation is accepted and then immediately no longer accepted (for example, "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet points and the points stored in the total score display device may be counted. More specifically, if the counting button operation is accepted and then immediately no longer accepted (for example, "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet number of 3 points and the total score of 30 points are counted, for a total of 33 points, and the counting process ends.

<Configuration 4 for counting process> When 3 points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process is executable (counting button operation is valid), if the counting button operation is accepted, the counting process is executed in stages in the order of "number of bets → total score", and the counting process ends when the counting button operation is no longer accepted. Specifically, it may be configured to work as follows: "Counting button off → counting button on → number of bets 3, total score 30 → number of bets 2, total score 30 → number of bets 1, total score 30 → number of bets 0, total score 30 → number of bets 0, total score 29 → ... → number of bets 0, total score 20 → counting button off → counting process completed."

The main control board may be configured to transmit gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information to the payout control board.

It may be configured to transmit counting notifications, gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, HC/fraud monitoring information, and loan receipt results from the payout control board to the loan machine side.

<Applicable errors> The medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this example may also be configured to act in response to the following errors:

<Serial communication error> If a framing error (an error in which the stop bit was not present where it should be at the timing when the stop bit should be received) or an overrun error (an error in which the next data is taken in before the CPU has read the data taken into the receive buffer, causing the previous received data to be lost) occurs, it may be determined to be a serial communication error, and (1) the gaming machine may add 1 to the counter value of serial communication error counter A and store it, or (2) the lending machine may add 1 to the counter value of serial communication error counter B and store it.

<Checksum error> If the checksum included in each command is abnormal, it is determined to be a checksum error, and (1) the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of checksum abnormality counter A and stores the result, or (2) the lending machine adds 1 to the counter value of checksum abnormality counter B and stores the result.

<Command sequence error> If an unexpected command is received (such as if the order of commands is incorrect), the system may be configured to determine that a command sequence error has occurred. In that case, the gaming machine may be configured to discard the loan notification received from the lending machine. For example, if a loan notification is received without sending a counting notification after sending a gaming machine information notification, the loan notification is discarded. Also, the lending machine may be configured to determine that the command is valid when a gaming machine information notification is received, and to discard the command when a command other than a gaming machine information notification is received.

<Command timeout error> If a command is not received within a specified time, it may be determined to be a command timeout error. If the gaming machine does not receive a loan notification within 170 ms after sending a counting notification, it may be configured to determine that a command timeout error has occurred, increment the counter value of the loan notification reception abnormality counter by 1, invalidate the counting notification that was sent, and resend the gaming machine information notification. Also, if the lending machine does not receive a command from the gaming machine for a period of 300 ms or more, it may be configured to determine that a command timeout error has occurred, and increment the counter value of the command timeout counter by 1 (only incrementing the counter value, and no other processing related to the error is performed).

<Serial number abnormality in gaming machine information notification> If the received serial number is not consecutive with the serial number received last time, the lending machine may be configured to increment the counter value of the serial number abnormality counter by 1. Note that this only increments the counter value, and the command transmission/reception process is executed in the same way as if the command was received normally.

<Counting serial number abnormality> If the received counting serial number is not consecutive with the previously received counting serial number, the rental machine may be configured to increment the counting serial number abnormality counter by one. Note that the machine only increments the counter value, and executes the command transmission/reception process in the same way as if the command had been received normally.

<Rental serial number abnormality> On the rental machine side, if the rental serial number in the received rental receipt result response is not consecutive with the previously received rental serial number, the rental serial number abnormality counter may be configured to increment the counter value by 1. Note that the machine only increments the counter value, and executes the command transmission/reception process in the same way as if the command was received normally.

<Lending receipt result response> When the lending machine receives information including an abnormality as a lending receipt result response, it may be configured to determine that the lending has not been established and to increment the lending abnormality counter by 1. Even in this case, it may be configured not to perform subtraction processing on the lendable points (sometimes called lending machine points) or the player's remaining balance stored.

In addition, for the above-mentioned serial communication error, checksum error, command sequence error, command timeout error, gaming machine information notification serial number abnormality, counting serial number abnormality, loan serial number abnormality, and loan receipt result response, a display device such as a performance display device may be configured to display the occurrence of an abnormality and a counter value related to the abnormality. By configuring in this way, it is possible to know how many errors have occurred at the end of a day during the development stage of the gaming machine or at the end of a day's business at the gaming center. Also, even if it is not displayed on a performance display device, by storing the information in RAM on the main control board (by storing the information in an area of RAM that is not erased by changing the settings), the number of times corresponding to each abnormality can be known based on the number of these counters when the gaming machine is collected.

<<Communication between gaming machine and SC board>> The gaming machine may be configured to transmit the main control chip ID number and payout control chip ID number as gaming machine installation information to the SC board, and in such a case, the ID number generation method may be configured as follows.

As an example of how to generate a main control chip ID number, the CPU's individual chip number is read in ascending order, the upper 4 bytes of the number are filled with 0, and an identification code (a code that identifies the type of chip) is added to the lower byte to make a 9-byte number. As a specific example, if the individual chip number is 0x12345678, the upper 4 bytes are filled with 0: 0x00000000 4 bytes: individual chip number: 0x12345678 1 byte: identification code: 0x22.

As an example of how to generate a payout control chip ID number, the chip individual number of the CPU is read in ascending order, the upper 4 bytes of the number are filled with 0, and an identification code (a code that identifies the type of chip) is added to the lower byte to make a 9-byte number. As a specific example, if the chip individual number is 0x87654321, the upper 4 bytes are filled with 0: 0x000000004 bytes: chip individual number: 0x876543211 byte: identification code: 0x11.

Next, FIG. 168 shows an example of when HC and fraud monitoring information is set as gaming information in gaming machine information notification. The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the SC board.

The HC/fraud monitoring information transmits the total score, score input signal (IN), score payout signal (OUT), main control status 1, main control status 2, gaming machine error status, fraud detection status 1 (main control), fraud detection status 2 (payout control), fraud detection status 3 (payout control), and game information count. More specifically, it is configured as follows. The total score is the current total score, and is 3 bytes of data that ranges from 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00. The score input signal (IN) is the number of bets, and is 1 byte of data that ranges from 0x01 to 0x03 (1 to 3 points). The number of bets is determined when the reel rotation device is activated (when the start lever is operated), and the number of bets is stored in a specified area of the RAM. Note that when information including the determined number of bets is transmitted from the gaming machine to the SC board, it is desirable to clear the number of bets stored in a specified area of the RAM (to prevent multiple transmissions). The score payout signal (OUT) is the payout points, and is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0x0F (1 to 15 points). The payout points are determined after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), and the payout points are stored in a specific area of the RAM. When the determined payout points are transmitted from the gaming machine to the SC board, it is desirable to clear the payout points stored in the specific area of the RAM (to prevent multiple transmissions). The main control state 1 is a state related to the game state, and is 1 byte of data. Specifically, it is configured as follows: Bit 0: RBBit 1: BBBit 2: ATBit 3: Game state signal 1Bit 4: Game state signal 2Bit 5: Game state signal 3Bit 6: Game state signal 4Bit 7: Unused. The main control state 2 is a state related to the game state, and is 1 byte of data. Specifically, it is configured as follows: Bit 0: Replay in operation Bit 1: Gadget in operation Bit 2: Continuous gadget in operation Bit 3: Indication function in operation Bit 4: Gadget continuous operation device in operation Bit 5: Unused Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused. The gaming machine error state is 1 byte of data, and Bits 0 to 5: Error code (000000 (B) = no error, Bit 6: 0 = payout control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = notification only, 1 = notification + HC output. Note that if Bits 0 to 7 are 0, no error has occurred. Fraud detection state 1 (main control) is a state related to an error in the main control board, and is 1 byte of data. Specifically, Bit 0: Security signal Bit 1: Setting change signal Bit 2: Setting confirmation signal Bit 3: RAM abnormality Bit 4: Reel rotation device abnormality Bit 5: Unused B Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused. Note that the security signal, RAM abnormality, reel rotation device abnormality, etc. are the same as those in the fraud detection state 1 described above, and a specific example of a security signal is a signal that becomes "1" when it is determined that the front door is open, or when it is determined that the setting key switch is on (including not only when the settings are being changed or confirmed, but also when the setting key switch is on during play (while the reels are spinning), etc. As described above, a RAM abnormality is an error (an unrecoverable error) that occurs when the checksum after power is turned on is abnormal. An abnormality in the reel rotation device is an error that is determined to be abnormal when the reel sensor does not detect the index on the reel within a specified period of time under circumstances where the reel is supposed to reach a constant speed (the reel drive state is in a constant speed state).Fraud detection state 2 (payout control) is a state related to an error in the payout control board, and is 1 byte of data.Specifically,Bit 0: Door open signalBit 1: Setting door openBit 2: Total score clear detectionBit 3: RAM abnormalityBit 4: Lending signal abnormalityBit 5: Overflow abnormalityBit 6: UnusedBit 7: Unused The total score clear detection indicates that the total score clear has been detected, with 0 being normal (no detection of the total score clear based on the operation of the total score clear switch), and 1 being detection of the total score clear based on the operation of the total score clear switch. The total score clear switch also has the function of clearing the memory area that stores the points (or points and number of bets) of the gaming machine when the total score clear switch is operated (satisfying a certain condition including the operation of the total score clear switch). The points are sometimes referred to as the total score. The fraud detection state 3 (payout control) is a state related to an error in the payout control board, and is 1 byte of data. Specifically, it is configured as follows: Bit 0: Unused Bit 1: Unused Bit 2: Unused Bit 3: Unused Bit 4: Unused Bit 5: Unused Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused. The number of game information is 1 byte of data, and is the number (n) of type information and count information, and n is fixed to 0.

As mentioned above, in this example, the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) is configured to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine every 300 ms, and is configured to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine by the HC/fraud monitoring information transmitted immediately after each score insertion (IN) or score payout (OUT). In this example, when a replay role is won and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed to execute an automatic bet (when an automatic bet of 3 points is executed), information of 3 points is transmitted as a score payout signal (OUT), and information of 3 points is transmitted as a score insertion signal (IN) during the subsequent reel rotation. In addition, even when 3 points are inserted, information of 1 point may be configured to be transmitted in three commands as the score insertion signal (IN), and even when 3 points are paid out, information of 1 point may be configured to be transmitted in three commands as the score payment signal (OUT). In this way, by configuring the game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) to transmit IN/OUT information at any time, even in the event of a power outage, the generated IN/OUT information can be accumulated and stored on the machine side.

In addition, the information on IN/OUT may be configured to be transmitted (including) by means of other than gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information). For example, the information on IN/OUT may be transmitted (including) as gaming machine performance information, which is a signal transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine at a cycle of 180 seconds after the gaming machine has been started up. More specifically, when a replay role is won and an automatic bet is executed when the replay-related symbol combination stops, OUT = 0 points, and IN = 0 points when the reels are rotated thereafter, the IN/OUT is accumulated and calculated from the time the power is turned on, and the calculation result is transmitted every three minutes. In addition, if a power outage occurs, the accumulated IN/OUT information is cleared (the RAM area related to the IN information and the RAM area related to the OUT information are cleared) when the power is turned on thereafter, and the accumulated IN/OUT information is calculated again from 0. By configuring in this way, the IN/OUT for one day at the gaming facility can be easily output to the outside of the gaming machine. The accumulated IN (cumulative IN) may be referred to as the total insertion score, and the accumulated OUT (cumulative OUT) may be referred to as the total payout score. In addition, even in the above-mentioned MY in one business day (a value obtained by subtracting the smallest difference in the number of coins for the player from the largest difference in the number of coins for the player from when the power is turned on again until it is turned off) in the case of a power outage, the RAM area related to the MY in one business day may be cleared (the RAM area related to the information required to calculate the MY is cleared) when the power is turned on afterwards. In this way, with regard to the information accumulated and stored as information for one business day, in the case of a power outage, the RAM area corresponding to the accumulated and stored information may be cleared after the power is turned on afterwards. In addition, the ball payout rate for one business day, the role ratio for one business day, and the consecutive role ratio for one business day may be stored as information accumulated and stored in the case of a power outage. With regard to the information, in the case of a power outage, the RAM area corresponding to the information may be cleared after the power is turned on. On the other hand, the information required to calculate the items to be displayed on the performance display device, such as the cumulative number of payouts during operation of the first type special device, may be configured not to be cleared even if a power outage occurs (the RAM related to the information is not cleared) (it may also be configured not to be cleared by changing the settings when the power is turned off and then turned on again and returned to normal (when no RAM abnormality or the like has occurred)).

The loan receipt result response command sent from the payout control board to the SC board may include a condition where the loan point receipt result is 0x01: abnormal when the gaming machine is executing a settlement process (counting). In other words, when the payout control board sends a loan receipt result response command to the SC board while the gaming machine is executing a settlement process, the loan point receipt result may be configured to be 0x01: abnormal.

When the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off and then on, the gaming machine enters a state of being started up during a first period, and after the startup of the gaming machine is complete, a gaming machine information notification with serial number 0 is sent to the SC board. Also, when the power supply of the SC board is turned off and then on, the SC enters a state of being started up during a second period, and after the startup of the SC board is complete, the gaming machine is waiting to be connected.

<When the gaming machine completes its startup first> After the startup of the gaming machine is completed, a gaming machine information notification with serial number 0 is sent to the SC board, but if the startup of the SC board is not completed, the SC board cannot receive commands from the gaming machine, such as gaming machine information notifications. Even in such a case, the gaming machine continues to send various commands to the SC board at a predetermined timing (the serial number also increments from 0, 1, 2, etc.), and after the startup of the SC board is completed, the SC board starts receiving commands from the gaming machine. Also, once the startup of the SC board is completed, the game can proceed and the operation of the counting button is also enabled.

<If the SC board finishes starting up first> If the SC board finishes starting up but the gaming machine does not, the SC board will wait for the gaming machine to connect and will be able to receive commands such as gaming machine information notifications from the gaming machine.

<<Regarding the priority order of gaming machine information notifications>> As described above in the 13th embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transmit gaming machine information notifications to the SC board, and is configured to transmit one of the following gaming machine information types: gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information. The HC/fraud monitoring information includes HC/fraud monitoring information that includes gaming information (gaming information that has been updated) and HC/fraud monitoring information that does not include gaming information. The transmission conditions (transmission timing) for gaming machine information notifications that include these are configured as follows: (1) HC/fraud monitoring information including game information: transmitted at 300 ms intervals after the game machine is started up (2) Game machine installation information: transmitted at 60 sec intervals after the game machine is started up (3) Game machine performance information: transmitted at 180 sec intervals after the game machine is started up (4) HC/fraud monitoring information not including game information: transmitted at 300 ms intervals after the game machine is started up In this way, since one of the commands is transmitted every 300 ms, 60 sec, or 180 sec, there are cases where the transmission timing of multiple commands overlaps at one timing. In order to solve such a situation, a priority order may be set. More specifically, the priority order may be "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including game information → (2) Game machine installation information → (3) Game machine performance information → (4) HC/fraud monitoring information not including game information" from the highest priority order, and if the transmission timing overlaps, only the command with the highest priority may be transmitted from the game machine to the SC board as a game machine information notification.

Examples of game information include information that one of the left, center, and right reels has been operated, information regarding the position at which one of the left, center, and right reels has been operated, information regarding the stopping position of one of the left, center, and right reels, information regarding whether the display result of the stopped pattern combination is normal, and the like, or information that combines multiple of these.

In this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured not to include gaming information. In such a configuration, there will be three types of gaming machine information notifications: (1) gaming machine installation information: transmitted at intervals of 60 seconds after the gaming machine is started up; (2) gaming machine performance information: transmitted at intervals of 180 seconds after the gaming machine is started up; and (3) HC/fraud monitoring information: transmitted at intervals of 300 ms after the gaming machine is started up. The order of priority is as follows, from highest to lowest: "(1) gaming machine installation information → (2) gaming machine performance information → (3) HC/fraud monitoring information."

If the transmission timings overlap, the command with the lower priority will be sent if the next transmission timing does not overlap with the transmission timing of the command with the higher priority. The next transmission timing is the timing with the shortest period, which is 300 ms later in this example.

As a specific example, if the transmission timing (timing A) of "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" and "(2) gaming machine installation information" overlap, then "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" will be transmitted at that timing A, and if "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is not transmitted 300 ms later (timing B), then "(2) gaming machine installation information" will be transmitted. If "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is also transmitted at timing B, then if "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is not transmitted 300 ms later (timing C) after timing B, then "(2) gaming machine installation information" will be transmitted.

In the specific example described above, if "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted at timing C, the next transmission of "(2) gaming machine installation information" may be 60 seconds after timing A (configuration 1), or 60 seconds after timing C (configuration 2). Note that even if the transmission timing overlaps with the transmission timing of "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information," which has a higher priority, "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" will be transmitted.

When configuration 1 is adopted, in which "(2) Gaming Machine Installation Information" is transmitted 60 seconds after the aforementioned timing A, it may be configured to store the fact that it is time to transmit the gaming machine installation information at timing A (triggered by the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information) in a specified memory area of the main control board or a specified memory area of the payout control board. By using configuration 1, it is possible to simplify processing. More specifically, it is configured to transmit commands at specified time intervals under normal circumstances, and even if an irregular event occurs, the next command can be transmitted at the same timing as under normal circumstances, making it difficult to deviate from the specified time interval.

In addition, when configuration 2 is adopted, in which "(2) Gaming machine installation information" is transmitted 60 seconds after timing C, it may be configured to store the fact that it is the timing to transmit gaming machine installation information at timing C (based on the actual transmission of the gaming machine installation information) in a specified memory area of the main control board or a specified memory area of the payout control board. By using configuration 2, commands are transmitted at specified time intervals under normal circumstances, and if an irregular event occurs, commands can be output at an appropriate interval according to the situation when the command was actually output thereafter.

<A: Flow 1 for counting notification command and lending notification command> Next, in FIG. 169, the flow for counting notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification including the information of total score = 50, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms passes while the counting button is kept on, and 50 is subtracted from the display of the total score display device, changing from 50 to 0 (the subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the total score based on the operation of the counting button may be referred to as settlement or execution of the settlement process). After that, the lending button is operated at a specified timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is operated (still on and settlement is being executed), the lending of the score is not executed. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification including information on counting points=50 and counting cumulative points=50, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 0. The timing of subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. The timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned off and then on, in other words, the timing of detecting the long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the counting notification, or the timing of receiving the lending notification. In addition, the subtraction of the display of the total score when the score is settled may be configured to be performed in stages. For example, even if the display of the total score becomes 50→0, the total score may be subtracted by a predetermined number at each predetermined time, such as "50→49→48...→1→0" or "50→45→40...→5→0". If the timing for subtracting the stored total score and/or the display of the total score display device is set to the timing for receiving the loan notification, the likelihood that the gaming machine has received the loan notification, i.e., that the loan notification is sent after the loan machine has normally received the counting notification, is relatively high, so the score stored or displayed on the total score display device can be configured to be subtracted after it is confirmed that counting is possible.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0, which will be the loan serial number p, is sent from the loan machine to the gaming machine (because the loan button was not valid). Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan points receipt result is normal, which will be the loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the loan machine, and the total score remains 0 points (the total score display device also remains 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers, or they may be the same number. Thus, in this configuration, even if the loan button is operated, if the loan of points is not executed, the loan points included in the loan notification will be 0, and the loan receipt result response is configured to output information indicating that it is normal.

Then, the counting button remains on and the lending button is operated again (off → on → off). In this case, the counting button remains operated (remains on), but since there are no points to settle (total points are 0), the lending button is enabled and lending of points is executed. Then, at a timing when more than 20 ms has passed since the previous lending receipt result response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1. Then, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, which includes information on counting points = 0 and counting cumulative points = 50, which results in counting serial number m+1.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 50 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score changes from 0 to 50 (the total score display device also displays 50).

<B: Flow 1 for counting notification command and lending notification command> Next, in FIG. 169, the flow for counting notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification including information on the total score = 50, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms passes while the counting button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and becomes 50 → 0 (the display of the total score display device and the subtraction of the total score based on the operation of the counting button are sometimes referred to as settlement, settlement processing being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is operated (still on and settlement is being executed), the lending of the score is not executed. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification including the counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and counting cumulative points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 0. The timing of subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the counting notification, or the timing of receiving the lending notification.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0, which will be the loan serial number p, is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine (because the loan button was not valid). Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan points receipt result is normal, which will be the loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains 0 points (the total score display device also remains 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers, or they may be the same number. Thus, in this configuration, even if the loan button is operated, if the loan of points is not executed, the loan points included in the loan notification will be 0, and the loan receipt result response is configured to output information indicating that it is normal.

In addition, the same figure may be configured to have one or more of the following configurations: (1) If the reels stop as a result of the operation of the stop button being accepted, and the operation of the lending button is accepted while the operation of the stop button is continuing, lending can be executed (counting may also be executed). (2) If the operation of the stop button is accepted while the operation of the stop button is not valid, the reels do not stop, and the operation of the lending button is continuing, lending can be executed (counting may also be executed). (3) While a game is in progress (for example, when all reels are spinning at a constant speed), the setting key switch is turned from off to on, and the operation of the setting key switch transitions to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. (4) When the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON during gameplay (for example, when all reels are spinning at a constant speed) and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has not been entered by operating the setting key switch, lending is not possible when the lending button is operated. (5) When the lending button is operated during setting confirmation mode, lending is not possible (counting may be possible or not possible). (6) When the lending button is operated during setting change mode, lending is not possible (counting may be possible or not possible). The above configurations may be used. The above configurations may also be applied to all of the configurations in Figures 169 to 171.

Then, the counting button remains on and the lending button is operated again (off → on → off). In this case, there are no points to settle (total points are 0), but since the counting button remains operated (remains on), the lending button is disabled and the lending of points is not executed. Then, at a timing when more than 20 ms has passed since the previous lending receipt result response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1. Then, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, which includes information on counting points = 0 and counting cumulative points = 50, which results in counting serial number m+1.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 0 (the total score display device also displays 0).

When configured as in FIG. 169, the gaming machine may be configured as follows. (1) The gaming machine can output a counting notification when it is time to output the counting notification. (2) When the settlement process is not executed, the gaming machine can output a counting notification including 0 as the counting points. (3) When the settlement process is executed, the gaming machine can output a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting points. (4) When there are points (total points), the gaming machine can output a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting points based on the operation of the counting button. (5) When a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting points is output and a lending notification including a value other than 0 as the lending points is received, the lending of the points is not performed and the lending points are not added to the total points. (6) When a counting notification including 0 as the counting points is output and a lending notification including a value other than 0 as the lending points is received, the lending of the points is performed and the lending points are added to the total points. By configuring in this way, even if the counting button is pressed and held, if there are no points to be settled, the lending of the points can be performed. If you want to perform the settlement process again, you will need to turn off the counting button and then press and hold it again.

<C: Flow 2 for counting notification command and lending notification command> Next, in FIG. 170, the flow for counting notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification including the information of total score = 50, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms passes while the counting button is kept on, and 50 is subtracted from the display of the total score display device, changing from 50 to 0 (the subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the total score based on the operation of the counting button may be referred to as settlement or execution of the settlement process). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is operated (still on and settlement is being executed), the lending of the score is not executed. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and cumulative counting points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 0. The timing of the subtraction of the display on the total score display device and the timing of the subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing when a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing of sending the counting notification, or the timing of receiving the lending notification.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which will be loan serial number p, is sent from the loan machine to the gaming machine (the loan button is not valid). Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, which will be loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the loan machine, and the total score remains 0 points (the total score display device also remains 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers, or they may be the same number. Thus, in this configuration, if the loan button is operated and the loan of points is not executed, the loan points included in the loan notification will be 50, and the loan receipt result response is configured to output information indicating that there is an abnormality.

Then, the counting button remains on and the lending button is operated again (off → on → off). In this case, the counting button remains operated (remains on), but since there are no points to settle (total points are 0), the lending button is enabled and lending of points is executed. Then, at a timing when more than 20 ms has passed since the previous lending receipt result response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1. Then, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, which includes information on counting points = 0 and counting cumulative points = 50, which results in counting serial number m+1.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 50 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score changes from 0 to 50 (the total score display device also displays 50).

<D: Flow 2 for counting notification command and lending notification command> Next, in FIG. 170, the flow for counting notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification including the information of total score = 50, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms passes while the counting button is kept on, and 50 is subtracted from the display of the total score display device, changing from 50 to 0 (the subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the total score based on the operation of the counting button is sometimes referred to as settlement, settlement processing being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a specified timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is operated (it remains on and settlement is being executed), the lending of the score is not executed. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and cumulative counting points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 0. The timing of the subtraction of the display on the total score display device and the timing of the subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing when a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing of sending the counting notification, or the timing of receiving the lending notification.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which will be loan serial number p, is sent from the loan machine to the gaming machine (the loan button is not valid). Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, which will be loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the loan machine, and the total score remains 0 points (the total score display device also remains 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers, or they may be the same number. Thus, in this configuration, if the loan button is operated and the loan of points is not executed, the loan points included in the loan notification will be 50, and the loan receipt result response is configured to output information indicating that there is an abnormality.

Then, the counting button remains on and the lending button is operated again (off → on → off). In this case, there are no points to settle (total points are 0), but since the counting button remains operated (remains on), the lending button is disabled and the lending of points is not executed. Then, at a timing when more than 20 ms has passed since the previous lending receipt result response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1. Then, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, which includes information on counting points = 0 and counting cumulative points = 50, which results in counting serial number m+1.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 0 (the total score display device also displays 0).

<E: Flow 3 for counting notification command and lending notification command> Next, in FIG. 171, the flow for counting notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification including information on the total score = 50, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, about 20 ms passes while the counting button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and becomes 50 → 0 (the display of the total score display device and the subtraction of the total score based on the operation of the counting button are sometimes referred to as being settled, settlement processing being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is operated (still on and settlement is being executed), the lending of the score is not executed. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification including the counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and counting cumulative points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 0. The timing of subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the counting notification, or the timing of receiving the lending notification.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 50, which becomes the loan serial number p, is sent from the loaner side to the gaming machine side (the loan button is not valid). Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan points receipt result is normal, which becomes the loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine side to the loaner side, and the total score changes from 0 to 50 points (the display on the total score display device also changes from 0 to 50 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or the same numerical values. In this way, in this configuration, even if the settlement process is being performed by operating the counting button, it is configured so that points can be loaned by operating the loan button. In this case, the total score displayed on the total score display device may be configured so that after the settlement process is executed and the total score changes from 50 to 0, the points related to the loan are added to make the total score change from 0 to 50, or the points may be added based on the receipt of a loan notification even while the settlement process is in progress (for example, subtractions and additions are performed, such as "50 → 49 → ... → 30 → 31 → 30", so that the total score finally becomes 50).

The counted cumulative points included in the counting notification in this example may be cleared by turning the power off and then on. In other words, the total number of points counted from when the power was turned on until now may be configured to be the counted cumulative points. In other words, even if the settlement process has been performed once (when the settlement process ends with the total points being 100 → 50, or when the settlement process ends with the total points being 500 → 450 → 400 → 350), the counted cumulative points will be carried over to the next settlement process. In other words, even if a player ends the game by performing the settlement process, the accumulated value will be sent for the value settled by the previous player through the settlement process. In this way, it becomes possible for the gaming machine side and the rental machine side to mutually monitor the cumulative number of points settled during one business day. The total number of points counted by one long press of the count button may be configured to become the accumulated count points, and when the settlement process is executed once, the accumulated count points become 50 → 100 → 150 → 200, and when the counting is ended, the accumulated count points become 0.

<When communication between the gaming machine and the SC board is interrupted> Next, FIG. 172 illustrates an example of the action when communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine (which may be the SC board) is interrupted (for example, when the communication line is broken). First, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, and a gaming machine information notification with serial number n is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side. Then, a counting notification with counting serial number m is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side. Then, a lending notification with lending serial number p is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Then, a lending receipt result response with lending serial number p, including information that the lending point receipt result is normal, is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Then, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+1 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

After that, communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine is cut off (for example, the communication line is broken), gameplay stops on the gaming machine, and operation of the counting button becomes invalid. Gameplay stops means that no new games are played, and for example, operation of the start lever becomes invalid, betting operations become invalid, etc. Also, if communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine is cut off while the counting button is on, operation of the counting button becomes invalid, and settlement is not performed. Furthermore, the lending machine is also unable to communicate with the gaming machine. As a specific example, the lending button becomes invalid.

After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m+1 is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but the lending machine cannot accept it. Because the counting button is disabled, the counting points will be 0 regardless of whether the counting button is operated or not. After that, a gaming machine information notification with counting serial number n+2 is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but the lending machine cannot accept it. After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m+2 is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but the lending machine cannot accept it.

After that, communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine is restored, game play can proceed on the gaming machine side, and operation of the counting button becomes valid. After that, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+3 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m+3 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Since the counting button has not been operated, the counting points are 0.

After that, a loan notification is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine, but since communication was interrupted, the loan serial number is 0. Thus, in this example, after communication is restored, a loan notification with loan serial number 0 is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. In this case, the gaming machine stores p, which is the normal loan serial number previously received from the lending machine, and also stores information that the next loan serial number should be p+1. In other words, it stores both the loan serial number received from the lending machine and the information obtained by adding 1 to the loan serial number received from the lending machine (the gaming machine (main control board or payout control board) has a separate memory area in the RAM area for storing each loan serial number). In this configuration, when the gaming machine receives information from the lending machine that is different from the information obtained by adding 1 to the loan serial number, it is configured to send information to the lending machine that the loan point reception result is abnormal and the loan serial number previously received normally from the lending machine.

Returning to the explanation of the diagram, because a loan notification with loan serial number 0 was received when p+1 should have been received as the loan serial number, the gaming machine sends a loan receipt result response to the lending machine, including information that the loan serial number is p and that the loan point receipt result is abnormal.

Then, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+4 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. Then, a counting notification with counting serial number m+4 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. Then, a lending notification with lending serial number p+1 is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. In this way, since the lending machine has received p as the lending serial number included in the lending receipt result response received from the gaming machine last time, it determines that p is the correct number as the previous lending serial number, and is configured to send a lending notification to the gaming machine with p+1, which is p plus 1, as the next lending serial number. Then, the gaming machine sends a lending receipt result response to the lending machine, which includes information that the lending serial number is p+1 and that the lending point receipt result is normal.

<When a communication error occurs during settlement> Next, FIG. 173 illustrates an example of the action when a communication error occurs between the gaming machine and the lending machine (which may be an SC board) during settlement processing. First, the operation of the counting button is accepted (for example, the counting button is pressed and held). After that, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, the lending machine score (lendable score) of the lending machine is 100 points, and a gaming machine information notification with serial number n is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m, counting score of 50 points, and accumulated counting score of 50 points is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 950 points, and the lending machine score stored in the lending machine is 150 points. After that, a lending notification with lending serial number p is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. After that, a loan receipt result response with loan serial number p, which includes information that the loan point receipt result is normal, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine.

After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m+1, counting points of 50 points, and counting cumulative points of 100 points is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. The total points stored in the gaming machine become 900 points, but the lending machine points stored in the lending machine remain at 150 points. After that, 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+2 is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. Here, the lending machine detects that a communication error has occurred, and within 300 ms, communication with the gaming machine becomes impossible, and the gaming machine also disables the counting button and stops playing. After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m+2, counting points of 0 points, and counting cumulative points of 100 points is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. In this way, in the counting notification output from the gaming machine after play has stopped, the counting serial number is updated (incremented), but the count points become 0. The rental machine then goes into a state of waiting for recovery from the error, and communication with the gaming machine is not possible until recovery from the error.

<When a communication error occurs during lending> Next, FIG. 174 illustrates an example of the action when a communication error occurs between the gaming machine and the lending machine (which may be an SC board) during the execution of the lending process. First, the operation of the lending button is accepted (for example, the lending button is turned off → on → off). After that, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, and a gaming machine information notification with serial number n is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, a lending notification with lending serial number p and a lending score of 50 points is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. After that, a lending receipt result response with lending serial number p, including information that the lending score receipt result is normal, is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 1050 points. Because the lending machine does not receive a loan receipt result response from the gaming machine, it determines that the loan is incomplete (or does not determine that the loan is complete).

After that, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, the communication error is resolved, and the rental machine receives the gaming machine information notification.

After that, a counting notification with counting serial number m+1 is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, a lending notification with lending serial number p and lending points of 50 is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. Since the lending machine has not received a lending receipt result response and is uncertain as to whether the previous lending notification has been received, it resends a lending notification with the same lending serial number as the previous time. After that, a lending receipt result response with lending serial number p, including information that the lending point receipt result is abnormal, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. Since the lending serial number is not consecutive with the lending notification received last time (not p+1), the gaming machine sends a lending receipt result response indicating that the lending point receipt result is abnormal. Since the lending notification sent last time and the received lending serial number match, the lending machine completes the lending (determines that the lending is completed).

Then, a gaming machine information notification with serial number n+2 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine.

<<Configuration of serial number update process>> Figure 175 shows the configuration of serial number update process applicable to this example. In this figure, it is a process for updating the serial number used when sending a specified command from a gaming machine (e.g., a payout control board) to a dispensing machine (e.g., an SC board). The specified command is, for example, a serial number used when sending gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information as a gaming machine information notification command. Note that in both cases of pattern 1 and pattern 2 described below, the maximum value of the serial number counter is 255, and it is configured so that adding 1 when the counter value is 255 sets the counter value to 0.

<Pattern 1> First, pattern 1 will be described in detail. When the serial number update process is executed, first, in step 5001, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter. Next, in step 5003, the gaming machine determines whether the serial number counter value has become 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5003, in step 5005, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter and proceeds to step 5007. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5003, the gaming machine proceeds to step 5007 without executing the process of step 5005. Next, in step 5007, the gaming machine stores the current serial number counter value and proceeds to the next process.

<Pattern 2> Next, pattern 2 will be described in detail. When the serial number update process is executed, first, in step 5002, the gaming machine determines whether the serial number counter value is the maximum value (255 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 5002, in step 5004, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter and proceeds to step 5006. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5002, the gaming machine proceeds to step 5006 without executing the process of step 5004. Next, in step 5006, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter. Next, in step 5008, the gaming machine stores the current serial number counter value and proceeds to the next process.

<Example of modification regarding communication between gaming machine and rental machine> In the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the configuration regarding communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1> The rental notification sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine may be configured to include, in addition to the rental serial number and rental points, a counting point reception result, which is information regarding whether the previously received counting notification is normal or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to send and receive information regarding whether the reception result is normal or not in both the rental notification and the counting notification without increasing the number of commands sent and received between the gaming machine and the rental machine, thereby reducing the data volume (reducing the number of times commands are sent and received) while reducing problems related to sending and receiving commands.

Furthermore, when configured in this way, the gaming machine may be configured to determine that counting has been completed when it receives information indicating that the counting points received are normal, and to subtract the counting points (the counting points sent by the gaming machine) from the total score display device at the time of receipt (subtract it from the total score stored in the total score display device and/or subtract it from the total score displayed on the total score display device). Furthermore, the lending machine may be configured to determine that counting has been completed when it transmits information indicating that the counting points received are normal, and to add the counting points (the counting points received from the gaming machine) to the lendable points (sometimes referred to as lending machine points).

Furthermore, when configured as in configuration 1 above, it may be configured to operate as follows: (1) The lending machine receives a counting notification from the gaming machine → The lending machine transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine, including information that the counting points received are normal → Immediately after the transmission, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The gaming machine receives a lending notification from the lending machine, including information that the counting points received are normal, and stores it in a specified memory area → The gaming machine detects a power outage and begins executing processing when the power is turned off → The gaming machine ends execution of processing when the power is turned off (2) The lending machine receives a counting notification from the gaming machine → The lending machine transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine, including information that the counting points received are normal → Immediately after the transmission, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The gaming machine detects the power outage and begins executing power-off processing → The gaming machine receives a loan notification from the lending machine side including information that the counted points received as a result are normal and stores it in a specified memory area → The gaming machine finishes executing power-off processingAs described above, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off immediately after the lending machine sends a loan notification to the gaming machine side including information that the counted points received as a result are normal, the gaming machine may be configured to receive a loan notification from the lending machine side including information that the counted points received as a result are normal and store it in a specified memory area by the time execution of the power-off processing is finished. In this example, in the processing when the power is cut off on the gaming machine side, various notifications from the lending machine side can be received from the time when the gaming machine detects a power cut until control by the gaming machine's CPU (the CPU of the main control board or the CPU of the payout control board) becomes impossible (a reset signal is sent to the CPU), or from the time when the gaming machine detects a power cut until the gaming machine is unable to store various notifications from the lending machine side in its memory area, but new notifications may not be sent to the lending machine side during this period. It should be noted that this configuration is applicable to all configurations in this example.

<Configuration 2> The rental notification sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine may be configured to include the counting serial number of the counting notification received by the rental machine in addition to the rental serial number and rental points. By configuring in this way, it is possible to check whether the counting notification was sent normally by comparing the counting serial number sent by the gaming machine with the counting serial number received thereafter, so that information on whether the receipt results were normal for both the rental notification and the counting notification can be sent and received without increasing the number of commands sent and received between the gaming machine and the rental machine, and problems related to sending and receiving commands can be reduced while reducing data volume (reducing the number of times commands are sent and received).

<Configuration 3> The gaming machine may be configured as follows. (1) The gaming machine is capable of outputting a counting notification when it is time to output the counting notification. (2) When the settlement process is not executed, the gaming machine is capable of outputting a counting notification including 0 as the counting points. (3) When the settlement process is executed, the gaming machine is capable of outputting a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting points. (4) When there are points (total points), the gaming machine is capable of outputting a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting points based on the operation of the counting button. (5) After the counting notification including 0 as the counting points is output, if a loan notification including a value other than 0 as the loan points is received, a loan point receipt result indicating that the points are normal can be output. (6) After the counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting points is output, if a loan notification including a value other than 0 as the loan points is received, a loan point receipt result indicating that the points are abnormal can be output. By configuring as described above, it is possible to perform processing smoothly by eliminating the situation in which points are loaned out during counting, resulting in a mixture of increases and decreases in the points.

<Configuration 4> When the lending machine determines that the counting notification received from the gaming machine is abnormal (for example, when the checksum is abnormal or the serial numbers are not consecutive), the lending machine may be configured not to send a lending notification. By configuring in this way, if the gaming machine does not receive a lending notification after sending a counting notification, it can know that there was an abnormality in the transmission and reception of the counting notification that was sent.

<Configuration of the counting button and the return button> In this example, the counting button and the return button may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1> When 1 point has been bet and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (the operation of the counting button is accepted), the system may be configured so that 51 points, which is the sum of the 1 point bet and the total score of 50 points, is settled. Note that "settled" means that the points are transferred to the rental machine.

<Configuration 2> When 1 point has been bet and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (the operation of the counting button is accepted), only the total score of 50 points is settled and the 1 point bet is not settled. In such a configuration, the 1 point bet may be transferred to the total score by operating the return button. Also, in such a configuration, when 1 point has been bet and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (the operation of the counting button is accepted), only the total score of 50 points is settled, the 1 point bet is not settled, and a voice saying "Points have been bet" is output (this may be output by the main control board, the payout control board, or the sub-control board). Also, when no points have been bet and the total points are 50, if the counting button is operated (the operation of the counting button is accepted), the total points of 50 are settled and a voice message stating "settled" is output (this may be output by the main control board, the payout control board, or the sub-control board). In other words, the voice message after settlement may be different depending on whether or not points have been bet. The volume of the voice message stating "points have been bet" and the voice message stating "settled" may be different.

<Counting button configuration> In the case where a symbol combination that causes a payout of points when stopped stops, such as when a small win occurs and the symbol combination related to the small win (e.g., a bell symbol) stops and displays to pay out 10 points, when a counting button operation is accepted (e.g., an operation related to the settlement process is executed, such as accepting a long press), (1) the score settlement process (or settlement display) is executed after the payout of points (or payout display) is completed, (2) the settlement process (settlement display) is executed at the time the counting button operation is accepted, or (3) the settlement process is not executed. Also, when the settlement process is executed, it may be configured to include the 10 points related to the bell in the settlement, or to execute the settlement process without including the 10 points related to the bell.

In addition, when a replay role is won, the symbol combination related to the replay stops, and an automatic bet is being executed, if the operation of the counting button is accepted (for example, an operation related to the settlement process is executed, such as accepting a long press), (1) the score settlement process (or settlement display) is executed after the automatic bet ends, (2) the settlement process (settlement display) is executed at the timing when the operation of the counting button is accepted, or (3) the settlement process is not executed. In addition, if the settlement process is executed, the number of bets automatically placed is maintained, and the total score is settled.

As mentioned above, in this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured not to include gaming information. In such a configuration, there will be three types of gaming machine information notifications: (1) gaming machine installation information: transmitted at 60-second intervals after the gaming machine is started up; (2) gaming machine performance information: transmitted at 180-second intervals after the gaming machine is started up; and (3) HC/fraud monitoring information: transmitted at 300-ms intervals after the gaming machine is started up. The order of priority is as follows, from highest to lowest: (1) gaming machine installation information → (2) gaming machine performance information → (3) HC/fraud monitoring information.

When configured in this way, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control process, which is the process related to gaming machine information notification that can be applied to this example, is described in detail in Figures 176 and 177.

<Configuration 1 of gaming information notification control process> First, in FIG. 176, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control process applicable to this example will be described in detail. The process in FIG. 176 is executed as an interrupt process in the main control board. First, in step 6002, the gaming machine judges whether the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification has been reached. In this example, the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification is configured to be reached every 300 ms. More specifically, as the gaming machine information notification, three types of information, HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, are configured to be generated and transmitted, and as for the generation and transmission timing, as described above, the HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted every 300 ms, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every 60 seconds (60,000 ms), and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every 180 seconds (180,000 ms), so that the gaming machine information notification generation timing is 300 ms, which is the shortest period, of the transmission period of the HC/fraud monitoring information. In addition, the transmission period of the gaming machine installation information and the transmission period of the gaming machine performance information are multiples of the period of the HC/fraud monitoring information, which is the shortest period (multiples of the gaming machine information notification generation period).By configuring it in this manner, it is only necessary to determine which gaming machine information notification to generate and transmit every 300 ms, which is the shortest period, thereby simplifying the processing related to the gaming machine information notification.

Furthermore, in this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information is sent every 300 ms, the gaming machine installation information is sent every 60 seconds (60,000 ms), and the gaming machine performance information is sent every 180 seconds (180,000 ms). In other words, the transmission period of the gaming machine installation information is 200 times the transmission period of the HC/fraud monitoring information, and the transmission period of the gaming machine performance information is 600 times the transmission period of the HC/fraud monitoring information. In this way, by providing multiple types of gaming machine information notifications and configuring the time values of all the transmission periods of the gaming machine information notifications to be integer multiples of the time value with the shortest transmission period among the gaming machine information notifications, it is possible to configure the system so that an appropriate gaming machine information notification can be sent by determining whether to send the subsequent gaming machine information notification every 300 ms, which is the time value with the shortest transmission period among the gaming machine information notifications, and the data capacity required for the program can be reduced. In addition, since gaming machine information notifications can be output to the outside of the gaming machine at a fixed cycle of 300 ms, the rental machine can receive commands from the gaming machine at 300 ms intervals, and can recognize the possibility of a communication abnormality if it is unable to receive a command.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 6002, then in step 6004 the gaming machine generates HC and fraud monitoring information. Next, in step 6006, the gaming machine determines whether or not the timing for generating gaming machine installation information has arrived. If the answer is Yes in step 6006, then in step 6008, the gaming machine discards the HC and fraud monitoring information generated in step 6002. Next, in step 6010, the gaming machine generates gaming machine installation information. Next, in step 6012, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine installation information and moves to the next process. In this way, since gaming machine installation information has the highest priority as a gaming machine information notification, when the timing for transmitting the gaming machine installation information arrives, the gaming machine is configured to discard the HC and fraud monitoring information and transmit the gaming machine installation information.

Also, if the answer is No in step 6006, then in step 6014 the gaming machine determines whether or not the timing for generating gaming machine performance information has arrived. If the answer is Yes in step 6014, then in step 6016 the gaming machine discards the HC and fraud monitoring information generated in step 6002. Next, in step 6018 the gaming machine generates gaming machine performance information. Next, in step 6020 the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine performance information and proceeds to the next process. In this way, since gaming machine performance information has the second highest priority after gaming machine installation information as a gaming machine information notification, when it is time to transmit the gaming machine performance information rather than the gaming machine installation information, the HC and fraud monitoring information is discarded and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted.

Also, if the answer is No in step 6014, then in step 6022 the gaming machine determines whether there is any delayed gaming machine performance information. If the answer is Yes in step 6006, which is the timing for transmitting the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, so the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is delayed and the information is transmitted after the timing for transmitting the next gaming machine information notification (300 ms later). If the answer is Yes in step 6022, then in step 6024 the gaming machine discards the HC/fraud monitoring information generated in step 6002 and proceeds to the next process. Note that if the answer is No in step 6022, then the process proceeds to step 6016. If the answer is No in step 6002, then the process proceeds to the next process.

In this way, in the figure, HC/fraud monitoring information is generated every 300 ms, and if the timing of sending a command with a higher priority than the HC/fraud monitoring information occurs, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded. In other words, HC/fraud monitoring information is generated every time a gaming machine information notification is sent, and if it cannot be sent (if a gaming machine information notification with a higher priority is to be sent), the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded. It may also be configured to generate gaming machine performance information as well, and discard it if it is not sent. The operation when configured in this way may be configured as follows.

<Action 1> (1) In a situation where a door open error has occurred as a specified error (door open error), it is time to send HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (or gaming machine installation information), so HC/fraud monitoring information including information that a door open error has occurred is generated, but since the gaming machine performance information is sent, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded. (2) 100 ms later, the door open error is resolved. (3) 300 ms after the timing of (1), it is time to send the HC/fraud monitoring information that could not be sent in (1), so new HC/fraud monitoring information (not including information that a door open error has occurred) is generated and sent. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output information that matches the latest situation.

As a modified example of FIG. 176, for any of the HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information, when the transmission timing (the timing when it should be transmitted) arrives, information is generated, and if the information cannot be transmitted because information with a higher priority than the generated information is to be transmitted, the information that could not be transmitted is stored rather than discarded, and transmitted at the next possible transmission timing (every 300 ms). The operation when configured in this way may be configured as follows.

<Effect 2> (1) In a situation where a door opening error occurs as a specified error, the timing for transmitting HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (or gaming machine installation information) has come, so HC/fraud monitoring information including information that a door opening error has occurred is generated, but since the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is stored. (2) 100 ms later, the door opening error is resolved. (3) At a timing 300 ms after the timing of (1), the HC/fraud monitoring information including information that a door opening error has occurred stored in (1) is transmitted. In addition, at the timing of (3), it is not necessary to generate new HC/fraud monitoring information, or new information may be generated. If new information is generated, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be stored or discarded. By configuring in this way, even if it is not possible to transmit information at the timing when it should be transmitted (for example, when it is not possible to transmit information due to transmission of information with a high priority), it is possible to transmit information according to the situation at the timing when it should be transmitted at the actual transmission timing, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the content of the information differs due to a delay in the transmission timing.

<Configuration 2 of gaming information notification control processing> Next, in FIG. 177, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control processing applicable to this example is described in detail. Note that the processing in this figure is processing executed as an interrupt processing in the main control board. First, in step 6026, the gaming machine determines whether or not the timing for generating a gaming machine information notification has been reached. In this example, similar to FIG. 176, the timing for generating a gaming machine information notification is configured to reach 300 ms. If the answer is Yes in step 6026, in step 6028, the gaming machine determines whether or not the timing for generating gaming machine installation information has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6028, in step 6030, the gaming machine determines whether or not the timing for generating gaming machine performance information has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6030, then in step 6032, since the timing for transmitting gaming machine installation information has a higher priority than gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine turns on a performance information delay flag (a flag that causes gaming machine performance information to be transmitted at the timing for transmitting a gaming machine information notification after the flag is turned on) and proceeds to step 6034. If the answer is No in step 6030, then proceeds to step 6034 without executing step 6032.

Next, in step 6034, the gaming machine generates gaming machine installation information. Next, in step 6036, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine installation information and proceeds to the next process.

Also, if the answer is No in step 6028, then in step 6038 the gaming machine determines whether or not the timing for generating gaming machine performance information has arrived. If the answer is Yes in step 6038, then in step 6040 the gaming machine generates gaming machine performance information. Next, in step 6042, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine performance information and proceeds to the next process.

Also, if the answer is No in step 6038, then in step 6044 the gaming machine determines whether the performance information delay flag is off. If the answer is No in step 6044, then in step 6046 the performance information delay flag is turned off and the process proceeds to step 6040. That is, the delayed gaming machine performance information is generated and transmitted. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 6046, then in step 6048 the gaming machine generates HC/fraud monitoring information. Next, in step 6049 the gaming machine sets the HC/fraud monitoring information and proceeds to the next process.

In this way, in the figure, it is configured to determine every 300 ms whether HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information should be transmitted, and to generate and transmit a gaming machine information notification based on the result of the determination. When configured in this way, the operation may be configured as follows.

<Effect 3> (1) When a door open error occurs as a specified error, it is time to send HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (or gaming machine installation information), so sending the gaming machine performance information is prioritized and HC/fraud monitoring information including information that a door open error has occurred is not generated. (2) 100 ms later, the door open error is resolved. (3) 300 ms after the timing of (1), it is time to send the HC/fraud monitoring information that could not be sent in (1), so new HC/fraud monitoring information (not including information that a door open error has occurred) is generated and sent. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output information that matches the latest situation.

The medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this example may be configured with one or more of the following active low: (1) Sensor that detects door opening (2) Sensor that detects operation of the stop button (3) Sensor that detects operation of the start switch (4) Sensor that detects operation of the count button (5) Sensor that detects operation of the return button In this way, by configuring one or more sensors with active low, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is highly resistant to noise.

<Combination of configurations related to this example> As described above, a gaming machine having a configuration related to this example to a configuration related to the thirteenth example has been described. The configurations from this example to the thirteenth example can be combined as appropriate, and below is a list of examples of a gaming machine that combines configurations from this example to the thirteenth example.

<Combined configuration 1> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> in <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process using insertion sensor>>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing at which push order navigation begins on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to have the blocker D100 pay out the medals to the release port D240) will not be completed in time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that can prevent the medals from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine, even though the credit addition process has not been performed.

<Combined configuration 2> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example with the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he looks at, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance compared to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that hits the collision section bounces back up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combined configuration 3> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, and the configuration related to <<<<<Drive control of medal payout device of fifth embodiment>>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which, for example, there is a delay in starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40, causing the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he looks at. This allows a player receiving a payout of game medals to receive the game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the specified number when a specified number of game medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 4> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> in <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related processing when the command and channel are one-to-one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which, for example, there is a delay in starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40, causing the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. It is also possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output has not ended.

<Combined configuration 5> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process using insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment and the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment: Medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the medal to the release port D240) will not be completed in time, and even though the credit addition process has not been performed, it is possible to prevent the medal from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the medal, making it possible to prevent a situation in which the first medal that hits the collision section bounces back to the medal receiving port D341.

<Combined configuration 6> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment and the configuration related to <<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed. However, if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the game medals to the discharge port D240) will not be completed in time, and it is possible to prevent game medals from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed. This allows a player receiving a payout of game medals to receive the first to the specified number of game medals at equal intervals when a specified number of game medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause a player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 7> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: An example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement processing when the relationship between command and channel is one to one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed. However, if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the medal at the release port D240) will not be executed in time, and it is possible to prevent the medal from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed. In addition, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being performed, the player will be able to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the audio output has not ended, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 8> For example, a gaming machine may be configured by combining the configuration relating to the <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment and the configuration relating to the <<<<Fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring it in this manner, for example, the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that strikes the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allowing the player receiving the payout of gaming medals to receive the first to the specified number of gaming medals at equal intervals when a specified number of gaming medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 9> For example, a gaming machine may be configured by combining the configuration relating to <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment with the configuration relating to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related processing when the command and the channel are one-to-one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring it in this manner, for example, the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that strikes the collision area from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341. In the event that communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can be assured that the audio output has not ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that no problems have occurred with the gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 10> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration relating to <<<<<Fifth embodiment: Drive control of the medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment with the configuration relating to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related processing when the relationship between the command and the channel is one to one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, a player receiving the payout of game medals can receive the game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number, so the player does not feel uncomfortable, and if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred with the game machine because the audio output does not end, making it possible to provide a user-friendly game machine.

<Combined configuration 11> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment, and the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment: medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing at which push order navigation is started on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, and the player is unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and using the blocker D100 to pay back the game medal to the release port D240) is not executed in time, preventing the game medal from entering (being swallowed) into the game machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the game medal, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first game medal that hits the collision section bounces back up to the medal receiving port D341.

<Combined configuration 12> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of displaying push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment: medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the configuration related to <<<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the game medal to the release port D240) will be delayed. This prevents game medals from entering (being swallowed) into the game machine even when the medal does not match the diameter and the credit addition process is not being executed, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is a sufficient distance compared to the diameter of the game medal, making it possible to prevent the first game medal that hits the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allowing the player receiving the game medals to receive the game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the specified number when a specified number of game medals are paid out, thereby providing a user-friendly game machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 13> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment: Medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment, the configuration related to <<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment, and the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related process when the command and channel are one-to-one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which, for example, the timing at which push order navigation begins on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the game medal to the release port D240) will not be completed in time, and the game medal will enter the gaming machine (be swallowed) even though the credit addition process has not been performed. ) and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the medal, making it possible to prevent the first medal that strikes the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341; when a predetermined number of medals are paid out, the player receiving the medals can receive medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number, so the player does not feel uncomfortable; and when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while processing involving audio output is being performed, the player can recognize that no problem is occurring in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 14> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process using insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), so that, for example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, the push order navigation can be executed by lighting the lamp (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., and it is less likely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation, and the first input sensor D2 When the second insertion sensor D30s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the gaming medals at the discharge port D240) will not be completed in time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that can prevent gaming medals from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed.

<Combined configuration 15> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example and the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), so that even in gaming machines that are not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, push order navigation can be performed using the lighting of the lamps (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., making it less likely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that hits the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combined configuration 16> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> of this example and the configuration related to <<<<<Drive control of medal payout device of fifth embodiment>>>>> of the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), so that even in gaming machines that are not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, push order navigation can be performed using the lighting of the lamps (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., and it is less likely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation, and when a player receives a payout of game medals, they can receive game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, so a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause a player to feel uncomfortable can be provided.

<Combined configuration 17> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> in <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related processing when the command and channel are one-to-one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), so that even in gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, push order navigation can be performed using the lighting of the lamps (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., making it less likely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation, and even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the audio output will not end, allowing the player to recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 18> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of the <<<Third embodiment: An example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 can be made different, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the burden on the player can be reduced by being able to view the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs.When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and using the blocker D100 to pay out the game medals to the release port D240) cannot be completed in time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that prevents game medals from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed.

<Combined configuration 19> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration relating to the <<Configuration relating to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration relating to the <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 ends can be made different from the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 ends, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the burden on the player can be reduced by allowing the player to view the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that hits the collision area from bouncing back up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combined configuration 20> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to the <<<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of the medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 ends can be made different from the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 ends, thereby avoiding the situation where the player must simultaneously view two display devices. This reduces the burden on the player, as the player can view the end of the push order navigation on each display device when the push order navigation occurs, and a player receiving a payout of game medals can receive game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the specified number when a specified number of game medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 21> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of processing related to settlement, when the relationship between the command and the channel is one to one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 ends can be made different from the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 ends, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, reducing the burden on the player by allowing the player to view the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs, and providing a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the player to recognize that no problems have occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end in the event that communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed.

<Combined configuration 22> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player operates the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even if the reel is being pressed to stop that reel, so it is less likely that the player will suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the push order. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified coin insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to have the blocker D100 pay out the coins to the release port D240) will not be completed in time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that can prevent coins from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed.

<Combined configuration 23> For example, a gaming machine may be configured by combining the configuration relating to the <<reel control and push order navigation configuration>> in this example with the configuration relating to the <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player can operate the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even when the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even when that reel is being pressed to stop that reel, making it less likely that the player will suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to pressing the wrong order, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that hits the collision section from bouncing back up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combined configuration 24> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<reel control and push order navigation configuration>> in this example with the configuration related to the <<<<5th embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player can operate the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even when the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even when that reel is being pressed to stop that reel, making it less likely that the player will suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to pressing the wrong order, and when a player receives a payout of game medals, they can receive the first medal at the same intervals from the first medal to the specified number when a specified number of medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 25> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: When the processing command and channel are one-to-one when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of the settlement-related process>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player can operate the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even when the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even when that reel is being pressed to stop that reel, making it less likely that the player will suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to pressing the wrong order, and even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the audio output does not end, allowing the player to recognize that no problems have occurred with the gaming machine, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

The above describes an example of a gaming machine that combines the configuration of this example with the configuration of the sixth embodiment, but this is just one example, and the configuration of this example and the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be combined as appropriate.

(Summary) Based on the configurations shown in the above examples, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and it is possible to combine or separate (superordinately conceptualize) these listed concepts, and to add concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples to these concepts.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1) has a strip-shaped reel tape (e.g., a reel strip MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (e.g., a reel frame MW), the reel tape has a plurality of types of symbols arranged along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, the types of symbols include at least a first symbol (e.g., a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (e.g., a bell symbol), the maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol, the second symbol is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on either of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than the outer periphery of the surface of the reel base around which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is a reel type gaming machine including: a gaming machine main body; a front door (e.g., front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable; and a reel unit (e.g., reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body, wherein the inside of the gaming machine main body is provided with: a base portion (e.g., base portion BU) on which the reel unit is installed; a main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the base portion and in which gaming media are stored; and an auxiliary tank member (e.g., medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for evacuating excess gaming media stored in the main tank member; a slope portion (e.g., inclined surface H64) descending from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided in a portion of the main tank member; the reel unit and the base portion are detachably held by a locking part (e.g., screw BS); This gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is located vertically below the locking part that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is a reel type gaming machine including a gaming machine main body, a front door (e.g., front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable, and a reel unit (e.g., reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body, in which the gaming machine main body is provided with a base part (e.g., base part BU) on which the reel unit is installed, a main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the base part and storing gaming media, and an auxiliary tank member (e.g., medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for evacuating excess gaming media stored in the main tank member, the reel unit and the base part are detachably held by a locking part (e.g., screw BS), and the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking part that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (4) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., reel M50); a plurality of stop switches (e.g., stop button D40); a performance display unit capable of displaying performances (e.g., performance display device S40); and an operation member capable of changing the display content of the performances (e.g., sub-input button SB, cross key SB2); after the plurality of reels are spun by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and one game can be ended by a final stop switch operation being performed, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel among the plurality of reels that will be last to stop spinning, and all of the plurality of reels are stopped; when the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time has elapsed without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, a specific image (e.g., a standby screen) can be displayed on the performance display unit; and when a predetermined operation member (e.g., sub-input button SB) is operated after one game has ended, a predetermined image (e.g., a menu screen) can be displayed on the performance display unit; When the specified operating member is operated to display the specified image, if a second specified time period has elapsed while the specified image is still displayed from a specific timing after the specified operating member is operated, the specified image can be displayed on the performance display unit, and the gaming machine is configured so that the second specified time period is longer than the first specified time period.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., reel M50); a plurality of stop switches (e.g., stop button D40); a performance display unit capable of displaying performances (e.g., performance display device S40); and an operating member capable of changing the display content of the performances (e.g., sub-input button SB, cross key SB2); after the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch; a final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel among the plurality of reels that is to be stopped last, is performed to stop all of the plurality of reels, thereby completing one game; when the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time has elapsed without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, the performance display unit is configured to be able to display a specific image (e.g., a standby screen); and when a predetermined operating member (e.g., sub-input button SB) is operated after one game has ended, a predetermined image (e.g., a menu screen) can be displayed on the performance display unit; a display unit configured to display the specific image when the specific operation member is operated and the specific image is displayed, if a second specific time has elapsed with the specific image being displayed from a specific timing after the specific operation member is operated; the second specific time is configured to be longer than the first specific time; a display unit configured to display the specific image when the specific operation member is operated and the specific image is displayed, if a specific operation member (e.g., cross key SB2) is operated before the second specific time has elapsed with the specific image being displayed from a specific timing after the specific operation member is operated, the specific image is not displayed on the display unit even if the second specific time has elapsed with the specific image being displayed from a specific timing after the specific operation member is operated; whereas a display unit configured to display the specific image when the final stop switch is operated, if the stop switch is newly operated before the first specific time has elapsed with no bet being placed from the specific timing after the final stop switch is operated, if the first specific time has elapsed with no bet being placed from the specific timing after the final stop switch is operated; This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the final stop switch operation is performed, if a bet is placed before the first predetermined time has elapsed without a bet being placed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, the specific image is not displayed on the performance display unit even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) comprises a main gaming section (e.g., a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, and a setting switch (e.g., a setting key switch) that is electrically connected to the main gaming section and is operated to transition to a setting change mode (e.g., a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed, the main gaming section is configured to be capable of executing an interrupt process which is a process executed at predetermined time intervals, and is configured to transition to the setting change mode when a power outage occurs in a predetermined gaming state other than the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where no power is being supplied to the gaming machine, power is supplied to the gaming machine, a power outage occurs after transition to the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned off and power is supplied to the gaming machine, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to transition to the setting change mode if a power outage occurs in a specified gaming state other than the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on under a situation in which power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a power outage occurs before the specified time has elapsed since the start of the power supply, and power is supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) on which a plurality of different patterns are provided; stop switches (e.g., left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by the player to stop the rotation of the reels; storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming media within a predetermined number; a main gaming section (e.g., main control board M) that controls the progress of the game; a speaker (e.g., speaker S20) that outputs sound effects; and a sub-gaming section (e.g., sub-control board S) that controls the output of effects. The main gaming section comprises: role selection means that executes role selection; and reel control means that, when the stop switch is operated, controls the stop of the reels to correspond to the role selection result by the role selection means. The game device is capable of executing a stored number increase process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means and a payout process for executing a payout of game media, and is configured to be able to award game media to a player when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed as stopped by the reel control means, and is configured to not execute the stored number increase process and execute a payout process when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as stopped and a specific number of game media is awarded when the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number minus the specific number, and is configured to execute the stored number increase process and not execute a payout process when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as stopped and a specific number of game media is awarded when the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number minus the specific number, when the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number but is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, a payout process is executed after a stored number increase process is executed; the main game unit is configured to be capable of transmitting game medium award information to the sub game unit after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the sub game unit is configured to be capable of outputting a game medium award sound, which is a performance sound related to the awarding of game media, from a speaker based on receiving the game medium award information; when the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, and the sub game unit is capable of outputting a predetermined game medium award sound (for example, a game medium award sound output when a credit is increased by one, a game medium award sound output when one game medal is paid out) based on receiving the game medium award information; When the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, the predetermined game media awarding sound can be outputted based on the reception of the game media awarding information; when the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, the predetermined game media awarding sound can be outputted based on the reception of the game media awarding information; This gaming machine is characterized in that the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to when it becomes A+1 during the execution of the stored number increase process is different from the time value from the start of execution of the payout process for the M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N-1)) game medium to the start of execution of the payout process for the M+1 game medium during the execution of the payout process to pay out N (N is a natural number, 2≦N) game media.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) comprises a main gaming section (e.g., main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, a sub-gaming section (e.g., sub-control board S) that controls the presentation, a gaming lamp (e.g., a lamp unit) that can be lit when the presentation is executed, and a setting value display section (e.g., a setting display LED) that can display a setting value, and the gaming lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (e.g., element 6 in FIG. 77), and the lighting pattern is composed of a combination of a plurality of lighting modes (e.g., element 5 in FIG. 77), and the lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (e.g., element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (e.g., element 4 in FIG. 77), and the lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (e.g., element 2 in FIG. 77) and an extinguishing time (e.g., element 3 in FIG. 77), and the gaming machine has a plurality of lighting colors, a plurality of lighting times, and a plurality of extinguishing times, The lighting patterns include at least a first lighting pattern that can be implemented when a specified abnormality occurs, a second lighting pattern that can be implemented when a set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when a specified abnormality does not occur and a set value is not displayed on the set value display unit, the first lighting pattern is configured to include a specified lighting mode, the second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the specified lighting mode, the second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode, and the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) comprises: a storage means capable of electrically storing gaming media within a predetermined range (for example, in this example, gaming medals can be electrically stored as credits within the gaming machine); a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting gaming media stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming media to be bet; a predetermined lamp (for example, a 3 bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a predetermined number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet; a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid; and a role determination means capable of determining a winning role, and is configured to be able to determine a replay role as the winning role determined by the role determination means; and is configured to light up the specific lamp when the predetermined gaming state is reached, a replay role has not been won in the game executed immediately before, the sum of the gaming media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the number of bets is less than the predetermined number, This gaming machine is characterized in that when the number of bets reaches the specified number while the specific lamp is lit, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine of this aspect (10) comprises a main gaming section (e.g., a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-game section (e.g., a sub-control board S) that controls the presentation, and is configured so that the time from when power starts to be supplied to the gaming machine until the program of the main gaming section starts is longer than the time from when a power outage occurs until the supply of power to the gaming machine ends, and the time from when power starts to be supplied to the gaming machine until the program of the main gaming section starts is longer than the time from when power starts to be supplied to the gaming machine until the program of the sub-game section starts.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, and in a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, and in a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the player with a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after the power is restored, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, and a power-off process based on the detection of a power outage is executed, resulting in a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination being displayed, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, and a power-off process based on the detection of a power outage is executed, resulting in a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination being displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of different patterns, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is capable of executing a freeze to slow down the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined pattern combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a pattern corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination stopped, and after the predetermined pattern combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination is awarded to the player, In the predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reels being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a predetermined game after the internal lottery means has determined a specific result; and is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (e.g., freeze at the start of a bonus) in a predetermined game after the internal lottery means has determined a specific result and symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the reel control means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (e.g., freeze at the start of a bonus) in a predetermined game after the internal lottery means has determined a specific result and the reels are stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, In a specified game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation thereafter, the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the specified freeze can be executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reels being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined game state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be awarded to the player; In the game in the specified game state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specified timing, the reel corresponding to the final stop operation experiences a specified rotation failure and a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed without inserting game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of a specific result being determined differs from that of the first drawing state, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and in a predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reel being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means; a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; This is a gaming machine that is characterized in that, in a game that is executed when the first lottery state is in effect, and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation, a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transition to the second lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (e.g., a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on when a specific result is determined, the reel control means being configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means being configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reels being in a predetermined game state and in which a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped on each reel that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing thereafter as the player's final stop operation, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the internal lottery means has determined the specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a game in the specified game state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped thereon, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stopping operation at the specified timing, a specified rotation malfunction on the reel corresponding to the final stopping operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the specified lamp is configured to light up.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (e.g., replay lamp D290) that can be turned on when a specific result is determined, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power outage is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is in progress and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined game state and in which the internal lottery means has determined the specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specified timing, a power-off process is executed based on the detection of a power outage, causing a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the specified lamp is configured to light up after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) comprises N reels (N being a natural number of 3 or more) with multiple types of symbols (e.g., left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), a speaker (e.g., speaker S20) that outputs sound effects, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means that controls the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the specified game state and in which the specified result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the reels are subsequently stopped at the specified timing as the player's final stop operation and a symbol combination other than the specified symbol combination is displayed due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value corresponding to the specified symbol combination is awarded to the player; in a game executed in a specific game state, a speaker is configured to output a specified sound effect (for example, a ready sound) after the N-1th reel is stopped at a specific timing as the player's stop operation on the reels, and symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the stopped reels; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a game executed in the specific game state, even if the player performs a stop operation on the N-1th reel at the specific timing, a specific rotation failure occurs on the N-1th reel, and a pattern other than the pattern corresponding to the specific pattern combination is stopped on each of the stopped reels, and the speaker is configured to output a specific sound effect.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided; a storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined range; a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming values to be bet; a specific lamp (e.g., a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid; an internal lottery means; and a reel control means which controls the reels; and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation to display the predetermined symbol combination, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and even after the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation to display a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and after the player stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is not notified that it is active. The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specific result. In the game, the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and during a game in which the internal lottery means determines the specific result, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and after the player stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, and after the reels display a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a specified rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the specific lamp is not notified that it is active.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) having a plurality of types of symbols; storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined range; a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and which allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet; a specific lamp (e.g., a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid; an internal lottery means; and a reel control means which controls the reels; the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process when a power-off is detected; and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the internal lottery means is reached, even if each reel is stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power off process based on detection of a power off, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; The reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; The gaming machine is configured such that, in a game in which one or more gaming media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is reached, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by the player performing a stop operation at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, no notification is made that the specific lamps are active; and, in a game in which one or more gaming media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is reached, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, even if symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and after the player performs a stop operation at the specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on detection of a power off, no notification is made that the specific lamps are active after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided; a storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined range; a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming values to be bet; a specific lamp (e.g., a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid; an internal lottery means; and a reel control means which controls the reels; and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the reels are subsequently stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation to display the predetermined symbol combination, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and even after the reels are subsequently stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation to display a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and after the player stops the reels at a specified timing as the player's final stop operation to display the specified symbol combination, the specific lamp is activated.The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the reels store symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination, and after the player stops the reels at a specified timing as the player's final stop operation to display a symbol combination other than the specified symbol combination due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the specific lamp is activated.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided; a storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined range; a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming values to be bet; a specific lamp (e.g., a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid; an internal lottery means; and a reel control means which controls the reels; and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game in which a predetermined game state has been reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels that have been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and after the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in which a predetermined game state has been reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, even if symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on detection of a power off, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player stops the reels at a specified timing as the final stop operation thereafter to display the specified symbol combination, and then a notification is made that the specific lamp is active.The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the reels store symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination, and then a notification is made that the specific lamp is active after the power is restored, even if the player stops the reels at the specified timing as the final stop operation thereafter to display a symbol combination other than the specified symbol combination due to the execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of different patterns, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player as a gaming state, and is capable of executing a freeze to slow down the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined pattern combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a pattern corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination stopped, and after the predetermined pattern combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reels being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; when a termination condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (e.g., a freeze at the end of a bonus) can be executed; in a game newly executed in a situation in which the special game state is reached and the termination condition of the special game state is satisfied by awarding the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the predetermined role has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each of the reels, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is a game newly executed in a special gaming state in which the end condition of the special gaming state is satisfied by granting the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and in a game in which the predetermined role has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination to be displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) having a plurality of types of symbols provided thereon, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, the gaming machine has at least a special gaming state advantageous to a player as a gaming state, is capable of executing a freeze for delaying the progress of a game, and is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process when a power-off is detected, the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, the reels being in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means each have a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped on each reel that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power-off despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after the power is restored; when a termination condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (e.g., a freeze at the end of a bonus) can be executed; in a game in which the special game state is reached and a termination condition of the special game state is satisfied by granting a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the predetermined role has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a termination operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after the reels are stopped, and even if a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power-off This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a special gaming state, a game is newly executed in a situation in which the termination condition of the special gaming state is satisfied by awarding to the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and in a game in which the predetermined role has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as his/her final stop operation, a power-off process based on detection of a power outage causes a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination to be displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the predetermined freeze after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is configured to, in a predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, stop each reel by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation with a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, to award a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, In the game in the predetermined game state and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the reels are subsequently stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stopping operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stopping operation, the gaming machine is configured not to award the player the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is configured to, in a predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, stop a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, grant a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, In the game in the predetermined game state and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player then stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation, and the game machine is configured such that after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is not awarded to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is configured such that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the next game can be executed without the insertion of gaming value, In the game in the specified game state and in which the internal lottery means has determined a specified result different from the specific result, each of the reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and the reels are subsequently stopped at a specified timing as the player's final stopping operation, and after the specified symbol combination is displayed due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stopping operation, the gaming machine is configured such that the next game cannot be played unless gaming value is inserted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is configured such that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the next game can be executed without the insertion of gaming value, This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specified timing and a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the next game can be executed without inserting game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a special game transition state advantageous to the player as a game state, and is capable of executing a freeze to slow down the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is configured to be capable of entering the special game transition state from the time a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination has stopped, In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and after the player stops the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed; in a game in which a transition to a special game is not possible and the lottery result of the role selection means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and after the player stops the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation and the reel corresponding to the final stop operation has a predetermined rotation failure and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is capable of executing a freeze for slowing down the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined freeze (e.g., a freeze at the start of a bonus) after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined freeze can be executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of a specific result being determined differs from that of the first drawing state, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and is a game executed when the game is in the first drawing state, and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and is configured to be capable of transitioning to the second drawing state after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, This is a gaming machine that is characterized in that, in a game that is executed when the first lottery state is in effect, and in a game in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the reels are subsequently stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stopping operation, and after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stopping operation, the machine does not transition to the second role lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) having a plurality of types of symbols provided thereon, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, the gaming machine is capable of executing a freeze for delaying the progress of a game, and is configured to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, the gaming machine being in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In the predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power off despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; and is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (e.g., freeze at the start of a special game) after each of the reels is stopped in a predetermined game after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter and the specific symbol combination is displayed; This gaming machine is characterized in that during a specified game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a pattern corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped thereon, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at a specific timing, a power-off process based on detection of a power outage causes the specific symbol combination to not be displayed, so that the specified freeze can be executed after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined game state and in which the internal lottery means has determined the specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be awarded to the player after power is restored; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the game in the specified game state in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specific timing, a power-off process based on the detection of a power outage is executed, causing a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the next game can be played after the power is restored without inserting game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of determining a specific result differs from that of the first drawing state, and is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the player stops the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter to display the predetermined symbol combination, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the internal lottery means is reached, even if each reel stops by a stop operation other than the predetermined symbol combination at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; The game is executed when the game is in the first lottery state, and in the game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation, the game is configured to be able to transition to the second lottery state; The game is executed when the game is in the first lottery state, and in the game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the reels are stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation, and a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the game is configured to be able to transition to the second lottery state after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) comprises N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) with multiple types of symbols (e.g., left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), a speaker (e.g., speaker S20) that outputs sound effects, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means that controls the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power outage is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined pattern combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination stopped, and after the predetermined pattern combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the specified game state and in which the specified result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the specified symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage despite the player performing a stop operation at the specified timing as the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the specified symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; in a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the player's stop operation for the N-1th reel, and after symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the stopped reels, a specified sound effect (for example, a ready sound) can be output from a speaker; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a game executed in the specific game state, even if the player performs a stop operation on the N-1th reel at the specific timing, a power-off process is executed based on the detection of a power outage, causing each stopped reel to display a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to output the specified sound effect from the speaker after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of a specific result being determined differs from that of the first drawing state, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and is a game executed when the game is in the first drawing state, and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and is configured to be capable of transitioning to the second drawing state after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, This is a gaming machine that is characterized in that, in a game that is executed when the first lottery state is in effect, and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation, a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transition to the second lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is configured to enable a stop function when a predetermined condition is met, is configured to be capable of executing a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met while the stop function is enabled, and is configured to be capable of setting at least one specific condition candidate from among multiple types of specific condition candidates as the specific condition.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is:

The gaming machine is characterized in that: the stop function is enabled when a predetermined condition is satisfied; the stop function is enabled and a stop process for stopping the progress of a game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied when the stop function is enabled; at least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition; the specific condition candidate includes a number of game media acquired in a predetermined period being equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is characterized in that: the stop function is enabled when a predetermined condition is satisfied; the stop process for stopping the progress of a game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied when the stop function is enabled; at least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition; the specific condition candidate includes a number of game media acquired in a predetermined period being equal to or greater than a predetermined number; and in a situation where the specific condition is set to a number of game media acquired in a predetermined period being equal to or greater than a predetermined number, after a certain game is executed, the gaming machine is in a predetermined game state and the specific condition is satisfied, and the stop process is not executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is configured such that a stop function is enabled when a predetermined condition is met, and is configured to be capable of executing a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met while the stop function is enabled, and is configured such that a judgment process related to a predetermined error can be executed even when the stop process is executed to stop the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is configured to: enable a stop function when a specified condition A is satisfied; enable an automatic settlement function when a specified condition B is satisfied; be capable of executing a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition A is satisfied while the stop function is enabled; be capable of executing an automatic settlement process when a specific condition B is satisfied while the automatic settlement function is enabled; be capable of setting at least one specific condition A candidate from among a plurality of specific condition A candidates as the specific condition A; be capable of setting at least one specific condition B candidate from among a plurality of specific condition B candidates as the specific condition B; be capable of setting at least one specific condition A candidate and one specific condition B candidate that are the same; and be capable of setting different conditions between the specific condition A and the specific condition B.

There is a demand for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and there is a demand for establishing a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receiving information from outside the gaming machine (Patent Publication No. 2017-182215).

A gaming machine having the following configuration can transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and can establish a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receiving information from outside the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a storage means capable of storing a serial number, configured to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, configured to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information including at least the serial number, capable of executing a special addition process that adds "1" to a value stored in the storage means, and characterized in that when the special addition process is executed when N (N is a value less than 255) is stored in the storage means, "N+1" is stored in the storage means, when the special addition process is executed when M (M is 255) is stored in the storage means, "1" is stored in the storage means, and when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a storage means capable of storing a serial number, configured to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, configured to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information including at least the serial number, configured to update the serial number stored in the storage means after outputting the predetermined information, configured to store "0" in the storage means when the power is turned on after being turned off, and configured to cyclically update the value stored in the storage means from "1" to "M (M is an integer equal to or greater than 2)" while the power is on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is a gaming machine having a reel, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, configured to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, configured to output specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, the types of serial numbers include at least a serial number related to the predetermined information and a serial number related to the specific information, the predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the predetermined information, the specific information includes at least a serial number related to the specific information, a first storage means for storing the serial number related to the predetermined information and a second storage means for storing the serial number related to the specific information, the addresses of the first storage means and the second storage means are consecutive, and when the power is turned on after being turned off, a "0" is stored in the first storage means and a "0" is stored in the second storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is a gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information includes at least information consisting of X (X>1) bytes and checksum information, the checksum information consists of 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum information, the information consisting of X bytes is divided into 1 byte units for calculation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to rotate the reel based on the operation of the start switch, and is configured to be able to add points based on the received lending signal when the points managed by the total score display device are less than a predetermined value while the reel is rotating, and is configured not to be able to add points based on the received lending signal when the points managed by the total score display device are equal to or greater than the predetermined value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, and a start switch, characterized in that the reel can be rotated based on the operation of the start switch, and in a specified situation where the reel is not rotating, the player's own points can be added based on the received lending signal, and in a situation where the reel is rotating, the player's own points cannot be added based on the received lending signal.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is a gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, configured to be able to receive a loan notification command from the outside, and the information contained in the loan notification command includes at least loan number information, and when a loan notification command containing "0" as the loan number information is received under a specified situation, it is capable of executing a bet process based on a bet operation, and when a loan notification command containing a value of "1" or more as the loan number information is received under a specified situation, it is configured not to execute a bet process based on a bet operation until a specified period has elapsed from the time of reception.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting button, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and is characterized in that it is able to start updating the score displayed on the total score display device even if the operation of the counting button is not accepted after the operation of the counting button is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside, and is able to output specific information including the counting information to the outside even if the operation of the counting button is not accepted after the operation of the counting button is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a point management means for managing point information, characterized in that the reel is configured to be able to rotate based on the operation of the start switch, and is configured to be able to transmit a command including the point information to the outside multiple times within the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the reel completes one revolution.

There was a demand for a gaming machine that could display necessary information on a performance display device without impeding the progress of the game (Patent Publication No. 2017-202185).

A gaming machine with the following configuration can be configured to display necessary information on the performance display device without impeding the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D10) is a gaming machine having a reel, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and has a first storage means capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played when the reel is in operation or the reel continuous operation device is in operation, and a second storage means capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played, and is configured to be able to calculate a reel etc. state ratio based on the value corresponding to the number of games played when the reel is in operation or the reel continuous operation device is in operation and the value corresponding to the total number of games played, and is capable of continuing the progress of the game even if, under a specified condition in which the power is on, the value corresponding to the number of games played when the reel is in operation or the reel continuous operation device is in operation, which is stored in the first storage means, is changed due to a specified abnormality and becomes a value greater than the value corresponding to the total number of games played, This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the power is turned off, if the value stored in the first storage means corresponding to the number of times a role or a role continuous operation device is in operation is changed due to a specified abnormality and becomes a value greater than the value stored in the second storage means corresponding to the total number of times a role is in operation, the gaming machine goes into a specified error state after the power is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E1) is a gaming machine having reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, to be able to output first information to the outside of the gaming machine every first hour, to be able to output second information to the outside of the gaming machine every second hour, to be able to output third information to the outside of the gaming machine every third hour, to be X times the first hour (X is a natural number) the second hour, and to be Y times the first hour (Y is a natural number) the third hour, and when the timings for the scheduled output of the first information, second information, and third information overlap, the second information is output, and then the third information is output when the first hour has elapsed, and then the first information is output when the first hour has elapsed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E2) is a gaming machine having reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, configured to be able to output first information to the outside of the gaming machine at predetermined time intervals, configured to be able to output second information to the outside of the gaming machine at specific time intervals, configured to output the first information and then output the second information at a predetermined timing when the timings for outputting the first information and the second information overlap, and configured to set the timing for the next scheduled output of the second information to the timing that is the specific time after the timings for outputting the first information and the second information, even if the second information is output at the predetermined timing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E3) is a gaming machine having reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, configured to be able to output first information to the outside of the gaming machine at predetermined time intervals, configured to be able to output second information to the outside of the gaming machine at specific time intervals, configured to output the first information and then output the second information at a predetermined timing when the timings for the scheduled output of the first information and the second information overlap, and configured to set the timing for the next scheduled output of the second information to a timing the specific time after the predetermined timing when the second information is output.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E4) is a gaming machine having a reel, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, configured to output first information to the outside of the gaming machine at predetermined time intervals, configured to output second information to the outside of the gaming machine at specific time intervals, the first information including information on whether a predetermined error has occurred, configured to output the second information if the timing of the planned output of the first information and the second information overlaps at the predetermined timing when the predetermined error occurs, and configured to output the first information at a specific timing thereafter, and configured to output the first information including information that the predetermined error has not occurred at the specific timing when the predetermined error is resolved at a timing after the predetermined timing but before the specific timing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E5) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to determine the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, to output information including settlement information related to settlement to the outside of the gaming machine, to output information including response information related to lending to the outside of the gaming machine, to output information in which the settlement information is 0 when the settlement process is not performed, to output information in which the settlement information is 0 when the settlement process is performed, to output information in which the settlement information is a value other than 0 when the settlement information is 0 after outputting information in which the settlement information is 0 and information in which the information related to lending is a value other than 0 is received, to output information in which the response information related to lending is normal, and to output information in which the response information related to lending is abnormal when information in which the settlement information is a value other than 0 is received after outputting information in which the settlement information is 0.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E6) is a gaming machine having a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, is configured to be able to output information including settlement information related to settlement to the outside of the gaming machine, is configured to be able to output information including response information related to lending to the outside of the gaming machine, is configured to execute a settlement process when the counting switch is operated when the total score display device stores a value other than 0, and is configured to output information in which the settlement information is 0 when the settlement process is not executed, and is configured to output information in which the settlement information is a value other than 0 when the settlement process is executed, This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the counting switch is operated, if settlement information related to settlement is outputted with a value other than 0, and then information related to lending is received with a value other than 0, the score displayed on the total score display device is not updated based on the received information related to lending with a value other than 0, and thereafter, if the situation in which the counting switch is operated continues and settlement information related to settlement is outputted with a value of 0, and then information related to lending is received with a value other than 0, the score displayed on the total score display device is updated based on the received information related to lending with a value other than 0.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E7) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, and is configured to be able to output information including settlement information to the outside of the gaming machine, and is configured to be able to receive information regarding loans within a predetermined period of time after outputting the information including settlement information, and the information regarding loans includes information that can determine whether the output information including settlement information is normal or not, a serial number, and information regarding the number of loans.

P: reel type gaming machine, DU: front door, D: door circuit board, D10s: coin insertion acceptance sensor, D20s: first coin insertion sensor, D30s: second coin insertion sensor, D40: stop button, D41: left stop button, D42: center stop button, D43: right stop button, D50: start lever, D60: settlement button, D70: display panel, D80: door switch, D90: coin shooter, D100: blocker, D130: upper panel, D140: lower panel, D150: decorative lamp unit, D160: reel window, D170: medal insertion slot, D180: start lamp, D290: replay lamp, D300: insertion possible lamp, D200: credit number display device, D210: insertion number display lamp, D220: bet button, D230: medal tray, D240: ejection port, D250: special game status display device, D260: keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push sequence display device) D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving port D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-drop surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Center reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Minimum play interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Reel backlight S40 Performance display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disk, H50a Disk rotation shaft H60 Game medal outlet, H70 Release energizing means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Reel board, K10 Reel motor K20 Reel sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 Counter for number of games remaining in advantageous zone FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU Base section, H62 Discharge guide section, H64 Inclined surface HS Medal auxiliary tank, BS Screw, DE Full detection electrode M55 First end, M57 Second end, M58 Overlapping section, M59 Gap MW Reel frame, MO Reel band M Main control board MN11ta-A First main game win/loss lottery table, MN11ta-B Second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win/loss lottery table, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B lottery table for determining second main game symbol, MN41ta-H lottery table for determining auxiliary game symbol, MN51ta-A lottery table for determining first main game variation mode, MN51ta-B lottery table for determining second main game variation mode, MN51ta-H lottery table for determining auxiliary game variation mode, MP11t-C timer for managing first and second main game symbol variations MP11t-H timer for managing auxiliary game symbol variations, MP22t-B timer for opening electric device for second main game start port MP33c winning ball counter, MP34t timer for special game MP52c time reduction counter, MT10 command transmission buffer A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game start port A11s first main game start port ball entry detection device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g first main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol reservation display section B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game start port B11s Second main game start port ball entry detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric device B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display section B21h Second main game symbol reservation display section C First and second main game common peripheral device, C10 First large prize opening C11s First large prize opening prize entry detection device, C11d First large prize opening electric device C20 Second large prize opening, C21s Second large prize opening prize entry detection device C21d Second large prize opening electric device, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail, D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port ball entry detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol reserved display section S Sub-control board, SM Performance display control means (sub-main control board) SG Performance display device SG10 Display area, SG11 Decorative symbol display area SG12 First reserved display section, SG13 Second reserved display section KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, KE10 Payout unit D16 Transparent plate, KR Prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH Prize ball payout control board Ea Power switch, D42 Launch device E Power supply unit, D40 Launch control board DL10 Left hitting area, DR10 Right hitting area ML10 Left hitting route (first flow down route), MR10 Right hitting route (second flow down route) D50 Right hitting route outlet NKc Number of balls counter P10 Left general winning port, P20 Right general winning port HSc Left hit instruction counter, MSc Right hit instruction counter MP51c Chance bonus number counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small winning game timer, MP41t-2 Discharge standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning port), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 Second large winning port discharge port, C23s Second large winning port discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning port ball entry detection device SM26c Pre-reading performance execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Consecutive number counter SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission/reception control means 3110 Reception control means, 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side received information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout processing related information temporary storage means 3311a First main game start port winning counter, 3311b Second main game start port winning counter 3311c First large winning port winning counter, 33
11d Second large prize winning port winning counter 3311e General prize winning port winning counter, 3312 Number of balls held counter 3313 Number of enclosed game balls counter, 3400 Launch control means 3410 Temporary storage means for launch control related information, 3500 Initial processing control means at the time of power outage/power outage recovery 3510 Temporary storage means for information at the time of power outage 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS Prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device, 2121 Normal prize winning detection device 2122 Normal electric role, 2221 Distribution prize winning detection device 2222 Distribution electric role, 2224a Shielding member 2224-1 Specific area ball entry detection device, 2224-2 Discharged ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 Gate unit CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment M90 Setting display LED

Claims (1)

Reel and
Stop switch and
Start switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The counting notification information is configured to be output to the outside of the gaming machine,
The hall control and fraud monitoring information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine every first period,
The gaming machine installation information is configured to be output to an outside of the gaming machine every second period,
The gaming machine performance information is configured to be output to an outside of the gaming machine every third period,
The counting notification information includes the counting serial number, counting points, and counting cumulative points.
The cumulative count is the cumulative count since the power was turned on.
The counting serial number included in the first counting notification information after power-on is "0", and the counting serial numbers included in the subsequent counting notification information are configured to be values within the range of "1" to "M (M is a numerical value)",
The gaming machine installation information includes information on the ID number of the main control chip,
The gaming machine performance information includes information on the total number of points inserted since the power was turned on.
The gaming machine performance information includes information on the total number of points awarded since the power was turned on.
The apparatus is configured to output gaming machine installation information at a first timing when the first period and the second period overlap, and to output hall control and fraud monitoring information at a second timing when the first period has elapsed from the first timing,
The gaming machine installation information is output at a third timing when the first period, the second period, and the third period overlap, and the gaming machine performance information is output at a fourth timing when the first period has elapsed from the third timing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images